IMPORTANT Read Before Using Keyboard!

Congratulations on your purchase of the new GEM WK6 / WK8 Special Edition World Keyboard by Generalmusic. This instrument is equipped with cutting edge Flash ROM memory, so that your new keyboard can be permanently updated by disk with the latest operational advantages and new features. It is important that you follow the procedure below before using your instrument for the first time to ensure that the instrument functions properly. Check with your authorised Generalmusic dealer for exciting new features to load in your Flash ROM in the future.

STEP 1 STEP 2

With the instrument turned OFF, insert the WK Operating System Disk included in your materials packet into the disk drive. After you have inserted the disk, turn the instrument ON. You will see a message in the instrument display screen that says: Loading OS-DISK clears ALL MEMORY!! <Enter to Load/Escape to abort> Press ENTER and wait about 3 minutes for the new Operating System to load. When the new system has finished loading, you will see the following message in the instrument display screen: Loading Successful!! <Enter to continue> At this time, Press ENTER again and the instrument will proceed through the normal operating display screens. You can now Turn OFF the instrument in preparation for the final step listed below. IMPORTANT: REMOVE THE OPERATING SYSTEM DISK BEFORE PROCEEDING TO THE FINAL STEP! As you turn the instrument ON, KEEP ROTATING THE DIAL until the following message appears in your display screen: !!WARNING!! Dial on Power-Up Requests Memory Clear!! <Enter to clear/Escape to abort> Press ENTER. You have now completed the update process, and your WK6/WK8 Special Edition has been permanently upgraded. Location of Dial, Enter & Escape controls.

FINAL STEP

Dial

Note: There may be a Battery Warning message when you initially turn on the instrument. This message will not appear after the instrument has been plugged in and turned ON for a few hours. During this time, the internal battery that holds new information in memory will recharge. For now, just press ENTER or ESCAPE to continue on if the message appears when you power-up the instrument.

271316

Index
A
Adjust the sound volumes separately 1. 17 Advanced Edit Sound 2. 13 Algorithms, Edit Sound 2. 16 Amplitude Envelope 2. 23 Amplitude Envelope Tracking 2. 26 Arrange On/Off 1. 24 Arrange On/Off, Performances 3. 2 Assigning samples, Sample Translator 2. 48 Attack, Edit Performance sound 2. 5 Autoload 1. 22

Erase track, Edit Performance 3. 23 Escape Edit Sound, temoprary 2. 14 Exclude, Edit Sound Patch 2. 9 Exit Edit Sound 2. 14 Expand, Edit Sound Patch 2. 10 Export sample, Sample Translator 2. 53

F
Fade In/Out 1. 28 Features Intro. 2 Fill In 1. 26 Filter Control, Edit Sound 2. 29 Filter Cutoff, Edit Performance sound 2. 6 Filter Cutoff Tracking 2. 30 Filter, Edit Sound 2. 29 Filter Envelope Tracking 2. 31 Filters connected in parallel 2. 29 Filters connected in series 2. 29 Flash Styles 1. 29 Front Panel 1. 1 Full keyboard playing 1. 14

B
Balance (Edit Sound) 2. 21 Balance Envelope 2. 23 Balance Envelope, Edit Sound 2. 26 Balance Envelope Tracking 2. 28 Balance Tracking 2. 21 balancing 1. 17

H
Hardcopy (Pads) 3. 18 Harmony 3. 21 Harmony type 3. 21 Headphones 1. 10

C
Cancelling assignments, Sample Translator 2. 50 Cancelling samples, Sample Translator 2. 50 Catch note, Edit Sound Patch 2. 10 CC#0 (ControlChange) 3. 18 CC#32 (ControlChange) 3. 18 Channel A effects 3. 12 Channel B effects 3. 12 Common Channel, Edit Performance 3. 5 Common channel, Edit Performance 3. 8 Compare, Edit Sound Patch 2. 11 Continuous Control Pedals 3. 15 Controllers, Edit Performance 3. 15 Copy track, Edit Performance 3. 22 Create track, Edit Performance 3. 22 Cutoff Frequency, Edit Sound 2. 29

I
Important Preliminary Notes Intro. 4 Isolate a single sound 1. 18

K
Key Assign 3. 18 Key On/Key Off Amp. Envelopes 2. 24 Key On/Key Off Balance envelope 2. 27 Key On/Key Off Envelope programming example 2. 25 Key On/Key Off Filter Envelope 2. 31 Key On/Key Off Pan Envelope 2. 37 Key On/Key Off Pitch Envelope 2. 33 Key range, Edit Performance 3. 22 Key Start 1. 27 Key-play 1. 7

D
Decay, Edit Performance sound 2. 5 Delay, Edit Performance 3. 22 Delay/Modulation 3. 12 Detune, Edit Performance 3. 19 Dialog windows 1. 8 Display Hold 1. 12, 1. 31, 2. 2 Drum Kit editing 2. 8 Drum Kits 2. 1 Dynamic layer, Edit Sound Patch 2. 8 Dynamic switch 2. 9

L
Layer dynamic range, Edit Sound 2. 38 Layer key range, Edit Sound 2. 38 Layers, Edit Sound 2. 15 LFO, Edit Performance sound 2. 6 LFO, Edit Sound 2. 34 Loading data into RAM 1. 40 Loading samples, Sample Translator 2. 46 Local ON, Local Off, Edit Performance 3. 10 Low Frequency Oscillator 2. 34 Lyrics on an external monitor 1. 23 Lyrics on display 1. 21

E
Edit Menu, Performances programming 3. 3 Edit Performance Sound 2. 5 Edit Sound 2. 13 Edit Sound menu 2. 14 Edit Sound Patch 2. 8 Edit Sound/Sound Patch 2. 4 Effect Send 3. 13 Effects, Edit Performance 3. 12 Effects, enable/disable 1. 37 Effects Programming 3. 13

M
MIDI channel configuration, Edit Performance 3. 5 MIDI Channels 3. 5 Midi Clock, Edit Performance 3. 6 MIDI Dump, Edit Performance 3. 9 MIDI, Edit Performance 3. 5 Midi File Player 1. 38 MIDI filters, Edit Performance 3. 6

Index A45

Owners manual
271316
English

APPENDIX C

CAUTION MIDI FILTERS conversion table

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK 0 Filter off 50 DOPrg. NOT OPEN 1 change 51
N. Description N.

Description 77 S.C. (Undef.) 78 S.C. (Undef.) 2 Pitch 52 79 S.C. (Undef.) The exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle is CAUTION: 3 TO REDUCE THE RISK OF Mono touch 53ELECTRIC 80 Gen. purp. c.5 intended to alert the user to the presence of important 4 NOT REMOVE Poly touch 54 81 Gen. purp. c.6 SHOCK, DO COVER (OR BACK). NO operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the 5 0 Bank sel 55 82 Gen. purp. c.7 USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER literature accompanying the product. 6TO QUALIFIED 1 Modulation 56 83 Gen. purp. c.8 SERVICING SERVICE PERSONNEL. 7 2 Breath cnt. 57 84 Portam. cnt. 8 3 Undef. cnt. 58 85 Undef. cnt. 9 4 Foot cnt. 59 86 Undef. cnt. 10 5 Portamento time 60 87 Undef. cnt. INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS 11 6 Data en. MSB 61 88 Undef. cnt. 12 instructions 7 Main vol. 62 and FCC 89 Undef. cnt. 1. Read all the (Safety, Installation if applicable) before using the product. 13 8 Balance 63 Undef. cnt. 2. Do not use this product near water (example, near 90 a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink or wet basement) and do not expose to 14 9 Undef. cnt. 64 91 Eff. 1 (Rev.) rain. 15 10 Panorama 65 92 Eff. 2 3. This product beExpression used only with a 66 cart or stand recommended by the manufacturer, or should be used with the 16 should 11 93 that Eff. 3is (Chor.) components supplied. If this product requires assembly being played, take special care to follow the assembly 17 12 Control 1 67 94 Eff.before 4 instructions the back2of the manual. 18 found at 13 Control 68 95 Eff. 5 19 whether 14 alone Undef. or cnt. 69 96an Data incr. and headphones or speakers, may be capable of producing 4. This product, in combination with amplifier 20 that could 15 Undef. 97 Data sound levels causecnt. permanent 70 hearing loss. Do decr. not operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a 16 Gen. purp. c.1 71 NRPN LSB level that 21 is uncomfortable. If you experience any 98 hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. 22 17 Gen. purp. c.2 72 99 NRPN MSB 5. WARNING place product or objects on the power cord, or place it in a position where one could walk 23 : Do not18 Gen. this purp. c.3 73any other 100 RPN LSB on, trip over over power74 or connecting cords of any kind. 24 or roll anything 19 Gen. purp. c.4 101 RPN MSB 25 should 20 cnt. 75 103 Undef. cnt. 6. This product beUndef. located so that its location does not interfere with its proper ventilation. 26 should 21 cnt. 76 heat sources 104 Undef. 7. This product beUndef. located away from such cnt. as radiators, heat registers, or other products that produce heat. 27 22 Undef. cnt. 77 105 Undef. cnt. 8. This product beUndef. connected only of cnt. the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on 28 should 23 cnt. to a power 78 supply 106 Undef. the product. 29 24 Undef. cnt. 79 107 Undef. cnt. 30 may be 25 Undef. cnt. 80 108 Undef. cnt. 9. This product equipped with a polarised line plug (one blade wider than the other). This is a safety feature. If you are 26 Undef. 81 contact 109 Undef. cnt. unable to 31 insert the plug into cnt. the wall outlet, an electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety 32 27 Undef. cnt. 82 110 Undef. cnt. purpose of the plug. 33 28 Undef. cnt. 83 111 Undef. cnt. 10. The power supply cord of the product should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for long periods of time. 34 29 Undef. cnt. 84 112 Undef. cnt. 11. Care should that cnt. objects do not liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings. 35 be taken 30so Undef. 85 fall and 113 Undef. cnt. 36 should31 cnt. by qualified 86 service 114 Undef. cnt.when: 12. This product beUndef. serviced personnel 37 supply 64cord Damper ped.plug has 87been damaged; 115 Undef. a) the power or the or cnt. 38have fallen, 65 Portamento 88 spilled into 116 Undef. cnt. b) objects or liquid has been the product; or 39 66 Sostenuto 89 117 Undef. cnt. c) the product has been exposed to rain; or 40 Soft pedal to operate 90 normally 118 cnt. marked changes in performance; or d) the product does67 not appear orUndef. exhibits 41 68 Legato foot or the91 Undef. cnt. e) the product has been dropped, enclosure119 damaged. 42 69 Hold 2 92 119 Undef. cnt. 13. Do not attempt to service product beyond that described 43 70 S.C.the (Sn.v.) 93 120 All snd.in offthe user-maintenance instructions. All servicing should be referred to qualified71 service personnel. 94 44 S.C. (Res.) 121 Reset all c. 45 S.C. (Rel.) and/or95 Local cnt. 14. Some products may 72 have benches accessory122 mounting fixtures that are either supplied as part of the product or as 46 73Please S.C. (Att.) 123 All note off optional accessories. ensure that 96 benches are correctly assembled and stable and any optional fixtures (where 47 74 S.C. (Cut.) 97 124 Omni m. off applicable) are well secured before use. 48 75 S.C. (Undef.) 98 125 Omni m. on 15. Electromagnetic Interference (RFI) This electronic product utilises digital sample wave processing technology (S.W.P.) that 49 76 S.C. (Undef.) 99 126 Mono m. on may adversely affect radio/TV reception. Read the127 FCC note on the inside back cover of the owners manual for additional 100 Poly m. on

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the products enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

information.
1 2

see Appendix A on Data Format 0=Echo LCD, 1=All, 2=All on 2 lines, 3=Lyric only, 4=Chord only 3 The values 00H-0FH relatve to the Midi Port-A and 10H-1FH to Port-B 4 The information 00=No in this Midi, publication No Keyboard, has been 1=only carefully Keyboard, prepared 2=only Midi, and checked. 3=Midi & Keyboard The manufacturers however decline all liability for 5 eventual errors. 00=N0 All rights are reserved. This publication may not be copied, photocopied or reproduced in part or in whole without prior Midi, No Generation, 1=only Generation, 2=only Midi, 3=Midi & Generation written consent 6 from Generalmusic S.p.A. Generalmusic reserves the right to apply any aesthetic, design or function modifications see Appendix A on Data Format it considers necessary to any of its products without prior notice. Generalmusic declines all liability for damage to property or persons 7 see paragraph Device Parameter Access resulting from8improper use of the instrument. Infact the Resource File Header isinstalled composed 21 byte (see Appendix B) service technician. Check with an authorized Make sure that all internal electronic options are byof an authorized Generalmusic See Appendix B regarding the closest composition of the various resources available Generalmusic 9dealer for information on the service center. 10 28 + byte data number Copyright Generalmusic 2000. All rights reserved.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

Products and brand names that are referred to in this publication (AKAI, Apple, IBM,Jaz, Kurzweil, Macintosh, Microsoft, MS-DOS, Sample Vision, Windows, Zip) may either be trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective owners. The Publisher/s and Author/s make no claim to these trademarks.

System Exclusive A43

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this instrument does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the instrument off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this product not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the users authority to operate this product.

Types of Resources
The resources can be classified as follows:
Resource ID: system SETUP SOUNDS GLOBAL PRESETS STYLE PRESETS USER STYLES SONGS 0 1 2 3 4 5

for each of which concern various files For each of the resourcces available, it is possible to send a command requesting all the resources which make up the part of that groups (all the SOUNDS, all the SONGS, ...), or, it is possible to refer to a single resource of the currently selected group (send the selected SONG, the selected STYLE, ...). Referring to the Resource Request Message command detailed above, setting the value of 0 in the field ss we will obtain all the resources, while specifying a number greater than 0 we will obtain the transmission of the single resource required. for each group of rerouces the possible selection values are the following:
Resourse ID SOUNDS GLOBAL PRESETS STYLE PRESETS USER STYLES SONGS Max Select Number 16 8 96 32 16

Creation of the Resource File

To create the Resource File it is necessary to write for each single file of a chunk consisting of a desription of the file and of the data that consistutes the file; the format of each chunk is the following:
bytes 4 4 1 1 1 1 20 len-28 rel.addr. 0 4 8 9 10 11 12 32 name chunck id chunck len file type file bank file perf not used F_HEAD < data > description data es.: 3010

see Code under Stock 271316 byte data

therefore the Resource File can be represented as: Specifications are subject

to change without prior notice.

data len0 ... < data > for FILE.000 data len1 = len0+4 ... < data > for FILE.001 data len2= len0+len1+8 ... < data > for FILE.002 data len3= len0+len1+len2+12 ... < data > for FILE.003 data len_n = S[len(i)] + 4*n ... < data > for FILE.00n

PRINTED IN ITALY

To calculate the totale length of the Resource File it is sufficient sum of the lengths of each file (Li) with the length of each single header chunk (32 bytes):
Resource File Length = S[Li] + n*32;

The variable F_HEADER present refers to the internal structure of how the file is effectively memorized within the system; to identify it we refer directly to the stuctures C used internally:
union TIME_INF { struct part { unsigned short hour : 5; unsigned short min : 6; unsigned short sec : 5; }; ushort time; }; // total 2 bytes

union DATE_INF { Ufficio vendite: I - 47848 S.Giovanni in Marignano (RN) - Italy Via struct part { unsigned short year : 7; Tel. +39 541 959511 fax +39 541 957404 tlx 550555 GMUSIC unsigned short month : 4; unsigned short day : 5;

delle Rose, 12 I

Sito Internet: http://www.generalmusic.com

System Exclusive A41

Contents
Introduction Intro. 1

QUICK GUIDE
Layout & Display 1. 1
Front panel 1. 1 Back panel (connections) 1. 2 The display 1. 3 Navigation, Data Entry, Confirmation/cancellation 1. 3 Alphanumeric entry 1. 4

Getting to know your instrument 1. 9

Adjust the general volume 1. 9 Power up 1. 9 Play with headphones 1. 10 Play with the pedals 1. 10 Play with the Trackball 1. 11 Play the Programmable Pads 1. 11 Select sounds 1. 12 Change Sound Bank 1. 13 Play on a split keyboard 1. 13 Return to full keyboard playing 1. 14 Play up to 8 sounds at the same time (Multi) 1. 15 Using the Keypad to Select Sounds 1. 16 Adjust the sound volumes separately (balancing) 1. 17 The SOLO button - Isolate a single sound from the rest 1. 18 Listen to the Demo Songs 1. 19 Multimedia 1. 21 Automatic loading of Songs at power up 1. 22 To display lyrics on an external monitor 1. 23 Play with Auto Accompaniment Styles 1. 24 Start a Style with Key Start 1. 27 Start a Style with Tap Tempo 1. 28 Start and stop a Style with Fade In/Out 1. 28 Select a Style without changing the keyboard sounds 1. 28 Select and play the Flash memory User Styles 1. 29 Select a Style Performance 1. 30 Select the Performances 1. 31 Saving to the same Performance 1. 33 Store Performance 1. 33 Saving to a different Performance 1. 34 Transpose the instrument up or down 1. 35 To clear the keyboard transpose setting 1. 35 Transposition 1. 35 Transposing tracks by octaves 1. 36 To clear the Track Octave setting 1. 36 Bypass the effects 1. 37 To activate the effects 1. 37 Play with Effects or bypass them 1. 37 Using the Midi File Player 1. 38 Loading data into RAM memory 1. 40 Quick Rec Recording 1. 42 Record a Song (Quick rec.) 1. 42 Play along with your recorded Song 1. 44 Save your programmed data to disk or Hard Disk 1. 45

Contents i

REFERENCEParameter GUIDE Data message:

F0H 2FH 5cH 41 H 00 cf pp <data > cc F7H = = = = = = = = = System Message status Sounds 2. Exclusive 1

GMX Banks 1, 2 and 3 2. 1 Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) Banks 4 - 16 1 Subfunction ID = 2. PARAMETER DATA Drum Kits00 and Drum Sounds 2. 1 Model ID, = WK4 checksum=1, format (5 2. per 2 Status, 0 altrimenti) Selecting Sounds packet number (00:7fH) The Sound Group families 2. 3

ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERALMUSIC

Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch 2. 4 checksum

EOX Performance Sound 2. 5 Edit Edit Sound Patch 2. 8 The data sent refer to the structure as described below. Save the modifications as a new Drumkit/Sound Patch file 2. 11

bytes 1 1 1 1 4 4 4 4 4 4

Status Data. The data relates to the parameters Advanced Edit Sound 2. 13 contained in the following fields (the quantities of memory are expressed in Kbyte):
rel.addr. 0 1 2 3 4 8 12 16 20 24

Entering EDIT SOUND 2. 13 name description Edit Procedure 2. 13 iClass see classification in Tab.1 Temporary escape from Edit Sound 2. 14 iSubClass see classification in Tab.1 Permanent escape without saving 2. 14 iRelease instrument release peripherals HD=b1, The main menu options 2.AV=b0 15 totalSysRam Total System Memory Layers 2. 15 freeSysRam Freee System memory Algorithms 2. 16 totalBackedRam Backed Sample Ram Memory Waveform 2. 17 freeBackedRam Free Backed Sample Ram Memory Volume e Balance 2. 19 totalVolRam Total Volatile Sample Ram Memory Volume Tracking 2.Free 20 Volatile Sample Ram Memory freeVolRam Balance 2. 21 iClass / iSubClass 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Tracking (F2) 2. 21 SK76 1 - Synth Expander Balance S2 S3 S2 Box SK88 Programming a tracking envelope 2. 22 2 - Masterkeyboards MK88 Amplitude WS2 Envelope WS1 & Balance Envelope 2. 23 3 - Keyboards WX2 WX2Box CD WX400 WK4 SX2 SX3 WK3 4 - Pianos WS400 RPro1 RPro2 RPprox Amplitude Key On and Key Off Envelopes 2. 24Ps2500 PS1500 5 - Home Organs Programming Key On and Key Off Envelopes 2. 25 6 - Classic Organs Amplitude AS-1 Envelope Tracking 2. 26 7 - Accessories Balance Envelope 2. 26 (TAB.1) Balance Envelope Key On & Key Off 2. 27 Parameter Data.Balance In this case the streams relating to parameter names requested are returned and all the data is identifed by the following Envelope Tracking 2.the 28 16 bytes: Filter 2. 29 Filter Cutoff Tracking 0 1 2 2. 30 3-15 Filter Envelope Key Parameter On & Key Off (13 2. char 31 Max) Parameter ID Bank SelectPerf Select Name Filter Envelope Tracking 2. 31 The parameters bs (bank and ps select) contained in the request vary according to the parameter as in Tab.2, taking into Pitchselect) Envelope 2.(prChange 32 accound that the request willEnvelope have effectively only in the Pitch Key followed On & Key Off 2.case 33 in which what has been requested is actually present in the system; to be able to request all the values available for a given parameter, it is sufficient to send the values bs=00 e ps=00. Pitch Envelope Tracking 2. 33 LFO (Low STATUS Frequency Oscillator) 2. 34 SOUND REAL PERF. STYLE SONG Bank Select Range Pan 00 1 - 16 1-8 1 - 96 1 - 16 2. 36 PrCh Select Range Pan 00 Envelope 1 - 128 not & used (nu) nu Key On Key Off 2. 37nu (Tab.2) Pan Envelope Tracking 2. 37

APPENDIX Sample A loading methods 2. 44

DATA FORMAT Entering Sample Translator 2. 44
Selecting Samples from the accept waveform 2. 45 The messages used to control the system exclusives data display in the following formats: The Sample Translator options 2. 45 Loading a sample from a Ram
format =0 (7 bit dataLoad value) : the natural Sample 2. data 46 format with values from 0 to 127. Does not require any form of treatment. format =1 (7 bit wide word LSB_J): the value of the data present in the stream has a range defined by the number of bytes transmitted. For Loading samples from disk or SCSI device 46configured as follows are required: example, to transmit the hexadecimal value F123 (61731 decimal) three 2. bytes Receiving Samples via a Dump 2. 48 03 62 23. This format is useful to transmit single data (byte, short, int, long, float, double) which do not fall within the range 0-127.

Sample Translator 2. 44

-Sound 2. 46

Assigning samples 2. 48

Deassigning samples 2. 50 bits but which can represent much greater values. for example, to transmit the hexadeciformat =2 (nibble): single byyes contain only 4 significant mal value F123 (61731 decimal) would require four bytes2. configured as: 0F 01 02 03; i practice, each single byte is sliced in two and transmitted on Cancelling samples (Delete) 50 two bytes with the four most significant 0. Sample Editing bits 2. at 51
format =3 (octect): the bytes are groups in sets of 8 Bytes with 7 significant bits to represent 7 real bytes in 8 MIDI bytes (56 bit). This format allows, Send Sample / Sample Request (F7) 2. 54 therefore, to achieve maximum compactness of the data to transmit in cases of data consisting of a large number of bytes whose priory value is not Storing Samples 2. 55 known.

Sample MIDI Dump 2. 54

ii Contents

System Exclusive A39

Performances 3. 1
Selecting the Performances 3. 1 Real Time panel operations 3. 1 Arrange On/Off 3. 2 Style Lock 3. 2 Multi Track List 3. 3 Programming the Performances 3. 3

MIDI 3. 5
MIDI Channels 3. 5 Configuration 3. 5 MIDI Filters 3. 6 General settings 3. 6 Common Channel/Arrangement 3. 8 MIDI Dump... 3. 9 Local On, Local Off 3. 10 MIDI Lock 3. 10

Mixer 3. 10
Volume 3. 10 Pan 3. 10 Random pan 3. 11 Audio Out 3. 11 3D Effect (F5) 3. 11

Effects 3. 12
Effects type 3. 12 Group A 3. 12 Group B 3. 13 Send Level 3. 13 General Eff1 Balance 3. 13 Effects Programming 3. 13

Controllers/Pads 3. 15
Trackball 3. 15 Pedals programming 3. 15 Pedals assignment 3. 16 The continuous pedal Functions 3. 16 The switch pedal Functions 3. 17 Pads 3. 18 Ped./Pad Lock 3. 18

Tracks/Split 3. 19
Transpose 3. 19 Master transpose enable/disable 3. 19 Detune 3. 19 Random pitch 3. 19 Touch Sensitivity 3. 19 Mode/Priority 3. 20 Velocity curve 3. 20 Velocity range 3. 20 Harmony 3. 21 Harmony type 3. 21 Harmony Type structures 3. 21 Delay 3. 22 Key range 3. 22 Create track 3. 22 Copy track 3. 22 Erase track 3. 23

Store Performance 3. 23
Saving to the current Performance 3. 23 To save to a different Performance 3. 24

Contents iii

02 H 00 13 H pp <data > cc F7H

Model ID, 00 = WK4 Selecting the storage device 4. 1 checksum, format 3 (octect) The Disk commands packet number (00:7fH) 4. 1 The file selector 4. 2 15 octects checksum The general Disk procedure 4. 3 EOX Operations 4. 5 Load Load Single 4. 5 Resource Request message: Load Group 4. 7 Load All 4. 9 Message status F0H = System Exclusive 2FH = Manufacturer ID = GENERAL Save operations 4. 11 MUSIC 5cH = Command ID: 5=Resource Save Single 4. 11 Access, c=device ID(0-F) 03 H = Subfunction ID = RESOURCE REQUEST Save Group 4. 13 00 = Model ID, 00 = WK4 Save All 4. format 15 0 00 = not checksum, Erase operations 4. 17 tt = Resourse ID ss = all files(0), selected(>0) Copy operations 4.9 18 F7H = EOX operations 4. 20 Move Utility 4. System 22 SETUP Resource ID : 0 Floppy disk utility 4. 22 SOUNDS 1 PRESETS 2 Hard Disk GLOBAL Utility 4. 23 STYLE PRESETS 3 Multicopy options 4. 27 USER 4 SCSI utility 4. STYLES 28 SONGS 5 Additional Disk functions 4. 29 Search Resource 4. 30 ACK message: Sound Search... 4. 30 F0H = System Exclusive Message status Disk handling information 4. 31 2FH 5cH 7FH 00 00 pp F7H Subfunction ID = ACK ROM Styles 5. 1 About the WK6/8SE Model ID, 00 = WK4 Flash Styles 5. 1 not checksum, format 0 Selecting and(00:7fH) playing the Styles 5. 1 packet number The EOX functions which control the Styles 5. 1 Arrange On/Off 5. 1 NACK message: Arrange Mode 5. 1 Memory 5. 1 Message status F0H = System Exclusive Lower Memory 5. 1 ID) = GENERAL MUSIC 2FH = ID number (manufacturer Tempo Lock 5. 2 5cH = Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) 7EH = Subfunction = NACK Mixer LockID 5. 2 00 = Model ID, 00 = WK4 Bass to Lowest 5. 2 00 = not checksum, format 0 Harmony On/Off 5. 2 pp = packet number (00:7fH) Style F7H = EOX Lock 5. 2 Single Touch Play 5. 2 Style Performance 5. 2 CANCEL message: Arrange Mode 5. 3 F0H = System Exclusive Message status Auto Chord and FixedID) Chord modes 5. 3 2FH = ID number (manufacturer = GENERAL MUSIC Chord Recognition modes 5.c=device 3 5cH = Command ID: 5=Resource Access, ID(0-F) Dynamic Arrange 5. 4 7D H = Subfunction ID = CANCEL 00 = Model ID, 00 = WK4 Autobacking 5. 4 00 = not checksum, format 0 Changing the split point 5. 4 pp F7H = = = = = = = = =

= = = = = = =

Subfunction ID = Disk Hard disk - FILE SCSIDATA 4. 1

Styles 5. 1 ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) Command

ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC

User EOX Styles 5. 5

packet number (00:7fH)

The basic structure of a Style 5. 5 WAIT message: Recording 5. 6 Restoring the User Styles memory 5. 7 F0H = System Exclusive Message status 2FH = ID number (manufacturer ID) = MUSIC The Record View page 5.GENERAL 8 5cH = Command ID: 5=Resource Time Signature 5. 9 Access, c=device ID(0-F) 7C H = Subfunction ID Measures 5.= WAIT 9 00 = Model ID, 00 = WK4 Tempo 5. 9 00 = not checksum, format 0 Key Note 5. (00:7fH) 9 pp = packet number Scale F7H = EOX Conversion 5. 9 Quantize 5. 9 Scale Conversion tables 5. 11

iv Contents

System Exclusive A37

Edit Style 5. 13
The Edit Style menu 5. 13 Escape from Edit Style 5. 13 The Edit Style options 5. 13 Undo 5. 13 Style Name 5. 14 Edit procedure 5. 14 Erase 5. 15 Move 5. 16 Copy 5. 16 Quantize 5. 18 Insert Measures 5. 19 Delete measures 5. 19 Velocity 5. 20 Transpose 5. 21 Microscope 5. 21 Access to the Event Edit 5. 21 Mask 5. 24 Drum mask (F7/F8) 5. 24

Song 6. 1
Load songs to memory 6. 1 Song-Performances 6. 1 Song playback 6. 1 Jukebox 6. 4 Preload 6. 5 Midi File Player 6. 7

Recording Songs 6. 9
The Quick Rec method 6. 9 The Record method 6. 10 Time/Tempo page 6. 11 Start 6. 12 Time Signature 6. 12 Tempo 6. 12 Quantize 6. 13 Restoring the Songs memory 6. 13

Edit Song 6. 14
The Edit Song Menu 6. 14 Escape from Edit Song 6. 14 The Edit Song options 6. 14 Undo 6. 14 Edit Score 6. 14 Song Name 6. 15 Edit procedure 6. 15 Erase 6. 16 Move 6. 18 Copy mode 6. 19 Quantize 6. 21 Insert measures 6. 23 Delete measures 6. 24 Velocity 6. 25 Transpose 6. 26 Microscope 6. Accessing the Event Edit Mode 6. 30 Master Track 6. 30

Score & Edit Score 6. 33

The Score track 6. 33 The SCORE button 6. 33 Score Controls 6. 33 Video controls 6. 34 Edit Score 6. 35

Contents v

Inserting 6. 35 64 00 00 01 notes 00 Inserting chord symbols 6. 35 MIDI OUT FILTER ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F ) Inserting lyrics 6. 36 xx 19 06

filter_in7

0 -> 100

00H

Address(H) Vocal Size (H) Range(H) Processor 7. 1

xx 1A 00 xx 1A 01 xx 1A 02 xx 1A 03 xx 1A 04 xx 1A 05 xx 1A 06

Parameter

Description

Default
00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H

00 00 01 00 64 filter_out1 0 -> 100 The 00 00Vocal 01 Processor 00 features 64 7. 1 filter_out2 0 -> 100 Connections 7. 1 00 00 01 00 64 filter_out3 0 -> 100 Activate the Vocal Processor 7. 2 00 00 01 00 64 filter_out4 0 -> 100 Working with the Vocal Processor 7. 2 00 00 01 00 64 filter_out5 0 -> 100 Chord 7. 2 00 00 01 00 64 filter_out6 0 -> 100 Vocoder 7. 3 00 00 01 00 64 filter_out7 0 -> 100 Unison 7. 4 Edit 7. 4 LOCAL ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F ) Pedals Address(H) Size (H) 7. 6 Range(H) Parameter Description Vocal On/Off and Equalizer xx 1B 00 00 00 01 00 01 7. 6 ped_ftsw[1] Special Midi Controllers associated to the Vocal Processor 7. 7 xx 1B 01 00 00 01 00 01 ped_ftsw[2]

Default

Edit00 General 00 01 8. 1 00 01 ped_ftsw[3] Description of- the Menu page 8. 1 SLIDER ( xx = CHANNEL =0 1F Main ) Keyboard sensitivity 8. 2 Address(H) Size (H) polarity Range(H) Parameter Footswitch 8. 2 xx 1C 00 00 00 01 Controls 00 8. 2 7F Attack General xx 1C 01 00 00 01 00 7F Release Tuning/Scale 8. 2 xx 1C 02 00 00 01Pitch 8.00 7F Flt Cutoff Master 2 xx 1C 03 00 00 01 Scale 00 Flt Resonance Keyboard 8. 2 7F xx 1C 04 00 00 programmable 01 00 Scales 7F 8. 2 Decay User xx 1C 05 00 00 01 00 LFO Depth Pedalboard/Computer 8.7F 4 xx 1C 06 00 00 01 7F LFO Rate Pedalboard 8. 00 4 xx 1C 07 00 00 01 8. 400 7F LFO Delay Computer xx 1C 08 00 00 & 02Time 8.0: Soundnr Date 5 7F+0:F Set date (F1) 8. 5 DRUM KIT EDITING Set time (F2) 8. 5 Display controls 8. 6 LAYER1 SOUND Mic/Line PATCH Input ( xx = 8. NOTE 6 = 0 - 7F ) Address(H) Size (H) General Range(H) The Edit Main Menu OptionsParameter 8. 8 xx 1D 00 00 00 02& release.... 0: 7F+0:F Soundnr Battery 8. 8 xx 1D 01 00 00 01 Info 8. 00 7F Level System 8 xx 1D 02 00 00 01 8. 8 00 7F Panorama Restore xx 1D 03 00 00 01 All 8. 9 00 7F Transpose Restore Restore 8. 9 xx 1D 04 00 00 01 Styles 00 7F Tune Restore 8. 7F 9 xx 1D 05 00 00 01 Performance 00 FltCutOff Restore 8. 9 xx 1D 06 00 00 01 Songs 00 03 Exclude Restore xx 1D 07 00 00 01 Style-Performance 00 7F 8. 9 Effect 1 Restore 8. 9 7F xx 1D 08 00 00 01 Sounds00 Effect 2 xx 1D 09 00 00 01 04 Analog Out Utility functions 9.001
xx 1B 02 Help 9. 1 DYNAMIC SWITCH Panic 9. 2 Range(H) Address(H) Size (H) Display Hold 9. 2 00 1E 00 00 00 01 00 7F

Description
-64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 Prog.Change(MSB) + Bank(LSB)

Default
40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 0

Description
Prog.Change(MSB) + Bank(LSB) 00 127 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 00 03 00 127 00 127 00 04

Default

Parameter
DynSwitch

Description
00 127

Default

APPENDIX LAYER2 A. 1 SOUND PATCH ( xx = NOTE = 0 - 7F )

Address(H)
xx 1F 00 xx 1F 01 xx 1F 02 xx 1F 03 xx 1F 04 xx 1F 05 xx 1F 06 xx 1F 07 xx 1F 08 xx 1F 09 ROM(H) Sound Tables A. 2 Size Range(H) Parameter Drumkit A. 10 00 00 02 Tables 0: 7F+0:F Soundnr ROM Style Tables 00 00 01 00 A. 20 7F Level Performance Tables A. 7F 22 00 00 01 00 Panorama Effects Tables A. 22 00 00 01 00 7F Transpose Wave Tables A. 23 00 00 01 00 7F Tune Recognized Control A. 25 00 00 01 00 Change 7F messages FltCutOff MIDI 00 00 Implementation 01 00 chart 03 A. 26/27 Exclude System A.Effect 28 1 00 00 01 Exclusive 00implementation 7F Index (alphabetical) 00 00 01 00 A. 45 7F Effect 2 00 00 01 00 04 Analog Out

Description
Prog.Change + Bank 00 127 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 00 03 00 127 00 127 00=track,1=L+R,2=O1+O2,3=O1,4=O2

Default

vi Contents

System Exclusive A35

Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the new GEM WK6 Special Edition and WK8 Special Edition World Keyboard by Generalmusic. These instruments provide high quality sounds and accompaniments, and a simple user interface with a graphic instrument display which allows total control of all the performance and programming activities.

POWER AND MULTIMEDIA FACILITIES

The new Special Edition Series instruments, WK6 SE and WK8 SE, incorporate a Flash-ROM memory which allows the instruments to be updated by disk with the latest operational advantages and new functions. The basic Operating System, which features 24 Mbytes of ROM sounds, an advanced Edit Sound function and the Sample Translator is common to both versions, not to mention the Audio Vocal Processor for vocal harmonizer possibilities as well as multi-effect processing of incoming line/mic signals. Both models incorporate Sample RAM (D-RAM) memory to increase the number of on-board waveforms with samples from a wide range of choices (8 Megabyte for the WK8SE and 2 Megabyte for the WK6SE). Both models incorporate an on-board Floppy disk drive, while the WK8SE includes an on-board 2.5 IDE Hard Disk and SCSI interface. WK6SE can be easily upgraded with a Hard Disk and is also predisposed for the installation of a SCSI interface. Both the Hard disk and SCSI optionals are available as kits supplied by Generalmusic A guitar player can connect to the audio inputs of the WK6/8SE Series instruments and play the chords which appear on a monitor connected to the instruments video outputs, and mix his sounds with those of the workstation (complete with effects processing!). At the same time a group of singers can follow the lyrics projected on a television (or other video projection device) by the WK6/8SE video interface.

THE OWNERS MANUAL

The Owners Manual is supplied as a 3-ring binder with instructions inserted inside. HOW TO USE THE OWNERS MANUAL To ensure long, trouble-free operation, please read this manual carefully. The Owners Manual is supplied as a 3-ring binder with instructions inserted inside. First, read the Quick Guide chapter while operating the WK6/8SE which explains the functions of each button and the display. This will help you understand the basic operation of the instrument. Graphical illustrations are included for a better understanding of the instrument. Once you are acquainted with the instruments basic functions, use the Reference Guide to discover all the potentials of your WK6/WK8SE World Keyboard. At the end of the manual is the Appendix containing various tables, MIDI information and an index.

Introduction 1

PanYou can shape -31 -> +31 best. envelopes, control Wave-3EH= 31 AnalogOut 0 forms and open and close filters with the help of0 Mic/Line On/Off high definition graphical representations projectMIDI_CHANNELS ( xx = CHANNEL 3 = 0 - 1F ) Maximum polyphony: 64 voices. Multitimbricity: ed on the display. Description The Sound Edit also featuresDefault Address(H) Size (H) or 32 Range(H) Parameter 16 parts (Style/RealTime modes) parts the Midi_IN_Port Sample Translator, an incorporated Waveform xx 0D 00 00 00 01 01 02 1 = MidiIn A, 2= MidiIn B 1=In A (Song mode). Each assigned to a xx 0D 01 part is 00 00 01 01track. 10 Midi_IN_Ch 1->10 allows = channels creating program which you1->16 to create new In Style/RealTime mode 8 tracks are assigned to 02 Sounds xx 0D 02 00 00 01 01 Midi_OUT_Port 1 = MidiOut A, 2= MidiOut B starting from disk-based samples or data1=Out A xx 0D 03 00 the 01 auto-accom01 10 Midi_OUT_Ch 1->10 = channels 1->16 the keyboard and the other00 8 to received via MIDI. (GENERAL) PEDALBOARD/COMPUTER MODE paniment section. Sample-RAM Address(H) Size (H) Range(H) Parameter (D-RAM) Description Default Sound generation 00 0E 00 00 00 01 00 03 Computer Mode 0=Off, 1=Mac, 2=PC1, 3=PC3 0 = Off WK8SE is fitted with 8 megabytes of RAM to al00 0E 01 00 00(Wave), 01 00 03 Pedalb. Mode 0=Off,1=Pdbass, 2=Pdchord, 3=MFun 0 = Off Based on sampled waveforms modified lowPcIfcPedB the loading of Mode disk-based 00 0E 02 00 00 01 00 01 switch samples to create 0 by programmable digital filters (DCF, Digitally RAM -Sounds. The WK6SE is supplied with a MIDI FILTERS IN ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 1F , Midi Lock ON ) Controlled Filters). Waves are assigned singu2 Mb D-RAM. TheDescription D-RAM is backed by a Ni-CdDefault Address(H) Size (H) of 3 Layers, Range(H) Parameter larly or in pairs to up to a maximum battery to retain data turning off the xx 0F 00 00 00 01 00 64 filter_1 0 -> after 100 (see Appendix C) instru-00H to obtain Sounds consisting maximum xx 0F 01 00 of 00 a 01 00 of 6 64 filter_2 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 00H ment. xx 0F 02 00 00 01 00 64 filter_3 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 00H Waves per voice. Volatile xx 0F 03 00 00 01 00 64 filter_4 Sample0RAM -> 100(optional) (see Appendix C) 00H ROM-Sounds xx 0F 04 00 00 01 00 64 0 -> up 100to (see C) of ad-00H It isfilter_5 possible to install 32 Appendix megabytes xx 0F 05 00 00 01 00to 24 64 filter_6 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 00H ROM (permanent memory) contains up ditional Sample-RAM via (see standard 72 C) pin com-00H xx 0F 06 00 00 01 00 64 filter_7 0 -> 100 Appendix megabytes of samples which are the source of puter SIMMs MIDI FILTERS OUT ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F , Midi Lock ON ) (single in-line Memory Modules) obover 1,000 ROM-Sounds. tainable from mostDescription computer outlets. Address(H) Size (H) Range(H) Parameter Default RAM-Sounds xx 10 00 00 00 01 00 64 filter_1 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 00H Digital Effects Processor 10 01 00 00 01 00 filter_2 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 00H You can loadxx disk-based RAM-Sounds based on 64 Four Digital Effects0Processors, controlled xx 10 02 00 00 01 00 64 filter_3 -> 100 (see Appendix C) in real00H samples contained RAM xx 10 03 in ROM. 00 00 01 Sounds 00 can 64 filter_4 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) and00H time, enrich the sound with effects (reverbs xx 10 04 00 00 01 00 or 64 filter_5 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 00H be supplied by Generalmusic, by third parties, modulations). A flexible matrix allows different00H xx 10 05 00 00 01 00 64 filter_6 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) can be created by the user with the sound editor effects to be assigned to every track. C) xx 10 06 00 00 01 00 64 filter_7 0 -> 100 (see Appendix 00H program. Sounds can be loaded from WK6/8 SE, MIDI COMMON/ARRG NoteToArrang 32 track Sequencer previous series WK, SK, PS and WX/SX disks. Address(H) Size (H) Range(H) Parameter Description The 32 track, 250 event/16 Song sequencer hasDefault 00 11 00 00 00 01 00 10 Chord Ch.1 0=Off, 1->10 = chans 1->16 0 = Off Edit Perf-Sound/Sound Patch a Microscope function (microscopic edit) and0 00 11 01 00 00 01 00 01 IN_1 The Edit Perf Sound and Patch 10 Score 00 11 02 00Edit 00 01Sound 00 Chord Ch.2 (to display 0=Off, 1->10 = chans 1->16 facility Score, chords and Lyr-0 = Off functions permits quick modification of Sounds 00 11 03 00 00 01 00 01 IN_2 ics). The QuickRec recording method allows the0 and Drumkits to produce Performance-Sounds. MIDI CTRL PADS ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F ) rapid recording of Songs by using existing Styles. The modifications are stored in Performance Address(H) Size (H) Range(H) Parameter Description Default Midi File player xx 12 00 00 00 01Real-Perform00 01 ped_ftsw[1] 1 tracks to allow Songs, Styles or xx 12 01 00 00 01 00 01 ped_ftsw[2] 1 File player The WK6/8SE models feature a MIDI ances to load the correct sounds. xx 12 02 00 00 01 00 01 ped_ftsw[3] 1 capable of reading any MIDI File available on the Drawbars PRESET PARAMETERS market and world wide web. A unique setEFFECTS of Drawbar A Performance for instant Jukebox & Preload access to vintage electronic organ using Address(H) Size (H) sounds Range(H) Parameter Description Default The Jukebox function allows you to chain the 00 13 00 00 00 01 00 17 Eff_Type1 0 -> 23 5=St.Concert the 8 panel sliders as drawbars, with key-click, 00 13 01 00 00 01 00 7F eff_vol1 -> 127 5AHafter = 90 the Songs in memory0and play them one percussion, etc.. 00 13 02 00 00 01 par#1_1 other with a single command. The Preload func00 13 03 00 00 01 par#2_1 Sound Edit tionpar#3_1 allows you to create a list of disk-based Songs 00 13 04 00 00 01 WK6/8SE features 00 13 05and advanced, 00 00 01 powerful 00 and 1F Eff_Type2 -> 31 = Chorus2 or MIDI Files and 0play them all by 9 means of a 00Sound 13 06 Edit section 00 00 01that takes 00 you 7F eff_vol2 0 -> 127 79H = 121 highly flexible single command, without first loading all data in 00 13 07 00synthesis 00 01 par#1_2 deep into the heart of sound at its very memory. 00 13 08 00 00 01 par#2_2

00THE 0C 07 00WK8SE 00 01 FEATURES OF WK6SE & 00 0C 08 00 00 01

00 00 00 0C 09 00capabilities 00 01 00 Polyphony/multitimbral

3E 03 01

2 Introduction

System Exclusive A33

Automatic accompaniments (Styles) The internal ROM Styles provide automatic musical accompaniments, consisting of 8 tracks. Every Style has 4 Variations. Up to 32 disk based Styles (User programmable) can be loaded and automatically stored in the battery backed system memory. Each Style can also be automatically reconfigured by means of up to 8 associated Style Performances. Flash Styles WK6/8SE contain an additional set of Styles stored in the User Style Flash memory banks, reserved for factory use where the contents may vary from market to market. From time to time, Generalmusic may offer operating systems which contain upgrades of the User Flash banks. Disk drive Data can be stored on 3.5" HD floppy disks, in WK6/8SE expanded format (1.6 megabyte), standard MS-DOS (1.44 megabyte) or Atari ST/ Falcon format (720 Kb). WK6/8SE is able to initialize disks for every format. It is possible to load RAM-Sounds, Styles and Songs from WK, WX2, SX2 floppy disks. Thanks to the SampleRAM, it is also possible to load new samples from disk (as RAM -Sounds). MS-DOS compatibility permits MIDI file exchange with other instruments and computers. Hard disk WK8SE is fitted with a 2.5 IDE or E-IDE internal Hard disk (max. 2 Gigabytes), while WK6SE can be upgraded with the optional Generalmusic Hard Disk installation kit, available from authorized Generalmusic stores. Hard Disk installed in the factory contain a vast assortment of data (Songs, User Styles, Sounds, etc.). Refer to the Hard Disk contents, a booklet supplied with models of the instrument fitted with the Hard Disk. Score view The display can show the score, the lyrics and chord symbols of a song. By connecting the Video (RGB-S/VHS) interface to a video system

(monitor, domestic TV, closed circuit video), it is also possible to display score and lyrics on a television (or other external video device). Lyrics can be projected onto a monitor during a performance to allow others to sing with the player. Audio/Video card with Vocal Processor The Audio/Video card offers the possibility of processing Mic/Line signals with the instruments internal Effects Processor and includes the Vocal Processor function to add vocal harmonies to your performance. Advanced MIDI operation & System Exclusive WK6/8SE has two independent MIDI circuits (A and B), offering up to 32 MIDI channels, with MIDI-merge and MIDI-thru functions and System Exclusive communication. Direct connection with a computer The Computer jack permits the connection of computers not fitted with a MIDI interface to WK6/ 8SE via a single serial cable. SCSI port For off-line storage, WK8SE is fitted with a SCSI port, so you can store files on an external storage device connected via the SCSI port (ZIP, JAZ, Hard Disks, etc.). This also makes it possible to load files from a CD-ROM drive. The WK6SE is predisposed for the installation of a SCSI interface by means of Generalmusics optional SCSI kit, available from all authorised Generalmusic outlets. Up-dateable operating system (OS) Since the operating system resides in a flashROM, it is possible to load updates from floppy disk. Operating system updates can add new functions to the instrument. The Multitasking operating system allows you to execute several operations simultaneously, such as modifying sounds while a song is playing, loading a song during song play, formatting a disk while playing.

Introduction 3

IMPORTANT PRELIMINARY NOTES (3)Command ID(3=RealTime) + device ID (1=2 device ID)

AVOID PLACING DISKS NEAR MAGNETS - Do not place floppy disks on top of speakers, near magnets, tele(5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6)c=0 ( No checksum), f=2 (nibble) phones, or other sources of electromagnetic fields. The disk contents could be damaged.=
(7)EOX (4)Set Subfunction

(2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC

MODELS WITH OPTIONAL HARD DISK INSTALLED- the hard disk may appear to operate rather slowly the first with the checksum, the stream will be: time you open its directory. This is caused by operations relating to the organization of the internal data and tests F0 2F 31 01 00 12 00 0B 05 09 03 F7 . on the integrity of the device. The delay is09 eliminated on all successive hard disk access operations. You may also find that the Hard Disk 5 is protected this merelyHighGain a precautionary measure avoidchannel accidental erasure ofbit any <Example > write : To know the value-of the is parameter of the Equalizer using to common 9 and format 0 (7 data value). According to the address map to theinGlobal Parameters EQUALIZER the addrress is 00 00 01H (HighGain) and the size is 00 00 01H; factory-loaded files. The protection isrelating removed the Disk Utility -page. UP-DATEABLE OPERATING SYSTEM - A disk containing the operating system is supplied with the instrument. F0 2F 38 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 01 F7 The disk can (1) contain a more recent version of the operating system (6) than the one contained in the instruments (2) (3) (4) (5) address size Flash ROM. (1)Exclusive Status To load the operating system contained on the floppy disk: (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (1) turn off the(4)Get instrument, (2) insert the floppy disk in the drive, (3) turn on the instrument, (4) When the message Subfunction (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6) EOX ENTER to load, ESCAPE to abort appears, press ENTER to start the OS Loading OS-disk clears all memory!! update, (5) wait while the the operating system is being (6) when the message Loading (Enter to If, for example, value of the parameter equals loaded, 1 dB, the instrument will respond with the appropriatesuccessful Set stream containing the value requested and with the checksum; therefore, the stream returnedthis will be: continue) is displayed, press ENTER. After completing process, proceed with the power-up reset that follows below to insure F0 proper 2F 38 01operation. 00 10 00 00 01 0D 0A F7. RESETTING AT POWER UP - If the data contained in the instruments memory has been damaged, either by REFERENCE TABLE being exposed to the effects of a strong magnetic field, or other unknown reason, the instrument may not operate PARAMETERS properly. TheGLOBAL remedy is a power-up reset: (1) Turn on the instrument while simultaneously pressing the POWER switch and rotating the DIAL, (2) when the MIXER EQUALIZER message !!WARNING!! on Power-Up Requests CLEAR !! < ENTER to CLEAR /Default ESCAPE to Address(H)DialSize (H) Range(H)MEMORY Parameter Description abort> appears, press 00 00 00 ENTER 00 to 00 clear 01 the MEMORY. 00 18 LowGain -12 -> +12 [dB] 0EH= 2dB
00 00 01 00 00 02 00 00 03 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 00 18 0C 0C HighGain -12 -> +12 [dB] LowFrequency 100 -> 400 [Hz] HighFrequency 3.0 -> 15.0 [KHz] 0DH= 1dB 2=150KHz 0 = 3KHz
(3)Command ID(3=RealTime) + device ID (8=9 device ID)

therefore, the get stream is as follows:

SCORE CONTROL

Address(H)
00 01 00 00 01 01 00 01 02

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01
TEMPO / DATA

Range(H)
00 00 00 04 03 15

+ 00 00 01
Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01

!!WARNING!! Dial on Power-Up Requests MEMORY CLEAR !! Parameter Description Default 2 < video_display ENTER to CLEAR / ESCAPE to 01 abort > lyrics_fonts char size 00 (if video_display=3) view_mode monitor bkgrnd col 00

GENERAL CONTROLS

Address(H)
00 02 00 00 02 01

Range(H)
01 01 05 05

Parameter
dynamic a.touch

Description

Default
3=Medium 3=Medium

ARRANGE MODE

Address(H)
00 03 00 IMPORTANT INFORMATION 00 03 01

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 01 02

Parameter
FixCh_Mode ChordMode1

Description
on/off Up/low-multi (Auto chord mode) Full keyboard (Auto chord mode) Fix chord mode on/off on/off

Default
01 01

1. The WK6/8SE should contain items the factory: 00 03 02 00 00 01the following 03 04 from ChordMode2 03 a) Instrument; 00 03 03 00 00 01 00 04 ChordMode3 01 b) Floppy disk (Operating System OS-Disk); 00 03 05 00 00 01 00 01 DynamArrg 00 c) Owners manual (shrink-wrap pack with 3-ring binder). 00 03 09 00 00 01 00 01 Autobacking 01 00 03 0B your retailer 00 00 01 15 6C Chord_split 3BH = 59 2. When contacting or authorized Generalmusic technical assistance centre, always provide the model name and serial number of your instrument (found on the identification plate). (GENERAL CONTROLS) FOOTSWITCH POLARITY 3. Generalmusic on Internet: Address(H) Size (H) Range(H) Parameter Description Default 00 04 00 00 00 01 00 01 Footswitch[1] 0=Normally closed, 1=open 0=NormClosd http://www.generalmusic.com

4 Introduction

System Exclusive A31

SOME USEFUL INFORMATION BEFORE STARTING

THE RECHARGEABLE BATTERY The WK6/8SE conserves the data in RAM after turning off, thanks to a rechargeable battery. The battery is recharged while the instrument is turned on (not just plugged in!). When the instrument is turned off, if the battery is at maximum charge level, the data in RAM is conserved for about two weeks. The charge of the battery increases by one day for every hour the instrument is left on, until the maximum level is reached. If the battery discharges, leave the instrument on for at least 15 hours to recharge it completely. To increase the efficiency of the rechargeable battery, repeat the complete recharging operation at least once a month. In most cases, normal use of the WK6/8SE will keep the battery charged.

WARNING- Sounds based on sample RAM (RAM Sample-RAM .

-Sounds) are conserved after power down in the Backed

WHAT REMAINS IN MEMORY AND WHAT IS CANCELLED

Stored after turning off Programmable (Real) Performances Modified Style-Performances User Styles (User buttons) Songs Setup (general settings) RAM-Sounds (based on samples in ROM) RAM -Sounds (based on samples in Backed S-RAM) RAM -Sounds (based on samples in Volatile S-RAM) Samples in Backed S-RAM Samples in Volatile S-RAM Not stored after turning off

The status of the following buttons also remain memorized: ARRANGE ON/OFF, ARRANGE MEMORY, LOWER MEMORY, TEMPO LOCK, MIXER LOCK, BASS TO LOWEST and the ARRANGE MODE settings.

Introduction 5

RAM RESET

DEVICE INQUIRY

If you want to recall the factory settings, you can INQUIRY MESSAGE: reset the backed RAM. F0H = System Exclusive Message status 7EH = in the EDIT Non-Real Time extension 1. Press GENERAL section to enter cc = device ID the Edit 06 General H = menu.INQUIRY ID
01 H F7H = = Identity Request EOX

To be able to identify a MIDI device, the following two messages are utilized; the first used for the inquiry:

and the second for the device response:

RESPONSE MESSAGE:
F0 7E cc 06 02 mm ff ff dd dd ss ss ss ss F7 cc mm ff ff dd dd ss ss ss ss =

BATTERY DISCHARGED MESSAGE If the instrument has been left turned off for a long period of time, the battery will slowly discharge. When the battery discharges completely, it causes the total loss of all user programmed data. If the battery has lost its charge completely, turning the instrument on will show the following message:

= device ID = Manufactures Sistem Exclusive id code = Device family code (14 bits, LSB first) = Device family member code (14 bits, LSB first) Software revision (format device specific)

UNIVERSAL REAL TIME SYSTEM MESSAGES

DEVICE CONTROL

The message cancels automatically 2/3 inserted in the These messages are used to control the general functions of the system, without refering to a specific MIDI channelafter and, therefore,
context of the Universal 2. Press the soft button F4 to messages. select the Restore all command. following dialogue window MasterThe Volume: F0H = System Exclusive Message status is displayed.

seconds. After the message cancels, be sure to save all of your edited work to disk until after the battery has 7FH = Real Time extension cc = device ID sufficiently charged. 04 H = Device Control ID 01 H = Master Volume ID Leave the instrument on for a few hours to revv vv = Volume (LSB first) charge the battery. One hour of charge time corF7H = EOX responds to approximately one day of use - the SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES battery charge remains active for approximately 3. Press ENTER to confirm the initialization, or ADDRESS DATA INTERFACE 15 days of non-use. ESCAPE to MIDI cancel the procedure. If of the The System Exclusive capabilities theproWK Series instruments allow you to manipulate all parts of the instruments memory from a computer If you foresee leaving the instrument turned off system. cedure is confirmed, the instrument can be The following is a reference to the SysEx protocol used byfor thea WK Series instruments. Thisbe Data Address Interface based on two principal long period of time, sure to save allis userplayed after fewSET seconds. functions: and GET. SET is used to set the contents of some of the instruments resources while GET is used to withdraw them. programmed data to disk to safeguard your data At the reception of a GET message, the instrument replies with an appropriate SET message containing the values of the requested data and against automatic erasure due to battery disrelative checksums. charge. status data EOX
GET SET
F0H 2FH 3cH 00 H/01 H id cf aa1:3 ss1:3 dd1 ddn cc F7H

F0 F0

2F 3c 00 id aa1 aa2 aa3 ss1 ss2 ss3 cc 2F 3c 01 id cf aa1 aa2 aa3 dd1 ... ddn cc
= = = = = = = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC Command ID: 3 RealTime, c = Device ID (0-F) Get subfunction / Set subfunction Model ID, 00 = WK4 c = checksum (0:1), f = Data Format (0:4) 1 c=1 checksum present, c=0 absent; starting address code (MSB first) amount of required data bytes (MSB first) Data byte : first data byte to be sent Data byte : last data byte to be sent checksum ( optional ) EOX ( End Of Exclusive )

F7 F7

EXTREMELY IMPORTANT: when parameters have positive values that exceed 127 (=7FH), always enter f=2 in the cf field of the SET stream and transform the data into nibble format as in the example: 134 = 0x86 becomes 0x08 0x06. N.B.: in the following address map, the undefined value xx that parameterizes some of the addresses is the number relating to the structure (typically track or note).

6 Introduction

System Exclusive A29

Quick Guide
1 Panel and Display 2 Getting to know your instrument

GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Power source

Be sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate before connecting to the mains. DC power cannot be used to power this instrument. If the instrument is to remain unused for long periods of time, remove the power cord from its wall outlet. For safety purposes, remove the power cord in cases of storms with lightning.
Keys Chs Note ON Note OFF True voice Default Messages Altered Default Changed

Control Change

Pitch Bender

After Touch

Velocity

Note Number

Mode

Basic Channel

FUNCTION

Manufacturer: Generalmusic S.p.A.

Handling the power cord

Never touch the power cord or its plug with wet hands. Never pull on the cord to remove it from the wall socket, always pull the plug. Never forcibly bend the power cord. If the power cord is scarred, cut or broken, or has a bad contact, it will be a potential fire hazard or source of serious electric shock. NEVER use a damaged power cord; have it replaced by a qualified technician.
If water (or other liquid) gets into the instrument

Do not allow liquids to penetrate the instrument. Do not place containers of liquids on the instrument. If water or liquids penetrate the instrument, remove the power cord from the wall socket at once, and contact the store where the unit was purchased. As a general precaution, never open the unit and touch or tamper with the internal circuitry.
Multimode X X 0-127 1-16 1-16

If the instrument plays in an abnormal way

Turn off the power immediately, remove the power cord from the mains outlet and contact the store where it was purchased. Discontinue using the unit at once. Failure to do so may result in additional damage or other unexpected damage or accident.
Important notes

Do not place heavy objects on the instrument and avoid leaning on it. Before turning on the instrument, be sure to set the volume to a reasonable level (master volume slider at about two thirds of the course). Before connecting your instrument to other devices, always remember to turn off the power to all units; this will help to prevent damage or malfunction.
2 MIDI IN; 2 THRU; 2 MIDI OUT EXTRA COMMON/CHORD CH.

General user maintenance

85 91 Voice Mute Mode (1) Reverb depth

18,50 64 66 67 Tuning control Damper Pedal Sustain (Sostenuto) Soft pedal

0,32 1 6,38 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 Bank change Modulation Data Entry Volume Pan Expression Contr. Vocal Volume (1) Vocal On/Off (1) Mode Recall (1) Voice Set Recall (1)

Transmitted

Multimode X X

0-127 *****

1-16 1-16

x o

o o

o o

MIDI Implementation Chart

Model: WK6/WK8 Special Edition

Recognized

0,32 1 6,38 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16,48 17,49 18,50 64 66 67 71 72 73 74 85 91 Bank change Modulation Data Entry Volume Pan Expression Controller Vocal Volume (1) Vocal On/Off (1) Mode Recall (1) Voice Set Recall (1) Effects selection Effects volume Tuning control Damper Pedal Sustain (Sostenuto) Soft pedal Resonance Release time Attack time Filter 1 cut-off freq. Voice Mute Mode (1) Reverb depth (send) Bank change recognized on common channel, only in reception: Bank-Change P.change C#0 C#32 PC 32 0 0-95 Internal Styles 36 0 0-7 Int. Style Perfs 40 0 0-7 User Style Perfs 44 0 0-31 User Styles 48 0 0-63 Global Presets 55 0 0-15 Songs 64 0 0-7 Song-Presets C#16 DSP select 0 Eff1 Reverb GroupA 1 Eff1 Reverb Group B 64 Eff2 Mod. Group A 65 Eff2 Mod. Group B C#48 Eff Type select (See Effects charts for selection values of individual Eff types)

o o

o o

true voice depends on selected sound

Remarks Version: 1.00

Clean the outer surface of your instrument using a soft, clean, slightly damp cloth and polish with a soft, dry cloth. Never use industrial cleaners, detergents, abrasive cleansers, waxes, solvents or polishes as they may damage the instrument finish. Always turn off the power supply after use and never turn the unit on and off repeatedly in quick succession as this places an undue load on the electronic components.

Quick Guide

Tables A27

Chapter 1 Layout & Display

FRONT LAYOUT
1. Power On/Off Switch. 2. Speakers. 3. Sliders (M.Vol, Mic/Line, Drum, Bass, Acc1/ 3, Acc 4/6, Lower 2, Lower 1, Upper 2, Upper 1, [A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H]. 4. Arrange On/Off, Arrange Memory, Lower Memory, Arrange Mode, Tempo Lock, Mixer Lock, Bass to Lowest, Harmony On/Off 5. Effects Bypass, Solo, Single Touch Play, Store Perf. 6. 1/4 VGA Display (backlit), Track Scroll buttons, Page Select buttons, Soft buttons AH, F1F8. 7. Style Lock, Performance Groups, Style P. 8. Contrast, Undo, Help, D. Hold, Key Pad. 9. Sequencer: Record St./Song, <<, >>, Score, Song, Stop, Play, Style/Real Time. 10. Sound Groups. 11. Edit/Number: Effects, Midi, Mixer, Cnt/Pads, Tracks, Sound, St./Song, Synth, General, Demo, Preload, Disk, Hard Disk LED. 12. Trackball (Pitch Bend, Modulation). 13. Headphones jacks (2). 14. Keyboard (C2-C7) - responds to note messages transmitted to MIDI IN for all notes from C1 - G9 (notes numbers 0 - 127). Using the Transpose function, the entire range C1 G9 can be covered on the keyboard. 15. Alphanumeric configuration - each note corresponds to a letter or number for use in name writing situations. 16. Style Groups. 17. Fade In/Out, Var 1, Var 2, Var 3, Var 4, Fill <, Fill ><, Fill >. 18. Start/Stop, Intro, Key Start, Ending. 19. Enter, Escape, Tempo/Data Dial. 20. Directional buttons (cursor arrows). 21. Pad 1, Pad 2, Pad 3, Pad 4. 22. Octave /+, Transpose b/#. 23. Disk Drive location.

8 9 10 11

12 13

14 15

16

17

18

19 20

21

22

23

Front and Rear panel 11

REAR PANELMESSAGGI (CONNECTIONS)DI CONTROL CHANGE CONTROL CHANGE SULLA TRACCIA (MIDI CONTROLLER) 1. Pedals: RICONOSCIUTI Damper, 1, 2, Volume. 7. Output:CC00,32 (Left, Right,Bank 1, 2). For Mono reprochange.
duction, use either the RIGHT or LEFT jack. 2. SCSI port (optional fordi WK6SE ). Il messaggio ControlChange attiva un MIDI CC01 Modulation. The auxiliary outputs emit dry sounds (i.e. Controller, 3. Pedalboard port. determinato del primo valore del Data Entry. with no CC06,38 effects). ControlChange. 4. Computer port (serial connector for direct 8. Video RGB, RGB (Video output in CC07 SVHS:Main Volume. computer connection (Apple Macintosh or parti: Il ControlChange composta da tre RGB/Composite Video standard), SVHS CC10 Pan (panorama). IBM PC and compatibles). (Video output in SVHS/Composite Video status byte - (status) determina lo stato di 5. MIDI interface: (MIDI IN A/B, MIDI THRU A/ CC11 Expression. standard). messaggio di ControlChange. B, MIDI OUT A/B). CC12 : Insert Vocal Volume (Vocal Processor) 9. Mains socket the supplied power 1 2/1 - (value 1) MIDI Controller attivato In:data 6. Mic/Line 1, 2,byte Gain - audio inputs for cord into this socket.Vocal On/Off (Vocal Processor) CC13 di ControlChange. Microphone dal or messaggio Line signals and twin gain il numero con cui sono identificati i ControlChange nelle CC14 Mode Recal (Vocal Processor) control for the input signals. tabelle seguenti.
CC15

Voice Set recall (Vocal Processor) Effects selection Effects volume General Purpose (Tuning control)

data byte 2 - (value 2) valore del MIDI Controller attivato.

CC16,48 CC17,49 CC18,50 CC32 CC64 CC66 CC67 CC71 CC72

BankSelect LSB. Damper pedal. Sostenuto (sustain) pedal. Soft pedal. Resonance. Release Time. Attack Time. Filter Cutoff Frequency. One Shot control On/Off control Voice Mute mode (Vocal Processor) Effect 1 send (E1, reverb depth). Effect 2 send (E2, modulation depth). NRPN

1 2 34

CC73 8 9 CC74 CC80 CC81 CC85 CC91

CC93

5 CC98,99

CC100-101 RPN

8 = travels on MiIDI Common 9 channel only

12 Quick Guide

Tables A25

THE DISPLAY
The display is the principal user interface which communicates the status of the instrument at all times.

TRACK SCROLL BUTTONS

PAGE (MENU) SCROLL BUTTONS

SOFT BUTTONS A H

NEGATIVE HIGHLIGHT CURSOR

SOFT BUTTONS F1 F8

NAVIGATION, DATA ENTRY, CONFIRMATION/CANCELLATION

The principal navigating controls are the CURSOR ARROWS (directional arrows) and the principal Data entry device is the DIAL. Secondary navigating devices are the SOFT BUTTONS on the left and right of the display, and the TRACK SCROLL and PAGE (MENU) SCROLL ( ) buttons above the Soft buttons. A secondary data entry device is the numeric keypad (the EDIT/ NUMBER section), which enters absolute numbers when the KEYPAD LED is on. The displays cursor is a negative highlight zone which can be moved by means of the cursor buttons. The selected parameter can be modified with the DIAL or NUMERIC KEYPAD. Confirmation or cancellation of an operation within the display is with the ENTER or ESCAPE buttons..

ENTER/ESCAPE AND DIAL

CURSOR ARROWS

EDIT/NUMBER SECTION ENABLED FOR NUMERIC ENTRY WHEN THE KEYPAD LED IS ON

The Display 13

Wavetables ALPHANUMERIC ENTRY In name writing situations (Performance name, Song name, etc.), the keyboard activates as a source of PIANO HOUS_RIM VOX_HHCL STEL_GTR HARMGT_H CELESTA LOGDRUM MARTELLO VOX_TAP HARMGT_L NEWPAD alphanumerical data whereHOUS_SD1 each note of the central zoneCLAVINET of the keyboard corresponds CRAS_ORC to a letter, symAGOGO VOX_TIP DIST_GTR ACU_RIDE KNELGT_L bol or number. Use the / HOUS_SD2 cursor buttons or the DIAL toBIRDS navigate within the active name writing zone.
BABYVOX HOUSCLAP WATER GUN_SHOT JAZZ_GT2 SWITCH APPLAUSE BD_ELECT1 HOUSEHH WHISTLE ELICOPT GTR_KURZ FRETLES HARPSI_S BD_HOUS1 HOUSRIDE WIND_CHI PHONE_1 ICE_RAIN HARP VIOLA BD_HOUS2 JNG_BELL WOODBLCK PHONE_2 KOTO STRATO VIOLIN BD_JAZZ MARACAS DIGIT1WV SCRATCH1 OR_THEAT STEL_GTR FKG_G_WS BD_ROOM1 MT_SURDO DIGIT2WV SCRATCH2 ORROCK_F ORJAZZ_S GT_HARMO BD_STD_1 OP_SURDO 1685DRAW SEA SAX_BARI OR_THEAT PIK_GRT1 ALPHANUMERIC CONFIGURATION IN NAME-WRITING MODE BD_STD_2 QUICA_HI EL_PIAN7 TICKTACK VOC-DUKN BARCHIME PIK_GRT2 BD_STD_3 QUICA_LO ORGAN_2W ZAPP FLANGED ICE_RAIN WHAWHA1 BD_TECNO RIDE_CUP ORGAN_3W ELGTR_S2 BANJO KPICK WHAWHA2 BONG_SLH RIDE_CYM KALIUMBA MARIMBA WHAWHA3 THE FOLLOWING EXAMPLE SHOWS HOW TO MODIFYORGAN_4W A PER4. FAGOTTO Insert the desired characters using the keyBONGO_HI RIMSHOT1 FROG_WV FLHARD_H METRO WHAWHA4 FORMANCE NAME: board. Each SHAMISEN note corresponds to a characBONGO_LO RIMSHOT2 ORGAN_5W FLHARD_L SITAR MARTEL2 ORCH_HIT ter, processing command or number. 1. Press the STORE PERFORMANCE button. BRUS_REV ROLL_SN ORGAN_6W FLUGE_S2 GLOCKEN RHODX_L PIK_GTWS An entryBRUS_RIG zone appears showing of Two options appear name (Caps SD_ELECT the status VIBES_2W FNKGSTOP LPN_KNHbelow the RHODX_H PIPE_S2 the current Performance: On/Caps OffELPN_KNL and Insert/Overwrite) BRUSHSLP SD_JAZZ1 E_PIANO4 SCRAP_GT THEATR_L TROMBO_K which can be enabled or disabled with notes D2 and BRUSHTAP SD_JAZZ2 E_PIANO5 HARP FLICORNO THEATR_H ORG_PIP1 CABASA SD_JAZZ3 FORMANT JAZZ_GT1 GTR_MUTE WUROLD_L MARIMBA D#2 respectively. CABASA_L SD_ORCH ORGAN_1W MUTE_TR1 ELPN_MKS WUROLD_H ORROCK_S The notes on the extreme leftMANDOL2 of the keyboard CASTAGNT SD_ROOM1 PIP_ORG3 SPECTR_1 RHODES_H BASSFRET zone provide RHODES_L word processing functions: BASSPICK CHINA SD_ROOM2 SQUARE NOISE BD_POWER CLAKSON SD_STD1 PULSE_O5 OBOE TRUMPET BASSCONT ACO_GTR2 CLAVES SD_STD2 PULSE_10 OCT_JGT VIBES - Caps On STELGTR2 D2: CAPS / Caps Off; ARMONICI CON_H_SL SD_STD3 PULSE_15 PANFLUTE XILOPHNO CLICK_BS PIANO_H D#2: INS/OVER between REZOBASS CON_L_SL PULSE_20 PICKBASS ACCORD2 - toggles PIANOL2 2. Press the Soft buttons SD_STD4 F7 or F8 to activate Insert / Overwrite mode; CONGA_HI PULSE_25 SOFT_SAX BRASS BLEEP_BS BRASS_2 the Change name... SMASH function. A second CONGA_LO SPLASH PULSE_30 SOPRANO VOCAL_DU DBASS PIANO_D entry zone appears where a name can be E2: SPACE - inserts a space COWBELL STICK PULSE_35 TENORSAX VOCAL_BA HIT_BASS GRNDPLUS inserted. The current name appears selected between two entries; CRASH TAMB_SLP PULSE_40 PIZZICATO FRHORN_H FINGBMS CP80_2 (shown in negative highlight). DARBK_HI TAMBOURI PULSE_45 TROMBONE FRHORN_L RHODX F2: DELETE - cancels the selectedFRETW DARBK_LO TIMB_LOW SAW VOCALBOY ELPNKURZor the ELPNKURZ WEDGBASS character one after; DOLLYVOX TIMBALES SINUS STRINGS A_MUSETT SYNBASS WUROLD G2: < (BACKSPACE) - cancels TONE DROP TIMPANI SUPERSAW ACBASS_L PLECTRA FMPIANO1 the previous character; FINGERSP TOM_ELEC TRIANGLE ACBASS_H MANDOL BOSMIC CLAVINET GUIRO_LG TOM_HIGH TUB_WAVE HARMACBS PKBSMUTE BRASS_T VIBES GUIRO_SH TOM_JAZZ ACCORDIO 16_1DRAW ABRASS 5. BAGPIPE Move back with the cursorRP_PIPE button and corHH_CLO1L TOM_LOW ACO_STR ELBASS_H ORJAZZ_S BRASS_T ; THEATORG rect wrong characters. In Overwrite mode, ABRASS HH_CLO1S TOM_ROOM ARMONICA EL_BASS_L BD_ORCH ORGAN316 the inserted characters substitute the seMARI_GM HH_OPEN1 TRIAN_LO BARCHIME THUMBASS FINGBELL VOICESA lected characters (in negative highlight). MARIM 3. To completely cancel the selected name, inHH_PEDAL TRIAN_SH BOTTLE HARMELBS CELLO ACOUSGTR STRINGK sert the HH_TGHT1 first character.VIBRASLP To change one or BRS_RIP HH_CLO2 ELECTBAS 6. BASSLAP_H Press ENTER to confirm and to close the ORCHIT more characters the flashing curHH_TGHT2only, move VOICES_1 CASSOTTO BASSLAP_L HH_OPEN2 JAZZ_GT1 active zone, or press ESCAPE to cancel and CHOIRA VOICES_2 CHOIR FRETLES DOOR sor with HOU_COWB the cursor buttons. RP_2_STR close the window. KALI_GM HOU_TCON VOICES_3 CLARINET FLUTE KITCHEN CEMBALO

14 Quick Guide

Tables A23

THE DEFAULT DISPLAY: SOUND VIEW PAGE

This type of page shows the Sounds assigned to the tracks. Sound View is the default viewing mode. A typical Sound View page appears in Style/RealTime mode (other Sound View pages showing slight variations appear in Song mode and Style and Song recording modes).

d e f g h a b c

a. Track status icons. Select the tracks with the Soft buttons A...H or with the cursor buttons / . b. Sound names. The name of the Group to which the Sound belongs appears close to the Sound name, or (in order) the ProgramChange, BankSelect MSB, BankSelect LSB numbers. Tracks which are not assigned to internal sounds show a string of dashes (------) instead of the Sound name. c. If the track has been modified with Edit Perf Sound, the symbol appears after the Sound name. Menu or Function list. Contains options which can be selected with the Soft buttons F1...F8. In Style/RealTime mode the soft buttons are coupled (F1/F2, F3/F4, F5/F6, F7/F8) and the menu shows the options to select: the track status (Full, Upp/Low, Multi). the Split Point. The keyboard area below the split point corresponds to the chord recognition zone for the automatic accompaniment. Status bar showing general information. Style and Performance name (Performance or Style-Performance, depending on whether SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is on or off). Song mode: Song and Song-Performance name. A Performance that has been modified but not saved with STORE PERFORMANCE is identified by the symbol []. A ROM Style with a modified Style-Performance is identified by the symbol [*]. Tempo (varied with the DIAL). Locator (measure and beat counter). In Style mode this parameter monitors the Style pattern (riff). Chord - the current recognized Chord symbol.

d. e.

f. g. h.

The Display 15

Styles/Style Performances THE DISPLAYS EDIT STATUS IDENTIFICATION ICONS Every edit environment CC00 PC Stylehas a relative icon: CC00 PC
LATIN 1
33 32 33 35 36 37 38 Style-Perf.

User Styles/Songs
CC00 PC User Style CC00 PC Song 55 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 CC00 PC Song-Perf. 64 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Bank 1
Bossa Nova SoftBossa ChaCha 2 Rhumba 1 Rhumba 2 Rhumba 3

36

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

USER 1
44 00 01

Edit34 Effects ChaCha 1

Edit 02 MIDI
03 04 05 06 07 Controllers/Pads Edit

Rhumba 4 Edit39 Mixer

LATIN 1
33 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47

Bank 2
Tango Stand.Tango Samba Beguine Salsa 1 Salsa 2 Cumbia 1 Cumbia 2

USER 2
44 08 09 10 11

Edit Tracks/Split

Edit Perf Sound/Drumkit

12 13 14 15

LATIN 2

Edit48 Style/Song 33 Merengue 1

49 50 51 52 54 55 Merengue 2 Mambo 1 Mambo 2 DiscoSamba Meneito 1 Meneito 2

Bank 1

USER 3
44

Edit 16 General
17 18 19 20

Edit53 Disk Disco / Preload Cha

Edit 21 Sound
22 23

LATIN 2
33 56 57 59

Bank 2
El Tic Tac Makarena Caliente 2

USER 4
44 24 25 26 27

58 Caliente 1 TRACKS, PERFORMANCES AND THE TRACK STATUS ICONS

60 Limbo 28 A Track is the smallest part of a Performance and in normal playing conditions, the display shows from 61 current Gipsy Performance. 29 4 to 8 tracks of the 62 Guaracha 30 A Performance is a configuration of several tracks, so that different Sounds can be combined to play at 63 Calypso 31 the same time. The Sound name and its ProgramChange and CC00 BankSelect numbers or the relative PC User Style-Perf. Group name appears on the main display. 40 00 01 of 16 tracks (8 tracks for the Style-Performances and Programmable Performances have a maximum 02 keyboard and 8 engaged by the sequencer for the arrangements). A Song-Performance can contain up 03 to 32 tracks. 04 Sometimes, a track is not assigned to a WK6/8SE Sound, but it controls an expander connected to the 05 MIDI OUT. In this case, MIDI is shown as well as ProgramChange and 06 BankSelect numbers (MSBLSB) on the main display when WK6/8SE is set to Multi mode. In Full 07 or Upper/Lower modes only the Sound Bank name appears, the ProgramChange and Bank Select numbers are not shown. On MIDI Common channel only

16 Quick Guide

Tables A21

Most of the operating modes display the tracks and their status icons are shown on the left part of the display. The status of a track can be shown in four different ways: in key-play if it can be played on the keyboard; in mute if the track is temporarily deactivated; in record if the track is in a record pending status; in seq-play if the track contains recorded notes. Each status is identified by an icon which appears in the track status column. You can change the track status by repeatedly pressing the corresponding soft button. For example, in RealTime mode, you can toggle between the mute and play status by pressing the corresponding soft button repeatedly.

THE TRACK ICONS

KEY-PLAY ICON (KEYBOARD PLAY)

The track can be played on the keyboard in Real Time.

MUTE ICON

The MIDI status of the tracks is also be identified by a status icon.

MIDI-RECEIVE/TRANSMIT ICON

The track is temporarily deactivated, even if it is connected to the keyboard. The track does not receive or transmit MIDI.
SEQ-PLAY ICON (SEQUENCER-PLAY)

The track can receive (IN) and transmit (OUT).

MIDI-RECEIVE ICON

The track receives MIDI messages (IN), but does not transmit them (OUT).
MIDI-TRANSMIT ICON

The track contains notes i.e. it is engaged by a Song or Style accompaniment track. In either case, this type of track cannot play in real time on the keyboard, unless it is set to key-play. This track cannot receive data at MIDI IN.
MUTE ICON (TRACK WITH NOTE)

The track does not receive MIDI messages (IN), but transmits them (OUT). The Track and MIDI status Icons are usually combined together to allow you to control the overall track status, both for playing, muting, recording in real time and in MIDI setups.

The track is temporarily deactivated.

RECORD ICON

The track is in a recording status.

The Display 17

Several types of dialog window exist; generally an option requires selection or one or more parameters require modifications and confirmation with ENTER or a soft button. Some examples follow.

These are similar to the dialog windows, but they do not display options to select. They communicate specific messages to the user (wrong operations, information on the current operation, etc.).

18 Quick Guide
Drumkits DIALOG WINDOWS

DK_STAND2WX 113-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < < < SDSTD2 101-9 < SDSTD3 101-10 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_ROOM2WX 114-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDROOM1 97-13 < SDSTD3 101-10 < SDROOM2 110-15 < < < < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_POWER2WX 115-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDROOM1 97-13 < SDROOM1 100-14 < SDELECT 100-9 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_ELECT2WX 116-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDELECT1 97-11 < < < SDSTD3 101-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 HOUSEHH 105-15 TOMHIGH 104-10 HOUSEHH 105-15 TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_HOUSE2WX 117-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDHOUSE2 97-10 < SDSTD2 101-9 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < < < < < < < < < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_RIDE IT 118-5-1

Select one of the options with the cursor buttons. Press ENTER to confirm or press ESCAPE to cancel the modifications. ENTER and ESCAPE close the dialog windows.

Select the parameter which has to be modified with the cursor. Modify the value with the DIAL or numeric keypad. Press ENTER to confirm or press ESCAPE to cancel the modifications.

Press the soft button corresponding to the option required.

Press F5, ENTER or ESCAPE to close the warning.

WARNINGS

Tables A19

Getting to know your instrument

POWER UP
1. Insert the instruments power cord into a suitable grounded wall outlet and press the power switch to turn on WK6/8SE.
After a few seconds the instrument will set to the default situation. The initial (default) main display screen will show a single sound (GrandPiano1) active.

2. If necessary, regulate the display contrast with the DISPLAY CONTRAST panel knob on the left of the display.
Different viewing angles may require an adjustment of the display contrast.

3. Play on the keyboard and you will hear a piano sound (GrandPiano 1) play across the full keyboard.

<---------------------------- FULL keyboard ------------------------->

ADJUST THE GENERAL VOLUME

4. Adjust the general volume with the MASTER VOLUME slider.
A comfortable level is around two thirds of the sliders travel distance. If you are using external amplification, better results are obtained by adjusting the volume with mixer or amplifier controls rather than lowering the volume of the instrument.

Quick Guide 19

The headphones jack panel is located on the left side of the instrument, under the keyboard. Inserting the headphones plug into the PHONES 1 jack excludes the internal speakers to allow you to play in total silence without disturbing others in the same room. Plugging into the PHONES 2 jack does not exclude the internal speakers.

The rear connections panel includes four jacks for control pedals, denoted Volume, 1, 2, Damper. The Volume jack is a non-programmable port for a standard Volume Pedal (optional). The remaining three pedal jacks are programmable and preset to provide Performance functions.

The pedal jacks 1, 2 and Damper are function assignable and can be independently enabled or disabled to react with the keyboard tracks of a Performance.

5. Plug a set of headphones into the PHONES 1 jack.

The default configuration of the pedals is as follows:

All three pedals (1, 2, Damper) can be programmed to accept Switch action (on/off) or Continuous (graduated levels) control pedals (Volume type).

Use the Master Volume slider to adjust the headphones volume.

Drumkits PLAY WITH HEADPHONES

PLAY WITH THE PEDALS

110 Quick Guide

Ped1 Ped2 Damper Volume

DK_POWER1WX 115-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 BDSTD1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 < SDROOM2 110-15 < SDSTD3 101-10 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_ELECT1WX 116-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 BDSTD1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 < SDROOM2 110-15 < SDROOM2 110-15 < < < < TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_HOUSE1WX 117-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDHOUSE 97-9 HOUSERIM 99-11 HOUSSD1 101-12 < SDSTD2 101-9 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSEHH 105-15 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSEHH 105-15 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 < HOUSETCON 109-16 < < < < < < < < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 < TIMBALES 110-9 COWBELL 108-11 < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_JAZZWX 118-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDJAZZ 97-12 < SDJAZZ2 100-11 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_BRUSHWX 119-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDSTD2 97-15 < BRUSHTAP 103-13 BRUSHSLAP BRUSHREV 103-10 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_ORCHWX 120-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 HHCLO1S 105-10 HHCLO1L 105-9 HHOPEN2 106-9 RIDECYMB 107-13 < BDELECT1 97-11 RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < TIMPANI 48-1 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 FINGERSNAP 113-8 SDJAZZ3 100-12 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

VOLUME

Volume Pedal (continuous)

VOCAL ON/OFF

DAMPER SOSTENUTO

Footswitch (on/off)

Vocal On/Off Sostenuto Damper (sustain) Volume

= = = =

Tables A17

PLAY WITH THE TRACKBALL

The on-board controlling devices include a Trackball on the left key block, preset for Performance functions. The default configuration of the Trackball is as follows: Left/Right movement = Pitch Bend Up/Down movement = Modulation The Trackball is spring loaded to return to the central position. The Trackball can be enabled or disabled to react with the keyboard tracks of a Performance.

Modulation

Pitch Bend

PLAY THE PROGRAMMABLE PADS

The four programmable Pads buttons (Pad 1, Pad 2, Pad 3, Pad 4) provide quick and easy ways of adding extra sounds to your playing. You can program each pad to produce an instrumental sound, a percussive sound or sample. The programmable Pads can also be assigned to the rotary slow/fast switching function.

Strike the Pads freely.

While you play, add additional sounds from the pads in real time. The configuration of the Programmable Pads can be stored in the Programmable Performances.

Quick Guide 111

DK_TECHNO 117-3-1 < < < < < < < < < BDTEKNO 98-9 BDJAZZ 97-12 HOUSERIM 99-11 HOUSSD1 101-12 < HOUSESD2 101-13 HOUSETCON 109-16 HHCLO2 105-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HHTGHT1 105-13 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HHOPEN2 106-9 HOUSETCON 109-16 ReverseCym 120-1 < < < < HOUSECOWB 108-13 < < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 DYNSDJAZZ 100-10 SDJAZZ2 100-11 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

1. Press a SOUND GROUPS button (PIANO GROUP button in the example).

WK6/8SE has a vast selection of instrument Sounds, including orchestral, percussion and contemporary musical instruments, organized in 16 Sound Groups, each consisting of 16 Banks of up to 16 Sounds in every bank.

2. Select a Sound by pressing the paired Soft buttons near the Sound name in the display (buttons E/F for Piano3 in this example).

3. Play on the keyboard and listen to the Sound.

The Sound will play across the full keyboard

If the Display Hold (D. HOLD) button is on (LED on), the Sound Group selection display will remain locked, allowing you to select another sound from the same bank. (The D. HOLD button is on by default). If you press ENTER after making the selection, the display will show the newly selected sound without turning off the D. HOLD button.

The Sound Groups display will activate showing 8 Sounds to choose from.

If D. HOLD is off, the display will return to the previous situation showing the newly selected Sound.

Select sounds

112 Quick Guide

Drumkits

DK_JAZZ2 118-3-1 < < < < < < < < < < < BDJAZZ 97-12 RIMSHOT2 99-10 SDJAZZ3 100-12 < DYNSDJAZZ 100-10 TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHTGHT1 105-13 TOMJAZZ 104-11 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHOPEN1 105-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_M1 119-3-1

DK_SY77. 120-3-1

< BDROOM1 97-13 BDELECT1 97-11 BDHOUSE1 97-9 BDPOWER 98-11 SDSTD1 100-16 SDORCH 100-13 SDSTD3 101-10 HOUSSD1 101-12 SDROOM2 100-15 RIMSHOT1 99-9 SDROOM2 100-15 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMHIGH 104-10 HHCLO1S 105-10 HOUSEHH 105-15 HHPEDAL 105-12 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HHOPEN2 106-9 TAMBOURINE 108-9 HOUSEHH 105-15 CRASH 107-10 CHINA 107-15 RIDECYM 107-13 RIDECUP 107-12 CABASA 110-12 VOXHHCL 114-12 HOUSCLAP 102-9 BONGOLOW 109-11 BONGOLOW 109-11 DARBKLOW 112-16 DARBKHIGH 112-15 CONGALOW 109-15

BDSTD2 97-15 BDROOM1 97-13 BDELECT1 97-11 BDPOWER 98-11 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMHIGH 104-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 BDHOUSE1 97-9 BDSTD2 97-15 SDSTD1 100-16 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 SDSTD3 101-10 TOMROOM 104-12 RIMSHOT1 99-9 SDELECT 100-9 TOMROOM 104-12 HOUSECLAP 102-9 COWBELL 108-11 CABASA 110-12 HHCLO1S 105-10 TAMBOURINE 108-9 HHOPEN2 106-9 CRASH 107-10 ROLLSNARE 103-9 RIDECYM 107-13 RIDECUP 107-12 TubularBel 15-1 TubularBel 15-1 TubularBel 15-1 KITCHEN 113-14 KITCHEN 113-14 DARBKLOW 112-16 DARBKHIGH 112-15 BreathNois 122-1

DK_STAND.3 113-4-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDSTD1 97-14 BDSTD2 97-15 RIMSHOT1 99-9 SDORCH 100-13 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 < HHTGHT1 105-13 < < < HHOPEN1 105-11 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_ROOM1WX 114-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < < < SDSTD2 101-9 < SCSTS3 101-10 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

< ----------------------- FULL keyboard ----------------------- >

SELECTION DISPLAYS NOT LOCKED

SELECTION DISPLAYS LOCKED

Tables A15

CHANGE SOUND BANK

4. Repeat step 2 to make additional selections.

This time, after pressing a SOUND GROUPS button, select the Bank containing the desired sound using the +/ (Page/Bank) buttons in the top right hand corner of the display area. Each Sound Group button consists of up to 16 Sound Banks, each containing up to 8 Sounds. The Bank 1 Sounds are all GeneralMidi compatible, while those that occupy the positions of the remaining 15 banks are variations the Bank 1 sounds.

Note: Not all sound Banks are fully occupied the empty slots are ready to accept user-edited sounds or disk based RAM-sounds.

If you want the Sound Group selection display to close after making your selection, turn the D. HOLD button off (LED off).

PLAY ON A SPLIT KEYBOARD

5. Press the F3/F4 paired Soft buttons to select the UPP/LOW keyboard mode and press a key below note F#3.
Pressing Upp/Low will activate the Lower 1 section for Play. You will hear a different Sound with respect to that assigned to Upper 1. The keyboard will be divided at note B3. The Lower 1 section will play across the extension C2-B3 and the Upper 1 section will play across the extension C4 - C7).

SPLIT Keyboard <--------Lower 1 -------- > < ------------ Upper 1 ------------- >

An active section shows a keyboard icon while a mute section shows the mute icon.

ACTIVE

MUTE

Quick Guide 113

7. Press the Lower 2 soft button (A/B) twice to select the corresponding Sound and play a key below note F#3.

8. Press the F1/F2 Soft buttons to select the FULL keyboard mode and press a key anywhere along the keyboard.

You will hear two sounds for each single note played on the right hand.

Drumkits 6. Press Upper 2 (E/F) TWICE to select and activate the Upper 2 section and play a key above note F#3.

If you play with both hands, you will hear two sounds on the right hand and two on the left.

You will hear the sounds of both Upper sections (Upper 1 and Upper 2) play layered across the full keyboard.

Activating Upper 2 introduces a second Sound (SlowString) layered with the first.

RETURN TO FULL KEYBOARD PLAYING

114 Quick Guide

DK_BRUSH 119-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < < BDJAZZ 97-12 < BRUSHTAP 103-13 BRUSHSLP 103-12 BRUSREV 103-10 TOMBRUSH 115-13 HHTGHT1 105-13 TOMBRUSH 115-13 < TOMBRUSH 115-13 < TOMBRUSH 115-13 TOMBRUSH 115-13 < TOMBRUSH 115-13 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_ORCH. 120-2-1 < < HHTGHT1 105-13 HHPEDAL 105-12 HHOPEN2 106-9 RIDECYM 107-13 < < < < BDSTD3 97-16 BDORCH 98-10 < SDORCH 100-13 CASTANETS 112-12 SDORCH 100-13 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 < < < < < CRASHORCH 107-9 < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_STAND.2 113-3-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDSTD3 97-16 < < SDSTD4 101-11 < SDSTD3 101-10 < HHCLO2 105-16 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_WS 114-3-1

BDPOWER 98-11 SDELECT 100-9 SDROOM2 100-15 SDSTD3 101-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 CABASA 110-12 < TAMBSLP 108-10 < COWBELL 108-11 RIMSHOT2 99-10 BDJAZZ 97-12 BRUSRIG 103-11 DYNSDJAZZ 100-10 BRUSHTAP 103-13 TOMJAZZ 104-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHCLO1S 105-10 TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHPEDAL 105-12 WOODBLOCK 111-12 HHOPEN2 106-9 HOUSCLAP 102-9 BDSTD1 97-14 RIDECYM 107-13 SDSTD1 100-16 RIDECUP 107-12 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 SPLASH 107-14 TOMROOM 104-12 CRASH 107-10 VIBRASLAP 108-12 CHINA 107-15 FINGERSNAP 113-9

DK_STD.1WX 115-3-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDELECT1 97-11 BDROOM1 97-13 < SDROOM2 100-15 < SDSTD3 101-10 < HHTGHT1 105-13 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_DANCE 116-3-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDELECT1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 < SDELECT 100-9 < SDROOM1 100-14 TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 HHOPEN1 105-11 TOMELEC 104-9 TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 < ReverseCym 120-1 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

SPLIT Keyboard <---- Low 1+Low 2 ----><--------- Upper 1 + Upper 2 --------->

SPLIT Keyboard <---- Low 1+Low 2 ----><--------- Upper 1 + Upper 2 --------->

FULL keyboard <------------------------ Upper 1 + Upper 2 ------------------------->

Tables A13

PLAY UP TO 8 SOUNDS AT THE SAME TIME (MULTI)

9. Press the soft buttons F5/F6 on the right of the display to select the MULTI keyboard mode.
All references to the Upper and Lower keyboard sections will no longer be displayed. The Multi situation will show 8 of the 16 Tracks of the current Performance. In Multi keyboard mode, you can play up to 8 Sounds in real time. The remaining 8 tracks are associated to the Style auto accompaniment tracks (explained later).

10. Configure the active/mute status of the displayed tracks using the relative soft buttons A F on the left of the display.
In Multi mode, the soft buttons on the left are not paired; each button relates to the corresponding track shown in the display.

10

11. Play on the keyboard with both hands.

You will hear a single sound, or a combination of sounds on both the left hand and right hand, depending on the active/mute status of each track. At this point, you can practice changing the overall sound combination by activating and/ or muting the sounds at will using the methods already described.

11

Multi (split) Keyboard < --- Sound(s) ----- > < ----------- Sound(s) ------------- >

Quick Guide 115

The WK6/8SE Sounds are identified by two numbers: the ProgramChange (PC) and the BankSelect MSB number (ControlChange 00 [CC00]). You can select a Sound by specifying the absolute values (PC and CC numbers) on the numeric keypad. In MIDI setups, a third number corresponding to the BankSelect LSB (CC 32) is sometimes necessary to select a sound of an expander connected to the WK6/8SE MIDI OUT.

B: If the required Sound belongs to a different Bank, key in a dash () which acts as a separator then specify the corresponding Bank number (Bank Select MSB). In the example, specify then 2.

2. Specify the ProgramChange of the required Sound.

1. Select (if necessary) the track whose sound you wish to reassign and press the KEY PAD button to enable the numeric keypad.

If necessary, add a second separator () and the third part of the message (BankSelect LSB).

An insertion window activates showing the number of Sound currently assigned to the track.

3. Confirm by pressing KEY PAD or ENTER, or press ESCAPE to cancel the operation.

Note: If you specify the ProgramChange on its own, the bank rests unchanged. For example, if the current Sound is 112-2-1, by specifying ProgramChange 96 or sending PC96 via MIDI, you will select Sound 96-2-1.

A: In the example, specify 4 then 9.

Drumkits USING THE KEYPAD TO SELECT SOUNDS

The KEY PAD LED turns off.

116 Quick Guide

DK_STAND1 113-2-.1 ROLLSNARE 103-9 FINGERSNAP 113-9 ZAPP 115-10 GunShot 128-1 SCRATCH2 115-12 SCRATCH1 115-11 STICK 99-12 SQCLICK 115-15 HOUSERIM 99-11 MUTBELL 110-16 BDSTD2 97-15 BDSTD1 97-14 RIMSHOT1 99-9 SDSTD1 100-16 HOUSECLAP 102-9 SDSTD4 101-11 TOMLOW 104-14 HHCLO1S 105-10 TOMLOW 104-14 HHPEDAL 105-12 TOMLOW 104-14 HHOPEN2 106-9 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMHIGH 104-10 CRASH 107-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 RIDECYM 107-13 CHINA 107-15 RIDECUP 107-12 TAMBSLP 108-10 SPLASH 107-14 COWBELL 108-11 CRASH 107-10 VIBRASLAP 108-12 RIDECYM 107-13 CONGASLAP 109-10 BONGOLOW 109-11 CONGAHSLAP 109-12 CONGAHIGH 109-14 CONGALOW 109-15 TIMBALES 110-9 TIMBLOW 110-10 AGOGO 110-11 AGOGO 110-11 CABASA 110-12 MARACAS 110-14 WHISTLE 110-15

DK_ROOM 114-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDROOM1 97-13 BDROOM1 97-13 < SDROOM1 100-14 < SDROOM2 100-15 TOMROOM 104-12 HHTGHT1 105-13 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_POWER 115-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDELECT1 97-11 BDROOM1 97-13 < SDROOM2 100-15 < SDSTD3 101-10 < HHTGHT1 105-13 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_ELECT. 116-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDELECT1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 < SDELECT 100-9 < SDROOM1 100-14 TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 HHOPEN1 105-11 TOMELEC 104-9 TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 < ReverseCym 120-1 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_HOUSE 117-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDHOUSE2 97-10 BDHOUSE HOUSERIM 99-11 < < HOUSESD2 101-13 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSEHH 105-15 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSEHH 105-15 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HOUSETCON 109-16 < < < < < HOUSECOWB 108-13 < < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 < < < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_JAZZ 118-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < < BDJAZZ 97-12 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 < SDSTD3 101-10 TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHTGHT1 105-13 TOMJAZZ 104-11 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHOPEN1 105-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

Or

2A

2B

Tables A11

ADJUST THE SOUND VOLUMES SEPARATELY (BALANCING)

The volume of each sound (in Full, Upp/Low or Multi setups) can be independently regulated with the corresponding sliders of the group to the left of the display. The Performances memorize the track volumes. After mixing, you can save the changes to the current Performance using the STORE PERF button. The correspondence between the sliders and the tracks is indicated by the two LEDs shown on the right of the group of sliders. The sliders can affect:

Full keyboard mode Upper/Lower mode

A) the tracks identified by the silkscreened markings above the sliders, or B) the tracks identified by the silkscreened markings AH below the sliders.
In Full Keyboard or Upper&Lower keyboard modes (situation A), refer to the markings above the sliders. The sliders (Upper 1 & 2, Lower 1 & 2) control the corresponding tracks. In Multi mode (situation B), or when Style accompaniment tracks are shown (see page 22), refer to the markings AH. Each slider corresponds to one of the displayed tracks: slider A to track 1, slider B to track 2, . slider H to track 8.

Multi mode

Quick Guide 117

ROM-Sounds THE SOLO BUTTON - ISOLATE A SINGLE SOUND FROM THE REST
9 10 11 If you are playing Bank in a situation where two or more SYN SFX group sounds are displayed, before activating a muted 1 BDHOUSE11 BDHOUSE21 sound you may97want to listen to it alone toBDELECT1 de98 BDTEKNO1 BDORCH1 BDPOWER1 cide whether to activate it or1 not. In such a situ- 1 99 RIMSHOT1 RIMSHOT21 HOUSERIM ation, you can isolate the 1sound from the rest 100 SDELECT DYNSDJAZZ1 SDJAZZ21 using the SOLO button in the following manner: 1 1 101 SDSTD2 SDSTD3 SDSTD41 12 BDJAZZ1 STICK1 SDJAZZ31 HOUSSD11 BRUSHSLP1 TOMROOM1 HHPEDAL1 HHOP_70
1

13 BDROOM11 RIM_701 SDORCH1 HOUSESD21 BRUSHTAP1 TIMP_JM1 HHTGHT11 HH_CL1_DR RIDECYM1

1 1 1

14 BDSTD11 BD_70_P1 RIM_11 SDROOM11 ROLL_701 BD_AC_1B1 TOM_141 TOMLOW1 HHTGHT21 HH_CL2_DR SPLASH1 CONGAHIGH MARACAS1 QUICALOW1 OPSURDO1 KITCHEN1
1 1 1 1 1

15 BDSTD21 BD_70_F1 RIM_21 SDROOM21 ROLL_F_LN2 BD_AC_2A1 TIMPANI1 HOUSEHH1 HH_PED_DR CHINA1 RIDE1 CONGALOW WHISTLE1 TRIANLONG1 DARBKHIGH LOGDRUM1 DOLLYVOX SQCLICK1 BEAT_SD1
1 1 1 1 1

16 BDSTD31 CLAP_MIX1 EFF_RIM1 SDSTD11 ROLL_F1 BD_AC_2B1 OPSURDO21 HHCLO21 HH_OP_DR1 SMASH1 RIDECUP1 HOUSETCON1 MUTBELL2 TRIANSHORT1 DARBKLOW1 CLAKSON1 BABYVOX1 DYTEK_TIMB2 SD_9091 SD_BR_DYN2 808_OPHHLP1 BD_Z21
1

ACOUST_KIK1 BD_KIK1

1. Press the SOLO button and play on the key103 ROLLSNARE BRUSREV BRUSRIG board. 104 TOMELEC TOMHIGH TOMJAZZ
1 1 1 1

102

HOUSECLAP1

CLAP1

BD_AC_1DYN1 BD_AC_2DYN1 BD_AC_1A1

1 1

TOM_13_DYN2 TOM_10_DYN2

The button turns on and HHCLO1L1 HHCLO1S1 HHOPEN11 the sound 105 currently shown highlighted will 1 1 106 HHOPEN2 HHCL_70 HHFT_701 play while all other sounds1 are automatically 107 CRASHORCH CRASH1 HOUSERIDE1 muted (if active). 1 1 1
108 TAMBOURINE TAMBSLP
1 1

ETHNIC group LED of the SOLO

RIDECUP1 VIBRASLAP1 CABASA1

1 1

COWBELL
1

HOUSECOWB1 COWBL21 CABASAL1 MTSURDO DOOR1

BONGOHISL CONGALSLAP BONGOLOW 2. Select any109 another sound by pressing the 110 TIMBALES TIMBLOW AGOGO corresponding Soft button once only. 111 GUIROLONG GUIROSHORT CLAVES
1 1 1 1

CONGAHSLAP CONGALSLAP WOODBLOCK1 QUICAHIGH1

112 the SHAKER JINGLEBELL is auIn this example, sound SlowStrings PERCUSSIVE group tomatically activated while the previous one 113 FINGERSNAP1 DROP1 NOISE21 (Piano1) is automatically muted. 1 Observe 1 114 VOICES1 VOICES2 VOICES31 that the sound plays across the full keyboard: 1 115 FINGBELL1 ZAPP1 SCRATCH1 normally Lower 2NOISEPERC plays on1the left split in Upp/ 116 RASPYRIDE1 CRASH_181 Low mode 117 and cannot be activated whenSD_STD3 Full 1 SD_STD11 SD_STD21 keyboard mode is selected. 1 118 SD_SH1 SD_SH21 SD_SH31
3 119 REZO_IT keyboard mode,

2 WINDCHIMES CASTANETS
WATER1 VOXHHCL
1

VOXTAP SD_BB1 SD_P70

VOXTIP D_SD1

SCRATCH21 HARD_CLAP1 SD_STD4 SD_FSN1 9091_OCHH WhaWha41 ReverShrt1

1 1 1

TOMBRUSH2
1

HOU_TOM1 SD_F70

SD_BR

EFF_SD21 BD_DNC31 9092_CHH Noisnare12 Noisnare2

2 1

808_CL_HH1 BD_Z1_LAYL2 9092_OPHH

1

808_OC_HH1 DNC_BD11 HH_LOOP_CL SD12 SD2

2

In Full 120 LONG_REVRS1 BD_Z1_LAYH2 9091_CHH1 sounds assigned to the Lower keyboard secSFX group tions play across the full1 keyboard when they 1 121 WhaWha1 WhaWha21 WhaWha3 are Solod. In other 1words, the SOLO but122 Glasses ReverseBd11 ReverSnar11 ton overrides the current Split point. 123 TekBrush2 ReverseBd21 ReverSnar21

LNG_BD11 therefore,

BD_DMGD_LN1 BD_DNC2_LN1 even

HH_LOOP_OP1 BD_DEEP_DN2 TOMLOW22 TOMHIGH22 BD11 BORDER_12 BORDER_22 Sinus1

SD_HEAVY12 SD_HEAVY2
2

1 124 ReverSnar31 In Upp/Low and Highhh Multi1 mode,ReverseBd3 a Solod sound 1 1 125the PhoneWave SCRATCH3 DYNA_PERC2 plays across currently assigned keyboard 2 126 RndEnArm2 SCRATCH41 extension. In this case, the SOLO button SD_ROCK rec127 OddSpace2 SCRATCH51 BD_ROCK2 ognises the current Split Point. 2 1 1

<ReverShrt3 ------------------------SlowStrings ------------------------------- > 1 Noisnare42 SD_HEAVY42 909_SD_LNG2

NOISE_C1HH
1

ReverShrt21

Noisnare32

SD_HEAVY32 BD_DN1_ZP
2

SD32

BrokeNoise

BD_Z1_HHC BD_DN3_HI2 BD_DN2_HI2

NOISE_C2HH1 HatOrSnare2 NOISE_OPHH1 FallingBD2 NOISE_OPRV

1

BD_DN2_ZP2 BD_DN3_ZP2 BN_DN3_SD

2

128

GlassalG

SCRATCH6

WEEP

WayaW

BD_DMG_SD

Empty1

The SOLO button finds its principal use in Multi track situations.

3. Press the SOLO button again to return to normal operation.

The SOLO LED turns off.

118 Quick Guide

Tables A9

Listen to the Demo Songs

You can listen to the automatic playback of your WK6/8SE to get an idea of what the instrument is capable of doing.

1. Press DEMO (in the Edit/Number section) to open the Demo window.
The Select Demo dialog window appears.

2. Select one of the elements in the list (All, Demo Song, Demo Style) with the cursor buttons / .

3. Press ENTER to gain access to the selection window of the element selected in step 2 (Demo Song or Demo Style).
The corresponding selection window activates showing 8 Song or Style names. An animated string of text starts to scroll across the top of the display under the title, showing basic technical specifications of the instrument. If you select ALL, all the Demo Songs and Demo Styles are chained into a single medley. The sequencer starts to play the first song automatically and stops when it reaches the end of the last Demo Style in memory. If you want to cancel the Select Demo display without playing the Demo Songs or Styles, press ESCAPE.

4. Select one of the Demos (Song or Style) with the corresponding soft button.
The selected single demo playback starts and shows up in negative highlight. When the end is reached, the demo stops.

Quick Guide 119

ROM-Sounds 5. Select the ALL DEMO option shown in the current selection to chain Bank window 9 10 all demos 11 displayed (Song REED groupor Style). Playback starts automatically from the first 66 demo. Demos not yet played are shown in 67 negative highlight while those played return 68 positive. 69
70 plays, all the buttons on the While a demo 71 control panel (except DEMO, the Function 72 buttons and ESCAPE) are disabled. FLUTE group 73 6. To stop a demo press the corresponding soft 74 button, or press ESCAPE. 75 76ESCAPE, the SELECT DEMO If you press 77 dialogue window closes and the display returns to the78 last operating mode selected.

5
12 13 14 15 16

65

79

IMPORTANT:80 Remember to escape DEMO mode if you want to select a Performance, Style or Song, SYNTH LEAD group or enter one of the FatSynth Edit modes. 2 81 MinBitSyn12 FxShape2

Eerie12 Eerie22 Eerie32 Eerie42 VocoWah2 ThinWha2 FatAttak12 FatAttak22

Vangelis1 Vangelis2 An A.Logic Spiral Phat Pulse Soft Seq. Soft Lead Alf's Lead

82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96

WhaSynth2 Outburst2 Its19852 FMbefore2 CrossShape2 CrossSharp2 CrossWires2 IcePad12 IcePad22 BassPad2

MinBitSyn22 DigGrunge12 DigGrunge22 ToneZone12 ToneZone22 ToneZone32 ToneZone42

SharpBuzz2 MinStack4 MajStack4 DimStack4 Maj5Stack4 Min7Stack4 Maj7Stack4

SYNTH PAD group Alf's Pad Alf's Pad2

120 Quick Guide

Tables A7

Multimedia
WK6/8SE can display Lyrics when playing WK (or PS) Series Disks. There are a wide variety of disks that display lyrics when played. No other keyboard brings vision to your music like the Gem WK Series does!

1. Press the SONG button.

You will see up to sixteen Song choices in the display (autoload the four song demo disk provided with the instrument if necessary).

2. Select the desired SONG with the corresponding Soft button.

3. Press PLAY to start the SONG playback.

3 4

4. Press the SCORE button and the score will appear in the display.

5. Press the F8 button to activate the SCORE CONTROLS.

Quick Guide 121

ROM-Sounds Soft buttons to high6. Use the corresponding light the desired viewing choices. Bank 9 10 11
BASS choices group The viewing are:

6
12 13 14 15 16 ST_AcousBs1 ST_FngrdBs1 ST_PickBs21 ST_Fretls11 ST_Fretls21 ST_FngrBs21 ST_PickBs11 ST_SynBas42 ST_Fretls31 ST_Fretls41

All:

33 34 35 36 37 38

Vang.Bass

The2 Score shows DanceFing Vang.Bass2

notes, 2 chords and lyrics on the SoftBass staff;

Lyrics 1, 2, 3, 4:

Lyrics only are shown in various different sizes 39 (Lyrics 1 is the default 40 setting); STRINGS group)
41 42 43 45 46 47 48 ENSEMBLE group 49 50 51 52 53 54

Chord:

Chord symbols are shown on the staff.

44 7. Press the ENTER button to view the results.

55 AUTOMATIC LOADING OF SONGS AT POWER UP 56

If your WK6/8SE doesnt have any Songs with BRASS group 57 lyrics in memory, it is possible to load a disk-based 58 Block of data (including Song data) automatically at power up. 59 If you have one or more Songs disks (1.44 Mb 60 format), insert the disk into the 61 drive of your computer and change the name of the Block file 62 which contains Song data to: 63 AUTOLOAD.BLK (use capital letters only).
64

With the instrument off, insert the disk into the drive and turn the instrument on. The AUTOLOAD.BLK file will be loaded to the RAM memory automatically.

WARNING - The automatic AUTOLOAD.BLK loading procedure replaces all the data conserved in System RAM.

122 Quick Guide

Tables A5

TO DISPLAY LYRICS ON AN EXTERNAL MONITOR

You can project the lyrics any Song onto your TV screen, or computer monitor, (or any other video device). Your WK6/8SE leaves the factory set by default to instantly project song lyrics onto an external video device.

1. Connect one of the video outputs (RGB, SVHS) to a domestic TV or to a monitor by means of the supplied video cable.
The supplied RGB/Scart video cable is suitable to connect your WK6/8SE to a domestic TV or computer monitor.

1/2

2. If you are connecting to the TV, tune it to the AV channel.

To select the AV channel, consult the owners manual of the television set.

3. Select a Song with Lyrics.

The external video device will show the Lyrics of the Song. If you press SCORE the lyrics will also be shown on the instruments display.

4. If the Lyrics do not appear on the external device, press F8 to open the Score controls window and adjust the parameters of the video controls accordingly.
Use the directional arrow buttons to select the parameters. Refer to the section entitled SCORE & EDIT SCORE in the Edit Song chapter of the Reference Guide for instructions regarding how to set the parameters.

Quick Guide 123

ROM-Sounds Play with Auto Accompaniment Styles

Bank PIANO group 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

WK6/8SE has 192 auto accompaniment Styles 1 with four Variations four Intros, four Fills and four 2 Endings for each 3 Style. You can also load up to 32 disk based User 4 Styles of your choice into the 4 User Style banks 5 available.

1. Press SINGLE 7 TOUCH PLAY (LED turns on).

Pressing this8button activates the ARRANGE MALLET. group ON/OFF and MEMORY buttons (if not al9 ready on).
10 11 The ARRANGE ON/OFF button enables 12 the Style auto-accompaniment patterns. 13 is off, only the Style Drum If this button 14 accompaniment will play when you start the Style. 15 16 ORGAN group 2. Press a Style button in the STYLE GROUPS 17 (8 Beat, 1618 Beat, Rock, etc.).

JAZZ in this19 example. The display will show 20 Styles from the first bank of the a selection of 21 selected Group.
22 23 24 GUITAR group) 26

3. Select a Style 25 from the current Bank (1).

You can also switch to Style Bank 2 with the 27 +/ (Page/Bank) buttons for an additional 28 choice of 8 29 ROM Styles.
30buttons near the Style name in Use the Soft 31 to select the desired Style the display (SWING in 32 Bank 1 in this example).

3
ST_Mandolin
1

ST_Nylon1 ST_Steel1
1

ST_Steel2

ST_Steel31 ST_12Strng1 ST_Steel41

If the Display Hold button (D.HOLD) is off, the display will show the sounds recalled for the keyboard sections and the keyboard mode will be shown as Upp/Low. If D.HOLD is on, press ESCAPE to view the current situation.

124 Quick Guide

Tables A3

4. Press the right Track Scroll button to check the sounds recalled for the accompaniment tracks.
Note that in this example, the tracks Acc 4/5/ 6 are all muted. Press the left Track Scroll button to return to the keyboard sounds.

5. Press the INTRO button if you want to preselect the Style introduction. 6. Press the START/STOP button to start the auto accompaniments.
You will hear the Drum track start to play. If you pressed INTRO in point 5 above, the Style will start with an introduction.

5/6

7. Play a chord of at least three notes below the split point (B3) to start Style play.
A fully orchestrated auto accompaniment pattern will start to play. In default conditions, the keyboards chord recognition mode is set to Fingered 1 which allows you to play Styles using fingered chords anywhere along the keyboard, regardless of the split point. You can change the chord recognition mode from Free to Fingered 2, One Finger or Free, by entering the ARRANGE MODE options. See the ARRANGE MODE function in the Styles chapter of the Reference Guide.

Quick Guide 125

8. Press one of the VAR buttons shown off.

Note how the accompaniment pattern changes to a different Variation. The VAR buttons control the Style Variations. Each button recalls a different version of the same accompaniment. Each Variation includes different patterns for the Basic, Intro, Fill and Ending sections.

Appendix
Sound tables Drumkit tables Style tables Performance tables Effect tables

9. Press one of the FILL buttons.

FILL plays the fill cycle then breaks into the previous Variation. FILL plays the fill cycle then continues with the current Variation. When the accompaniment is not playing, FILL can be preselected to play as an intro. FILL plays the fill cycle then breaks into the next Variation (this button also incorporates the Tap Tempo function - see over). Normally the fill cycle plays once only. If you hold the FILL button pressed, it will repeat the Fill cycle continually until release.

Wave tables MIDI Controllers MIDI Implementation Implementation System Exclusive Index (alphabetical)

10. Play a different chord and start to play the melody with the right hand.
Note how the accompaniment pattern is transposed. The combination of sounds that play and the current keyboard mode will depend on the Style selected.

10

11. Stop the Style by pressing the START/STOP button or the ENDING button.
START/STOP stops the Style instantly. ENDING stops the Style with an ending phrase.

11

126 Quick Guide

START A STYLE WITH KEY START The Key Start function synchronizes the start of the automatic accompaniment with a note pressed on the keyboard below the split point without having to use START/STOP. KEY START can be used in various situations. The most common use is as follows:

12. When the Style is not playing, press KEY START.

The KEY START LED turns on.

12

13. Play a chord (at least 3 notes) with your left hand below the split point (B3).
The accompaniment starts immediately (eventually preceded by the introductory pattern if selected). If you release the keys, the accompaniment continues to play.

13

Note: If ARRANGE MEMORY or LOWER MEMORY are off, the accompaniment plays while your notes are pressed on the keyboard and stops instantly when the notes are released. If, instead, one of these two functions are active, the accompaniment or the drum track only will continue playing after releasing the keys.

14. Press START/STOP or ENDING to stop the ac-

companiment.
With Start/Stop, KEY START remains active. With Ending, KEY START turns off. If you use Start/Stop to stop the accompaniment, press KEY START to turn it off.

14

Quick Guide 127

START A STYLE WITH TAP TEMPO

15. With the Style accompaniment off, beat time on the TAP TEMPO button.

Help

15
HOW TO USE HELP 1. Press the HELP button when you want general information regarding the current mode. A GENERAL page will open showing information regarding the current operating mode. 2. If available, press DETAILS (F7/F8) to open a sub-page with specific details concerning the current help topic. Depending on the current mode, a NEXT page (F3/F4) may or not be available. Once you have entered a NEXT page, the PREVIOUS option (F1/F2) will be available. Options not available will be shown with broken lines. 3. To return to a GENERAL page, press F5/F6. 4. To pass to another HELP topic, regardless of the current operating mode, press NEXT (F3/ F4) or PREVIOUS (F1/F2). 5. Press ESCAPE to close the current HELP page.

The tempo is set according to the timing of WK6/8SE incorporates an on-line-help system the last two taps, the relative Tempo value is which provides brief information on the basic funcdisplayed and the accompaniment starts autions of the instrument. This feature is particutomatically. larly helpful if you get stuck and do not have acThe tempo adjusts itself automatically cess to the owners manual accordat the time. ing to the current Time Signature (4/4, 3/4, Generally, pressing HELP opens a page showetc.). ing information regarding the currently set mode. START AND STOP A STYLE WITH FADE IN/OUT

16

16. Press the FADE IN/OUT button before starting the accompaniment with START/STOP.
Therefore, if you are Style/Performance mode, The Style track volumes are in instantly set to press HELP to get information concerning the zero. Use either START/STOP or KEY default situation (main page). START to start the accompaniment. Similarly, if you are currently working in one of After thethe start, thesections, accompaniment track volEdit (Edit Effects, for example), umes gradually increase and reach their propress HELP to get information on the Effects secgrammed peak after a 2 measure (bar) cytion. cle. Some Help pages consist of a General information IN/OUT page and one or more Detail pages which 17. Press FADE while the accompaniprovide detailed information regarding the curment is playing. rent topic. All the track volumes gradually decrease and the accompaniment automatically stops at the end of the Fade Out cycle. During the Fade cycle, the relative LED flashes.

17

SELECT A STYLE WITHOUT CHANGING THE KEYBOARD SOUNDS If you want to change Style while playing without changing the keyboard sounds, select the Style with SINGLE TOUCH PLAY off. When SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is off, selecting a Style changes the patterns, the sounds and effects of the accompaniment tracks only - the keyboard sounds remain unchanged.

LED OFF

128 Quick Guide

Utility functions 91

SELECT AND PLAY THE FLASH MEMORY USER STYLES

WK6/8SE leaves the factory with a selection of User Styles stored in the User Style flash memory banks, reserved for factory use where the contents may vary from market to market. From time to time, Generalmusic may offer operating systems which contain upgrades of the User flash banks. The selection procedure is identical to the one used to select a ROM Style, with the difference that you select the flash User Style from bank 2 of the User 1 and User 2 locations

1. Press the USER 1 button in the STYLE GROUPS section 2. Select Bank 2 with the +/ Page/Bank ( ) buttons.
The display will show the names of 8 flash Styles to choose from..

1 2

IMPORTANT: the Flash Styles vary depending on the model. The WK6SE Flash Styles utilize ROM Sounds, while those of the WK8SE require sounds that reside in the instruments RAM memory. For this purpose, WK8SE leaves the factory with the sounds of Block A_1RSND (in the Hard Disk) already loaded into the RAM memory. Bear in mind, therefore, that if you modify the contents of the WK8SE RAM memory, the Flash Styles might not play correctly due to the absence of the correct sounds. In such a case, you will have to reload the Sound Block A_1RSND from the Hard Disk. Refer to the Disk and Hard Disk chapter for information regarding how to load Hard Disk data.

WK6SE

WK8SE

3. Select a Flash User Style with the corresponding soft buttons.

To play with the flash Style, proceed as already described on page 1.24.

Note. The recalled Flash User Style Performance can be modified and memorized to the same Flash User Bank, or to any other User location. Refer to the Store Performance procedure on the pages which follow for details regarding how to store Performances. The Flash User Styles cannot be erased.

Quick Guide 129

SELECT A STYLE RESTORE PERFORMANCE ALL (F3)

This operation cancels all user programmed data When Single Touch Play is on, each WK6/8SE currently in RAM (Performances, Style is associated to 8 Style Performances whichUser Styles, Style-Performances, and restores the inyou can assign at any time beforeSongs) or during play. strument to its factory-set status (RAM The Style Performances are permanent and can- empty). not be destroyed. Pressing They F3 are, prompts however, a request rewritable to confirm the (keyboard and operation accompaniment with ENTER sounds). or cancel Their with ESCAPE. default settings can be restored with the Restore command. A Style Performance be programmed to change the keyboard sounds RESTORE STYLES (F4)as well as the accompaniment sounds, but the accompaniment This operation cancels all User Styles in RAM patterns of the current Style remain unchanged. residing in (including User Style-Performances) User 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons of the STYLE 1. Select a the Style from bank 1 or 2 of the Style 1 GROUPS. The User slots are restored to the Group using the procedure already described factory-set conditions (empty: User). on the previous pages.

RESTORE STYLE-PERFORMANCE (F7)

This operation cancels all user-programmed Style-Performances associated to the ROM STYLES. The status of the Style-Performance parameters are restored to the factory-set values. ROM Styles associated to modified StylePerformances are identified by an asterisk (*) after the Style name. Pressing F7 prompts a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.

RESTORE SOUNDS (F8)

This operation restores the Sound configuration to the original factory-set situation, cancelling all User edited Sounds previously stored to user locations. This operation is particularly useful to restore the original WK6/8SE sound set (over 1,000 sounds) after loading a sound configuration from a previous series WK6/8SE disk (about 600 sounds) using the Load All Sounds or Load Block procedures. Pressing F8 prompts a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.

Pressing F4 prompts a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.

RESTORE PERFORMANCE (F5)

This operation cancels all user-programmed Performances in RAM residing in the 8 buttons of the PERFORMANCE GROUPS. The status of the Performance are restored to the 2. Press the STYLE P. buttonparameters to gain access to values. the Stylefactory-set Performances. Pressing F5 prompts a request to confirm the 8 Style Performance names associated to the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE. current Style are displayed.

RESTORE SONGS (F6)

This operation cancels all Song in RAM. The Songs memory is restored to the factory-set sta(empty: User). with the corre3. Select a tus Style Performance sponding paired soft Pressing F6 buttons. prompts a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE. Buttons A/B in this example.

If Single Touch Play is off (LED off), selecting a Style Performance activates the button automatically (LED on). Repeat steps 2 and 3 for other Style Performance selections. Use D.HOLD to lock the selection display.

130 Quick Guide

Edit General 89

Select the Performances

WK6/8SE has 64 user programmable Performances, organized in eight different banks in the PERFORMANCE GROUPS section. These Performances feature single and layered sounds, custom effect settings, split keyboard combinations and a special Drawbar Performance bank. You can create your own Performances or load new ones from disk. A Performance can also memorize a Style, Variation and Style Tempo, giving you the possibility of saving your user-programmed Style Performances to the Performance Group locations. When you select the Performances, you can then choose to recall the memorized Style or not by means of the Style Lock button.

1. Press the Bank 1 button in the PERFORMANCE GROUPS section.

The display will show 8 Performances to choose from, each with a different name. If the STYLE LOCK button is off, (default setting) selecting Performances will recall live keyboard and also accompaniment Sounds (Style Perfs). The relative Style, Variation and Tempo are selected. If the STYLE LOCK button is on (LED on), selecting Performances recalls live keyboard sounds only.

PERFORMANCES RECALL STYLES

PERFORMANCES RECALL KEYBOARD SOUNDS ONLY

2. Select a Performance use the Soft buttons nearest to the name (Church in the example).
If Display Hold (D. HOLD) is off, the display will return to the previous situation showing the newly selected sound combination. If D. HOLD is on (LED on), the Performance Group selection display will remain active, allowing you to select another Performance from the same Group. Press ENTER if you want to see the recalled sound combination.

Quick Guide 131

Maximum volume levels 3. Play on the keyboard and listen tocan the produce Sound clipping, 3 a distortion which can be eliminated by controlcombination. ling the gain. Depending on the Performance recalled, you clipping will be able to play with a combination of up to 16 Sounds, either layered together or split across the keyboard in any configuration. You can modify the Sound configuration to suit The VU-meter indicates the level of the input signal. The dark zonethen to thestore extreme right represents clipping (distortion). your needs the modified Performance with the Store Perf button (explained VOLUME further ahead). Separate volume control for each input. 4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to make additional Assignable values: 0 ... 127.

RESONANCE Sets the filter resonance. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. AUDIO OUT Directs the signal to the audio output outputs. Assignable values: L+R, 1+2, 1, 2.

MIC/LINE ON/OFF (F1)

Switch to activate/deactivate the Mic/Line IN1 and IN2 jacks. When the inputs are active, the overall polyphony is reduced by two voices; if you do not intend using the Mic/Line inputs, deactivate them in order to direct the two voices to the internal WK6/8SE sounds.

selections. This time, press the Performance button N.8.

4/5

PAN The display will show Drawbar PerformDetermines the8position of the input signal within ances tothe choose from stereo panorama.

Assignable -32 (all to the left) ... 0 (cen5. Select one of the 8 values: Drawbar Performances tre) ... +31 (all to the right). and play on the keyboard.
In the example, we select the Jazz Split PerEFF GROUP formance. Selects the Group of effects A or B. E1 SEND Determines the amount of Reverb effect to apply to the signal. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. E2 SEND Determines the amount of modulation effect to apply to the signal. 6. While you play, change the colour Assignable values: 0 ... 127. of the

VOCAL ON/OFF (F3/F4)

Switch for the activation/deactivation of the Vocal Processor. See also the Vocal Processor chapter.

EQUALIZER (F5/F6)
The Equalizer parameters affect the Mic/Line input signals only.

organ sounds using the 8 panel sliders.

FILTER The eight sliders operate as eight of the drawbars of an organ. You can change the pitch Selects a filter type. of each drawbar to make any footage Assignable values: Off, LP (Low you Pass), HP (High like. Pass), BP (Band Pass), PB (Parametric Boost),

PC (Parametric Cut). setting that Once you have made a drawbar you like, you can memorize it to the current Performance using the Store Performance CUTOFF operation explained on frequency. the next page. Sets the cutoff Assignable values: 0 ... 191.

132 Quick Guide

Edit General 87

Store Performance
Use the STORE PERFORMANCE command to save any changes you make to a Performance, a Style Performance or a Song Performance. The changes made to the Performances and Style Performances are interchangeable, that is, you can save a modified Performance to a Style Performance and vice versa. A modified Song Performance can be saved only to the Song Performances. In all cases, you can create a completely new Performance and change its name.

1. Press STORE PERFORMANCE to open the Store Performance dialog window.

If SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is off, the destination suggested will be a Performance location (Performance). If SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is on, the destination suggested will be a Style-Performance location (Style).

2. Press ENTER to save to the current Performance,

OR

Select a different Performance location to save to before pressing ENTER.

SAVING TO THE SAME PERFORMANCE With ENTER, the changes are memorized to the current Performance and the display returns to the modified Performance display. Each time this Performance is recalled, it will configure the WK6/8SE with precisely the same settings are those memorized. If you press ESCAPE, you will to cancel Store operation, but the temporary status of the new Performance will be retained, until you select another Performance.

Quick Guide 133

SAVING TO A DIFFERENT COMPUTER PERFORMANCE MODE (F8) OPTIONS Options to communicate with a computer

3. If you want to save to a different Performance, use the Cursor Left/Right ( / ) buttons and the Dial to configure the Performance Store display accordingly.

Date & Time

Sets the internal calendar and clock.

The Cursor Left/Right arrows switch from the Performances (Performance) to the Style Off - Connection deactivated. Performances (Style) and vice versa. Macintosh - To connect to an Apple Macintosh Rotatingcomputer. the Dial scrolls through the Groups A standard Mac serial cable is required in the Store to zone. to connect to the Modem port. In the computer software, set a communication velocity If you are saving to the Performances , of 1 MHz. - Allows serial to connection with select a PC1 Group in the Store zone and a an IBM computer compatible, with a communication Performance in theor Performance zone. velocity of 31250 baud. A standard PC serial If you are saving to the Style Performcable must be connected to the RS-232 port of ances, select a Style Group in the Store to the computer. zone, move down to the Style zone to select PC2 move - As above, but with a communication vea Style, then down again to the Perf locity of 38400 baud. zone to select a Style Performance.

SET DATE (F1)

Sets the date in edit. Take the cursor to the day, month and year and specify the value of each parameter with the DIAL. Confirm with ENTER or F1.

SET TIME (F2)

Sets the time in edit. Take the cursor to the hour, minute and seconds with the cursor buttons and specify the value of each parameter with the DIAL. Confirm with ENTER or F2.

4. Press ENTER.
If the destination is a Performance, the display returns to the modified version of the original Performance. If the destination is a Style Performance, pressing ENTER opens a dialog window requesting confirmation of the Style Performance name. You can either confirm the same name or change it.

5 Press ENTER again to confirm the new or old Style Performance name.
If you dont want to save your modifications, press ESCAPE to cancel the operation.

Edit General; Date & Time

134 Quick Guide

Edit General 85

Transposition
TRANSPOSE THE INSTRUMENT UP OR DOWN If you would like to play a song in a different key, or a song is too high or too low for a singer or another instrument, you can transpose the instrument to play the song in an easier key. The TRANSPOSE b/# buttons allow real time semitone adjustments (transpositions) of the overall pitch (range 24 semitones = 2 octaves).

1. Press TRANSPOSE # to raise the pitch.

An insertion screen shows the current Transpose value (0 = standard pitch). Press the Transpose # button as many times as necessary until you reach the desired pitch.

2. Press TRANSPOSE b to lower the pitch.

An insertion screen shows the current Transpose value. Continue pressing the TRANSPOSE b button until the dialog window shows a negative reading. The LED on one of the buttons will be on to indicate that the instrument is currently in a Transposed status (sharp or flat ). TO CLEAR THE KEYBOARD TRANSPOSE SETTING

3. Press both TRANSPOSE buttons simultaneously.

The LED on the active button goes off and the instruments normal pitch is restored. The display shows the 0 setting for a few seconds then returns to normal.

Quick Guide 135

TRANSPOSING The TRACKS final BYconfiguration OCTAVES can then be copied to selected octaves of the keyboard, or to all octaves. Any track, if selected, can be instantly transposed in octave steps, within the range octaves. EXAMPLE - TO PROGRAM A5 SCALE BY FINE TUNING ONE OR MORE NOTES: 1. Select the track you wish to transpose. 1. With the Octave Up function (F5), select the octave to program. 2. Use the directional arrows to select the fine tune parameter (in this case 0) and rotate the Dial to fine tune the note according to your requirements. While tuning, play the note repeatedly. 3. Repeat the microtuning operation for other 2. Press the OCTAVE notes.+ to raise the octave setting. 4. Select the Copy to oct. function (F3), select Tune in the current Copy Ocparameter and An insertionFine screen shows tave setting.ALL in the to octave parameter, then press ENTER to confirm. Press the OCTAVE + button as many times 5. When the scale programmed, save as necessary until you reachhas the been desired setit to the Setup by pressing F7 (Save). You ting. The value is expressed in semitones: will be prompted to select a User location. 12 = 1 octave, 24 = 2 octaves, etc.. The in-

OCTAVE UP (F5) Selects the next highest octave to edit. OCTAVE DOWN (F6) Sets the next lowest octave to edit. CATCH NOTE... (F7) Selects the note to edit. Press F7. The following message appears:

Play the note to edit. SAVE... (F8) Saves the User programmed scale to the Setup. The Save dialog window is opened where you can choose from 8 User scale destinations.

sertion screen cancels automatically after 2/ 3 seconds.

THE TUNING/SCALE OPTIONS

3. Press OCTAVE button to lower the octave setting. COPY TO OCTAVE... (F3)

3
Select the User scale with the DIAL. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.

Copies the current to another octave. The The current Octave settingsetting is shown. Copy to octave dialog window is opened where Continue pressing the OCTAVE button you can specify the elements toas copy and the many times as necessary until you reach the data to. octave to copy the user programmed desired setting. An eventual positive Octave status will be cancelled. TO CLEAR THE TRACK OCTAVE SETTING

4. Press both OCTAVE buttons simultaneously.

Coarse&Fine - Copies both the coarse tuned The insertion screen shows the value of 0 notes as well as theis fine.. and the tracks normal pitch restored. Coarse - Copies only the coarse tuned notes. Finetune - Copies only the fine tuning. To octave - Selects the octave to copy to. Select the ALL option to copy a programmed octave to the entire keyboard.

136 Quick Guide

Edit General 83

Play with Effects or bypass them

You can temporarily modify the way in which a Performance is processed by the on-board effect processor by changing the On/Off setting of the Effects Off button. BYPASS THE EFFECTS

1. To bypass the effects, press the EFFECTS OFF button.

The LED of the button turns on, indicating that the current Performance is no longer processed by the Effects. TO ACTIVATE THE EFFECTS

2. Press the active EFFECTS OFF button.

The LED of the button goes off to indicate that the current Performance is processed by the Effects.

You can find out more about the Effects and how to assign them to the Performances, Style and Song Performances in the Edit Effects section of the Performance Chapter in the Reference Guide.

Quick Guide 137

Using the Midi File Player

Edit General
DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN MENU PAGE
The menu page shows 6 editors at the centre: General Controls, Tuning/Scale, Pedalboard/ Computer, Date & Time, Display Controls and Mic/Line In. On the right hand side are 8 options which can be selected with the corresponding Soft buttons F1F8: Battery & Release, Auto Help, System Info, Restore All, Restore Styles, Restore Performances, Restore Songs, Restore Style Performances, Restore Sounds. After entering the editors, the options shown in the options column change according to the editor. The description of the main menu options is at the end of this chapter.

The MIDI FILE PLAYER plays MIDI files directly from floppy disk or Hard Disk without loading data This is where you can modify global parameters into RAM memory. If a Floppy disk containing that affect the instrument as a whole and which MIDI Files is already inserted in the drive, the are not memorized to a Performance. A part of MIDI File player engages the floppy, otherwise the general parameter settings are conserved in the Hard Disk (if present) is engaged automatiRAM and saved to disk as a Setup. cally. Press the GENERAL button in the Edit/Numbers The following example how to use the MIDI section toshows gain access to the EDIT GENERAL File player utilizing a floppy disk containing MIDI section. files. If you have saved some MIDI Files to your When you press GENERAL for the first time, the Hard Disk, follow the example without inserting a display shows the main menu. disk into the drive. The GENERAL functions can be selected using 1. Insert a one diskof containing MIDI Files into the the following methods. drive and press the SONG button. 1) Rotate the DIAL to select the editor and press ENTER; The display shows the SONG BANKS selecUseor the directional arrowsof to select the tion window 2) (with without a selection and press8ENTER; Songs). Theeditor example shows Songs present in RAM memory. 3) Use the page scroll buttons to pass directly from one editor to another; 4) Specify the editor number on the keypad (with the KEYPAD LED on) and press ENTER.

2. Press either of the +/ Page/Bank ( ) buttons to activate the MIDI File player.
The MIDI File player selects the MIDI File folder contained in the disk.

Edit General - Main menu

138 Quick Guide

Edit General 81

3. Press ENTER to access the SMF folder.

A list of MIDI Files is shown.

3/4

4. Use the directional arrows to select a MIDI File that you want to listen to.

5. Press PLAY to start the MIDI File playback.

During the playback, you can deactivate the melody by pressing the MELODY ON soft button (F3) i order to play the melody yourself. The option changes to MELODY OFF. Press the same soft button (F3) to restore the melody (MELODY ON). When the end of the MIDI File is reached, playback stops. Repeat the selection procedure and press PLAY to listen to other MIDI Files.

6. Press EXIT (F8) to escape from the Midi File Player.

You can refer to the SONG chapter in the Reference Guide for information regarding all the MIDI FILE PLAYER options.

Quick Guide 139

SPECIAL MIDI CONTROLLERS ASSOCIATED TO THE Loading data into RAM memory VOCAL PROCESSOR

LOADING MIDI FILES CONTAINING A VOCODER TRACK

To control the Vocal Processor via MIDI, the folWhen a MIDI File containing a Vocoder track is If you have some disk-based Songs, or Styles or Performances that you wish to load into the instrulowing special MIDI controllers (Common Chanloaded from disk, the Vocoder track sets to track ments RAM memory, or you wish to load data from the WK6/8SE Hard Disk, heres how to do it. nel) are available: 5 by default. The example shows how to load a Song from Floppy disk (or Hard Disk). All other data, such as User Styles, Programmable Performances, etc., are loaded using similar procedures adapted for the type of Cntrl No. Description Value data being loaded.
12 13 Vocal volume Vocal On/Off 0 127 0 Off/On (toggle)

1. Insert the floppy disk into the drive and pressOn 1 64-127 the DISK14 button to open the main Disk Load Mode recall 0 = Chord mode page. 1 - Vocoder mode If a disk is inserted in the drive but you want 2 HARD = Unison to work with the Hard Disk, select the 15 with soft Voice Set recall 1 = 1the DISK option button F2 to open 2=2 Hard Disk Load page.
3= 3 If a disk is not inserted in the drive, the Load page configures automatically for Hard Disk operations. The example refers to a 15 loading = 15 operation from Hard Disk. 16 = 16 Voice Mute required mode 0 = (for Voice 1 2. Specify 85 the load operation example, Load Single Song). 1 = Voice 2 2= Voice 3 Use the navigational arrows to navigate within the two columns of the display area and se- 4 3 = Voice lect the required command by combining one 4 = Main element from each column. 5 = Bass

For example, combine Single from the left column with Song from the right to specify Load Single Song. If you are using a MIDI file disk, specify Single MIDI File.

3. Press ENTER to confirm the command and open the File Selector.
The File selector shows one or more Blocks in the Hard Disk directory, and the directory of the destination representing the section of RAM containing the file types currently being handled (in this example Songs).

140 Quick Guide

Vocal Processor 77

4. If necessary, select a Block file and press ENTER to gain access to the files contained in the Block.
Now the display shows a list of files of the same type selected in step 2 (in this case Songs).

5. Select the Song that you want to load using the Up/Down directional arrows.
A destination in RAM will already be selected (shown enclosed by a rectangular frame). Move over to the right of the display (RAM) if you want to select a different destination.

6. With a RAM destination selected, press ENTER twice to execute the Load Song command.
Pressing ENTER the first time prompts a request to confirm the command. Press ENTER a second time to complete the procedure. After a short period, the Demo Song will be in memory.

7. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit DISK mode.

DISK leaves Disk mode directly. When you return to Disk the last page selected will be shown. ESCAPE allows you to exit from the various levels of the Disk operations: (1) exit the Block, (2) exit the file selector, (3) exit Disk mode.

7
Or

Quick Guide 141

In this page, it is possible to recall up to 16 Custom configurations. Each Custom Selects the waveform of themulti-track low frequency oscilWK6/8SE allows you to record a simple Song using the QUICK REC recording method whenrecalls a different setting of all the Vocoder parameters (Vollation. using existing Styles. In practice, the Quick Rec method can record from 1 to 8 real time tracks accomume, Pan, Mute, Mode, lfo,...). The Custom setpanied by allAssignable the backing tracks ofOff, a Style to create a multitrack values: Sinus, Triangle, Saw, Song of up to 16 tracks. You can also tings are not programmable. play along with the song during playback. . Square, Random, Sample/Hold You can use the Custom Voice Sets as a starting LFO RATE point for your configurations and, any subsequent QUICK REC RECORDING changes to the settings can be memorized to the Determines the velocity of the LFO. Performances. Assignable values: 1 200.

Record a Song (Quick rec.)

LFO WAVE

THE EDIT PAGE PARAMETERS

VOICE SET (F4)

1. Press the SONG button.

1/2

LFO DEPTH The Song Banks display shows empty Determines the depth action the LFO. songs as User locations. If not,of you can of use the Restore All Songs function (in Edit GenAssignable values: 0 7. eral) to clear all songs in memory. LFO DELAY 2. Select anDetermines empty location (User) with the cor- of the LFO. the delay before the entry responding Soft button or Function button. Entry of the LFO is gradual. Assignable values: 0 64.

3. Select QuickRec with the soft button F2.

PITCH FILTER

The RECORD ST/SONG button turns on Checks the pitch of the voices. In Free mode, all (LED on). pitch imperfections detected due to minor A new Song and in Song Performance is crechanges the pitch of the voice rest unchanged. ated based on the Performance selected at In Auto Correction mode, the imperfections are the time automatically of entering Quick Rec mode. The corrected. display appears in negative with the Assignable values: highlight Free, Auto Correction . selected track in positive. CHORD TYPE Selects from two different modes of harmonization according to the chord played. 4. If necessary, select a preferred Style to use Assignable values: Close and Smart.. as the provider of the backings for the Song. [See also Harmony Type in Edit Tracks/Splits]. If you want the Style to govern the PERFORMANCE sounds, VOCODER TRACKpress SINGLE TOUCH PLAY before selecting the Style (Arrange On/ Selects the track exploited by the Vocoder. Off and Lower Memory activate automatically if off). Assignable values: 1 32.

Vocal Processor - Voice Set

LOCK (F8)
The LOCK function locks the current Vocal settings to protect them from subsequent Performance changes. To lock the current setting, press the function button F8 to activate the Lock. The icon is shown in negative highlight and the small lock closes.

TRANSPOSE To maintain the same Performance, select the Style with SINGLE TOUCH PLAY Offone then Transposes the Vocoder track octave above turn on standard the accompaniment controls (ARpitch. RANGE Assignable ON/OFF and MEMORY) if necesvalues: Off, Octave+ . sary.

Vocal Processor - Chord mode, Volume option, Lock on

142 Quick Guide

Vocal Processor 75

5. Press either PLAY or START/STOP to start the recording and start to play.
PLAY starts the recording for the real time tracks only. START/STOP starts the recording and also engages the Style accompaniments tracks. If you selected a Style in step 4 with SINGLE TOUCH PLAY active and you also activate KEY START, you will be able to start the recording (Style and real time tracks) by playing on the keyboard. You can also start with an Intro by preselecting the INTRO, FILL or ENDING button before record start. As the recording proceeds, you can select other Styles, introduce the Fills, change Performances, activate or deactivate other real time tracks, etc..

5
Or

6. When you have finished, stop the recording either with STOP or START/STOP.
STOP stops the sequencer and the recording of both the accompaniment and keyboard tracks, taking the Song pointer (locator) to the starting position [1 1 1]. START/STOP stops the accompaniment tracks but not the sequencer, allowing you to continue recording the real time tracks without accompaniment. The Song Pointer continues to monitor the recording. To stop the recording completely, press STOP. The RECORD ST/SONG button LED will turn off.

6
Or

7. Press PLAY or START/STOP to listen to the song playback.

In playback, you can stop the song with STOP or START/STOP and start the song again from the stop point with PLAY. If you press STOP or START/STOP twice during playback, the song returns to the starting point (locator 1 1 1). In EDIT SONG, you can enter a name for the Song.

7
Or

Quick Guide 143

four voices can be selected PLAY ALONGThe WITH YOUR RECORDED SONGfrom the six avail-

VOCODER (F6)

able: VOCODER mode operates both in Style mode In Song playback mode, can play along with your recorded Song by activating one or more tracks Voice 1 :you Extreme Lower octave as well as Song mode. not used for the recording. It is also possible to disengage a recorded track from the sequencer and use Voice 2 : Close Lower octave The VOCODER mode operates by referring to it to play in real time. Naturally, you can also mute the tracks you do not wish to hear. the notes played in real time on the keyboard, or Voice 3 : Extreme Upper octave The operations can be carried out before or after start, but remember, if you start after modifying reproduced by the sequencer, andthe the Vocal ProcVoice 4 : Close Upper octave track status, the tracks will revert to their previous status unless essor you store the Performance. theof your voice responds by shifting the In pitch : doubles the input voiceplayback. example below, Main the changes are carried out during exactly to the notes played. Bass : doubles the input voice one ocThe Vocoder is always tied to one of the tracks tave down. (see Vocal Processor - Edit). You can regulate the Volume and Pan param1. Start the playback of the selected Song with You can regulate the Volume and Pan parameters of each single voice (F1/F2). eters of each single voice (F1/F2). PLAY or START/STOP. You can mute or activate the various voices with You can mute or activate the various voices with the function buttons A-F. 2. During playback, press the soft button of the the function buttons A-F. track you wish play along with as many Ex:to an active voice shows the icon Or mode, the Main and Bass voices In VOCODER times as necessary until it is shown set for are not present. a muted voice shows the icon key-play then start to play. The assigned Vocoder track is able to receive The Harmony parameter controls the general If the track contains recorded notes (shown Pitch and Modulation messages. volume of the Vocal Processor: with the seq.-play icon ):

press the relative soft button once to The Volume page operates inselect the same manner the track; as the same page in Edit Mixer; in other words, you can regulate levels with the Dial or Sliders. once again to mute the the track and; The Volume Pan controls are common to all once again to set it and to key-play. three operating modes. The graphic example how NB. The opposite number illustrates of voices produced by the to disengage a recorded track and activate it Vocal Processor is always a maximum of 4. for real time playing. Example: if voices 1, 2, 3 and 4 are active in If the track was not for the it voice, you order toused activate therecording, Main or Bass must mute one of the active will be shown either as a muted track ( voices. ) or in key-play status ( ). In this case: press the relative soft button repeatedly to toggle from muted to key-play and vice versa.

3. Press STOP or START/STOP to stop the playback.

3
Or
Vocal Processor - Vocoder mode, Volume option

144 Quick Guide

Vocal Processor 73

Save your programmed data to disk or Hard Disk

The WK6/8SE RAM is backed by a rechargeable battery to safeguard your programmed data when the instrument is turned off. For security reasons, it is best to store your data to floppy disk or Hard Disk for future use. The RAM memory should be considered as a work area which can be continually updated, not as a data storage device. Have a new or used disk ready to save data to. These can be WK6/8SE format disks (or standard MSDOS disks for the storage of MIDI files). You can also save MIDI Files to WK6/8SE format disks. How to save MIDI files is discussed in the Disk chapter of the Reference Guide. The following example shows how to save the Song that you recorded with the Quick Rec method to Disk or Hard Disk.

1. If you are saving to floppy, insert the disk into the drive and press DISK to open the first Disk mode page.
If the main Save page is not selected, use the +/ Page/Bank ( ) buttons to pass to the page required. If you want to save to Hard Disk, select the Hard Disk option with the corresponding soft button F2.

2. Specify the Save operation required (example, Save Single Song).

Use the navigational arrows ( / and / ) to navigate within the two columns of the display area and select the required command by combining one element from each column. For example, combine Single from the left column with Song from the right to specify Save Single Song. If you are using a MIDI file disk, specify Single MIDI File.

Quick Guide 145

3. Press ENTER to confirm the command and open the File Selector.

The display shows the directories of the RAM memory and the floppy disk, or Hard Disk. The Vocal Processor function allows solo vocalIn the example, thevocal instruments RAM direcists to add harmonies to their Performance. tory is shown with 2 songs (with generic Up to 4 extra melody lines can be added to any names). kind of sound source (voice, guitar, synth, etc.). Your WK6/8SE is fitted with the Audio If the disk is new (no Blocks present), the di- Vocal Processor card which provides effectone processing and rectory will be empty. If the disk is used, or more vocal Blockharmonizing files may befeatures. present. If you are working on the Hard Disk, several Block files will THE be shown. VOCAL PROCESSOR FEATURES 1. vocal to your voice accord4. If necessary,Add select the harmonies Song that you want ing to various Performance configurations to save and its destination, using the direcwhich enrich the vocal backings automatitional arrows. cally. A selected file is shown in negative highlight. 2. Implements controlling functions assignable An empty destination is shown as a broken to the Pedals and specific MIDI Controllers line. A preselected destination shown ento control the Vocalis Processor via MIDI. closed by a rectangular frame. 3. Under Edit General, the Vocal Processor implements an Equalizer (the Mic/Line editor) You can choose to select an existing Block which affects the a Microphone signal only. as the destination, or create new one by selecting an The empty one (broken line). INPUT 1 is predis4. rear-panel MIC/LINE posed to accept a Microphone signal in or5. Press ENTER. der to be processed by the Vocal Processor If you chosefunction. an empty destination in step 5 above, youll be prompted to create is a found new under EDIT The Vocal Processor function Block. The name MAIN suggested EFFECTS, editorwill N.2, VOCAL auPROC. Press tomatically. ENTER to gain access to the Vocal Processor Use the menu. keyboard to enter a name for the

3 Vocal Processor
CONNECTIONS
To work with the Vocal Processor, the minimum amount of equipment you will need is: A low impedance microphone with a standard jack connector on the output end of the cable. Other equipment youll be using which WK6/ 8SE already has is one of the switch pedals. Switch Pedal: Assign an optional pedal one of the Pedal functions to control the Vocal Processor (Vocal On/Off, Vocal Mute, Mode recall, etc.). Microphone: connect the Microphone to the MIC/ LINE 1 jack. You can regulate the microphones sensitivity (Gain) with the small knob 1. In Edit General, Mic/Line editor, you will find the Mic/Line On/Off and Vocal On/Off options and an Equalizer which affects the microphone input signal only.

block.

6. Confirm the new Block name with ENTER.

A new Block directory will show the first 8 empty locations (within the new block). Up to 16 locations are available by scrolling with the cursor arrow.

146 Quick Guide

Vocal Processor 71

7. If necessary, select a destination and press ENTER twice to execute the Save Single Song command.
Pressing ENTER the first time prompts a request to confirm the command. Press ENTER a second time to complete the procedure. After a short period, the Song will be saved to disk or Hard Disk. Remember that if you save to an existing file, it will be overwritten by the incoming one. Whenever possible, try to save to an empty location (shown as a broken line) to safeguard existing data on the storage device.

8. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit DISK mode.

8
Or

IMPORTANT - Do not save to the original disk(s) supplied with the instrument. Make sure that original disks are always protected.

Quick Guide 147

To escape and return to the note, press the soft button E (Previous event). To escape and pass to the next note press the soft button D (Next event). At this point, Next event and previous event pass from 16th to 16th instead of from note to note. 5. In this operating mode, the keyboard transforms into a source of alphanumeric data (see the paragraph entitled Alphanumeric Entry on page 1.10 of the Quick Guide). Write the required syllable using the keys of the keyboard. 6. Press soft button F (End phrase) to terminate the verse. The end of the verse is indicated by the end phrase symbol I. Do not write lines consisting of more than 20 characters. This is to avoid the incorrect syllabisation of words when you are viewing lyrics in large type. For example, the word Ballgame may syllabize to Bal-lgame, or Ballg-ame or other, instead of Ball-game. 7. You can modify a selected syllable by rewriting it entirely or partially. To replace one character with another, remain in Overwrite mode (rectangular cursor). If you are in Insert mode (cursor in the form of a vertical line), press note D#2 (INS/OVER) to pass to Overwrite mode. Move the cursor with the DIAL, then insert the new character. To insert a character without cancelling another, pass to Insert mode. Press note D#2 (INS/OVER); the cursor will take the form of a vertical line. Move the cursor with the DIAL, then insert the new character. Press D#2 to return to Overwrite mode.

THE EDIT SCORE PAGE

CHORDS (F5) Takes the cursor to the Chords line (above the staff). LYRICS (F6) Takes the cursor to the Lyrics line (below the staff). NEXT EVENT (D) Takes the cursor to the next event (note or pause). PREV. EVENT (E) Previous event. Takes the cursor to the previous event (note or pause). GO TO LOC... (G) Takes the cursor to the beginning of the specified measure. Press soft button G to open the dialog window:

Specify the measure with the DIAL. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.

>> 1/16 (F8) Each note greater than a sixteenth (demisemiquaver) is ideally subdivided into sixteenths; this button takes the cursor to the next sixteenth. For example, a quaver (8th) is divided into two 1/ 16ths, a crotchet (quarter) into four 1/16ths, etc.. The edit takes place in an active zone:

To escape and return to the normal edit of the note, press soft button E (Previous event). To escape and pass to the next note, press soft button D (Next event).

148 Quick Guide

Score/Edit Score 6 37

Reference Guide
Sounds, Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch Edit Sound SampleTranslator Performances, Edit Performance Edit Midi, Edit Mixer, Edit Effects, Edit Controllers/Pads, Edit Tracks/Split, Disk-Hard Disk-SCSI Styles, User Styles (programmable), Edit Style Songs, Preload, Midi File Player, Song Recording Edit Song Score, Edit Score Vocal Processor Edit General Utility functions (Help, Display Hold)

Edit Score
HOW TO ENTER EDIT SCORE 1. Press SONG and select a Song. 2. Press the ST.SONG button to open the main Edit Song menu. 3. Press EDIT SCORE (F6) to enter the Score page.

INSERTING CHORD SYMBOLS

Chord symbols correspond to the MIDI Text event. These are loaded and saved with MIDI files. Chord symbols can be inserted into a new Song using the procedure explained on the next page. 1. Press F5 (Chords) to take the cursor to the chord line (above the staff).

If the Song does not contain a score, press GET SCORE (F4) to create one (this procedure is explained afterwards). HOW TO EXIT EDIT SCORE Press ESCAPE once to return to the main Edit Song menu, twice to return to main Edit menu and a third time to return to the Sound View page.

2. Press the soft button G (Go to loc...) to go to a specific measure:

INSERTING NOTES
To create a Score, notes are withdrawn from a Song track. 1. Press F4 (Get Score):

Specify the measure with the DIAL then press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel. 3. Move the insertion point to the previous or next note using the soft buttons D (Next event) and E (Previous event). 4. Each note is ideally subdivided into 1/16ths. In addition to a symbol at the beginning of a note (first 1/16th), you can insert symbols in one of the 1/16ths which follow. Press F8 to open the symbol insertion zone:
Insertion of the symbol at the second 1/16th

2. Use the DIAL to select the track to transcribe. 3. Press ENTER to confirm. Wait a few seconds for the score to be generated.

Insertion of the symbol at the third 1/16th Insertion of the symbol at the fourth 1/16th

The number shown on the left of the insertion zone indicates the current 1/16th. To move the insertion point to one of the other 1/16ths, use the soft buttons H (<<1/16)

Reference Guide

Score/Edit Score 6 35

Sounds

Because the WK6/8SE has well over 1000 factory sounds as standard, these sounds have been divided into 16 families, making it easier to find the right type of sounds quickly and easily. The families are organized into 16 Instrument Groups of the SOUND GROUPS section (Piano, Chrom, Organ, etc.) and each Group is further subdivided into 16 Banks, each capable of containing up to 8 sounds (128 Sounds per family).

BANKS 4 - 16
These are the core sounds of the WK6/8SE, where you will find a wide selection of typical synthesizer sounds, authentic reproductions of traditional orchestral instruments and more. Many of these sounds are further enhanced by appropriate effects, typical of the instruments playing style, being assigned to either velocity or aftertouch. All the Sounds can be freely edited and stored as new sounds. The 16 Banks of each family provides ample room for all your programmed work.

GMX BANKS 1, 2 AND 3

GMX is a standard set of sounds which are included in every Generalmusic product. The first GMX bank, (Bank 1) of the Sound Groups section contains the industry standard General MIDI sound library. This family is designed to be used when the WK6/8SE is required to play General MIDI song disks or when the instrument is being controlled by a computer program or some other device which requires a General MIDI sound library. The second and third GMX banks, (Bank 2 & 3) contain 256 sounds taken from Generalmusics own extensive sound library. These sounds, along with the 128 sounds in Bank 1, ensure compatibility with Generalmusics own song library, and also with song disks created on other Generalmusic instruments.

DRUM KITS AND DRUM SOUNDS

The Drum Kits family, called PERCUSSIVE, includes just about every type of drum kit you could imagine - from jazz to rock, orchestra to techno and beyond. Just like the sounds, the individual drum sounds can be freely edited and stored to the empty locations of the 16 Banks of the Percussive family. They can then be stored as new sounds, either for individual use or for incorporating into the drum kits.

Sounds 21

Score & Edit Score Selecting Sounds

Score Controls

Individual Sounds are recalled If the Display (D.HOLD) function isopen on the Score In the Hold Score page, press F8 to THE SCORE TRACK using the buttons of the SOUND GROUPS section. The sounds (LED on), the SOUND GROUPS selection Control dialog window. The Score is a ghost that is added recalled are assigned totrack the selected tracktrack of the window will remain active, allowing you to to the tracks of a Song. track allows the current Performance. A selected track This is shown select another sound either from the same insertion and viewing of notes (Music), words highlighted on the display. Group, or from another Group. To do this, (Lyrics) and chord symbols (Chords). simply select a different SOUND GROUP 1. Press one of Score the SOUND GROUPS buttons to not chords. line and The displays a melody button to open the corresponding selection open a A Sound Group window track of chords selection is analyzed, the highest notes window. showingare 8 Sounds to choose from. line is generated. extracted and a melody To see your selection, press ESCAPE to close the current selection window and return to THE SCORE BUTTON the Performance display without turning D. Press SCORE to view the notes, lyrics and chord HOLD off. symbols on the display and/or on an external If D. HOLD is off (LED off), every time you monitor. select a Sound from the SOUND GROUP selection, the display will return to the Performance display.

2. Scroll through the Banks with the +/ Page/ Bank buttons [ ].

You can also select Sounds directly by entering a number on the Number keypad (with the KEYPAD LED on); this is the quickest way to go The current Bank number is shown in the top directly to the sound you need (seeENTER page 1.16 of When finished, press to confirm or ESright hand corner of the selection window. the Quick Guide forto details of this method). CAPE cancel. As you scroll through the Banks, youll see Press F8 (Score controls...) to select the viewAnother way of selecting Sounds is by recalling that most of options them will contain only one or two ing and the video standard. Performances (Real or Style Performances). PerSounds to choose from, others will be empWhen a Song containing a Score is in playback, PARTS THE DISPLAYED SCORE formances offer the OF possibility of selecting Sound ty. Empty locations are shown by a string of an indicator ( ) monitors the current position combinations which you can program as Select the parts of the Score topredisplay with the dashes (------). These locations represent the of the score. ferred. Refer to the next chapter, Performances, Soft buttons F3 F8. locations where you can store your edited for all relevant information. sounds or disk-based sounds. All - Notes, lyrics, chord symbols. Lyric 1...Lyric4 - Lyrics only across the display, 3. Select a Sound with the corresponding Soft MOVING BETWEEN FAMILIES of various dimensions. with characters button. Sometimes you might want to jump directly from Chords - Traditional chord symbols without notes. one sound family to another when looking for This option refreshes the displayavery quickly particular sound. This best done with DISPLAY which canisbe useful for guitarists and bassists. HOLD on (LED on). Pressing any SOUND GROUP button will open To view on an external monitor, the WK6/8SE theexcorresponding SOUND GROUP window, Video RGB output must be connected to the showing ternal monitor or domestic TV by means of the the same Bank as the previous selection. special cable supplied with the instrument. The Score is created in Edit Song.

22 Reference Guide

Score/Edit Score 6 33

The current family is shown at the top of the top of the display and you can select any other family by pressing the SOUND GROUP buttons accordingly.

EDITING AND CHANGING SOUNDS

Any sound on the WK6/8SE can be edited to your taste. This editing can consist of anything from the simplest adjustment of the sounds tone or volume level, to a complete reconstruction of the sound, resulting in a totally original and personal sound. Editing always begins by selecting one of the sounds currently in the instruments memory as a starting point for the sound youre going to create. When you edit a sound, you can decide, at any point, to either save the new sound youve made or to just quit editing and go back to using the instrument as before. This procedure is explained in detail under STORING SOUNDS. There are two different ways to edit a sound. The first method is EDIT PERFORMANCE SOUND which lets you modify the sound indirectly by programming the parameters that are exclusive to the tracks of the current Performance. Any sound that you assign to the edited track, therefore, will inherit the modifications applied. This is a quick and easy method, using a set of Performance parameters under EDIT SOUND/SOUND PATCH of the Edit Performance section. The second method is ADVANCED EDIT SOUND which allows you to intervene on the Sounds parameters, going deep into the sounds structure and changing its characteristics. The result is a new RAM-Sound that you can store to any empty slot of the Banks within the SOUND GROUP families. You will then be able to assign your new RAM-Sound to any track of any Performance.

THE SOUND GROUP FAMILIES

Sound Group Piano Chromatic Organ Guitar Bass Strings Ensemble Brass Reed Pipe Synth Lead Synth Pad Synth SFX Ethnic Percussive SFX ProgramChange 1 ... 8 9 ... 16 17 ... 24 25 ... 32 33 ... 40 41 ... 48 49 ... 56 57 ... 64 65 ... 72 73 ... 80 81 ... 88 89 ... 96 97 ... 104 105 ... 112 113 ... 120 121 ... 128

Sounds 23

EFF. DEVICE Selection of a DSP device. Sound Patch. This means that any Sound Recalls a dialog window where you it is possible to SEL. Corresponds to CC18. assign to the edited track of a Performance will select the events that will be displayed by the EFF. TYPE Type of effect assigned to the inherit the same modifications. If the same Event List. selected DSP. Corresponds to Sound/Sound Patch is recalled by a different track Set the events that you want to mask to OFF. CC48. The tables of the or Performance, it will not play with the same assignable effects are in the modifications. Modified Performance Sounds are Appendix. identified by the symbol . EFF. DEVICE General Effect Volume of the In Performances and Style-Performances, the VOLUME effect type assigned to the 3. Modify the parameters according to your reDSP. The Effect Sends Drumkit/Sound Patch is conserved in the accomquirements. (amount of effect applied) for paniment tracks. When you change Style or eachthe track is regulated in the 4. Press EDIT or ESCAPE to exit editor. Performance and cause a change in the accomMicroscope by means of the paniment tracks, the Drumkit/Sound Patch also 5. If you want to store the Performance containControl Change messages changes. Performances which contain a modiing the modified Sound/S.Patch CC91parameters & CC93. fied Drumkit/Sound Patch are identified by the for future use, save the modifications by pressing STORE PERF then ENTER. symbol . If you dont want to save the Performance, simply select a different one and all your modifications will be lost. INS: (X) (F3) THE GENERAL SOUND/S.PATCH EDIT PROCEDURE:

TEMPO Metronomic Tempo. If the The Status column shows the type of event. Tempo Rec option is enabled One or more parameters can be modified for each during the recording, all tempo The term Sound refers toshown all theopposite WK6/8SE event. The table lists the events variations are recorded. Sounds that and are parameters not Drumkits, nor contain a dywhich can be modified. [20 250] namic switch. Sound Patch is a generic term PERFORMANCE Change of Performance used to describe a Drumkit or a Sound contain[1 8] ing a dynamic switch. START PARAMETERS (F1) VOLUME Volume variation via MIDI Edit Performance Sound Sound Enters the edit ofand the Edit Songs start parameters. (through the Common channel) Patch are both edit or by means of the Volume Press F1 facilities again to which return permit to the the edit of the sucrapid modification ofparameters. a Sound or a Sound Patch Pedal. Does not record cessive If you enter the edit with a track containing by means of macro edit parameters. Volume changes a made with the ROM Sound Patch, you will gain access to M.VOL slider. The modifications are associated to the tracks of [0 127] the Edit Sound Patch parameters. the current SHOW... Performance, (F2) not to the Sound or

PROGRAMMABLE EVENTS AND PARAMETERS Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch

STATUS

VALUE

Inserts the specified type at the cursor po1. Select the Performance trackevent containing the sition. To position the inserted event precisely, Sound you wish to modify. modify its locator (the parameters to the left of 2. Press the SOUND button (in the EDIT/NUMthe Status). BER section) to enter the MENU.

If you enter the edit with a track containing a ROM Sound, you will gain access to the principal Edit Performance Sound parameters.

24 Reference Guide

Edit Song 631

OSCILLATORS AND LAYERS

It is useful to know something about the structure of the WK6/8SE Rom Sounds and how they are affected by the modifications you make under the Edit Sound/S. Patch editor. The WK6/8SE Sounds can comprise 1, 2 or 3 layers. The layers are sound generating units consisting of 1 or 2 oscillators. Each oscillator elaborates a Wave sample, or waveform. Consequently, each polyphonic voice can be generated by 6 simultaneous oscillators. The structure of the Sounds is represented in the diagram below. The Edit Performance Sound tasks modify all layers and all oscillators simultaneously. This allows all the parameters of a Performance Sound to be edited by means of a few, simple operations.

EDIT PERFORMANCE SOUND

In Edit Performance Sound, you can program a set of principal Performance parameters that will affect any sound you decide to assign to a track of the current Performance.

THE PERFORMANCE SOUND PARAMETERS

ATTACK: This parameter adjusts the time taken for a sound to reach its maximum volume level after a key has been pressed. Setting a very fast attack time will make a sound more percussive. Setting a slower attack time will cause the sound to fade in slowly when a key is pressed. The modifications are expressed as relative values, subtracting them from or adding them to the normal attack of the Sound. Assignable values: -63 (maximum rate) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 (minimum rate). DECAY: This parameter will only affect those sounds which feature decay. Decay is the effect of something fading away as you hold a key on the keyboard. A piano sound is a good example of a sound which has decay. As you hold down the key, the sounds fades away or decays. Eventually you will hear no sound at all. An organ sound, on the other hand, has no decay. The level of the sound remains the same as long as you hold down a key. The decay parameter is used to adjust the amount of time it takes a sound to decay, (in the case of our piano sound that would be the amount of time it took between when the sound is at maximum level and the point at which we no longer hear anything). The modifications are expressed as relative val

SOUND Layer 3 Layer 2 Layer 1 Oscillator 2 Oscillator 1

Wave

Filter

Envelope

Sound structure. The number of layers and oscillators can change from a Sound to another.

Edit Perf Sound /Sound Patch 25 Sounds

Band-pass - Allows ues, subtracting from or adding them to the INS:them (X) (F3) DELETE (F6)the entire band to pass. Modifies the phase of the Sound and is usenormal decay of the Sound. Inserts the event specified in the INS. TYPE Cancels the selected event. ful when two oscillators that read the same Assignable values: -63 ... 0 (unfunction at (maximum the currentrate) cursor position. To posiWave are used. changed) ... tion +63the (minimum rate). precisely, modify its locator inserted event Parametric boost - Enhances accordingly (the parameters to the left of the StaCATCH LOCATOR (F7) the frequencies around the cutoff frequency, rendering a RELEASE: This parameter is used to adjust the tus). Selects the event currently playing (when the sound brighter and stronger at the higher end. amount of time a sound continues to play after The events are inserted with the following deSong is in playback mode), or the event immedithe key has fault beenparameter released. values: This release time Parametric cut - Attenuates the frequencies ately after the current Song position. increases as the parameter value decreases around the cutoff frequency. Higher values (negative). Maximum release times can last for renders the sound weaker at the high end. Statusthirty seconds 1V 2V more than twenty after a 3V key hasGate Assignable values: -63 (maximum decrease of GO TO LOC... (F8) been released. Note: C4 64 64 128 the cutoff frequency) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 Takes the cursor directly to the first event of the The modifications P. Ch are expressed 1 1 as relative 1 val(maximum increase oflocator the cutoff frequency). specified (measure). The number can be ues, subtracting them from or adding them to the Contr. 1 0 ---specified with the DIAL. normal release of the Sound. RESONANCE: This parameter, the second esP.Bend 0 64 ---Assignable values: -63 (maximum rate) ... 0 (unsential element of filter control, introduces com0 rate). ---changed) ... M.Tch +63 (minimum plex harmonic overtones which are added to the P.Tch C4 0 ---final sound. Sometimes these overtones can only be produced when Specify the Filter Cut-Off is low FILTER CUTOFF: In its simplest form, this is the locator andsetting press ENTER to confirm. enough. Try setting the Resonance parameter the sounds most important tone control. Cut-Off After inserting the desired event, modify its pafairly high and then modifying the Cut-Off paramis one half of the main filter controls, (the other rameters accordingly. eter while you play. The distinctive sound of a being Resonance). Usually these two are used resonating filter is one of the key elements in in combination for powerful manipulation of a many classic synthesizer sounds. sounds tonal character. As the parameter value INS TYPE... (F4) is decreased (negative) the filter closes allowAssignable values: -63 (least intensity) ... 0 (unRecalls a dialog you can select ing less of the original soundwindow to passwhere through. changed) ... +63 (highest intensity). the type event to insert This generally has the of effect of making the manually sound with the function. warmer and Ins(x) less fizzy. Increasing the paramNote: The higher values of resonance causes the eter value (positive) opens the filter, increasing filter to enter into auto-oscillation. If used wisely, the brilliance of the sound. The action of the filter the auto-oscillation can create very suggestive synthetic sounds, but can also increase the output level varies according to the type of filter contained in excessively, causing disturbing distortion. the Sound. LFO RATE: This parameter can be used to adLow-pass - Cuts into the higher frequenjust the speed of the vibrato or modulation in a cies. As a result, if you use Sounds with a Select the event type to insert and press ENTER.sound. It is designed to be used in conjunction low harmonic content, the notes at the highwith the LFO DEPTH parameter. er end will be cut. This parameter regulates the brilliance of the Sound. Lowering the Assignable values: -63 (minimum rate) ... 0 (uncutoff frequency produces a mellow sound changed) ... +63 (maximum rate). while an increase produces a bright sound. High-pass - Cuts into the lower frequencies, LFO DEPTH: This parameter is used to set the making the sound brighter. The higher the valamount of vibrato or modulation applied to a ue, the lighter the sound. sound. If the current sound includes some type of modulation or vibrato, you can use this param

26 Reference Guide

Edit Song 629

eter to either increase, decrease or completely remove the effect. Assignable values: -63 (minimum rate) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 (maximum rate). LFO DELAY: This parameter determines the delay of the entry of the LFO. In acoustic instruments, vibrato generally enters after the attack phase, and mainly forms part of the sustain phase of the sound. Assignable values: -63 (minimum rate) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 (maximum rate)..

THE PERFORMANCE SOUND OPTIONS

COPY TO... (F6)
Copies the modifications applied to the current Performance track to a different track of the same Performance. The parameter values are copied, NOT the Sound, therefore, if a Piano sound is at the source and a Bass is at the destination, the Bass sound will inherit the parameter modifications and play with the same characteristics as those applied to the Piano sound.

Track - Select the track with the DIAL. In Style/RealTime mode, the maximum number of tracks is 16, in Song mode, 32.

RESTORE TRACK (F7)

Cancels the modifications of the selected track. 1. Press F7 to cancel. You are prompted to reconfirm the operation.

2. Press ENTER again to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.

RESTORE ALL TRACKS (F8)

Cancels the modifications applied to all the tracks of the Performance. 1. Press F8 to cancel. You are prompted to reconfirm the operation.

2. Press ENTER again to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.

Edit Perf Sound /Sound Patch 27 Sounds

EDIT SOUND PATCH Microscope

List SELECTING/MUTING THE DYNAMICEvent LAYER

track in edit

Drumkits and Sound Patches have two dynamic In Edit Performance S Patch, you can program Layers. Normally, Sound Patches exploit both The Microscope allows exclusive you to modify sina set of Performance parameters to every Layers (1 & 2) while Drumkits limit themselves to gle event recorded in the tracks. The Event List these type of sounds. Layer 1. The soft buttons A and B select and at the centre of the display shows all the events mute the Layers. In Switch sounds, this allows recorded. you to work on a Layer without hearing the sound on the other layer. Once you enter into Edit Sound Patch to select the Layers, it is not posACCESSING THE EVENT EDIT MODE sible to select the tracks of the current Perform1. Select the track whose events you wish to ance. see in the Event List. 2. Use the / buttons to scroll through the measure Value 1 events. The selected notes are played autobeat Value 2 matically. Any Drum Sound or Drum Kit that you assign to resolution Value 3 3. track Select parameter to modify using the cura the modified willthe inherit the modifications / . sor buttons event type Gate applied. (Status) 4. Use the DIAL to modify the selected paramAlthough structurally identical, Drumkits and eter. the following difference: Sound Patches have In a Drumkit, a percussive instrument is assigned to each note of the keyboard. This allows EVENTS AND PARAMETERS WHICH CAN BE a Drumkit to be controlled across a single MIDI SHOW... (F2) channel. CHANGED Recalls a dialog window where it is possible to The Status the type of event. In a Sound Patch , two column differentshows sounds are select the events that will be displayed in the One or more parameters can be modified for each separated by a dynamic threshold in order that Event List. event. playing harder recalls the sound at the higher dySet the events that you want to mask to OFF. Refer to the events table on the following page namic level. Try playing, for example, the sound for an explanation of each event. DYN ORCH (48-3); play softly first, then harder and listen to the change in timbre. These Sound are also called Switch sounds. Dynamic Layer options to select and mute the layers. Press the Sound Patches, therefore, allow you to vary the same soft button repeatedly to toggle between L and M. timbre of a Sound by varying the keystrike velocity.
Set the parameters and press ENTER.

28 Reference Guide

Edit Song 627

THE EDIT SOUND PATCH PARAMETERS

EDIT NOTE: Determines the note to edit. Assignable values: A0 ... C8 (respectively the lowest and highest note in an 88 note master keyboard). SOUND: Determines the Sound assigned to the note. It is possible to select any sound from the ROM-Sounds, RAM-Sounds or RAM -Sounds. VOLUME: Determines the volume of the note in edit. This parameter can be useful to balance Sounds which differ greatly in volume. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. PAN: Determines the position of the note in the stereo panorama. In Drumkits, it is important to pan single percussive instrument correctly. For example, the toms are normally positioned in order that a snare drifts from one stereo channel to the other. Assignable values: -32 (all left) ... 0 (balanced) ... +32 (all right). TRANSPOSE: Transposes the Sound assigned to the note. At the zero value, a percussive instrument can be distant from the sampled note, which is normally around note C4. If the note in edit is below C4, the Sound will require transposing upwards (positive), while if above will require transposing down (negative). Assignable values -64 ... +63. TUNING: Fine tune control, in steps of 1/64 of a semitone. Assignable values: -64 ... +63. FILTER: Regulates the cutoff frequency of the filter. Assignable values: -64 (maximum decrease) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 (maximum increase).

EXCLUDE: A linking number between two notes that exclude each other. Playing a note will interrupt another note with the same exclude number. For example, if a Closed Hi-Hat and an Open Hi-Hat have the same exclude number, they interrupt each other, exactly as occurs in reality. You can create as many linked percussive instrument groups as there are Exclude numbers assignable. Assignable values: Off, 1, 2, 3. EFF. 1 (REVERB): Effects send for the reverbs. The maximum value corresponds to a perfect balance between the original sound and the processed one. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. EFF 2 (DELAY/CHORUS/FLANGER/MODULATION): Effect sends for the modulation effects. The maximum value corresponds to a perfect balance between the original sound and the processed one. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. AUDIO OUT: Allows you to direct the sound assigned to the note in edit to a preferred output. Assignable values: Main, Left+Right, Out1+Out2, Out1, Out2. DYNAMIC SWITCH: Threshold level that divides Layer 1 from Layer 2. When you play with a low velocity, the Sound assigned to Layer 1 is triggered. By playing harder, the Sound assigned to Layer 2 is triggered. The value 0 causes the Sound assigned to Layer 2 while the value 127 causes the Sound assigned to Layer 1. Assignable values: 0 ... 127.

Edit Perf Sound /Sound Patch 29 Sounds

THE SOUND PATCH OPTIONS

Velocity

EXPAND... (F3)
Extends the programmed parameters of the note

in edit to a specified keyboard zone. CATCH NOTE... (F1) Modifies the key Velocity. This parameter repreSelects the note tothe place in edit by playing it onis played, 1. Select the note whose parameters require sents speed with which a note or the keyboard. its intensity. Generally, the greater the velocity copying. higher the volume. Velocity also affects the 1. Press F1the (Catch note...). 2.with Press F3 (Expand...). filter of many sounds, rendering them brighter The following message appears. increased velocity. The Expand dialog window opens:

PARAMETERS
VELOCITY MODE FROM LOCATOR... TO LOCATOR... Provides two velocity modes to choose from Determines the start and end point of the part to 2. Play thewhich note to place inway edit. affect the the Change Velocity3. funcaffected. It is possible torotate specify Measure, With thebe From parameter selected, tion operates. Beat and tick. The dialog window closes and the Edit note the DIAL, or play a note to specify the lowparameter is modified. values: within the actual limits of the est note Assignable of the required keyboard zone. Normal - The value indicated in Velocity Song. It is not possible to specify a point beyond is added to or subtracted from 4. the Pass to the parameter the To end of the Song.with the cursor COPY TO LAYER...change (F2) key Velocity values. button . Rotate the DIAL, or play a note to Copies an entire Layer to the other. Fixed - The key Velocities are all set to the specify the highest note of the required key1. Select the Layer copy with the soft but-Velocity pavalueto specified in the Change board zone. rameter. tons A and B.

2. Press F2 (Copy to Layer...). You are CHANGE VELOCITY prompted to reconfirm the operation.

Specifies the amount by which the velocity values can be changed. This depends on the option selected in Velocity Mode.

NOTE RANGE FROM... TO... mand, or ESCAPE to cancel. Assigns the upper and lower limits of the notes Confirming extends the programmed param3. Press ENTER to confirm To or ESCAPE to cancel. to be affected. modify the velocity of a single eters of the original note to the specified keypercussive instrument of the Drum track, assign board zone. the same note to the highest and lowest limit. WARNING - The copy will cancel the programmed For example, to change the snare (D2) set the data in the destination Layer. parameter to Note range from D2 to D2. Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.

5. Press ENTER to confirm the Expand com-

210 Reference Guide

Edit Song 625

COMPARE... (F4)
ON/OFF switch. When active, the original parameter values of the Drumkit/Sound Patch in edit are temporarily recalled in order to compare them with the current edited ones.

SAVE THE MODIFICATIONS AS A NEW DRUMKIT/ SOUND PATCH FILE 1. Press F8 (Store...).
The Store dialog window opens:

RESTORE (F6)
This option restores the original Sound Patch or cancels the last modifications applied after saving to the Performance.

1. Press F6 to open the following dialog window:

2. The File option is shown selected. Press ENTER to confirm.

An insertion zone appears:

2. Select the function required with the directional arrows and press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel to abort.
S.P. Performance - Restores the Drumkit/ Sound Patch in edit to its original status (cancels all editing operations applied to all notes). Current edit - Cancels the current modifications and recalls the last saved parameter settings of the Drumkit memorized in the Performance.

The insertion zone shows the ProgramChange and BankSelect MSB (CC00) to which the new Drumkit/SoundPatch will be saved.

3. Press ENTER to confirm the current location, or use the DIAL if you wish to select a different location. 4. If you want to change the name of the file, press the soft button F7 or F8.

STORE... (F8)
This option allows you to save the modifications to a Performance or creates a new Drumkit/ Sound Patch file that can be used by any Performance. To conserve the modifications, save them before selecting a Performance. Selecting a Performance before saving cancels all modifications applied.

5. Insert a name using the method described in the Alphanumeric Entry paragraph on page 1.4 of the Quick Guide. Press ENTER to confirm the name and return to the Store window.

Edit Perf Sound /Sound Patch 211 Sounds

6. Press ENTER to save the new file to the seInsert measures lected location.

SAVE THE MODIFICATIONS TO A PERFORMANCE 1. Press F8 (Store...). The Store dialog

The newInserts Drumkit/SoundPatch is now availawindow appears: a specified number of measures. The part ble as a of RAM-Sound. the Song after the insertion point shifts forward As any new RAM-Sound, the the same number of new barsDrumkit/ as those inserted. SoundPatch willthat remain memory after powGiven the in Time Signature of the inserted er down. To conserve it and safeguard it measures can differ to the Time Signature of the against Song, future the cancellation, save it to disk Insert Measures parameter permits the using thecreation Save Single Sound, Save All Sound 2. Select the Performance option with the curof a Song with multiple Time Signatures. or Save All procedures. sor button and press ENTER to confirm.

PARAMETERS

The Drumkit store dialog window opens:

MEASURES TO INSERT Specifies the number of measures to insert. Assignable values: 1...999.

TIME SIGNATURE 3. Select the Performance or Style-Performance Determines the Time Signature of the measures to insert. option with 1 the / 2 cursor 3arrows. 4

4. Rotate the DIAL to select the Performance INSERT FROM LOCATOR or Style Performance Group to store to. Specifies the measure at which the new measures will be inserted. 5. Move down to the Performance option with 1 2 3 4 5 Assignable values: from the first measure of the the cursor button and select (1) (2) (a) the Perform(b) (3) Song, to the first measure after the end measure ance to save to with the DIAL. of the Song (coda insertion).
forward.

(4)

6. Press ENTER to confirm or to cancel. measure 3. Measure 3 ESCAPE and all successive measures are moved

Insert measures example. Two measures are inserted at

212 Reference Guide

Edit Song 623

Advanced Edit Sound

If youre serious about creating and editing sounds then it wont be too long before you yearn for a little more flexibility than is offered by the Performance Edit Sound/Sound Patch parameters. In the advanced editing controls you will find the real key to the sound synthesizing power of the WK6/8SE. The results of your Sound editing tasks is a RAM-Sound that you can store to the WK6/8SE sound library, assign to any track of any Performance and save to Disk.

PROCEDURE
1. From the main Style/Performance display, select the track containing the Sound you wish to edit. If necessary, press the SOLO button to isolate the Sound from the rest. 2. Press the SYNTH button in the EDIT NUMBER section You are prompted to confirm the request to enter EDIT SOUND.

ENTERING EDIT SOUND

When you enter EDIT SOUND, it is best to prepare yourself by checking that the current sound, that is, the one shown selected in the Performance display, is the one you want to edit. For example, if you want to tweak some of the parameters of a Piano sound to create a variation, its best to start with a sound similar the one you want to modify. If, instead, you want to create a completely new and original Sound, you can start with practically any one you wish, because in the editing menus, youll find all the tools you need. You can choose to enter EDIT SOUND either with a solod Sound (SOLO button LED on), or with two or more tracks of the current Performance active. This second option allows you to listen to the Sound currently in edit together with other active tracks of the Performance to give you an idea of what your edited Sound is like when combined with other Sounds. Once you enter EDIT SOUND, you cannot activate or deactivate the SOLO button; you must set the SOLO button according to your requirements before entering Edit Sound.

3. Press ENTER to enter EDIT SOUND. Press ESCAPE to cancel the request. With ENTER, you gain access to the Edit Sound menu consisting of several Editors. The configuration of the Editors depends on the starting Sound.

Edit Sound - main menu

Edit Sound 213

TEMPORARY ESCAPE FROM EDIT SOUND

Thanks to multitasking, you can temporarily esThe configuration of the Editors changes accordcape Edit Sound by pressing the SYNTH button ing to the Algorithm selected, but the basic funcauto-corrector of timing trior ESCAPE.An The Sound remains in edit errors. and the Includes tions remain the same. plet and swing quantize values. selected track of the current Performance plays the Sound in its modified status. Waveform Selects the Wave sample (the funTo return to the sound in edit press SYNTH damental waveform). SOFT BUTTONS F1 AND F2 again. If you attempt to select a Song, Style, PerformVolume Volume of the Sound. Some situaThese select the Note On Quantize and Note ance or Sound while the sound is still in edit, the tions also include a Balance editor. Off Quantize parameters. display will show the following message: Note On Quantize - Quantization of the Note On event. Note Off Quantize - Quantization of the Note Off event. After a Note On quantization, Filtera Note Off quantization affects the duration of the notes, adapting them to the quantization Press either ENTER or ESCAPE to close the wingrid. dow, press SYNTH to return to the Edit, then press EXIT or SAVE to escape permanently.
Amplitude envelope Varies the sounds volume over time. Can be defined by Key On and Key Off Envelopes, a Tracking curve and some situations include an Env. Balance editor. Modifies the Sounds timbre, attenuating or enhancing certain frequencies, such as in an equalizer. Can be defined by Key On and Key Off Filter Envelopes, Filter CutOff tracking and Filter Envelope tracking curves.

Quantize

THE EDIT SOUND MAIN MENU

PERMANENT ESCAPE WITHOUT SAVING

To escape EDIT SOUND permanently, use the EXIT option, (F6), in the main Edit Sound menu. An Are you sure dialog appears requesting confirmation of the Exit command. Further confirmation of the Exit command with Enter escapes EDIT SOUND permanently and cancels all modifications made to the Sound prior to escaping the Edit. To escape permanently without losing the modifications, use the SAVE option (F8) explained under the section entitled Storing Sounds towards the end of this chapter.

Pitch envelope Variation of the Sounds Pitch over time. Can be defined by Key On and Key Off Pitch envelopes and a Tracking curve. LFO Low Frequency Oscillator to provide Modulation. Generates cyclic variations in the amplitude or in the cutoff frequency of the filters. Position of the Sound within the Stereophonic panorama. It is possible to program the Key On and Key Off Pan envelope and the Tracking curve.

Pan

214 Reference Guide

Edit Song 621

THE MAIN MENU OPTIONS

The main Menu offers several options which can be selected with the corresponding Soft buttons (F1F8). See also page 2.38 for further explanations.
Sample Translator Activates the program which is able to read samples from previous Generalmusic Series instruments (S, WX, SX) and disk-based samples of various formats. Also permits the reception and transmission of samples via Midi and the creation of new Waveforms. Sample Translator is discussed separately on page 2.44. Allows you to choose one of the 5 Algorithms available. Allows you to Create, Import or Delete layers as required. Sets the velocity and key ranges for each layer allowing you to create splits and velocity switching between layers. Escapes definitely from the Edit of the Sound. Allows you to save your modified Sound to the WK6/8SE Sound Library (RAM) and escapes from Edit Sound definitely. Available in all Edit pages, Compare temporarily assigns the original parameter status of the current edit page to the Sound in edit to compare the Sound before and after the modifications. Pressing Compare activates two new commands: Copy (F7) Copies the recalled parameter status to the Sound in edit, cancelling all the modifications made in the current edit page and escapes from Compare mode. Compare exit (F8) Escapes from Compare and retains the modifications made to the sound in the current edit page.

LAYERS
The first thing you need to know, when you enter the EDIT SOUND menu to edit a sound, is that all WK6/8SE sounds are created using either 1, 2 or 3 LAYERS. After entering EDIT SOUND, look at the extreme left column of the Edit Sound menu showing three Soft options.

Algorithm Layer Utility Layer Range

Exit Save

Compare

These are the layer select options (L1, L2, L3) which can be selected in any Edit Sound situation. Either 1, 2 or all 3 of these options will be selected. This tells you how many layers the current sound is made from. Layer can be activated (L) and muted (M) by toggling between the L and M status with the corresponding Soft button (A1, B2, C3). Muting a layer can be useful when you want to hear only the layer which youre currently editing without listening to the others. If an option shows the letters XX, this simply means that the Sound in edit does not comprise that particular layer. So what actually is a layer ? In simple terms, a layer is a sound. In fact, many of the WK6/8SE sounds are created using only one layer. When more complex sounds are needed, up to three layers can be combined together to form a single sound. Since the process required to edit one layer is exactly the same as for another, the explanations in this section concentrate only on editing a single layer. Creating multi-layer sounds is a relatively simple process once you know how to edit a single layer.

Edit Sound 215

THE ALGORITHMS

Layers can also be of different types - single waveform or dual waveform. Each layer is elaboCopies events from a single track or from all rated by an associated Algorithm of synthesis. A Volume, Amplitude envelope, Filter and Pitch envelope for tracks. one waveform only. An Algorithm is the signal path of a sample to the audio outputs, through a series of processDUAL 1 ing functionsSOFT that you select F3 during the course of BUTTONS ... F8 the editing tasks. The processing functions which Use the buttons F1...F8 to are select the track you assign during theSoft various editing stages from which events will be copied. Depending on the synthesis tools (oscillators, filters, amplitude the type of track selected, the following paramenvelopes, etc.). eters may or may not appear. While you cannot change the path of an Algorithm, you can choose from a selection of 5 difSeparate Track - Single track. track Volume, Amp Envelope, Filter and Pitch Envelope for ferent Algorithms, each(F3) representing a fixed Select sig- theeach waveform. with the Soft buttons A...H. nal path, and assign a wide variety of processing functions to theMaster individual stages of the algoDUAL 2 track (F4) - The Master Track records rithms path. events pertaining to the general controls of the Song (Tempo, Timeillustrate Signature, selected The following graphical representations Performance, selected effects). the signal path of the Algorithms. Chords track (F5) - Track for the chord symbols inserted in the score. Music track (F6) - Track for the notes of the As above but the two filters are in series and common to both score (standard notation). waveforms. Lyrics track (F7) - Track for the lyrics of the DUAL 3 score. All tracks (F8) .

Copy

SINGLE

Volume and Amp. Envelopes are common while Filters are separater for each waveform.

DUAL 4

Everything is common to both waveforms.

216 Reference Guide

Edit Song 619

Waveform
Valid for all Algorithms. Single activates a single Waveform editor while all Dual Algorithms activate Waveform 1 and Waveform 2. The Waveform editor gains access to the fundamental control parameters of the Waveform which is the basic waveform of the sound. WAVE VECTOR: Allows you to choose a wave vector: Forward: reads the wave from the start point to the end; Reverse: reads the wave from end to start point; Alternate 1: reads the wave from start point to the end, loops back to the beginning and repeats continually; Alternate 2: a variation of Alternate 1. TUNING MODE: Assigns the Waveform to a specific note of the keyboard. Assignable values: Normal, A0C8. Normal transposes the wave according to the note played. Assigning a note (A0C8) fixes the Wave to the same note across the entire keyboard. TRANSPOSE: Transposes the Waveform in semitones. Assignable values: 64 ... +64. 0 corresponds to standard pitch. FINE PITCH: Fine tunes the Waves pitch in steps of 1/64th of a semitone. Assignable values: 64 ... +64. 0 corresponds to standard pitch. PITCH TOUCH SENSITIVITY: Links Pitch to Aftertouch variations. The Pitch of the Sound can be varied by applying pressure on the notes of the keyboard after key on. Assignable values: 7 (lowest sensitivity = 2 semitones) ... +7 (highest sensitivity = +2 semitones). Positive values increase the Pitch while negative ones have the inverse effect. WAVESTART: Represents the actual (default) starting point of the wave sample in the instruments memory. Use this parameter to determine the point at which the sample will start its playback.

THE WAVEFORM PARAMETERS

WAVEFORM: Here you can select the basic waveform of the Sound, choosing from the Rom Waveform library, from the Waveforms loaded to memory with a disk-based Ram -Sounds, or one created with the Sample Translator (see page 2.44). Select the waveforms sequentially with the DIAL, referring to the ROM Wave table in the Appendix at first if necessary. You can also use the Search facilities to look for a specific waveform.

Edit Sound - Waveform

Edit Sound 217

Depending on NOTE the RANGE waveform, FROM...values TO... above the SCALE MODE: Selects a scale (temperament). default starting point may cause the sample to values: 0, 1, 2. The highest and lowest limits of the note Assignable range start at a later point, removing some or all of its to cancel. To cancel a single percussive instruValue 0 corresponds to Equal temperament; attack. ment from the Drum track, assign the sameValue value 1 corresponds to 1/4 tone difference beValues below value cause the to the the default from and tomay parameters. For example, tween each note; sample to start before its normal point, addto cancel the snare start (D2), set the parameter as Value 2 corresponds to a 1/16 tone difference ing part or all of the samples stored at lower Note range from D2 to D2. between each note. memory addresses. Assignable values: C-1 ... G9. WV. START FROM DYN LOCATOR... MODE: Selects the mode in TO LOCATOR... which the Wavestart parameter is linked to key Determines the start and end point of the part to velocity. cancel. In some cases it is possible to specify Disable: not the linked to key velocity. measure, beat and resolution (tick), in othSwitch: either the entire or the part of the ers, only theWave, measure. Wave following the programmed Wave Start is Assignable values: within the limits of the Song. read above or below a certain key velocity setIt is not possible to specify a point before the start ting. or after the end of the Song. Floating: fluctuates the Wave Start according to the key velocity. WV. START DYN SNS: With the Switch mode setting, the value (0127) represents the dynamic switch. Above the dynamic switch setting, the entire Wave is read while below, only the part of the Wave that follows immediately after the programmed Wave Start is considered. Switch assignable values: 0127 If the mode is Floating, the value determines the distance from the point at which the Wave is read at the programmed Wave Start, or towards the end of the Wave. (The Wave is always read from the Wave start setting, not before). With positive values, the higher the key velocity, the nearer the Wave is read at the Wave start setting. Floating assignable values: 7+7.

218 Reference Guide

Edit Song 617

Volume e Balance
VOLUME
Valid for all Algorithms. Dual 1 and Dual 2 activate Volume 1 and Volume 2, Dual 3 and Dual 4 share a single Volume editor with a Balance control. The Volume editor controls the volume of a single waveform, or the volume of two waveforms with a Balance control (Dual 3 & 4). This function corresponds to the maximum volume level available of the Sound in any situation. DYNAMIC SENSITIVITY: Links the Volume response to velocity variations. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. Positive values increase the Volume with increased key velocity, while negative values create the inverse effect. 0 = no response. VOLUME TOUCH SENSITIVITY: Links Volume response to Aftertouch. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. Positive values increase the Volume with increased aftertouch pressure, while negative values create the inverse effect with increased aftertouch. 0 = no response.

THE VOLUME PARAMETERS

VOLUME: Sets the Volume of waveform 1 or 2. If the Algorithm comprises the Balance editor, this controls the general volume of the layer. Assignable values: 0 127.

Edit Sound - Volume

Edit Sound - Balance

Edit Sound 219

SONG NAME (F8) VOLUME TRACKING (F2)

POINT, KEY, LEVEL EDIT PROCEDURE

Modifies the Tracking name of the Song. Valid for all Algorithms. allows you to The Tracking can be defined using Edit the 3 Song. 1.curve Press ST./SONG to enter determine how the volume varies across the keydisplay parameters, Point, Key and Level. The main menu appears. board. Here you can enhance the presence of a 2. Select the editor that you wish to edit using sound more or less across the keyboard in order Point: Corresponds to one of the extreme ends the DIAL or the cursor buttons. to simulate to a greater degree that which occurs of a segment. Point 1 represents the lowest note is also possible to enter editor by specin reality. For example, an acoustic piano can of the keyboard.It The highest note of thean keyifying by thethe relative number on the numeric keyreach a higher sound level in the bass region, board is represented last Point (dependpad. while the higher notes are less intensive. ing on the number of segments inserted). 3. Press ENTER to enter the editor. The characters are inserted using the method described in the paragraph entitled, Alphanumeric Key: Defines note at thedesired selected Point.with Thethe soft but4.the Select the option Entry on page 1.4 of the Quick Guide. You can points (A#0, extreme C8) cannot be modified. tons. move the cursor with the Soft buttons or the DIAL 5. Select the parameters with the cursor butand insert the characters with the keys of the key-: The value of this parameter is a relative Level tons and modify their value with the DIAL or board. value which represents the change in volume with the numeric keypad (with the KEYPAD LED setting of the Volume funcName - Name of the Song which appears respect in the to the actual on). tion. Assignable values: 0 127 WK6/8SE file selector. This name does not ap6. Confirm the operation with ENTER. pear when the disk is read by a computer. A Maxilevel of 0 corresponds to the maximum setting 7. Pass to another editor with the +/ Page SEGMENT (F6) mum character length: 10. of the Volume function and all other values are ). buttons ( Using the SEGMENT you can divide the negative. Title - Fulloption, name of the Song. Otherwise, return to the main menu with ESTracking curve into several different segments, A value of 127 corresponds to 0 volume at the Author - Name of the composer. CAPE and select another editor. in order to obtain a more refined Tracking across note defined by the selected Point. Pub - Song Publisher. the keyboard. A straight line running from point 1 to point 2 corresponds to the lowest possible resolution. An illustrated example of how to program a Tracking curve is on page 2. 22.

1 Segm: The Tracking curve is essential, representing a constant Volume offset across the keyboard. The parameter Key cannot be modified.. 3 Segm: The Tracking curve consists of 3 segments which allow the construction of a situation offering different variations across the keyboard. 6 Segm: The Tracking curve is divided into many parts (maximum resolution); allowing a more complex programming of the Volume offsets across the keyboard.

220 Reference Guide

Edit Song 615

BALANCE
Valid for Dual 3 and Dual 4 Algorithms onlY.

BALANCE TRACKING (F2)

Balance Tracking allows you to program a Balance offset, or the variation of the Balance (programmed in the Balance page) across the keyboard.

THE BALANCE PARAMETERS

BALANCE: Balances the Volume of the two oscillators of the current layer. Assignable values: 127 ... +127. Positive values render the first Waveform louder, negative values enhance the second Waveform. BALANCE DYN. SENSITIVITY: Links the Balance response to key velocity variations. Value range: 7 ... +7. Positive values enhance the presence of the first Waveform with increased key velocity while negative values enhance the presence of the second Waveform with increased key velocity. 0 = no response. BALANCE TOUCH SENSITIVITY: Links the Balance response to aftertouch variations. Value range: 7 ... +7. Positive values enhance the presence of the first Waveform with increased Aftertouch pressure while negative values enhance the presence of the second Waveform with increased Aftertouch pressure. 0 = no response. The option and parameters used to shape the Balance tracking curve, (Segment, Point, Key and Level), are identical to those explained for the Volume Tracking on page 2.20. An illustrated example of how to program a Tracking curve is on page 2. 22.

Edit Sound 221

recording by using the DIAL. The events are PROGRAMMING A TRACKING ENVELOPE

If the RAM already contains a large amount of captured in the Master Track, provided that the data, a dialog window may appear showing the 1. Press F6 appropriate to open the option SEGMENT selection win- rec, 3. diaSelect the KEY parameter with thewhich downindicates ( ) is active (Controls message Memory full!, that the dow, select 3 or 6 segments with the down cursor arrow and rotate the DIAL to set the log window F3). recording cannot proceed further. The recording ( ) cursor arrow and pressalways ENTER contains to con- the initial requiredis value. instantly interrupted. The Master Track firm. Tempo of the Song. The value can be modified You can increase the amount of space in RAM but not cancelled. by deactivating the Undo function. QUANTIZE An auto-corrector of timing errors during the recording phase. The selection values are normal, triplets or swing.
Value Quantization

1/4 Edit Sound - Volume 1/8 Tracking: add 3 segments 1/12 triplet 2. Rotate the DIAL to select the Point that you 1/16 wish to modify. 1/24 1/32 1/48 1/64 1/96 free 1/8 B...F* 1/16 B...F* triplet (1/64) (1/64 triplet) no quantization . . (swing) (swing) triplet

freeTracking: modify no Edit Sound - Volume thequantization Point parameter

RESTORING THE SONGS MEMORY If you have loaded disk-based Songs or recorded Songs and used up all the memory dedicated to the storage of Songs, a quick and easy way of clearing Song memory and making room for other Songs is to use the Restore Songs operation. Naturally, must to save the Songs Edit Sound - Volume Tracking:you modify the remember Key parameter that you dont want to lose to disk before pro4. Select the LEVEL with parameter withprocedure. the down ceeding the restore ( ) cursor arrow and rotate the DIAL to set 1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain the requiredaccess value. EDIT GENERAL. 2. Press RESTORE SONGS, (F6) to cancel all the Songs (and relative Song-Performances) in RAM. You are prompted with a request to reconfirm your choice. 3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel. With ENTER, the Songs are cancelled from memory. Edit Sound - Volume Tracking: modify the the Levelsong parameter With ESCAPE, data are retained. EDITING YOUR SONGS The Edit Song functions allow you to modify the recorded song, by copying or moving entire parts of a song, by correcting timing errors, by inserting events in event edit environments (Microscope and Master Track).

* B F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel. MEMORY PROGRESS BAR A bar graph which monitors the amount of memory being used up by the song as it is being recorded. In Play mode, the parameter changes to SONG MEMORY, expressed as a numerical value and is independent of the total amount of memory remaining in RAM. Each Song is limited to 400 kb.

222 Reference Guide

Recording a Song 613

Amplitude Envelope & Balance Envelope

Valid for all Algorithms. Dual 1 and Dual 2 activate the Amp. Envel. 1 and Amp. Envel. 2 editors; Dual 3 and Dual 4 share an Amp. Envelope with a Balance control. The Amplitude Envelope represents the volume displacement of the Sound over time. This editor allows you to program the Key On Envelope, the Key Off Envelope and the Envelope Tracking. In practice, the Key On and Key Off Envelopes correspond to the traditional ADSR parameters (Attack, Decay, Sustain, Release). When this parameter is not set to Off, the last segment of the Key On Envelope sets to 0 automatically and cannot be modified; this is to prevent the sound from playing continually after release due to the deactivated Key Off Envelope. Assignable values: Off, A0 C8. SEGMENT 1 RATE DYNAMIC SENS.: Segment 1 corresponds to the Attack phase. This parameter ties the Attack rate of the Sound to key velocity. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. Positive values increase the Attack rate with increased key velocity while negative values produce the inverse effect with increased key velocity. 0 = no response. KEY OFF RATE DYNAMIC SENS.: Links the response of the Key Off Envelope rate to the release velocity. The Key Off Envelope corresponds to the Release phase. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. Positive values increase the completion speed of the Key Off Envelope with increased key release velocity, while negative values slow down the completion speed with increased key release velocity. 0 = no response.

THE AMPLITUDE ENVELOPE PARAMETERS

ENVELOPE FINISH: Determines the note from which the Key Off envelope cannot interrupt the Amp. envelope on its natural course to completion, indispensable to simulate, for example, the acoustic piano where no dampers are applied from the note A6 onwards; the sound continues indefinitely after release.

SUSTAIN (F5)
This parameter fixes a sustain level independent of the release envelope. Activation of this parameter depends on the status of the Sustain function. Press soft button F5 to activate Sustain (shown in negative highlight). Press again to deactivate Sustain. Assignable values: 0 127.

Edit Sound - Amplitude Envelope (single)

Edit Sound 223

you have finished, stop the recording Add with Segm: TIME/TEMPO Inserts a new PAGE segment immediately AMPLITUDE 10. KEYWhen ON AND KEY OFF ENVELOPES

STOP. after the currently selected segment. A maximum The Key On Envelope is a 10 segment curve MODE... (F1) of up to 10 segments is permitted. (maximum) that Note: represents the variation of thethe Song back Pressing STOP twice rewinds Opens the Record Mode dialog window where sounds volume to for the entire duration that the the beginning. Del Segm : Cancels the current segment. you can select various recording options. notes are held pressed. 11. To add additional events to the same track(s), Replace - The new notes substitute old notes The Amplitude Key Off Envelope is a 10 segment IMPORTANT: press STOP again to take the song pointer to the already present in the tracks being recorded. curve (maximum) that represents the variation of The Key On Envelope must have at least one starting point and repeat points 8 - 10. Overdubb - New notes are cannot merged with those the sound after the notes have been released. segment, (the Attack phase), which already present in the tracks being recorded. This envelope phase called Release. Note: is To often add notes to existing ones in a track, select be cancelled. the Overdubb option. To substitute existing notes in Examples of a Key On and a Key Off Amplitude Punch In/Out - A means of inserting a correction a recorded track with new ones, select the Replace Envelope are shown below. without a segment recording. Punch recording Loop Segm: Loopsrepeating the current (enveoption. is activated by pressing an appropriately prolope repetition), provided that the Envelope FinZOOM (F7) 12. If you are satisfied with the recording, confirm grammed pedal (in Edit Controll./Pads). ish parameter in the Envelope control page is set trackyou or tracks by pressing the correspondUsing the ZOOMthe option, can enlarge the field Activate the recording with PLAY. When to OFF. When it reaches the terminal point, it the song ing Soft buttons. of vision of the envelope up to 4 times at a sereaches a position justcycle before the point at which loops back to the beginning. The repeats lected Point. thekey correction must inserted, press the pedal. until release. The be initial Loop point The recording will be confirmed and the continually tracks At this point, the recording proceeds in replace Pressing the soft button repeatedly selects the is represented by an arrow [ ] set to seq-play. mode. When the correction is complete, release Zoom options in cyclic order (1, 2, 3, 4, 0). Zoom To eliminate the loop, select the segment and 13.to Repeat the recording procedures for other tracks. the pedal to stop the replace recording. 0 corresponds actual size. select Del Segm.. 14. Press RECORD to escape Record mode. SEGMENT (F6) OPTION... (F2) SEGMENT, The LED of the RECORD button will turn off TIME, LEVEL The SEGMENT option, common to both Key On Metronome options. The Envelope Key On and Key Off Envelopes and the display returns toyou normal. and Key Off Balance Envelopes, allows to Countdown lead into the recording during can be defined using the -3A display parameters, divide the Envelope seg15. Press into PLAYseveral to listendifferent to the playback. which time no events can be captured Segment, Time and Level. ments to create some interesting Key On and Key Settings: On, Off. Off effects. A Loop feature is also available. Segment: Allows you to select segments with Metronome vol. -the Volume setting of the metroLets examine the Time/Tempo parameters. the Dial. The onetick. selected corresponds to the nome flashing terminal point. Settings Off, 10...127. Time: Determines the duration of the Segment. CONTROLS REC... (F3) Recording options for Tempo, Master Volume, effects changes. These events are captured in the Master Track. Tempo - To record the Tempo variations. Settings: On, Off. P.Volume. - To record the general Volume of the instrument using the Damper pedal programmed to operate as a continuous control (Volume). These events are recorded as CC07 (see Appendix). Settings: On, Off.
Edit Sound - Amp. Key Off Envelope

Edit Sound - Ampl. Envelope mostrando segmento 4 impostato con un Loop. In pratica, il Volume inizia a 0, ascende alla prima vetta di segmento 1 (fase di attacco), scende al segmento 2, ascende alla vetta di segmento 3, scende di nuovo a segmento 4 poi ritorna alla vetta di segmento 3 e ripete di continuo fino al rilascio di tasto.

224 Reference Guide

Recording a Song 611

The maximum segment time is approximately 21 seconds. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. Level: Sets the Sound level of the segment at its terminal point. The maximum level corresponds to the volume programmed in the Volume editor. Assignable values: 0 ... 127.

IMPORTANT The initial level of the first Key On segment at the starting point is always zero (it cannot be modified). The level at the terminal point of the Key Off Envelope is always zero (it cannot be modified). An illustrated example of how to program Key On & Key Off Envelopes is shown below.

PROGRAMMING KEY ON AND KEY OFF ENVELOPES

1. To insert a segment, press F6 to open the SEGMENT selection window and press ENTER to confirm the Add Segm option (shown selected). 3. Select the TIME parameter with the down ( ) cursor arrow and rotate the DIAL to set the required value.

Edit Sound - Key On Envelope: modify the Time parameter Edit Sound - Key On Envelope: add 1 segment

2. Rotate the DIAL to select the envelope segment that you wish to modify. If necessary, use the ZOOM option to zoom in on the selected segment.

4. Select the LEVEL parameter with the down ( ) cursor arrow and rotate the DIAL to set the required value.

Edit Sound - Key On Envelope: modify the Level parameter Edit Sound - Key On Envelope: select a segment

Edit Sound 225

AMPLITUDE ENVELOPE TRACKING

The tracking curve represents the change in the Valid for Dual 3 and Dual 4 Algorithms only. completion velocity of the Amplitude Envelope The Balance Envelope corresponds to a mixer WK6/8SE 3. Selectwhich a Style andaset the Amaccompaniment D. offers two principal Song recording across the keyboar for the two oscillators share single methods: Quick Rec and Record. controls (MIXER LOCK, TEMPO LOCK, plitude Envelope. ARRANGE ON/OFF, MEMORY, LOWER MEMORY, ARRANGE MODE options). QUICK REC RECORDING 4. Program the Performance as required and The Quick Rec method exploits existing Styles save the changes with STORE PERFORMin order to record your keyboard tracks with auANCE. tomatic accompaniments. This method is a quick and easy way of recording which does not involve 5. If necessary, activate KEY START, INTRO, the more advanced options common to the more FILL or ENDING. traditional Song Record method explained after6. Press START/STOP to start the recording. The tools used to shape the Amplitude Envelope wards. The Quick Rec method is an excellent The PLAY button activates automatically. tracking curve, (Segment, Point, Key, Level), are way of recording backing tracks for vocalists. BALANCE ENVELOPE CONTROL PARAMETERS identical to the Volume Tracking tools. 7. Play the keyboard sounds with the automatBALANCE ENVELOPE: Activates (On) or deacNote, however, that the Level option determines ic accompaniment, using the Fills and Intro RECORD METHOD tivates (Off) the at Balance the Key On or Key Off envelope completion vewill. envelope. Assignable values: The more you On, Off. locity offset across thetraditional keyboard.Record method allows 8. Conclude your song (use the Ending). to record one track at a time velocity, and does not exploit Positive values increase the completion 9. Press STOP. The LED on the RECORD butexisting structures. BALANCE ENV. AM. SENSITIVITY: Depth of the negative values slow it down. 0 corresponds to ton goes off. the standard segments For duration example,of tothe record a Drumprotrack, youaction must of the Amplitude envelope on Balance. this point is possible modify the song The envelope is At activated byitthe Balance to Envegrammed in build the previous pages. Assignablenote val- for note the drum accompaniment usrecording in Edit Song, or to record other lope parameter above. ues: -63 0+63. ing the individual percussive instruments of a tracks using the normal Record Drumkit assigned to one of the tracks. Positive values increase the depth of the action method described on the next page. The Key On and Key Off Envelope completion of the envelope on Balance while negative valvelocity can be faster or slower across the note ues have the inverse effect. Assignable values: range of acoustic instruments. For example, the THE QUICK REC METHOD 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect. bass notes of a piano or an acoustic guitar sound (N.B. See also page 1.42 of the Quick Guide). for a longer period than the high notes. BALANCE ENV. DYN. SENSITIVITY: Links the 1. Press SONG to open the Songs dialog window and select a free location (User). An illustrated example of how to program a Track2. page Select ing curve is on 2. the 22. QuickRec option from the New Song dialog window by pressing the soft button F2. The RECORD LED lights up and the Quick Record page activates showing a negative highlight page. A new Song and Song Performance is created based on the starting Performance (if modifications were previously applied, entering record mode saves the modifications to the new Song-Performance).
tracks Edit Sound - Balance QuickRecord Envelope (Dual page 3)

Recording Songs

BALANCE ENVELOPE

menu

226 Reference Guide

Recording a Song 69

Balance envelope response to key velocity variations. Positive values increase the response of the Balance envelope with increased key velocity while negative values have the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect. KEY OFF BALANCE ENV. RATE DYN. SENS.: Links the response of the key off Balance envelope completion velocity to key velocity variations. Positive values increase the completion velocity of the Key Off Balance envelope with increased key velocity while negative values have the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect.

BALANCE ENVELOPE KEY ON & KEY OFF

The Balance Key On and Key Off Envelopes are 10 segment curves (maximum), allowing you to enhance the presence of one Waveform with respect to the other in the key on and key release situations. The Key On Envelope represents the variation of the Balance for the entire duration that the notes are held pressed.

The Key Off Envelope represents the variation of the Balance after the notes have been released.

The options and parameters used to shape the Balance Envelope (Zoom, Segment, Time and Level), are identical to those used for the Amplitude Key On/Key Off Envelope explained on page 2..24. An illustrated example of how to program a Key On & Key Off Envelopes appears on the page 2.25.

Edit Sound 227

of file being loaded is a Song, the caption SONG BALANCE ENVELOPE TRACKING will appear in capital letters while the second capThe Balance Tracking allows you to vary the Baltion smf will appear in small letters. ance setting across the keyboard. SELECT ALL (F7) Selects all the files shown in the left part of the display and inserts them directly into the list. The list can contain a maximum of 16 files. If the SMF option is selected, Select All inserts all MIDI files present in the current directory. The list will show the Song names without the .MID extension. The option and parameters used to shape the Balance Envelope Tracking curve, (Segment, PLAY (F8) Point, Key and Level), are identical to those used Starts the playback of the Songs contained in the for the Volume Tracking curve explained on page list. 2. 20.
Note: if the Disk or Hard Disk contains more than one Block, Preload will recognise only the first block An illustrated example of how to program a Trackwhile 2. others ing curve is on page 22. will be ignored. Warning:: song playback using Preload will cancel all songs contained in memory, except the one currently playing.

Midi File Player

WK6/8SE features a MIDI File player which allows you to play MIDI Files directly from a source (Floppy disk or Hard disk) without loading the files to memory. Press the SONG button to access the SONG BANKS page.

Press one of the +/ Page/Bank buttons (S.M.F. PLAYER) to open the MIDI FILE PLAYER.

If a Floppy disk containing MIDI Files is inserted in the drive, the machine starts to scan the disk and the display shows the root directory, where MIDI files are saved. If selected, press ENTER to gain access to the MIDI files.

Select a MIDI File to listen to and press PLAY. While the Midi file is playing, you can play along with the playback.

228 Reference Guide

Song 67

Filter
Valid for all Algorithms. The Dual 1 and Dual 3 algorithms have two Filters connected in parallel [Filter os. 1, Filter os. 2]. The Dual 2 and Dual 4 algorithms have two Filters connected in series [Filter 1, Filter 2]. Filters enhance or attenuate certain frequencies of the Waveforms. The sound changes according to the type of filter selected. The WK6/8SE filters are 2 pole filters with roll off curves at 12 dB per octave. If both filters are programmed with identical parameter values, they become a single 4 pole filter with a roll off curve of 24 dB per octave, perfect for those classic analog synth sounds. Some additional information regarding Filters is on page 2.43 of this chapter. Assignable values: Off, Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, Parametric boost, Parametric cut. CUTOFF FREQUENCY: Sets a value for the Cutoff Frequency, or the frequency at which the filter intervenes. The Cutoff Frequency is the same for all the notes of a Sound, unless you programme Filter Tracking. Assignable values: 0 ... 191. RESONANCE: Applies resonance to the Cutoff frequency, creating a peak of emphasis at the Cutoff frequency. A high value of resonance can place the filter on auto-oscillation, producing a whistling sound rich in harmonics. Assignable Values: 0 ... 127. CUTOFF DYNAMIC SENSITIVITY: Links the Cutoff Frequency to Key On Velocity. Positive values increase the Cutoff Frequency by playing harder (the filter opens resulting in a brighter sound), negative values produce the inverse effect (the filter closes and the sound becomes dull). Assignable values: 7 ... 0 +7. 0 = no effect.

FILTER CONTROL PARAMETERS

TYPE: Selects the Filter type. Off deactivates the filter. RESONANCE DYNAMIC SENS.: Links Resonance to Key On Velocity. Positive values enhance the Resonance with increased key velocity while negative values give the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... 0 +7. 0 = no effect. CUTOFF TOUCH SENSITIVITY: Links the Cutoff Frequency to Aftertouch. Positive values increasingly open the filters with increased Aftertouch pressure, negative values have the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... 0 +7. 0 = no effect.
Edit Sound - Filter

Edit Sound 229

RESONANCE ECUTE, TOUCH (F8) SENSITIVITY: to start the Links playback the of the FILTER Juke- CUTOFF PRELOAD TRACKING Resonance to box Aftertouch. list. Valid for All Algorithms. The Preload function is a background loading Positive values increases the amount of Resofacility whichcurve allows you to playback, The Filter Cutoff Tracking allows you to vary by means nance applied with increased Aftertouch presof a single command, a list of Songs the Cutoff Frequency across the keyboard, in (or MIDI sure, negative values have the inverse effect. Files) contained in a disk or Hard order that it does not remain fixed for all the notesdisk, without Assignable values: 7 ... 0 +7. to load all the data tothe memory of a Sound,having but moves according to note beforehand. 0 = no effect. played. PLAYBACK ALL THE SONGS OR MIDI FILES ON A DISK FILTER ENVELOPE AMOUNT: Activates the 1. Insert the disk containing Songs and/or Midi envelope for the Filter in edit and sets the depth files into the disk drive and press PRELOAD You can envelope. interrupt the Jukebox at any time with of action of the Filter (in the Edit Numbers section). STOP. The envelope consists of two parts: Filter Key If a disk is not inserted in the drive, the Hard On Envelope and the Filter Key Off Envelope. Disk will be engaged automatically. DELETE (F4) the Filter Envelope. Negative values invert Removes a ... selected Assignable values: 10 +10. Song from the Jukebox list. The options and parameters used to shape the INSERT (F5)DYN. SENS.: Links the FILT. ENV AMOUNT Filter Cutoff Tracking curve, (Segment, Point, Key depth of action of the Filter envelope to changes Inserts the selected Song into the Jukebox list. and Level), are identical to those used for the in key velocity. Volume Tracking curve explained on page 2. 20. RESET LIST (F6)the depth of action of Positive values enhance the Filter envelope with increased key velocity, Removes all the names from the Jukebox list. An illustrated2. example how to program a Track-in the list usnegative values produce the inverse effect. AsSelectof the type of file to include ing curve is on page 2. 22. signable values: 7 0 +7. ing the soft button F6 (SONG/smf). ALL SONG (F7) 0 = no effect. 3. Use the cursor buttons to select the Song or Includes all the Songs contained in memory to MIDI file to include in the list and press ENthe Jukebox list in a single step. An existing list TER. FILT. ENV AMNT. Links the will be TOUCH. cancelledSENS.: and substituted with the new. depth of action of the Filter envelope to changes The selected file is added to the first availain Aftertouch pressure. ble space in the list and the destination frame EXECUTE (F8) moves one step forward. Positive values enhance the depth of action of Starts the playback of the Jukebox. the Filter envelope with increased Aftertouch pressure, negative values produce the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 0 +7. 0 = no effect.

4. Select other files and press ENTER each time to include them in the list. IMPORTANT: If you are working from Floppy disk, do not extract the disk during the file insertion procedure; doing so will provoke the cancellation of the list.

230 Reference Guide

Song 65

FILTER ENVELOPE KEY ON & KEY OFF

Valid for all Algorithms. The Key On and Key Off Filter Envelopes are 10 segment curves (maximum). The Key On envelope represents the variation of the Filter cutoff frequency for the entire duration that the notes are held pressed.

FILTER ENVELOPE TRACKING

Valid for all Algorithms. The Filter Envelope Tracking curve, valid both for the Key On and Key Off Filter Envelopes, increases or reduces the speed of action of the Filter envelope across the keyboard.

The Key Off envelope controls Filter variations after releasing the notes.

The options and parameters used to shape the Balance Envelope Tracking curve, (Segment, Point, Key and Level), are identical to those used for the Volume Tracking curve explained on page 2. 20. An illustrated example of how to program a Tracking curve is on page 2. 22.

The options and parameters used to shape the Filter Key On/Key Off Envelopes, (Zoom, Segment, Time and Level), are identical to those used for the Amplitude Key On/Key Off Envelope explained on page 2..24. An illustrated example of how to program Key On & Key Off Envelope is on page 2. 25.

Edit Sound 231

LOCATOR (SONG POSITION POINTER) This section, (LOC 1 1) shows the current Song control the record/playback parameters. position expressed in measures and beats. When Valid for all Algorithms. the Song is not playing, the Locator can be modiDYNAMIC RATE: of the page Pitch to EnveThe Dual options activate separate Pitch Envefied in Sensitivity the Time/Tempo select a starting lope to key velocity lopes for the two waveforms of each layer (Pitch point forvariations. the playback. It can be also modified with Envelope Os. 1 and Pitch Envelope Os. 2). With positive values, increasing the(Forward) key velocity the << (Rewind) and >> buttons regard(playing harder) up the Envelope develless speeds of the status of the sequencer (playing or off). The tuning (pitch) of the waveforms can vary over opment (the completion velocity). Negative valtime, thanks to Pitch Envelope which is divided ues act inversely with increased key velocity. into two parts: the Pitch Key On Envelope and LOCATOR (PROGRAMMABLE) Value range: -7 ... +7. 0 excludes the action. the Pitch Key Off Envelope. This parameter (1 1 1) shows the same information as the locator in the status bar, but at a ENV. AMOUNT TOUCH SENS.: Links the depth ERASE... (F7) higher resolution, 1 (beat), 1 (measure), 1 (tick). of action of the Pitch Envelope (defined in the Here you can cancel a Track or a Song. When theto sequencer not playing, you can seEnv. Amount setting) variationsisof Aftertouch lect this parameter and modify each part of the Track- Cancels the selected track. pressure. locator by rotating the DIAL. Song - Cancels all tracks (all Song) leaving an settings increase the velocity of the acPositive empty Song, ready to start another recording.. tion with increased aftertouch pressure. NegaPLAY/REC MODE The Song-Performances are not cancelled. tive settings create the inverse effect. Assignparameter offers three Playback able values:This 7 ... +7. 0 excludes the action of or Record METRONOME (F8) aftertouch. options to choose from: PITCH ENVELOPE CONTROL PARAMETERS Linear: the Song starts at the point indicated by ENVELOPEActivates/deactivates AMOUNT: Activates the themetronome. Pitch enthe DYN. locator and stops at the thedepth natural ENV. AMOUNT SENS.: Links ofSong end. velope and sets the depth of the Pitch to apply to action of the Pitch Envelope (defined in the Env. Forced stop: the Song starts at the point indithe oscillator. The maximum value corresponds Amount setting) to variations of key velocity. THE TIME/TEMPO PARAMETERS cated by the locator and stops at the specified to a Pitch excursion of 2 semitones. End. Positive settings increase the velocity of action The Time/Tempo display shows several Negative values invert the Pitch Envelope. As- informaincreased keythe velocity. Negative settings tion boxes and0offers a number of differentwith playLoop: Song starts at the point indicated by signable values: 7 ... +7. excludes the action create the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7repeats from back options. the locator, stops at the End, then of the envelope. ... +7. 0 excludes the action. the Starting point. The loop repeats continuously until stopped with the Stop button. TEMPO ( )

Pitch Recalls Envelope the Time/Tempo page, where you can

TIME/TEMPO (F6)

Shown in the status bar at the top of the display, this represents the current Metronome speed (Tempo) expressed in beats per second. During the playback, the Tempo can be modified with the DIAL. The [i] or [e] symbols, shown after the tempo value indicate the current status of the synchronizing MIDI clock: [i] = internal (WK6/8SE or [e] = external (external sequencer controlling the sequencer). The MIDI Clock can be programmed under EDIT MIDI/GENERAL SETTINGS.
Edit Sound - Pitch Envelope

Song mode - the Time/Tempo parameters

232 Reference Guide

Song 63

PITCH ENVELOPE KEY ON & KEY OFF

The Pitch Key On and Key Off Envelopes are 10 segment maximum) curves. The Key On envelope regulates the Pitch for the entire duration that the notes are held pressed.

PITCH ENVELOPE TRACKING

The Pitch Envelope Tracking curve, valid both for the Key On and Key Off envelopes, increases or reduces the speed of action of the Pitch envelope across the keyboard.

The Key Off envelope controls Pitch variations after releasing the notes.

The options and parameters used to shape the Pitch Envelope Tracking curve, (Segment, Point, Key and Level), are identical to those used for the Volume Tracking curve explained on page 2. 20. An illustrated example of how to program a Tracking curve is on page 2. 22.

The options and parameters used to shape the Pitch Key On/Key Off Envelopes, (Zoom, Segment, Time and Level), are identical to those used for the Amplitude Key On/Key Off Envelope explained on page 2..24. An illustrated example of how to program Pitch Key On & Key Off Envelopes appears on the page 2.25.

Edit Sound 233

LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)

Song

A single Low Frequency Oscillator generator for You can choose from the following waves: Sinus, all Algorithms. Triangle; Square, Random, Sample/Hold. The SONG button allows you to select any Saw, SONG PLAYBACK SONGS that you already have loaded to The LFOs depth of action on may the Pitch, Ampli1. Once youve loaded your Song(s), press the memory from Disk or programmable Hard Disk. From the same Sine SONG tude and Filter is independently Triangle Saw-tooth button to open the SONG BANKS button, you can also enter Song Record mode for each oscillator. selection window. by selecting an empty User Song. It LFO is a periodic (repeating) control source. produces a low speed waveform (low frequency) Square Random Sample&Hold that can be SONG-PERFORMANCES applied to various aspects of the sound to cause patterns of cyclic BeEach Song contains upchange. to 8 Performances, which Determines the velocity of the LFO. RATE: cause of its periodic nature, the LFO can be used are loaded and memorized with the correspondAssignable values: 1 ... 200. to create effects like Tremolo (cyclic amplitude ing Song. modulation),Using Vibrato (cyclic pitch modulation) the Song-Performance is anor, alternative and Determines the delay before the entry DELAY: for example,rapid Wah-wah (applied to the filter cut- and Effects. method of changing Sounds of the LFO. Entry of the LFO is gradual. off-frequency). Song-Performances instantly reset the instruSelect Value range:2. 0 ... 64. the Song with the corresponding Soft ment, therefore, they are very useful during a real button to enter Song Playback mode. time Song recording. The display shows window, SYNC: When set to ON, the LFOthe is Time/Tempo Synchrowhere you can modify some playback paramnized for all the notes played. When set to MIDI, PROGRAMMING SONG PERFORMANCES eters. the LFO is tied to the MIDI Clock. Program your Song Performance using the Assignable methvalues: Off, On, MIDI. ods described for the Global Performances and Style Performances. Store the Song PerformPITCH S.O.1 & S.O.2: Applies LFO to the Pitch ance to the Song Performance bank with the to produce a Vibrato effect on the selected oscilSTORE PERF procedure (refer to the Performlator. This parameter determines the modulation LFO PARAMETERS ance chapter for instructions). depth of LFO on Pitch. WAVE: Selects the waveform of the low freA Song Performance can have a maximum of 32 and negative values indicate an opposed Positive quency oscillation. Given the low frequency of tracks. sense of vibration at the starting phase (upwards the oscillation, the waveform is clearly perceptiIf you want to see the sounds assigned to or downwards respectively). ble. the tracks of the Song Performance, press Lets first examine how to select a Song and play Assignable values: ... +7. 0 =button, no effect. the 7 SoundView (F5), and use the it back. In this section you will also find explanaTrack scroll buttons to bring other tracks into tions regarding the various options offered in song PITCH S.O.1 & S.O.2: Links the depth TOUCH view. playback mode. of the Pitch modulation to Aftertouch pressure. By applying aftertouch pressure to the keys, the LOAD SONGS TO MEMORY Delay parameter is ignored and the oscillation If you havent already loaded any Songs tostarts RAM immediately. memory, refer to the DISK chapter for illustrated Positive and negative values indicate an opposed instructions of the Load file operation fromsense Disk, of vibration at the starting phase (upwards Hard disk or SCSI device (optional). or downwards respectively). Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect. Return to the Time/Tempo window with butEdit Sound - LFO ton F6.

234 Reference Guide

Song 61

AMPLITUDE S.O.1 & S.O.2: Applies Lfo to the Amplitude to produce Tremolo effects. This parameter determines the modulation depth of the LFO on the Amplitude (the output level). The positive and negative values indicate an opposed sense of increase/decrease of the Tremolo output level (the choice between positive or negative values give perfectly equivalent results). Higher positive or negative values increase the modulation depth. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect. TOUCH AMPL. S.O.1 & S.O.2: Links the depth of the Amplitude modulation to Aftertouch pressure, permitting you to control of the amount of Tremolo by varying the aftertouch pressure applied to the keys. The Delay parameter is ignored when pressure is applied to the keys and the oscillation starts immediately. The positive and negative values indicate an opposed sense of increase/decrease of the Tremolo output level (the choice between positive or negative values give perfectly equivalent results). Higher positive or negative values increase the modulation depth. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect. FILTER S.O.1 & S.O.2: Applies Lfo to the Cutoff Frequency of the Filter (1 or 2) to produce a WhaWha effect, caused by the opening and closing of the Filter. This parameter determines the modulation depth of the Lfo on the Cutoff Frequency. The positive and negative values indicate an opposed sense of opening and closing, otherwise, the choice between a positive or negative value give perfectly equivalent results. Higher positive or negative values increase the Filter modulation depth. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect.

TOUCH FILT S.O.1 & S.O.2: Links the depth of the Filter modulation to Aftertouch pressure. By applying aftertouch pressure to the keys, the Delay parameter is ignored and the oscillation starts immediately (toggles between open and closed filter). The positive and negative values indicate an opposed sense of opening and closing, otherwise, the choice between a positive or negative value give perfectly equivalent results. Higher positive or negative values increase the Filter modulation depth. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect.

Edit Sound 235

Pan

EVENTS TABLE AND RELATVE PARAMETERS

STATUS VALUE 1 VALUE 2

Valid for all Algorithms. In Note Dualname situations, reNote gardless of whether the Filters are connected in series or in parallel, there is only one pan envelope for both waveforms (oscillators). The position Program of the sound in Program the stereo change panoChange message. The PC rama can be controlled dynamically by means contained in the of the Pan envelope divided in two parts: the tracks Pan and shown in the Key On Envelope and the Pan Key Off EnveMicroscope has lope.

Key On Velocity

the WK6/8SE banks, necessary to select use numbers 1 16 the WK6/8SE sounds SENS.: Links the enve[1 ENV. 128] AMOUNT TOUCH [1 128]

ENV AMOUNT DYN SENSITIVITY: Links the enKey Off Velocity Note Length velope amount to key velocity variations. expressed as the Sequencer Positive values increase the envelope amount by resolution (q=192) [0 63323] increasing the key velocity while negative values Bankact Select inversely MSB with Bank increased Selectkey MSB velocity. message. To select message. Not Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response.

VALUE 3

GATE

priority over the PC recorded in the Performance. [1 128]

Type of Control Change (or MIDI controller). Example: CC00 = BankSelect MSB, CC32 = BankSelect LSB, CC01 = Modulation, CC07 = PAN ENVELOPE CONTROL PARAMETERS Volume [1 128]

Control Change

lope amount to variations in the Aftertouch pressure. Positive values increase the envelope amount by Control Change the Aftertouch pressure, while negaincreasing Value tive values act inversely with increased Aftertouch. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response.

PAN DYNAMIC SENSITIVITY: Links the sensitivity of the Pan envelope to key velocity variations. Positive values move the sound further right by ENVELOPE AMOUNT: Activates the Pan Enve- Value Pitch Value of LSB (Least of MSB increasing the key velocity while negative values lope and determines of action. Assign- (Most Bend its depth Significant Byte). Significant act inversely with increased key velocity. able values: 0 7. 0 = no envelope. [0= Off, 1127 = On] Byte). Effectifve valueAssignable of bending. values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response.
[063 = down 64 = PAN neutral TOUCH SENSITIVITY: Links the sensitiv65127 = up] ity of the Pan envelope to variations in the Mono Touch Poly Touch Channel Aftertouch intensity [0 127] Note to which Aftertouch is applied. [C1 G9]

Aftertouch pressure. Positive values move the sound further right by increasing the Aftertouch pressure, while negaNote Aftertouch tive values act inversely with increased intensity. [0 Aftertouch. 127] Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response.

Edit Sound - Pan

236 Reference Guide

Edit Style 523

PAN ENVELOPE KEY ON & KEY OFF

The Pan Key On and Key Off Envelopes are 10 segment maximum) curves. The Key On envelope regulates the Pan for the entire duration that the notes are held pressed.

PAN ENVELOPE TRACKING

The Pan Envelope Tracking curve, valid both for the Key On and Key Off envelopes, modifies the relative position of the sound across the keyboard extension with respect to the central point. For example, the sound in the bass section may be further to the left while in the treble section, it may be further to the right.

The Key Off envelope controls Pan variations after releasing the notes. The options and parameters used to shape the Pitch Envelope Tracking curve, (Segment, Point, Key and Level), are identical to those used for the Volume Tracking curve explained on page 2. 20. An illustrated example of how to program a Tracking curve is on page 2. 22.

The options and parameters used to shape the Pan Key On/Key Off Envelopes, (Zoom, Segment, Time and Level), are identical to those used for the Amplitude Key On/Key Off Envelope explained on page 2..24. An illustrated example of how to program Key On & Key Off Envelope is on page 2. 25.

Edit Sound 237

Transpose The Main Menu options

SAMPLE TRANSLATOR (F1)
Transposition in semitone steps. This gains access to the Sample Translator, explained separately in detail from page 2.44 onwards.

Microscope
The Microscope allows you to modify every sinImport: opens a second level window gle event recorded indialog the tracks. The Event List where you can select the source and destination shown at the center of the display shows all the layer. events recorded.

ACCESS TO THE EVENT EDIT

1. With the track in edit selected, use the / cursor buttons to scroll through the events. This option allows you to choose the Algorithms. The selected notes are played automatically. Pressing F2 PARAMETERS: activates a dialog box showing the 2. Select the parameter to be changed using current Algorithm. / cursorselected buttons.Layer. the currently Variation: Selects one of the 4 Variations.Delete: Only cancels the 3. Use theto DIAL to change paramexisting Variations can be selected (those with Thisat option limits itself cancelling onethe or selected two eters. to cancel all layers - at least one recorded Riff). layers. It is not possible least one must be present. Riff: Selects one of the riffs from the chosen VariEVENTS AND PARAMETERS options as required and confirm with ation. Only existing riffs can be selected. Program If the the PROGRAMMABLE ENTER or cancel the operation with ESCAPE. Style is empty, the phrase No Riff appears. The Status column shows the type of event. One or more parameters can be changed for each Transpose : different Determines the value Rotate the Dial to select a Algorithm and of the transevent. See the next page for a table of events position or (incancel semitone steps). with confirm with ENTER the operation LAYER RNG. and (F5)their parameters. ESCAPE. Assignable values: -64 ... +64. This option allows you to assign a Key range and Algorithms available: Single, Dual 1, Dual 2, Dual Note range from... to... : Sets the upper and SELECT RIFF... (F1) layer. a Dynamic range for the current 3, Dual 4. lower limits of the notes to be affected. To transSelects the Riff and box Variation to you edit. Pressing F5 activates a dialog where pose a single percussive instrument of the Drum can select the option required with the Up/Down track, assign the same note to the highest and LAYER UT. (F4) lowest limit. For example, to change the cursor snare buttons. (D2) set the allows parameter to create Note range from D2 The Layer Utility option you to a to D2. new Layer for the current Sound in edit, to imvalues: C-1 or ... G9 port a LayerAssignable from another Sound, delete a SHOW... (F2) Layer. From locator... To locator...: Defines the start Here you can select the events that will be disend point of thebox part where to be affected. It is posPressing F4and activates a dialog you Key Range:played assigns inthe thelowest Eventand List.highest keysible to specify measure, beat and resolucan select the option requiredthe with the Up/Down board limits for the current Layer. tion. cursor buttons. Dynamic Range: assigns the lowest and highAssignable values: within the actual limits est of the key velocity limits for the current Layer. Riff. Program the options as required and confirm with ENTER. Press ESCAPE to cancel the operation.

ALGORITHM (F2)

Create: adds a second or third layer to the current sound in edit.

Set the parameters and press ENTER. To mask the events, select Off

238 Reference Guide

Edit Style 521

EXIT (F6)
Press this soft button to escape permanently from the Edit Sound environment without saving eventual modifications. See Escape from Edit Sound on page 2.14 of this chapter.

SAVE (F8)
Press this soft button to save your programmed sound to the WK6/8SE Sound Library and escape from Edit Sound permanently. Refer to the section entitled Storing Sounds which follows on the next page (2.40). On page 2. 42, you will find some useful suggestions and tips to obtain the best results from Sound Editing tasks.

Edit Sound 239

Measures Storing Insert Sounds

Delete measures

Inserts specified number measures. The part Whenever you editaa sound you will,of at some Cancels a specified number of measures. The RAM-Sounds based on ROM-Wavesamples ofthat the you Riff either that follows the insertion point, decide want to save your point shifts measures directly after the point of cancellation are saved with an asterisk (*) attached after forward same number ofto measures new sound or simplythe forget it and return using as those shift towards the beginning the Riff and join with the name to identify the Sound fromof the originserted. TheA length of the Riff changes. the instrument as before. modified Sound that the measures preceding cancellation point. inal. New sounds based on new the Wavesamhas not been stored to memory shows a small ples loaded from disk or created with the mark at the top left hand corner before the name. Sample Translator are called RAMSounds, identified by the small graphical To cancel an edit, simply press the EXIT button and confirm with ENTER to return the main Edit representation of a wave ( ). menu This will cancel your edit and return the 2. Use the directional arrows to select the Bank sound to its starting status. and Prog. Change entry zones and rotate the Dial to select the numbers correspondIf you decide you want to store your sound into ing to an empty location (shown as No the instruments memory, the next step will be to Sound).PARAMETERS: press the SAVE button (F8). PARAMETERS To change the Sounds name, press the Any sound that you create yourself can be stored Variation : Selects one of the 4 Variations.3.Only Variation : Selects one of the 4 Soft Variations. Only F7/F8 . in Sound Group families, (or Banks). During existing Variations can be selected (those with button at existing Variations can be selected (those with at the storing process, you will firstRiff). be asked to seleast one recorded least one recorded Riff). lect a destination for your new sound and then Riff : Selects one of the riffs from the selected Riff: Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Varigiven the opportunity to name it. Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If ation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the the Style is empty, the phrase No Riff appears. Style is empty, the phrase No Riff appears. 1. Press the soft button F8 to select Save from the mainMeasures Edit Sound menu. to insert: Specifies the number of Measures to delete: Specifies the number of measures to insert. measures to delete. The Bank Prog. Change window opens where you can select the destination of the thelength of the Assignable values: depends on Assignable values: number that Use the standard name entrya procedure (seedoes not exnew Sound in the16 WK6/8SE Sound library. riff (max measures). ceed the length of the Riff. For example, if the Alphanumeric Entry on page 1.4 of the Riff is 4 measures long, the maximum assignInsert from locator: Specifies the measure Quick at Guide). able value if 4. which the new measures will be inserted. Press ENTER to confirm the new name. Delete from locator: This parameter indicates Assignable values: from the first measure (bar) 4. Press ENTER again to memorize the Sound the first measure of those to be deleted. of the Riff, to the first measure after the end measto the selected location. ure of the Riff. Assignable values: within the actual limits of the riff. Dependent on the previous parameter. The WK6/8SE Sounds are stored in the orb der of Bank Select a and Program Change numbers. You can choose to store the modified sound with its original name, or with a 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 new name.
1 2 3 4

(1)

(2)

(a)

(b)

(3)

(4)

(1)

(2)

(5)

(6)

Insert measures example. Two measures are inserted at measure 3. Measure 3 and all successive measure are moved forward.

Delete measures example. Measure 3 and 4 are cancelled. All the measures after the deletion point shift towards the beginning of the Riff.

240 Reference Guide

Edit Style 519

IMPORTANT REMINDERS WHEN STORING NEW SOUNDS

1. You cannot overwrite a Rom-Sound. A modified ROM-Sound generates a RAMSound which can be stored to either an empty location, or to an existing RAM-Sound. If you attempt to store a RAM-Sound to a ROMSound destination, the display will show the following message:

Repeat the operation and select an empty location. 2. If you save the new RAM-Sound to an existing RAM-Sound, the existing file will be irremediably lost without warning. Be absolutely sure, therefore, that you have stored the existing RAM-Sound to disk or Hard disk before confirming the save procedure.

Edit Sound 241

Copy times: Sets the number of consecutive copSome Sound ies. Eachediting copy starts suggestions exactly where the previous one ends.

To Style...: The destination Style of the copy. Assignable values: any of the USER Styles.

WAVEFORM Assignable values: depends of the length KEY OFF ENVELOPE of the COPY STYLE (F8)

Not all Waveforms cover entire extension Thanks to the articulated Key Off Envelopes (Reriff. The copythe must not exceed theof riff length. the keyboard. This becomes particularly evident lease phase) of the WK6/8SE Series, you can Copy mode: Determines the copy mode. when you use an 88 note keyboard. create Merge unites the copied events to those al- some very interesting effects. In practice, you can render a Sound live after releasing the The problem is caused by a lack of samples at ready present at the destination. Replace subkeys. the extremes of the keyboard. During the creatstitutes the events present at the destination with ing phase of a Waveform, For example, try programming an Amplitude Key those copied. considerations are made for theOptions: quality ofMerge, the sound and the amount Off Envelope of the following kind with a Sound Replace. of memory necessary to store all the samples such as 12StrGtr (26-2): which constitute the Waveform; if some high or COPY RIFF (F6) PARAMETER: low end samples are lacking in musical quality Here you can copy allWaveform, the tracks of (e.g., the lower notes of a violin ora riff. Copy current Style to Style: Selects the USER the higher notes of a double bass Waveform), it location where the entire current Style is to be is preferable to eliminate them to avoid using up copied to (Style [all Vars] option). precious memory.

VOLUME, VELOCITY & AFTERTOUCH

The Volume of a Sound can be controlled in live When you release the key the sound begins to situations by velocity and aftertouch variations fade and then reappears, it is held for an instant (the relative parameters are found in the Volume and then fades away gradually. editor). PARAMETERS: If you set very sensitive values for both Same as COPY TRACK but controls without the Track to LFO (e.g. +7 assigned to both dynamics and Track parameter. Lfo can be applied to several different sound paaftertouch), the Sound will be very difficult to conrameters. trol and easily susceptible to sudden volume variCOPY VAR (F7) ations. The effect produced depends on the parameter affected: LOOP AND LFO Amplitude > Vibrato By programming a loop on two segments of a Pitch > Tremolo Key On Envelope which create an ascending and Cutoff Freq. > Wha-wha descending ramp (/\) you can simulate a Tremolo effect, without using the Lfo editor. A loop of this kind on a Pitch Key On Envelope will simulate a more realistic Vibrato effect than PARAMETERS: the effect obtained with the LFO. Copy Variation... to Variation...: The source and destination of the copied Variation (Var (all riffs) option). Assignable values: 1 ... 4.

242 Reference Guide

Edit Style 517

FILTERS
The action of the filters on the sound is represented by curves:
dB
Hz

RESONANCE
Resonance enhances the frequencies in close proximity of the Cutoff Frequency, rendering the filter curves more complex:
dB

Low Pass (attenuates the high end frequencies). High Pass (attenuates the low end frequencies).

Resonance
Hz

dB
Hz

dB
Hz

Band Pass (attenuates the frequencies above and below the C.F.). Parametric Boost (enhances the frequencies around the Cutoff Frequency). Parametric Cut (attenuates the frequencies around the Cutoff Frequency).

Resonance was a very typical feature of classic analog synthesizers. As an example, listen to the Sound Resonance (102-2).

dB
Hz

dB
Hz

The slope of these curves is determined by the attraction capacity of the poles. The WK6/8SE Series can have two 2-pole filters connected in parallel (Dual 1, Dual 3 Algorithms), or one 4pole filter, corresponding to two 2-pole filters connected in series (Dual 2, Dual 4 Algorithms). A 4pole filter creates a clearer slope and consequently a fuller and more aggressive sound.

TO OBTAIN A 4-POLE FILTER:

Programme identical parameter values for the Filter 1 and Filter 2 editors of the Dual 2 or Dual 4 Algorithms.

Edit Sound 243

SamplesErase and the Sample Translator

the end of the riff.

ERASE RIFF (F6)

This editor events. The WK6/8SE can load cancels new sound samples into HereMETHODS you can erase all the tracks of a Riff. SAMPLE LOADING memory which can then be edited and saved as Samples can be loaded from disk, via MIDI from ERASE TRACK (F5) new WK6/8SE sounds. computers, samplers, etc., from external SCSI Allows you are to work on a single Style. (only if your instrument is fitted with the WK6/8SE instruments equipped with Track Sam- of the devices ple RAM memory (8 Mbytes for WK8SE and 2 optional SCSI kit), or dumped from external deMbytes for WK6SE), sufficient to accommodate vices. the samples you wish to load. You can increase Samples can also be loaded directly from the amount of memory by installing additional RAM -Sounds, provided that you enter EDIT RAM in the form volatile S-RAM kits supplied by SOUND with the same sound assigned to the Generalmusic, or SIMMs chips which can be obselected track of the current Performance. PARAMETERS: tained from most computer suppliers. You can check the amount of sample memory that has ENTERING SAMPLE SameTRANSLATOR as ERASE TRACK but without the Note been installed by looking under EDIT GENERAL/ Range From...To... parameter. Access to the Sample Translator is always via PARAMETERS: SYSTEM INFO, (F1 button). the Edit Sound environment (press SYNTH in the Variation: Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only ERASE VARIATION (F7) EDIT section; see also page 2.13). Variations that contain at least one recorded riff Here you can erase a Style Variation. You can enter the Sample Translator in two ways: can be selected. SAMPLE TRANSLATOR 1. With a RAM -Sound. This allows you seThe WK6/8SE is: capable loading Riff Selects of one of the many riffs ofdifferthe selected Varilect Sample Translator and load the Waveent samplesation. typesOnly fromexisting a number different riffs of can be selected. If the form associated to the selected RAM companies formats. Style is empty, the phrase No Riff appears. Sound. Because theEvent list oftype compatible sample types : Determines the type is of event2. to be With a Rom-Sound (for example, select the constantly erased. being updated, check with yourthe note with Duplicate note eliminates default Grand Piano Performance). This alGeneralmusic dealer orvelocity distributor to see which the lowest value when two notes of the lows you to enter Sample Translator and load formats are same compatible with at the operating syspitch start the same position. a sample from floppy disk or SCSI device (optem version you are currently using. Some of Options: All, Duplicate note, Note, Pitch Bend, tional), or receive them via a MIDI Dump from the most common formats currently in use are; ERASE STYLE (F8) Mono touch, Poly touch, Velocity Off, an external device. Wave, Stereo Wave, Sample Vision, Sound DeProgramChange, ControlChange 00...31, Here you can cancel the entire Style. signer 1, Akai, Aiff, Kurzweil and many others. ControlChange 64...127. The new RAM Waveforms that you can create Note range from... to...: Sets the upper and using the Sample Translator can be stored to the lower limits of the notes to cancel. To cancel a WK6/8SE Wave Library. Using the new Wavesingle percussive instrument of the Drum track, forms, you will then be able to create new assign the same note to the highest and lowest RAM -Sounds, increasing WK6/8SEs sonic limit. For example, to cancel the snare (D2) set potential. the parameter to Note range from D2 to D2. To start SAMPLE TRANSLATOR, press the SAMAssignable values: C-1 ... G9. PLE TXL button (F1) in the main EDIT SOUND From locator... To locator...: Determines the start display. and end point of the part to cancel. It is possible to specify the measure, beat and resolution. Assignable values: within the actual limits of the Edit Sound - Sample Translator display, no samples loaded riff. It is not possible to specify a point beyond

244 Reference Guide

Edit Style 515

THE MAIN SAMPLE TRANSLATOR DISPLAY

The main Sample Translator display consists of 16 slots, each able to house a sample that can compose a Waveform. A Waveform may consist of one or more samples covering different keyboard ranges. The display example below shows the sample configuration of a Waveform originating from a previous series instrument.

THE SAMPLE TRANSLATOR OPTIONS

Load: Loads a sample into the selected location, directly from the selected Ram -Sound, from floppy disk or via MIDI from an external source (computer, sampler, etc.). Saves a sample to the instruments Wave Library. Only samples which have been assigned a keyboard extension are saved. Saving also escapes the Sample Translator and returns to Edit Sound where you can create a new Sound with the new Waveform. Cancels the selected Sample from the main Sample Translator display. Assigns the selected sample to a keyboard range. This assigned sample plays together with the other assigned samples that make up the Waveform. Sample keyboard range overlaps are not permitted. Cancels the extension limits of the selected sample. Opens a page showing information regarding the Waveform (Sample name and type, properties, size, pitch, Sample rate, Loop Start, Loop End points and the Loop status). Several parameters can be edited in this page and other options are activated (Tuning, Normalize, Gain, Cut, Export).

Save:

Delete: Assign:

Here, the original RAM -Sound contains a Waveform consisting of 6 samples, each assigned to a specific range of the keyboard:
Deassign:

Locations without samples are numbered and shown with three dashes ( ).

Edit:

SELECTING SAMPLES FROM THE WAVEFORM DISPLAY

Select the Samples with the Up/Down cursor buttons. Next to each sample, three notes are usually shown, representing the lower limit of the keyboard range to which the sample has been assigned, the original sample pitch, and the upper keyboard limit:

Send Sample: Activates a sample Dump process to transfer (via MIDI) the sample to an external device (for example, another WK6/8SE keyboard). Exit: Escapes the Sample Translator, erasing all the samples present, and returns to Edit Sound.

Sample Translator 245

The time To taken escape depends without on closing the size the ofedit the page, press sample. the When ST/SONG loading has button. finished, To pass the disto another edit play shows environment, a situation use similar theto +/ the PAGE example buttons ( ). below, with one or more samples which conLOAD (F1) stitute the Waveform. Afterallows recording a load UserSamples Style, the Style riffs can The Load option you to into THE EDIT STYLE OPTIONS be modified using the functions of the EDIT the Sample Translator directly from a RAM STYLE MENU. If you select a User Style to edit, Sound, or from disk or SCSI device (optional). all the Edit Style functions will be available. If UNDO (F2) you select a ROM Style, only the Copy function When this parameter is selected (shown in nega1. LOADING A SAMPLE FROM A RAM -SOUND will be available. tive highlight), the UNDO function is enabled. This operation should be carried out with RAM Undo cancels the last operation or series of opSounds originating from previous Series instruerations carried out. This function consumes exments (WK6/8, S, SX, PS/GPS) or from Ram ENTERING EDIT STYLE actly the same amount of RAM memory as the Sounds containing a Waveform created by SamIn Style/RealTime mode, select the User Style Style. If there is a shortage of memory in RAM, it ple Translator. Set the instrument in Style/ 2. LOADING SAMPLES FROM OR SCSI DEVICE you wish to modify. is a good idea DISK to deactivate UNDO. RealTime mode with a single track active in Full To load samples from disk, in practice you Press the ST/SONG button (in the Edit Numbers Press the UNDO panel button tocan execute the demode. enter with any sound, including a RAM -Sound, section) to open the main EDIT STYLE menu. sired Undo operation. 1. With a RAM -Sound assigned to a track of because once you enter the Sample Translator, a Performance, enter Sample Translator via you can override the sound assigned to the track SYNTH/EDIT SOUND/SAMPLE TXL. and listen to a sample loaded from disk. If, instead, other tracks are active, you will hear these as well. You will be prompted with a request to confirm 1. Insert the sample disk into the drive. A dialog window is displayed informing that a the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESRam-Sound has been found and the associ2 Enter Sample CAPE.Translator via SYNTH/EDIT ated Waveform is ready to be loaded. SOUND/SAMPLE TXL. Entering this section the first time opens the main A. If you enter with a RAM -Sound, you menu page (00). On all successive occasions, are prompted to load the associated the last page selected is recalled. Waveform. Press ESCAPE to ignore the prompt and pass to the load phase THE EDIT STYLE MENU (point If 3). UNDO is disabled, pressing the UNDO button and confirming with ENTERthe activates the followB . If you enter with a Rom-Sound, The Edit Style menu contains 10 Style Editing ing user message: dialog window does not appear and you functions (or Editors): 2. Press ENTER confirm theQuantize, operation, or Measure, pass directly to the load phase. Erase, to Move, Copy, Insert escape to cancel. 3. Press LOAD (F1). Delete Measure, Velocity, Transpose, MicroMask. A dialogscope, window showing an animated metronome Two keeps you informed the samples options are alsoof available: Undo and Style being loaded: name.

Edit Style Loading samples

Press ESCAPE to close the window and repeat UNDOwindow, operation, thisthe time with UNDO ena4. From thethe selection select device To escape from EDIT STYLE press ST/SONG from or which bled. the sample will be loaded and ESCAPE (once or twice, depending on the curpress ENTER. rently selected level). The sample data contained in the storage

ESCAPE FROM EDIT STYLE

246 Reference Guide

Edit Style 513

device, in this example, a floppy disk, is shown the selection window, similar to the example below:

LOADING OTHER SAMPLES

You can load other samples to the Sample Translator, provided that you select an empty location in the sample list.

If you load another sample to an existing sample location, a cancellation request will appear. The various sample formats are identified by appropriate extensions. 5. Select the sample you wish to load with the cursor buttons ( / ) and press ENTER to start loading the Sample. Some sample formats allow you to load individual samples or Programs. (See Sample and Programs afterwards). A dialog window showing an animated metronome keeps you informed of the samples being loaded. A bar graph also appears at the top of the display to monitor the loading phase. When the sample has been loaded, the display will show something similar to the example below.

You can use the Sample Overwrite method to cancel an unwanted Sample. Up to 16 Samples can be loaded to the Samples List.

LOADING SAMPLES AND PROGRAMS

Some sample formats, such as Akai and Kurzweil, allow you to load individual Samples (equivalent to the WK6/8SE Series samples) and Programs (similar to the WK6/8SE Series Waveforms). In such cases, when you select a file type from the File Open window, a second selection window appears:

This example shows a single unassigned Flute Wave sample. Select an individual sample, or select All samples and press ENTER. A Program organizes the Samples by defining the keyboard ranges to which they are assigned. Unlike the Waveform of the WK6/8SE Series, a Program can distribute the Samples over sev

Sample Translator 247

eral differentSCALE Levels (dynamic levels). CONVERSION TABLES Sample Translator load single Samples, or it to chord and bass patterns played in the key of C and show which These can Scale Conversion tables refer can convert, notes in a single operation, an entire level are converted. The changes are expressed in semitones, therefore, if the note C shows a converof the Program a WK6/8SE WaveASSIGN (F4) sioninto of 2, the note is Series converted 2 semitones down (Bb). Notes not converted are shown blank. form. If a Program contains more than one level, Once youve loaded in the samples that you need, it can be converted entirely in successive phases, step you need to take before Scale Converter ina OFF status: Major riff the > only C 7thessential riff using (a) a Sound Patch, (b) multi trackC conyou can save them is to ASSIGN, (or map), your C# D# F# G# A# key-dynamic figuration, c) a Sound containing a samples to a specific range of keys. Only asassignment (executed in Edit C Sound). D E signed F G A samples become a part ofBa Waveform which you can then save Wave accomp. 2 +1to the WK6/8SE 1 CONVERSION LIMITATIONS Library. +1 1 A WK6/8SE bass Waveform can contain only 16 samWhen you load a new Waveform into Sample ples. For example, an Akai S1000 level can Translator, the samples that constitute the Wavecontain up to 99 Samples, therefore, when a conform are shown assigned to specific key ranges. version is carried only the Samples from Scale out, Converter in 16 OFF status: C Major riff > C minor riff In such cases, three values are shown, the lowthe lowest register are loaded. C# D# F# the sample G# pitch and A#the highest note: est note, These kind of Samples can overlap even inside C D E F G A B note Highest a dynamic Level. Sample Translator eliminates Lowest note accomp. 1 +1 1 this overlap, using the lowest limit-note of the highest pitched sample as the limit between sam- 1 bass +1 1 ples.

Assigning samples

Sample pitch

If you load new Samples from disk or a SCSI RECEIVING SAMPLES VIA A DUMP Scale Converter active: C Major riff > C 7th riff device, or receive them via MIDI, they will norYou can also Dump samples into Sample TransC# D# lator via the Sample Request option (F7). This is C D E discussed in detail on page 2.53.
7th 1 accomp. 7th 1 bass 7th 2 accomp. 7th 2 bass 7th 3 accomp. 7th 3 bass 7th 4 accomp. 7th 4 bass 2 2 2 2 F#shown without G# an assignment, A# mally be but with the In such TransF sample pitch. G A cases, Sample B lator allows you to listen to the sample across the entire keyboard, to help you decide the in which note range you can obtain the best results. 1 Once you have decided the best note range, 1 press the ASSIGN button (F4) to open the ASSIGN MENU. +1 +1

The selected Sample is shown with a temporary key range, represented by the black line. The notch shown in the line represents the Sample Pitch.

248 Reference Guide

User Styles 511

If the selected Sample is not shown with a black line, simply strike the left Cursor button ( ). 1. Rotate the Dial to assign the lowest key limit:

OVERLAPPING SAMPLES

If you overlap the key range of two samples, pressing ENTER will prompt a message indicating the presence of an overlap.

2. Strike the right cursor button ( ) and assign the upper key limit with the Dial.

3. Press ENTER to confirm. 4. Select the next Sample to assign with the up/ down cursor buttons ( / ) then strike the left cursor button ( ) to activate the lowest key limit of the selected sample (A0).

Press Escape to cancel the message and assign the correct key range before confirming with ENTER. A typical assignment consisting of several samples that constitute a WK6/8SE Waveform may look like this:

Repeat the assignment procedure for all the samples that are to be part of the new Waveform, and avoid overlapping. Each sample covers a specified key range and the notch at the beginning of each range corresponds to the Root Key Number, also called the Sample Pitch. Once you have completed the sample key range assignments, press ESCAPE to close the ASSIGN display and return to the Sample Translator. At this point, unless you want to start editing your sample, you can press SAVE, (F2) to store your sample to the WK6/8SE wave library. Follow the section entitled, Storing the sample on page 2.55 at the end of this chapter.

Sample Translator 249

METRONOME (F8) Cancelling assignments

to program also the respective riffs, the relative Scale conversion will be ignored. The parameter TIME SIGNATURE DEASSIGN (F5) DELETE (F3)consists of two variable parts, corresponding to Valid for the entire Style. This parameter can The Deassign command cancels a sample asThebe Delete option you to cancel the sethe twoallows complementary chords with respect to the If the Sample signment. modified only before starting a recording. lected from the Sample Translator. one being recorded. Style contains recorded events, this parameter 1. Select the Sample to deassign. After listening to your Samples and assigning If the Off setting is selected, the arranger carcannot be modified. them, you may tosimplified eliminateconversion the no longer ries want out the referred to. The required. tables at the end of this chapter show how the MEASURES Scale Converter both and in the off status, Simply select the sample you operates, wish to cancel asbutton well as for the Minor and 7th chords. Several Determines the length of a riff expressed in measpress the soft F3. 2. Press the soft(max button F5 to deassign the samdifferent solutions for each chord are provided ures 16). You are prompted with a message to reconfirm ple. for. the operation with ENTER or cancel with Escape. On pages 5.12 and 5.13 you find Scale ConverTEMPO sion tables for reference. Sets the playing speed (metronomic Tempo). Valid for the entire Style. QUANTIZE After deassigning, the sample will play across An auto-corrector of timing during the recording the entire keyboard KEY NOTE range, but only if it is seENTER to delete Sample. phase. Thethe selection values are normal, triplets lected. Sets the reference key for the recording. Press KEY or swing. If you wish to save the sample asin part of the NOTE indicates the key which the original riff final Waveform, you When must reassign a note is recorded. you play the indicated chord, range before proceeding. the riff will play back in exactly the same manner Value Quantization as recorded. If other chords are played, the riff 1/4 will be transposed accordingly.
1/8

Activates/deactivates the metronome.

Cancelling samples nor and/or 7th). If, on a future occasion, you wish

the scale converter for the other two chords (mi-

SCALE CONVERSION
If you program a Style accompaniment based on the Major scale, the WK6/8SE arranger will automatically convert a minor or 7th chord accordingly. This allows you to limit your User Style recording times by, for example, recording only the Major riff of Variation 1, in order that when you play with the recorded style, a minor or 7th chord will be automatically adjusted for the change. However, in harmonic terms, this type of over-simplification creates errors when using the more complex chord structures. To overcome this problem, the WK6/8SE Scale Converter provides a selection of chord inversion systems, based on algorithms in order to render the conversion more musical. You can program the Major chord only and set

1/12 1/16 1/24 1/32 1/48 1/64 1/96 free 1/8 B...F* 1/16 B...F* free

triplet triplet triplet (1/64) (1/64 triplet) no quantization (swing) (swing) no quantization

* B F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel.

250 Reference Guide

User Styles 59

Sample Editing
EDIT (F6)
The Edit option opens a display showing nonprogrammable information relating to the original sample, and gives access to some programmable parameters which allow you to change some characteristics of each individual sample.

at which it was sampled). To help you with this operation, use the Tuning function, activated with the F1 soft button, which plays the original sample pitch with a sinusoidal that is superimposed on the sample. You can also use this parameter to make the sample play its normal pitch on a different key from the one to which it was assign when it was recorded. This, however, will pitch shift the sample and change its playback rate, which can affect the timbre of the sample. SAMPLE RATE: This parameter defines the frequency with which the Sample is read. If the Sampling Rate is modified, the sample pitch is also proportionally modified. For example, if the Sample Rate is raised in value, the sample pitch will also become higher. Basically, this function provides a fine tuning for the sample, avoiding dissonance between the samples that make up the Waveform. LOOP START: This parameter causes samples to replay indefinitely until you release the note, or they decay to silence. Each sample, when triggered, begins at the Loop Start point and plays through to the Loop End, then loops to the Loop start point and plays again. This cycle will continue until the note is released. If the Loop Switch is set to Off (see below), when the sample plays to the Loop End on its first cycle, it stops when it reaches the Loop End. Changing the Loop Start (and Loop End) points can have a small or great effect on the sample timbre, depending on the nature of the sound at the Loop Start point. You may hear a click as the sample loops back from the Loop End to Sample Start. In such cases, vary the Loop Start value until you reduce the click to an acceptable value. LOOP END: This parameter represents the end of the current sample and the point where the sample, once played, loops back to the Loop Start point. If the Loop Switch is set to Off, the Loop End parameter changes to Sample End.

The first four items of the display correspond to the sample information: SAMPLE NAME: Shows the original name of the wave sample. SAMPLE TYPE: Identifies the sample format. PROPERTIES: Shows the technical characteristics of the sample. SAMPLE SIZE: Shows the size of the sample expressed as the total number of samples. The remaining items of the display correspond to settings for the sample assigned to the currently selected key range. All these parameters are programmable. SAMPLE PITCH: Indicates the pitch at which the sample was originally recorded. This parameter also defines the Root Key number, or the key where the sample root for the current key range is assigned. If the WK6/8SE does not recognize the Sample Pitch of a sample youve loaded from disk, you can use this parameter to specify the key which will play the sample at its normal pitch (the pitch

Sample Translator 251

LOOP SWITCH: This parameter togglestrack between 9. Confirm the recorded with the NORMALIZE corre(2) RESTORING THE USER STYLES MEMORY the On and Off status of the Loop. If set to ON, sponding soft button. If the volume If of you the have selected loaded sample disk-based seemsUser to Styles, or the sample loops continually from Loop Start to be too low, it have is quite recorded probable User that Styles the original using up all the The Record icon will change to the Seq-play Loop End until the keys are released. If OFF, the sample Gain memory (Volume) dedicated has a setting to the that storage needs of Styles, a icon. sample plays from Loop Start to Sample End and to be adjusted. quick Normalize and easy takes way the of sample clearing gain User Style stops. to its maximum memory setting and in a making single room step. for other Styles is to use the Restore Styles operation. For details 1. Press F2 to select NORMALIZE. 10. Select another track to record and repeat GENERAL NOTES ON SAMPLE EDITING regarding the RESTORE functions available, reThe display shows the current status of the the procedure for other tracks until you have fer to the GENERAL chapter, page 8.8, in the When you trim samples by changing the values sample Gain. In the example, we are workrecorded all the riffs you want for your Style. Reference Guide.

of Loop Start and Loop End, youll hear the effect ing on a stereo sample (Left and Right parts). Remember confirm each track you record with the next note you play. to However, the SamNaturally, you must remember to save the User before selecting one, otherwise you ple is not actually changed in another the WK6/8SE Styles that you dont want to lose to disk before will record memory until you save it. your new track and add the same proceeding with the restore procedure. events to the track already recorded.

THE SAMPLE EDIT OPTIONS

Entering the Sample Edit page activates several In this display situation, the Gain setting is The LED on the RECORD button goes off options. not programmable. and the display shows the new Style window. 2. Press ENTER to set the sample Gain to its TUNING (F1) maximum setting (100%). The Tuning option provides a reference for the sample pitch, producing the exact note with a sinusoidal, superimposed on the sample. This is useful in situations where the original sample pitch is required when assigning a sample to a key range. Repeat the operations for the other section Press the soft button F1 to activate the Tuning of the sample, (RIGHT), by selecting the Left function (shown in negative highlight) and play a parameter with the cursor and rotating the note on the keyboard. Dial. Press F1 to deactivate Tuning.

11. When you have finished, press the RECORD button to escape Record mode.

GAIN (F3)
This option allows you to modify the volume of the sample with respect to the other samples of the Waveform. One of the primary uses of Gain is to equalize the volume levels between different key ranges.

252 Reference Guide

User Styles 57

1. Press F3 to select GAIN. The display will show the current GAIN status (in the example, we are working on the RIGHT section of a stereo sample).

EXPORT (F7)
Use the Export option to save the Sample currently in edit to disk or SCSI device (if installed). 1. Premete EXPORT to open a selection window where you can select the periferal device to export toper aprire una finestra di dialogo dove potete segliere lunit esterna dove esportare il sample.

2. Rotate the Dial to set the Gain to a suitable level, playing the sample as you regulate the setting. 2. Press ENTER to open a dialog where you can specify a name for the sample and select the format.

3. Press ENTER to confirm the setting. After a short period, the sample Gain setting is memorized.

CUT (F5)
This option allows you to trim the Sample at a specified Loop End in order to cut off the last portion of the Sample. If you vary the current setting of the Loop End and wish to eliminate the portion of the sample that follows, press F5 to trigger the CUT option. After using CUT, youll find that the Loop End point cannot be taken to a higher value.

You can chose to save in two of the most commonly recognized formats: Sound Designer 1 or Windows RIFF Wave. 3. Select the File Type parameter and rotate the Dial to select the other format.

4. Press ENTER to start the export procedure. If you export to disk, insert the disk into the drive before pressing Enter. Shortly after, the Sample is saved. Press ESCAPE to exit the Sample Edit display.

Sample Translator 253

4. Specify WHAT a sample number (by rotating the IS A RIFF? Dial) and press ENTER. A Riff is a musical motif capable of repetition (loopShortly after, the sample transfer process ing). It can also be expressed as a phrase or begins. lick, During the the to process is but it transfer, is important understand that the The four USER buttons (1, 2, 3 and 4) of the SEND SAMPLE / SAMPLE REQUEST (F7) monitored on the bar of the main Sam-In fact, when Riff must be graph capable of repetition. STYLE GROUPS section recall User-programSamples can be transferred WK6/8SE ple Translator display. you play with Styles, you will note that the patmable Styles, in between other words, free locations that and most other samplers and computer sampling terns are short sequences. If the sending device isrepeating another WK6/8SE , allow you to record your own auto accompaniprograms using the Send Sample/Sample Respecify the numbers from 0 to 15 all the Riffs ments. Up to 32 User Styles can reside you in can The table shown on this page lists quest option which operates according to the MIDI which correspond 16 locations of the memory, 8 in each User Group. that make to upthe a Style. Sample Dump Standard. This feature works on Sample Translator. A new Style can be created by recording every The basic Riff is the principal pattern of the Style the handshake principal and requires only that If youre requesting a sample fromuntil an exterpart yourself. You can also modify an existing which repeats continually stopped, or until it the transmitter and receiver conform to the standnal computer or sampler, you can specify a pattern. Style. This second option is explained in the Edit is broken by a Fill, Intro or Ending ard. Both units must be connected via a closed number from 0 to 255, depending on the samStyle section on page 5.13. The Fills, Intros and Endings are triggered by MIDI loop The operation proceeds smoothly and ple numbers stored inrelative the external Disk based User Styles be loaded into pressing the FILL,unit. INTRO, or ENDING at high speed without freezing either thecan external While the transfer is taking place, the Sammemory (to .the 1,necessary 2, 3 and 4 to locations) and buttons. device or the WK6/8SE It User is not ple Req option changes to Dump Stop. user-programmed Styles can be saved to disk, set MIDI channels. If the external device does A Riff can vary in length from one Use to sixteen measDump Stop to stop the sample transfer from the methods described in the Disk chapter not conformusing to the Sample MIDI Dump Standures long. the external device. of the Reference Guide, page 4.6. ard, this operation cannot be performed. Each Riff consists of up to 8 Style tracks: Drum, The Send Sample option is shown when a SamBass, Acc1, Acc2, Acc3, Acc4, Acc5, Acc6. TO SAVE A SAMPLE USING THE SAMPLE DUMP THE STRUCTURE A STYLE disple is selected in BASIC the main Sample OF Translator STANDARD (SEND SAMPLE) play. Styles provide automatic accompaniments based on the system of chords. In particular, the Major, Press SEND SAMPLE (F7). Minor and Seventh chords trigger three comShortly after, the sample transfer process pletely different arrangement patterns. begins. During the transfer, the process is The option changes from Send Sample to SamThere are 4 Variations of the Major, minor and monitored on the bar graph of the main Sample Request when an empty location is selected. 7th chords and each Variation breaks down into ple Translator display. Var1 Var2 Var3 Var4 several different sections: basic, Intro, Fill, EndWhile the transfer is taking place, the Send Basic Major Basic Major Basic Major Basic Major ing. These four sections form the basis of a strucSample option changes to Dump Stop. Use ture consisting of 48 short sequences, or Riffs, Basic Basic Minor Basic Minor Dump Stop toMinor stop the sample transfer to the Basic Minor for each Style. externalBasic device. 7th Basic 7th Basic 7th Basic 7th TO LOAD SAMPLES USING THE SAMPLE DUMP

Sample User MIDI Styles Dump

STANDARD (SAMPLE REQUEST)

1. Connect two MIDI cables between the sending device and the WK6/8SE (MIDI IN to MIDI OUT and MIDI OUT to MIDI IN). 2. Select an empty location in the Sample List. 3. Press SAMPLE REQ (F7). A selection window opens where you can select the sample number.

Fill Major Fill Minor Fill 7th

Fill Major Fill Minor Fill 7th

Fill Major Fill Minor Fill 7th Intro Major Intro Minor Intro 7th End Major End Minor End 7th

Fill Major Fill Minor Fill 7th Intro Major Intro Minor Intro 7th End Major End Minor End 7th

Intro Major Intro Major Intro Minor Intro Minor Intro 7th End Major End Minor End 7th Riffs of a Style Intro 7th End Major End Minor End 7th

254 Reference Guide

User Styles 55

Exit (F8)
Use the EXIT option to escape from Sample Translator without saving your samples. Pressing EXIT activates a prompt to confirm the abort process with ENTER and cancel all samples.

Storing Samples
SAVE (F2)
The SAVE operation is used to save assigned Samples to the WK6/8SE Wave Library. A Waveform can contain one or more assigned samples, provided that each is assigned to a specific keyboard range. Once your samples have been assigned, press the SAVE button, (F2), to Save the Waveform to the WK6/8SE Wave Library. The Save Sample dialog window is shown:

Pressing ENTER cancels all samples and returns to the Sound Edit environment. Press ESCAPE to cancel the display and retain the samples. Save the samples with SAVE to escape the Sample Translator. Here you can write a name for the waveform (Wave name) and a name for the new RAM Sound (Sound name) based on the Waveform. The name given to the Waveform is automatically assigned to the sound once you select the Sound Name entry zone. You are free, however, to write a different name for the Sound. Also shown is the first available empty location in RAM for the new RAM -Sound, defined by the Bank and Program numbers. Whatever Bank and Program number you select with the Dial, it will always correspond to an empty location in RAM. WK6/8SE does not allow you to overwrite existing Ram-Sounds or RAM Sounds. If you attempt to save the Waveform with a name that already exists, an message appears saying that the Wave Name already exists. Press Enter or Escape to cancel the message and return to the Save Sample window and write a different name for the Wave. Confirm with ENTER to save the Waveform to

Sample Translator 255

the WK6/8SE A Wave Style Performance Library. The be new programmed Ram - to change Sound is simultaneously the keyboardsaved sounds to as thewell WK6/8SE as the accompaniSound Library ment at the sounds, selected but location. the accompaniment Pressing patterns Enter also escapes of the current the Sample Style remain Translator unchanged. and returns to Edit Sound where you can start to edit the new Ram -Sound using all the methods already described. ARRANGE MODE Youll find the new Ram -Sound to access to The ARRANGE MODEassigned button gains the currentlyseveral selected track,associated and the new Waveoptions to the Styles: the Auto form selected in the Waveform editor. the Style Chord Recand Fixed Chord modes, ognition modes, Dynamic Arrange and Autobacking UN-ASSIGNED SAMPLES and the Mixer Lock and Bass Follow functions. If, among the assigned samples of the Sample Translator, one or more unassigned samples are present, pressing SAVE prompts a message requesting the cancellation of unassigned samples before proceeding with the Save operation.

CHORD RECOGNITION MODES

The Chord Recognition modes generate the automatic accompaniments of the Styles in various different ways according to how many notes are pressed and where on the keyboard (above or below the split point). The programmed accompaniment patterns are always fully generated with a fully recognised chord. Major, minor and seventh chords each can generate completely different accompaniment patterns. The chord recognition modes available are: ONE FINGER: A single note played below the Split Point is interpreted as the root of a major chord. A minor chord requires the root note and the minor third (e.g. C and Eb). A seventh chord requires the root and seventh (e.g. C with a Bb either above or below C). FINGERED 1: Needs at least three notes for full chord recognition. With less than three notes, the chord is not recognized - the notes played are considered stray. FINGERED 2: At least three notes must be played to obtain the fully programmed pattern. If less than three notes are played, the arranger recognizes the chord but triggers a partial accompaniment. FREE 1: A three note chord is recognized anywhere along the keyboard, overriding the Split Point. Less then three notes does not affect the chord recognition mechanism. Up to 4 chord notes are recognized by Free 1. FREE 2: As above, but up to 6 notes are recognized. The option selected can be stored to the Performances.

AUTO CHORD AND FIXED CHORD MODES

Chord recognition can be set to remain fixed rePress ENTER to confirm and proceed mode with the gardless of the keyboard setting, or to saving of the Waveform as described above. change automatically according to the change in If, instead, you to assign the un-assigned the want keyboard mode. samples, press Escape to cancel the message, assign the samples, then press Save again to AUTO CHORD MODE: active by default, allows proceed with the saveof operation. changes the chord recognition mode according to the selected keyboard mode (Full Keyboard, Upper&Lower or Multi). Given that the keyboard mode is memorized in a Performance, the chord recognition can change along with the Performance. FIXED CHORD MODE: allows you to set a chord recognition mode which does change with changes in the keyboard mode (and consequently any Performance changes). The option selected remains memorized after power down.

Note: The symbols of the recognized chord appear on the main Style display screen. If the

256 Reference Guide

Styles 53

Performances
A PERFORMANCE is a combination of up to 16 sounds either layered together or split across the keyboard in any configuration. Whatever playing mode you are using, Real time, Style or Song, it will always be governed by a Performance which determines how you play in real time, how you play the Style or the Song. Pressing one of the PERFORMANCE GROUPS buttons and selecting a PERFORMANCE will put the WK6/8SE in Performance play mode. You would use the Performances to play in real time with up to 8 sounds simultaneously. Other Performances which you can select from the panel are the Style Performances, available in Style mode when the SINGLE TOUCH PLAY button is on. Also available are the Song Performances when you are in Song mode. Lets take a closer look at the Performances and all the things you can do with them Performances without losing them. At any time, you can restore the original Performances with the RESTORE function.

REAL TIME PANEL OPERATIONS

Several panel operations can be carried out to change the status of the Performances while you play. For example, if you recall a single Performance, (one with only one sound active to play on the keyboard), you can activate one or more tracks to play with a combination of sounds. The Performance will still be the same one recalled, but modified so that more tracks are active to play. Some examples are given in the Quick Guide on pages 1.18-1.20. You can also change other Performance parameters, such as the track Volumes using the 8 panel sliders, or the keyboard mode, from Full to Upper/Lower, (split keyboard), to Multi using the corresponding Soft buttons. You can assign a different split point to the keyboard in Upper/lower mode, you can even assign different Sounds to the tracks. If you dont want to save the changes you make to your Performance, simply select another one and all the changes to the previous Performance will be lost. If, instead, you want to save the Performance, press the STORE PERFORMANCE button followed by ENTER to save the changes. The STORE PERFORMANCE operation is explained in greater detail on page. 3. 24.

SELECTING THE PERFORMANCES

To select them, simply press one of the Performance Group buttons and select a Performance with the corresponding soft button. In this way you can select all Performances which already exist in memory. In the Quick Guide, on page 1.31, youll find illustrated explanations relating to the selection of the Performances. Each Performance Group button recalls 8 Performances to choose from. In this way you can select all Performances which already exist in memory. There are 64 Performances from the factory and all are user-programmable. That is, you can save your modifications to any of the

Performances - Edit Performance 31

ARRANGE ON/OFF

When you turn the instrument on for the first time, Thanks to the STYLE LOCK function, you can or every time you select the GRAND PIANO Perdecide to select Performances and change Style formance from Group 1, the panel will default to every time, or simply recall keyboard sounds withStyles are a collection of musical patterns repreTHE WHICH CONTROL THE STYLES the power up situation with several buttons on, out changing theFUNCTIONS Style accompaniment. senting many types of music, ranging from rock The Styles controlled by a set of functions among them the ARRANGE ON/OFF button (LED LOCK is are on, (LED on), selecting and pop to traditional, Latin and Oriental When music STYLE which determine how they on). Performances recalls keyboard soundsplay. only. The automatic accompaniments of the Styles are triggered by the chord information received from the WK6/8SE keyboard; the accompaniment patterns change to suit the current chord. When STYLE LOCK is off, (LED off), selecting Performances recalls sounds for the keyboard This button enables the auto-accompaniments of BASS TO MIXER HARMONY TEMPO LOWEST LOCK ON / OFF ROM STYLES as well as a Style. LOCK the Style. InABOUT fact, if THE youWK6/8SE press the START/STOP The WK6/8SE has 192 auto accompaniment button and play a chord on the keyboard, an autoIn Real Time mode, when the ARRANGE ON/ ROM Styles arranged in 12 each Style accompaniment pattern will start toStyle play. Groups,OFF button is off (LED off), changing Performcontaining 2 banks of 8 Styles each. ances with STYLE LOCK on would be useful to If the ARRANGE ON/OFF button is off, (LED off), Topattern selectofathe Style, one of the STYLE play live with the Drum Track of the memorized only the drum Stylepress will play when ARRANGE ON/OFF GROUPS buttons, 16 se- Simply Style. press START/STOP the you press START/STOP. This (8 is Beat, useful toBeat, play etc) and When this button is on, to allstart the accompaniment lect a Style the Bank 1 selection window Drum pattern. When select other Performyour Performances live from with drum accompaniparts of a you Style are enabled. If it is not on, you with the corresponding soft buttons. To ances, select you could change real timetrack keyboard ment. will only hearthe the Drum when you press Bank 2 Styles, press the Page/Bank button sounds without changing the Drum pattern. Since the Performances can memorize any panel Start/Stop to start the Style. ( can).be programmed to recall a With STYLE LOCK off, you could select Performsituation, they ances and recall the Drum track of a different Style Style comprising the sounds for the automatic acARRANGE MODE FLASH STYLES and, if Tempo Lock is every time. companiments, a Variation Pressing this button gains access to the chord off, a TempoYour setting. In fact,may the also Performances instrument contain a set of Flash recognition modes for the accompaniments. are an alternative way of recalling user-proUser Styles. Refer to the Arrange mode paragraph on page grammed Style Performances, as you will dis5.3 for more information. cover further ahead.

Styles

STYLE LOCK

SELECTING AND PLAYING THE STYLES

Refer to pages 1.24-1.29 of the Quick Guide for illustrated examples of how to select the ROM Styles and Flash User Styles and how to use the automatic functions, (START/STOP, INTRO, ENDING, KEY START, TAP TEMPO, FILLS, FADE IN/OUT and VARIATIONS).

MEMORY
When this button is on, the accompaniment continues to play after releasing the left hand from the keyboard. When off, releasing your left hand causes the accompaniment to stop.

LOWER MEMORY
If this is on, the notes of the track assigned to the left hand (Upper&Lower and Multi modes) are held even if the left hand is taken away from the keys. The Lower Memory function is useful for holding on background sounds without having to use a Damper pedal (which may be of more use with the upper sounds).

32 Reference Guide

Styles 51

Programming the Performances

By selecting a Performance, all the settings memorized to the Performance are recalled in a single step. In addition to the panel changes, a Performance can also memorize other parameters, such as effect settings, the status of the controllers, (pedals, Pitch/Mod Trackball, etc.), the MIDI channel configuration and many others. Lets examine all the Performance parameters that can be modified and saved to the Performances. To construct a Performance, you start by selecting a number of sounds, or Tracks. A Performance can contain as little as only one Track or as many as 16 Tracks layered together. Regardless of how many Tracks you actually decide to use, you will always be able to view 16 Tracks within your Performance. How many of the sounds you actually decide to activate and use is entirely your choice. If you only decide, for example, that you want to layer three sounds together, then you only need to be concerned with the first three Tracks in the Multi Track List the display, therefore, the activation of the Track is made with the corresponding Soft button (AH) and other tracks can be brought into view with the Track Scroll buttons. The active tracks are shown by the track status icon in the left display column. If all the tracks are set to MUTE, you will hear no sound. The 8 panel sliders, (marked A-H underneath) adjust the volumes of the tracks shown in the display. Sound assignments are made using the SOUND GROUPS buttons and +/ Page/Bank buttons to scroll the banks. Sound assignments are best made with the DISPLAY HOLD function off, so that the display returns to the Performance you are programming every time you select a Sound.

EDIT MENU
Every track of the current Performance can be independently programmed in the Performance Edit Menus which are accessed with the buttons of the EDIT/NUMBER section.

MULTI TRACK LIST

The Track List can be viewed by pressing the MULTI button (F7/F8). If you are not currently in one of the default displays, press the Group 1 button of the Performances and select the Grand Piano Performance.

You can move from one Track to another with the Cursor up/down keys. The part shown selected (negative highlight) is the active zone of

The buttons which gain access to the Performance Edit Menus are Effects, Midi, Mixer, Control/Pads, Tracks and Sound. Press one of the Edit buttons to gain access to the parameters of the section. For example, if you press the MIDI button, you will gain access to all the MIDI parameters:

Performances - Edit Performance 33

Disk handling informationrameters exclusive to the tracks, such as Sec-

TRACKS/SPLIT: Here you can program the pa-

tion Transpose, Detune, Polyphony priority, VeIf youre new to working with floppy disks and These parameters would affect any sound locity. are not sure as to how you should handle you these decide to assign to the tracks being prodelicate accessories, please read this section for grammed. some useful information. Disk not protected Disk protected Use a :pen oryou other pointed object to set the tab SOUND/S.PATCH Here can program a set INSERTING DISK INTO THE DISK and DRIVE of sound edit An Edit Menu containsAseveral parameters asparameters shown. that would affect any options to choose from, most of which affect the Floppy disks must be inserted into the disksound drive you decide to assign to the tracks you are tracks of the label Performance you are programming. side up and shutter first. Push the diskprogramming. firmly HANDLING FLOPPY DISKS Those not examined in thisuntil chapter are, General, into the drive it clicks into place. This editor is explained in detail in the Sound When handling floppy disks, certain precautions Style/Song e Sound/S.Patch.. chapter of the Reference Guide, starting from should be taken to avoid damage or data loss. The tracks of the Performance in edit are shown page 2.4. Do not open the metal protection shutter or in the left track column DRIVE at all times, therefore you touch the surface of a disk can select your tracks without returning to the OPERATING All pages relating to the Performances the LED If your WK6/8SE has toshow be transported, make Multi Track list. ) in the top left hand corner, indicatletter P, ( sure that a floppy disk is not inserted in the The Edit sections that you would use to construct ing that the parameters of Vibration the current page are disk drive. may cause the disk drive your Performance are: Avoid forcing a disk into the drive and hold the memorized to the Performances. head to scratch the disk, rendering it unusadisk straight while inserting it. ble. Lets examine each Performance editor in detail, MIDI: Here you can assign MIDI channels, sestarting with MIDI. Do not store or place floppy disks in close lect the MIDI configuration, set the MIDI Filters, EJECTING A FLOPPY DISK proximity of television sets, computer moniand a host of other settings to set your Performtors, loudspeakers, or other devices that are Before ejecting a disk, make sure that the disk ance correctly for MIDI setups. potential sources of magnetic fields. Doing drive operating led is off and that the WK6/8SE so may render the disk unusable. display is not currently showing a Loading or MIXER: The mixer controls the final output of the Saving message. Do not store or place floppy disks in locasounds in your Performance. Essentially it lets tions subject to extremes of temperature and To extract the disk, press the eject button and you select volume, pan position and output jack humidity, direct sunlight, or excessive dust remove the disk. selection for each Track. Also available is a 3D and dirt. effect feature. Do not place objects on top of a floppy disk. EJECT BUTTON Return disks to their protective cases after EFFECTS: Here you can assign the effects that use. you would like to use, then, for each track, you can assign the amount of SEND to each effect.

THE WRITE PROTECT TAB

Floppy disks contain a writethe protect CONTROL/PADS : Here you can program on- tab which allowsthe you to protect valuable data from being board controllers: pedals, the pitch/modulaaccidentally overwritten. tion trackball, the Pads (1, 2, 3 and 4), and you To prevent to disk and so avoid accican decide which trackswriting of yourdata Performance will dental erasure, slide thewill tabnot. fully down to open be affected by them and which one the window. To permit writing data to disk, slide the tab fully up to close the window.

34 Reference Guide

Disk

431

MIDI
Under MIDI, youll find all the elements you need to program your Performances for any kind of MIDI setup.

CONFIGURATION (F2)

THE MIDI MENU

Use this option to set the track configuration of each of the 16 available tracks of your Performance. You can choose which tracks respond to MIDI In messages, which ones react with the instruments internal generator, which direct their messages to MIDI OUT and which ones do not respond to any information. Just like the MIDI channel parameter, the Configuration parameter is divided into four parts and the selected one is shown highlighted. Rotate the dial to change the setting and move to the next part with the right cursor arrow and so on.. When an icon is shown, the parameter is on;

MIDI CHANNELS (F1)

This option allows you to set the MIDI channel configuration for each of the 16 available tracks and assigns the MIDI IN port, (A or B), and MIDI OUT port, (A or B), for each track. Each track can have separate assignments for MIDI IN and MIDI OUT. Each Performance can have its own MIDI channel configuration. The parameter is divided into four parts and the selected one is shown highlighted. Rotate the dial to change the setting and move to the next part with the right cursor arrow and so on.. The first part represents the MIDI IN port, the second represents the MIDI IN channel, the third the MIDI OUT port and the fourth the MIDI OUT channel.

MIDI IN

keyboard/ Common Channel

internal sound generator

MIDI OUT

when OFF appears in place of the icon, the parameter is deactivated. MIDI IN ICON: When on (icon showing), the track responds to MIDI data received at the MIDI IN port. When OFF, the track does not receive external MIDI data. KEYBOARD/COMMON CHANNEL ICON: The track responds to the WK6/8SE keyboard, or to an external controlling device (master keyboard) transmitting to the WK6/8SE via the Common Channel. The common channel allows a remote controller keyboard to emulate the internal keyboard of the WK6/8SE.

MIDI IN port (A or B) MIDI IN channel (1...16)

MIDI OUT channel (1...16) MIDI OUT port (A or B)

Performances - Edit Performance 35

When OFF, the track does not respond to the GENERAL SETTINGS (F4) keyboard, but responds to MIDI IN messages, or it can be used by a Song or Style. This section explains the various options found in the main Disk pages ICON: and in the File Selector, INTERNAL SOUND GENERATOR The some of which are permanent, others events generated by the track are directed to the specific to a particular orthe disk page. internal sound engine. command When OFF, track is not connected to the internal sound engine, but Select the type of Sample-RAM with the cursor can send data to an MIDI device via the NEW FL. external DISK (F5) buttons and press ENTER to confirm. WK6/8SE MIDI OUT port. This a option provides settings that influence Updates the current directory after changing Once a RAM -Sound is loadedthe into memory, a instrument as a whole and are saved to the Gendisk inserted in the drive, allowing the instrument flag is applied to it to indicate which SampleMIDI OUT ICON: The events generated byPressing the eralF5 Setup. RAM contains the sounds associated sample. to recognize the disk change. the track are sent to an external MIDI device via the window: Soft button opens the following dialog When you save the RAM -Sound, the flag is WK6/8SE MIDI OUT port. When OFF, the track MIDI CLOCK: This allows you to select whether retained in the disk. does not transmit MIDI via MIDI OUT. the sequencer will synchronize to the WK6/8SE When load theclock. Sounds again, the RAM Internal clock or to you an External Sounds are directed to the Sample-RAM indiNote: WK6/8SE receives or transmits MIDI Clock cated by the flag. MIDI FILTERS You (F3) can also see the new directory by escaping on the same MIDI port (A or B) as the Common Note - If the Samples that you save with repeated Channel. Disk mode the re-entering.

Additional Disk functions

Options: On, Off. RAM, Backed Sample-RAM, volatile SampleRAM and any connected SCSI device (optional). MIDI MERGE: Allows the data BLOCK RENAME (F7) received at both Each Track has 14 filters available; 7 filters for MIDI IN 1 and MIDI IN 2 to beappears passed in to all MIDI This option, which File Selectors, MIDI IN and 7 filters for MIDI OUT. These filters OUT A and MIDI OUT Bto after having procallows you modify thebeen name of the selected allow you to specify up to 7 events which you do essed by theBlock. Performance settings. This means Use the standard method of name entry not want the selected Track to either send or rethat the MIDI data can by Entry the paragraph asIN described in be theprocessed Alphanumeric ceive. volume, transpose, MIDI etc. before being on page 1.10filters of the Quick Guide. sent to MIDI OUT. Options: Off, Program Change, Pitchbend, Mono touch, Poly touch, ControlChange 00...31, Options: On,BLOCK Off. On is (F8) the default setting. SIZE SAMPLE-RAM... (F8) ControlChange 64...127. Note: TheThis parameter cannot be appears programmed when option, which in all File selectors, This option allows you to select the Sample-RAM the COMPUTER port is the in use. See Computer. determines dimensions of the currently sethat is going to store your Samples. If your inlected Block. The information appears under the strument has been upgraded with additional SamMIDI IN TRANSPOSE: This allows the simple directory of the active File Selector. ple-RAM (optional kit), you will be able to choose pitch shifting, (in half step increments), of all data residing in according to your needs. The dimensions of the same Block received at MIDI IN. RAM and in disk can differ by a few kilobytes, Selecting the option opens the window where you Deactivating due this parameter useful to avoid to the factcan thatbe some Setup data in RAM is can choose between both types. unwanted transpositions when you program not saved to disk. Songs with a computer. A computer operates as a THRU device. After receiving data by a track

Save Single operations become too large for the available backed Sample RAM, the instrument will attempt CLOCK SEND: Selects whether or S-RAM not the(if WK6/ FREE MEMORY (F6) to save to the Volatile present). If there is 8SEs internal MIDI CLOCK information will be or the Volatile not enough space for the operation, This option displays the amount of memory resent via MIDI OUT. S-RAM is not present, the save operation will be inmaining in the floppy disk, Hard disk, Systemterrupted.

36 Reference Guide

Disk

429

which has been transposed, the computer can return the notes to the same track which will transpose them further. This will not occur if MIDI IN Transpose is deactivated. Options: On, Off. MIDI IN FIX VELOCITY: This function will increase the velocity of all notes received at MIDI IN by the specified amount. If this parameter is set to OFF, notes are received via MIDI IN with the correct velocity value. Options: Off, 1 ... 127. Hint: Some accordions transmit velocity at a fixed level, not able to be regulated. With this parameter, it is possible to modify the velocity value received by the accordion. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE: Setting this function to ON allows the reception and transmission of WK6/8SE system exclusive data via MIDI. Options: On, Off. SYSTEM EXC DEVICE ID: Sets the MIDI In and Out port and MIDI channel for system exclusive transmissions. The default settings are MIDI port A, channel 1.

SMF SAVE FORMAT: Allows you to set the MIDI File conversion format to 0 or 1 when saving Songs as MIDI files. Options: 0, 1. SMF LOAD MODE: provides two loading options for Midi Files. Copy 1st bar optimizes the data, converting all Program Change data and storing to the Song Performance. Normal ignores the optimization process and loads the SMF File without Program Change conversion. Options: Normal, Copy 1st bar. GENERAL MIDI: The G.M function allows optimum compatibility with the General MIDI standard. Before loading a G.M file from disk, set this function to ON. The table shown below lists the drumkit Program Changes according to the status of the parameter. Options: On, Off. BANKSELECT: Enables, (On) or disables, (Off) the reception and transmission of the BankSelect MSB (CC00) and BankSelect LSB (CC32) message. Options: On, Off.

MIDI channel 10, General MIDI On - conversion table (automatic) PC-GM 18 9 16 17 24 25 26 32 33 40 41 48 49 128 PC-BS WK6/8SE 113-2 114-2 115-2 116-2 117-2 118-2 119-2 120-2 Drumkit GM Standard Room Power Electronic TR-808 Jazz Brush Orchestra Drumkit WK6/8SE DK-STAND1 DK-ROOM DK-POWER DK-ELECT DK-HOUSE DK-JAZZ1 DK-BRUSH DK-ORCH

Performances - Edit Performance 37

COMMON CHANNEL/ARRANGEMENT (F5) MULTICOPY SCSI TO H.DISK

(F5) on. If, instead, you set ler keyboardEXECUTE was sending the controller keyboard to the COMMON Press EXECUTE (F5) to startCHANthe multicopy procThis option allows you to copy more than one NEL, it would play the complete Performance ess. Block file at a time (a batch) from a SCSI device exactly as though you were playing the internal of your choice to the Hard Disk. (F7) itself. keyboard of LIST the SIZE WK6/8SE 1. With the Multicopy SCSI to Hard Disk option This option allows you to The Common Channel is reserved tocalculate special the overall selected, press ENTER to open the SCSI dimension of the of current list and shows the free tracks dedicated to the control effects and other Drive selection window. parameters. space available at the destination.

Here you can program parameters that are common to all Performances.

COMMON CHANNEL: This channel, independent from the settings defined under the Channel 2. Select the allows drive and press conENTER to enter and Configurations pages, a remote CHORD CH.1 / CHORD CH..2: Here you can the file selector. troller keyboard to emulate the internal keyboard assign the Chord channels in order that a MIDI of the WK6/8SE. accordion can communicate with the WK6/8SE The COMMON CHANNEL should be used when Styles and auto accompaniments. you wish to play a GLOBAL PERFORMANCE or The parameter is divided into two parts. The first a STYLE from an external controller. Program part selects the MIDI channel (Off, 1 - 16). The change messages received on the Common second part selects the MIDI IN port (A or B). channel are interpreted as PERFORMANCE Chord to Arr.1: is dedicated to the auto chords. CHANGE messages. Chord to Arr.2: is dedicated to the auto Bass. The parameter is divided into three parts: the first 3. Prepare a list of Block files to copy. A MIDI controlling accordion can send notes for part selects the MIDI channel to assign to the the automatic accompaniment from the chord Select a Block and press ENTER to insert it Common Channel (IN and OUT), the second the into the list. The cursor moves to the from the bass section, or from both secMIDI IN port used by the Common Channel, (A down section, tions. next empty location automatically. or B) and the third the MIDI OUT port used by the Common Channel, (A or B). Repeat the operation for other Blocks.The Common Channel unites to these two channels and their notes contribute to the formation 4. Press EXECUTE MIDI IN port (A or B) to start the copy process. of the chord for the automatic accompaniment. Options: Off, 1 ... 16. MULTICOPY OPTIONS
DELETE (F1)

ProgramChange ControlChange data reBLOCK and SIZE (F8) ceived on the Common Channel select Style, Use this option to calculate the dimension of the Song, Performance, Effects and other parameters current Block. listed in the Appendix. Options: Off, 1 ... 16.

Select DELETE (F1) to cancel a Block from the MIDI OUT MIDI IN/OUT channel port (A or B) list. (1...16)
RESET (F2)selected a multi-track PerFor example, if you formance onSelect the WK6/8SE then tried to play RESETand (F2) to cancel a list containing this Performance external controller morefrom thanan one Block in a singlekeystep. board connected to either of the WK6/8SEs MIDI ALL (F3) only be able to play IN ports, youSELECT would normally Use Select All (F3) to select all the Blocks conone of the constituent parts of that Performance tained in the directory (SCSI or HD). depending on the midi channel that the control

38 Reference Guide

Disk

427

MIDI DUMP... (F6)

The DUMP menu allows you to transfer the contents of the WK6/8SEs internal memory to external storage devices, (such as Home P.Cs or MIDI Data Filers or another WK6/8SE), via MIDI. Selecting the MIDI DUMP option, (F6) opens a file type selection window where you can select the type of data to send to the external storage device or sequencer.

User Style: opens a selection window where you can select either All files or a single userprogrammed file. Song: opens a selection window where you can select either All files or a single Song (including relative Song-Performance).

Note: WK6/8SE receives and transmits the Dump on the same MIDI ports (A or B) as the Common Channel. The System Exclusive parameter in the General Set option of Edit MIDI must be set to ON (ON by default). The MIDI DUMP operation must be carried out while WK6/8SE is in Style/RealTime mode - Style not playing.

Select the desired file type then press ENTER to access the second level file selector.

TRANSMISSION OF DATA TO A SEQUENCER

Check that the external sequencer is able to record System Exclusive data. 1. Connect the MIDI OUT of the WK6/8SE to the MIDI IN of the sequencer. Use the MIDI port (A or B) assigned the WK6/8SE Common Channel. 2. Open the MIDI DUMP file selector and select the data that you want to transmit. 3. In the external sequencer, dedicate a track for the reception of the system exclusive data by assigning a generic MIDI channel (Any, All, or similar) and activate the recording in the sequencer. 4. Press ENTER on the WK6/8SE to start transmitting. A bar graph shows the progression of the transmission. Wait until the data transfer operation is complete. If the MIDI Dump aborted! - Check connections message appears, the transfer was unsuccessful. Check the cable connection and try again.

Use the direction arrows to select the desired file and press ENTER again to send the Dump. The options are: Setup: the current general settings of the instrument. Sound: opens a selection window where you can select either All files (including RAM-Waves, RAM-Sounds and RAM -Sounds) or a single file from the WK6/8SE Sound Library. Real Performance: opens a selection window where you can select either All files or a single Performance. Style Performance: opens a selection window where you can select either All files or a single user-programmed file.

Performances - Edit Performance 39

RECEPTION OF DUMP DATA FROM A SEQUENCER

It is not necessary to prepare the WK6/8SE to Use the HARD DISK RESTORE function to load receive a dump. Dumps can be received at any backup data from floppy disk back into the Hard time and the data will immediately be available The MIXER controls Disk. the final output of the sounds for use. in the current Performance. Insert a disk into the drive and press ENTER RESTORING BACKUP DATA TO THE HARD DISK WARNING - Sending system exclusive to WK6/ to start saving to the data disk. 8SE cancels all data of the same type currently re1. Insert the Floppy disk containing the backup When thethe Backup has finished, siding in memory. Save data you wish to con- a message THE MIXER MENU file or files into the drive. is displayed saying: Operation completed. serve before receiving the system exclusive data from an external unit. 2. Select Hard Disk Restore and press ENTER If the Backup procedure requires more than VOLUME (F1) to activate the function. one disk, a dialogue appears requesting the insertion of disk n. 2 and so on. The floppy disk may contain more than one backup file (shown with the .AR extension), With Local On (default setting) the WK6/8SE keyOVERWRITE (F1)internal sound engine. board is connected to the Select OVERWRITE (F1) if you When set to OFF, the built in keyboard ofwant the to overwrite data on disks previously used for other backups. WK6/8SE will be disconnected from the internal 3. Select the file to restore to the Hard disk and sounds. This option is selected by default. Here you can set the volume of each track. press ENTER to confirm. Activate Local Off to program Songs ex- the backup Deselect this function if on youan want Use either the DIAL or the sliders AH. Inselection PerConfirming the backup file opens a ternal sequencer using WK6/8SE as the con- stored in floppies tothe retain any data currently formance edit, each slider corresponds to a track second level display showing the Floppy disk trolling device. The WK6/8SE keyboard transthem. (track A = slider A and soon on...). directory the left and a column on the right mits data to the external sequencer, and the Value range: 0 ... 127. you can prepare a list of backup data COMPRESS (F2) where sequencer returns the data to the WK6/8SE into decompress. ternal soundSelect engine. COMPRESS (F2) to compress the files of the backup list. PAN (F2) This function is selected by default.

Mixer HARD DISK RESTORE

LOCAL ON, LOCAL OFF (F7) THE BACKUP OPTIONS

MIDI LOCK (F8) DELETE (F5)

Normally, your MIDIDELETE settings are as a a part Select (F5)saved to cancel block from the of the current Performance, (when you press the list. Store Performance button), and each PerformThe Delete option does not cancel ance can have its own distinct MIDI settings. If,a Block from the Hard Disk directory. however, you want the current MIDI settings to 4. Prepare a list containing the block(s) to reremain in effect, regardless of which Performance RESET (F6) store. you select, turn on the LOCK function. Select RESET (F6) to cancel in a single step Select Block the andpan press ENTER to insert it This a function lets you a select position list containing two or more Blocks. the list. Moving The cursor within the stereointo panorama. the moves Pan all down to the empty automatically. to the left or all next to the right,location you can direct the SELECT ALL (F7) sound to one output instead of both. for other blocks. Repeat the operation Use Select All (F7) to select all the Blocks conValue range: -31 If (all to the left) ... 0 insert (center) you attempt to a ...+31 Block that has altained in the Hard disk. (all to the right). ready been inserted, an appropriate warning is displayed. Press ESCAPE to cancel the EXECUTE (F8) warning and select a different Block. Use EXECUTE (F8) to start the backup process.

310 Reference Guide

Disk

425

RANDOM PAN (F3)

3D EFFECT (F5)

This function will automatically shift the pan position of the current track by a random amount whenever a new note is played. The amount of shift limited by the value you select. At maximum level, (7), the pan position may shift completely to the left or right channel Value range: 0 (no effects) ... 7 (maximum randomness).

The 3D effect is a spatializer which adds dimension to the WK6/8SE Sounds. BASS: A Bass equalizer which adds or removes the bass frequencies. Value range: 12dB +12dB 3D: A spatializer which affects the stereo outputs of the instrument. The effect is not heard if the instrument is connected to a mono amplification system. Value range: 3dB ... 12dB.

AUDIO OUT (F4)

Routing of the tracks to the audio outputs. The parameter is important only when the tracks are connected to the internal sound generation. Normally the WK6/8SE sends sounds to both LEFT and RIGHT outputs, but it is possible to send some tracks to the auxiliary 1 and 2 outputs, for an external mixing operation and a wider sound opening. The outputs selection also affects the internal amplification. Options: Left+Right, Out1+Out2, Out1, Out2.

Performances - Edit Performance 311

EffectsHARD DISK UTILITY

When you select the EFFECTS Edit button, the display will show a sub-menu with two editors: EFFECT and VOCAL PROCESSOR.

EFFECTS TYPEHARD (F1) DISK CHECK/RECOVERY

This procedure can restore a damaged Hard Disk to its original status. Damage to the Hard Disk can be caused by: a power failure during a Save operation; physical defects of the disk. If the Hard disk is damaged, an access attempt prompts a message similar to the following:

Here you can set up the actual effects that you would like your Performance to use from each This operation formats the Hard disk and is used DSP. If you are working on the keyboard tracks a when rapid cancellation of the HD contents is only, youd select the effects from Group A. If required. you are programming the accompaniment tracks Use the following recovery procedure as soon Here we explain EFFECT editor.WITH Although USE the THIS OPERATION EXTREMEof CAUa Style Performance, youd select your effects as possible. the Vocal Processor TION ! feature contains some Perfrom Group B. This means that your PerformGo to the Disk Utility A page and seformance parameters, theHard nature of this function ance processed by Hard two sets of DSPs. 1. Go to the Disk Utility page and select (ifcan be1. lect Hard disk check/recovery requires a separate explanation which youll find Style Performance, therefore, can play with a . necessary) the Format Hard Disk function. in a separate chapter on page 7.1 of the ReferThe Are you sure? with dialog window appears: set of effects respect The following dialog window appears: completely independent ence Guide. the to the keyboard tracks. To gain access to the Edit Effect parameters, select the Effect editor and press ENTER. The GROUP A EDIT EFFECT menu contains general paramEFF. 1: The 2. Reverb selector of Group A.the recovery of the Press ENTER to start eters that affect the instrument as a whole data. Assignable reverb types: refer to the lists in the (amount of general reverb), parameters that af2. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to canAppendix. Shortly after, another dialog window appears fect all the tracks of the Performance in edit (efcel. similarlevel to the below: fects assigned to the DSPs), and track paramVOL. General Reverb ofone Group A. a security measure, a second confirmaeters (amount ofAs effects sends). Assignable values: 0 ... 127. tion request appears: The DSP consists of four real time controlled units EFF. 2: The Modulation, (delay/chorus/flanger, which process the Performances with Reverbs etc) selector of Group A. and Delay/Modulation effects: two Reverb chanAssignable delay/mod types: refer to the lists in nels (A & B) and two Modulation channels (A & the Appendix. Such a message shows no errors. In cases B) are available. In Style/Performance mode, of errors, make a note of the VOL. General Modulation level of Group A. numbers shown channel A effects are reserved for the keyboard as they are useful to provide information for Assignable values: 0 ... 127. tracks and channel B the for Soft the accompaniment 3. Press button F1 (NOT ENTER) to technical assistance. EFFECT tracks. Each track can be processed by two efstart the Hard Disk format procedure, or ES- 2 TO EFFECT 1: Sets the quantity of Check feedback of Eff2into Eff1.version - Version of the test profects. When a Style is selected with the SINGLE CAPE to cancel. gram and data recovery. Assignable values: 0 (no feedback) ... 127 (maxiTOUCH PLAY button off, only the effects as Error found - Code relating to the error mum feedback of the signal). signed to the accompaniment tracks will change found. None appears in cases where no (Group B). When a Performance is selected with errors are encountered. STYLE LOCK on, only the effects assigned to the keyboard will change (Group A). WARNING - NEVER turn off the instrument while the Hard disk or disk drive are writing data (Save, Copy, In Song mode, each track can be independently Move, Erase operations). processed by either A or B channel effects.

FORMAT HARD DISK

312 Reference Guide

Disk

423

GROUP B
EFF. 1: The Reverb selector of Group B. Assignable reverb types: refer to the lists in the Appendix. VOL. General Reverb level of Group B. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. EFF. 2: The Modulation, (delay/chorus/flanger, etc) selector of Group B. Assignable delay/mod types: refer to the lists in the Appendix. VOL. General Modulation level of Group B. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. EFFECT 2 TO EFFECT 1: Sets the quantity of feedback of Eff2 into Eff1. Assignable values: 0 (no feedback) ... 127 (maximum feedback of the signal).

GENERAL EFF1 BALANCE (F3)

SEND LEVEL (F2)

Here you can adjust the overall Reverb level, regardless of the current Performance. This parameter allows you to adapt the reverberation of the WK6/8SE to the natural reverb of the surroundings. Assignable values: 0% (all dry) ... 100% (all wet). The value of 70% corresponds to the factory set value. The reverb duration varies according to the dimensions and absorption characteristics of the surroundings in which you play. You can program the WK6/8SE reverb in order to obtain the best results over headphones, or for home listening, and then regulate this parameter to adapt the reverb to the surroundings in which you play in public. The setting is not retained in memory at power down.

Here you can control the amount of effect (SEND) assigned to each track. In Style/Performance mode, you cannot switch Groups for the keyboard tracks and accompaniment tracks, therefore the Group A and B parameters cannot be selected. The parameter is divided into three parts, the first, (Group A or B), remains fixed, the second, (E1), and the third, (E2), relate to the Reverb and Modulation effect send levels for each track. In Song mode, the Group parameter can be switched from A to B and vice versa. Assignable values: 0 (dry) ... 127 (wet). A zero send level corresponds to no effect for the track.

EFFECTS PROGRAMMING (F4)

Here you can program the effects currently assigned to your Performance. The top section of the display (6 lines) relate to the Group A effects, while the bottom half to the Group B effects.

Performances - Edit Performance 313

The tables i the available effect SPEED 6. Appendix Pass into list thethe destination directory and se- (ROTARY EFFECTS): Time required to types. pass from slow to fast or vice versa. lect the destination. The parameters shown in the display will depend ROTARY: Slow/fast velocity. on the type of effects selected from the Eff.1 and SEMITONE: Transposition in semitone steps. Eff.2 DSPs. Below follows a brief explanation of all the parameters that you would encounter when programming your Performance effects. DETUNE: Detuning over a range of 100 Cents. LOW GAIN: Enhancement of the low frequencies.

MEDIUM GAIN: Enhancement of the mid freREV.TIME (REVERB TIME): Decay time of the quencies. reverb. In this case, use the Page scroll buttons to scroll through the Sound Groups Up/ GAIN: Enhancement of the high frequenHIGH DELAY (REVERBS): Initial delay between the and the directional arrows to scroll the cies. emission of the Down original sound (dry signal) and through individual Sound Group locations. the reverb (wet signal).

7. Press ENTER twiceDECAY): to Move the H.F.DECAY (HIGH FREQUENCY De-Sound file to cay of the high frequencies. parameter indithe selectedThe destination. cates the final frequency of the filter. The decay The file at the original location (in this case, of the high frequencies has a longer duration than 19-7) is cancelled and moved to the new lothat of the low frequencies. cation (in this case, 17-8). ROOM SIZE: Dimensions of the simulated room. The time lapse between first reflection Note: It is the not possible to move and a file to itself. Atthe remainder oftempting the reverb. to do so prompts the following message:
DIFFUSION: Duration of the reverb (Early type reverbs). L.P. FILTER (LOW PASS FILTER): Determines the cutoff frequency of the filter. Press ENTER ESCAPE to close the winDELAY (DELAYS): Velocity of or the delay repetidow and repeat the operation by moving to a tion. different destination. FEEDBACK (DELAYS): Interaction of the delay with itself. Determines the number of repetitions of the delay. FEEDBACK (PHASERS AND FLANGERS): Interaction of the phaser or flanger with itself. Determines the harmonic amount of the effect. FREQ.MODUL. (FREQUENCY MODULATION): Modulation velocity of chorus and flanger effects. DEPTH: Depth of the action of the effect. FEEDBACK (DISTORTION): Saturation of the distortion.

314 Reference Guide

Disk

421

Controllers/Pads
Here you can set up the Trackball, the pedals and the Pads, the on-board physical controllers for the Performance in edit.

PEDALS PROGRAMMING (F2)

TRACKBALL (F1)
Here you can assign a function to the pedals 1, 2 and 3. All three Pedals can be set to operate as either Switch or Continuous controls. Switch action pedals control on/off functions such as Soft, Sostenuto, Damper, Start/Stop, Fill, Rotary Slow/Fast, etc. Continuous control pedals control functions such as Volume, Expression, Pitch and Modulation. SWITCH functions: Off, Damper, Sostenuto, Soft, Start/Stop, Key Start, Intro, Fill <, Fill =, Fill >, Ending, Var 1, Var 2, Var 3, Var 4, Var >, Var <, Perf >, Perf <, Harmony, Bass to Low., Arrange On/Off, Fade In/Out, Tempo >, Tempo <, Punch, Rotary Slow/Fast, Minor, 7th, Dim, Min 7th, Maj 7th, Vocal On/Off, Vocal Custom 1-16, Vocal Mute, Vocal Chord, Vocal Vocoder, Vocal Unison, Freeze Chord. CONTINUOUS functions: Off, PitchBend, Pitch+, Pitch, Filter Cutoff Frequency (CC74), Resonance (CC71), Modulation (CC01), Breath controller (CC02), Volume (CC07), Pan (CC10), Expression (CC11), Vocal Volume. Refer to the Pedal function tables on pages 3.16 and 3.17 for brief explanations of each function.

Activates the action of the Trackball for single tracks. Each track can be independently programmed for the action of the Trackball. This controlling device is spring loaded to return it to the central position.
PITCHBEND Pitch Bend is applied by horizontal (left/right) movements of the Trackball. The parameter offers a maximum pitch excursion of 12 semitones and Off. The same control can be assigned to a continuous control pedal. See Pedals Programming (F2). MODULATION

Modulation is applied by vertical (up/down) movements of the Trackball. The parameter can be set to either On of Off. The same control can be assigned to a switch action pedal. See Pedals Programming (F2). Options: Pitch Bend: Off, 1...12. Modulation: Off, On.

Performances - Edit Performance 315

PEDALS ASSIGNMENT 6. Pass into the destination directory to THE select CONTINUOUS PEDAL FUNCTIONS the destination.
Off Pitch Bend No effect Applies Pitch Bend to the notes. The Pitch Bend sweeps from the maximum negative to maximum positive setting of the Pitch setting in the Performance Controls menu. The central position of the continuous pedal corresponds to 0 pitch. Increases the Pitch by the value set in the Pitch Controls menu. Decreases the Pitch by the value set in the Pitch Controls menu. Opens/closes the Filter Cutoff parameter in Edit Sound/S.Patch. Affects the Resonance parameter. Generates Breath controller (CC02) data (useful for external MIDI devices capable of recognizing this controller). Controls the general volume (CC07). Controls the Pan (CC10) from left to right. Controls the volume from 0 level to the maximum settings of the mixer levels. Controls the volume of the Vocal harmony track when using the Vocal Processor.

Here you can assign the pedals to the tracks of Pitch + your Performance. If necessary, select a Block in the Hard disk The pedal settings you choose can be stored to and press ENTER to access then select Pitch a the current Performance with Store Performance. destination.
Filter 7. Press ENTER twice to copy the file to the destination.

Resonance

Note: It is not possible to copy a file to itself. At- Cnt. Breath tempting to do so prompts the following message:

Volume Pan

Press ENTER or ESCAPE to close the winExpression dow and repeat the operation by copying to a different destination.
Vocal Volume

316 Reference Guide

Disk

419

THE SWITCH PEDAL FUNCTIONS

Off Damper Sostenuto No effect Applies the sustain effect to released notes. Sustains only the notes played at the time of pressing the pedal; notes played after pressing the pedal are not affected. Attenuates the sound. Simulates the Start/Stop button. Activates/deactivates the Key Start function. Activates the Intro. Activates the Fill< function. Activates the Fill function. Activates the Fill> function. Activates the Ending function. Switches to Variation 1. Switches to Variation 2. Switches to Variation 3. Switches to Variation 4. Switches to the next Variation. Switches to the previous Variation. Advances to the next Performance. N.B. To select Performances sequentially in increasing order, all those you want to recall should be programmed for the action of the Perf> function. Returns to the previous Performance. N.B. To select Performances sequentially in decreasing order, all those you want to recall must be programmed for the action of the Perf< function. Activates/deactivates the Harmony On/Off button. Activates/deactivate the Bass to Lowest function.

Fade In/Out Tempo > Tempo < Punch

Activates/deactivates the Fade In/ Out function. Increases the Tempo setting by one unit at a time. Decreases the Tempo setting by one unit at a time. Activates/deactivates the Punch recording function during recording operations. Changes the speed of the Rotary effect from Slow to Fast or vice versa. Converts the currently held chord to the minor chord. Converts the currently held chord to the diminished chord. Converts the currently held chord to the minor 7th chord. Converts the currently held chord to the Major 7th chord. Captures a Bitmap image of the current Display. Activates/deactivates the Vocal Processor for Vocal harmonies.

Soft Start/Stop Key Start Intro Fill < Fill = Fill > Ending Variation 1 Variation 2 Variation 3 Variation 4 Var > Var < Perf >

Rotary s/f Minor Dim Min 7th Maj 7th Hardcopy Vocal On/Off

Vocal Custom 1-16 Recalls custom Vocal Processor Voice settings. Vocal Mute Mutes the Vocal Track when using the Vocal harmonies.

Vocal Chord/Vocoder/Unison Switches from one Vocal Processor operating mode to the other. Freeze Chord Locks the current chord (pedal held), allowing you to play freely with both hands across the entire keyboard without triggering changes in the Style auto-accompaniment. The function deactivates at pedal release.

Perf <

Harmony Bass to Low.

Arrange On/Off Activates/deactivates the Arrange On/Off button.

Performances - Edit Performance 317

PADS (F4)

Vocal Chord/Vocoder/Unison - Switches from one Vocal Processor operating The four PAD buttons are independently programmode to the other. mable. Each button can be configured to react Hardcopy - Captures a bitmap image of according toUse the the settings ofcommand various parameters. Erase to cancel files no longer needed from a data storing device; Disk, Hard the current display (.BMP) into RAM. Disk or SCSI (if installed), or from RAM, to make The images can be saved to an MSDOS disk and elaborated by a graphic room for other files. program running on a personal The Erase File Selector does not operate becomputer. If you are erasing from a floppy disk, insert tween source and destination directories (as in PAD # the disk into the drive and check that the the Load and Save File selector), but on a single Floppy Disk option is selected (soft button Determines the Function to assign to the pad. directory contained in the device you are cancelF1. Functions assignable: Off, KeybAssign, Rotary ling files from. If you are erasing from the Hard Disk, select slow/fast, Vocal Vocal 1-16, EraseOn/Off, operations areCustom executed using the same the Hard Disk option with soft button F2. Vocal Mute, procedures Vocal Chord, Vocal Vocoder, Vocal are those described for the Load and Unison, Hardcopy. If you are erasing from a SCSI device (opSave commands. This section provides general tional), select the SCSI option with soft butOff - pad deactivated. information relating to the Erase operation. The Confirm (F1) - confirms the captured display. ton theF4. captured image to an MS-DOS disk. user- is encouraged apply the same logic Save to (F2) - saves KeyAssign The pad playstothe assigned Reset (F3) - cancels all captured images and liberates the Erase as those used for Load and note. The operations Volume, Pan, Transposition Press ENTER6to enter the file selector. RAM. Each4. image uses approx. KBytes of RAM. Save operations. and MIDI OUT channel settings correIgnore (F5) - closes the dialog window without capturing spond to following those of track 6. The Note and The example shows how to Erase a sinthe image. ProgramChange are defined by the folgle Song from RAM memory. lowing parameters which appear only when this option is selected PED./PAD LOCK (F8) SINGLE SONG PC -ERASE Program Change. Range 1128. When selected ( ), the Pedals/Pads Lock conC#0 - CC00: Control Change 00 (Bank serves the current pedal and pad programmed 1. MSB). Press Range DISK to enter Disk Mode and use the for all Performance and Style selections. Select 1128. status +/ Page/Bank ( ) buttons the C#32 - CC32: Control Change 32 (Bank to open To enable the of the Pedal/Pads param5. recall If necessary, select the Block containing the main ERASE page. does not reSelect LSB). This parameter eters, make surefile theto Padlock is open (unlocked). erase then press ENTER to access the quire a setting to play an internal WK6/ Block. Lock remains in memory after Select the desired ERASE command. The Pedals/Pads 8SE 2. sound. Range 1128. power down. It is saved to the Setup. Note - Determines the note played. 6. Select the file to erase. Range: C-1 to G9 Dynamic Note velocity. Range 0127 Rotary slow/fast - Switches the Rotary velocity from slow to fast or vice versa. Vocal On/Off - Activates/deactivates the Vocal Processor for Vocal harmonies. 3. Select the source device to erase from. Vocal Custom 1-16 - Recalls custom Vocal In Voice this case, select the RAM option with soft Processor settings. 7. Press ENTER twice to erase the file from the F3. directory. Vocal Mute button - Mutes the Vocal Track when

Erase operations

using the Vocal harmonies.

318 Reference Guide

Disk

417

Tracks/Split
Here you can program the parameters exclusive to the tracks, such as Section Transpose, Master transpose enable/disable, Detune, Random Pitch, Touch Sensitivity, Polyphony priority, Velocity. These parameters would affect any sound you decide to assign to the tracks being programmed.

DETUNE (F3)

TRANSPOSE (F1)

This allows you to adjust the fine pitch of the sound in steps of 1/64th of a semitone. Assignable values: - 630+63.

RANDOM PITCH (F4)

Here you can change the pitch of the sound in half tone steps, within a maximum range of 60 steps up or down. Assignable values: 600+60.

MASTER TRANSPOSE ENABLE/DISABLE (F2)

This function automatically applies a little detuning to the sound each time a new note is played. The amount by which it detunes the note is limited by the value you select. At maximum value, (7), this automatic detuning may be as much as a half step sharp or flat. Assignable values: 0 (no effect) ... 7 (maximum randomness).

TOUCH SENSITIVITY (F5)

Usually you will want to leave this set to ON. It confirms that this sound will be affected by the TRANSPOSE buttons on the front panel. In some situations, for example, when using drum kits, you may not want the track to be shifted. In this case, set this function to OFF (default setting).

This function enables or disables the tracks of

Performances- Edit Performance 319

the current Performance for Group the action the touch 4. Select the fileof from the RAM directoVELOCITY CURVE (F7) SAVE ALL sensitive keyboard. Tracks set to Off will not ry and its destination. Use Save All to save an entire set of file types react to velocity changes. contained in RAM in a single step. Assignable values: 0n, Off.

MODE/PRIORITY (F6)

SAVE ALL SONG PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE)

1. Select ALL SONG from the main Save page.

Provides a selection of Velocity response curves. As well as modifying the velocity data, velocity 5. Press ENTER twice to execute the command. curves allow the creation of crossfade effects between two tracks. For example, it is possible to assign two tracks with opposing dynamic curves (for example, two Selects the polyphonic/monophonic mode for the opposing linear curves [ex. 1 & 4], or two oppostracks and activates/deactivates the Priority oping exponential [ex. 2to &enter 5]. the FILE SELECTOR, then 2. curves Press ENTER tion (guaranteed minimum polyphony for the select the destination device (Floppy or Hard The resulting effect is one of hearing the sound track). of the second track fade in by gradually increasdisk). MODE: Sets the track to play monophonically ing the keystrike velocity while the sound of the (one note at a time) or polyphonically (two or more fist track fades out. Playing softly triggers one simultaneous notes). Mono R gives priority to sound and playing hard triggers the second. Playthe right note, Mono L to the left note, Mono T to ing with in between values creates a blend of the last note played. both sounds. Options: Poly, Mono L, Mono R, Mono T. PRIORITY: Setting this function to On gives the current sound priority of polyphony. This signifies that this particular sound will never have notes stolen by other Performance tracks or tracks of the sequencer. If you subsequently try to play this sound while all of the available polyphony is being used, it will steal the notes it needs from other tracks.
Note: Avoid assigning Priority=On to too many tracks, as this will cancel the function due to conflicts between the assigned tracks.

3. Select the destination Block in the disk diVELOCITY RANGE (F8) rectory, then press ENTER twice to start the saving procedure

The Velocity Range parameter is used to specify, for each track, exactly how and when it will be If necessary, select an empty location to creactivated from the . The limits applied atekeyboard a new Block using the method described allow the creation of cross-switching effects by in the Quick Guide, page 1.47. assigning tracks different velocity ranges. Warning: Use Save ALL with care as this proceFor example, to make a three part velocity dure overwrites all data at the switch, destination. B e absoactivate Tracks 1, 2 and 3 (using theof correspondlutely sure, therefore, the file content in disk before using the Save ALL procedures. ing soft buttons).

320 Reference Guide

Disk

415

Then assign the VELOCITY range as follows; Track 1 : 0 to 40 Track 2 : 40 - 80 Track 3 : 80 - 127 This will give you one sound across the whole keyboard. Depending on how hard you play, you will switch between three different sounds. Assignable values: Low range 0127 - High range: 1270. Press the Page ( ) button to pass to Page 2.

HARMONY (F1)

Duet: similar to Smart, but limited to two notes. Block: based on the harmonizing tables. Octave 1: doubles the note of the right hand by playing an octave higher. No left hand chord required. Octave 2: doubles the note of the right hand, one octave above as well as one octave below. No left hand chord required. Peterson: doubles the note of the right hand with a note two octaves below. No left hand chord required. Jazz: adds two notes above the note played by the right hand, at intervals of a fourth and a minor seventh. No left hand chord required. Rock: adds three notes of the perfect chord below the note played with the right hand. No left hand chord required.

TRACK
Allows you to choose from a selection of harmony types. The Harmony function is enabled and disabled by pressing the HARMONY button on the control panel. Harmony is a function that affects the instrument set to Styles/Performance mode when the keyboard is split (Upper/Lower and Multi modes). Songs are not affected. Selects the track to which the harmony type is assigned. Options: tracks 38

HARMONY TYPE STRUCTURES

HARMONY TYPE
Provides a selection of harmony types (defined by the structure chart shown below). Close: the notes of a chord played below the Split Point harmonize the melody of the right hand. The harmonizing chord is a closed (or tight) position and the notes of the left hand are copied to the right hand (see table). Open 1: an open chord (see table). Open 2: similar to Open 1 (see table). Smart: similar to Close, but based on the harmonizing tables.

Harmony example. The left hand plays a chord in C Major. The black notes represent the melody, the white note the harmony added by the Harmony option.

Performances- Edit Performance 321

DELAY (F2) SAVE MIDI FILE PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE)

Track 2:SAVE C3 to B3 GROUP Track 3:The C4 to B4 Group command offers a quick way of Save 1. Select SINGLE MIDI FILE from the main Save saving a Group of 8 elements in a single step. Track 4 : C5 to B5 page. Track 5: C6 to A8 Warning: The Group currently on disk or hard disk This will give you a five part split where you have is overwritten by the incoming Group. If, for exama different sound in each octave. ple, the User Style Group you are saving contains Assignable values: C8 . all User Styles of the destinaonly A0) one User Style,

Selecting a value here will cause the sound to be delayed for a brief period of time after a key is pressed. This allows you to create a number of This function, available only if you are working special effects real timeto delays The delay 2. using Press ENTER enter. the FILE SELECTOR and Group offers the mode, following possibilities: with a Song Save Performance in Song allows time value is shown inthe Ticks . These ticks (Floppy are select destination device oryou Hard to create multi-track Performances of more subdivisions of the beat based on the current disk). than 16 tracks. track you create has the SAVE Each GROUP REAL PERFORMANCE Clock Speed, (the tempo of the internal same default settings. Saves a Group of user-programmed Performsequencer). Each tick represents 1/192nd of a Press the Soft button F6Performance to open the Group Create ances to any destination on beat. Therefore if you set a delay time of 192, Track dialogue window: disk or hard disk. you will hear a delay of exactly one beat between when you press the key and when the sound is heard. SAVE GROUP USER STYLE 3. Select the Song to as a MIDI Assignable values: 0 (off)192 (1 save ) 384 (2 ) file from Saves a Group of up to 8 User Styles (and correthe RAM 576 (3 ) 768 (4 ). directory and select a .MID dessponding Performances) to any User Group destination in disk. Specify the Track number with the DIAL. tination on disk or hard disk. If the specified track number already exists, default KEY RANGE (F3) values are automatically assigned. SAVE GROUP SONG Press ENTER to confirm to cancel Saves Songs or as ESCAPE virtual Groups (Song Group 1 the operation. and Song Group 2 found in the Disk environment only). Each virtual group corresponds to the first 8 or second 8 locations of the Song memory. The COPY TRACK (F7) left column corresponds to the virtual SongsGroup 1 you and to the rightthe to Songs-Group This function allows copy settings of 2. If necessary, enter a Block (or sub-directory one track to another, saving time. The destinaThis function, available only the if you are working shown with .<DIR> extension) to gain tion track assumes all the programmed settings SAVE GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE with a Song Performance Song mode, assigns access toin other MIDI File locations. of the source track. Saves a Group of 8 Style Performance banks to a keyboard extension (highestselect and lowest notes) If necessary, an empty location to cre- the source Select track and press the soft button disk or hard disk, each bank containing up to 8 to each track, allowing you to program a multiate a new Block using the method described F6 to open the Copy track dialogue window. user-programmed Style Performances. Unlike split Performance. in the Quick Guide, page 1.47. other Groups, the Style Groups cannot be For example, to make a five part split, activate switched - they must be saved to their original 4. 4 Press twice to start the conversion Tracks 1, 2, 3, and 5 ENTER (using the corresponding locations. For example, Group 8 cannot be saved soft buttons). process. to any other location on disk other than Group 8. Then assign the Key ranges as follows, If you attempt save tocopy a destination Specify the number of theto track to to with other than Track 1: A0 to B2 the DIAL. the correct one, a user message will inform you

tion Group currently on disk will be cancelled and replaced by the new Group. Be sure of the contents of the Group data being overwritten before proceeding. CREATE TRACK (F6)

322 Reference Guide

Disk

413

Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel the operation.

Note: This operation does not copy the notes captured by the sequence. To copy the notes, use the Copy events function (in Edit Style or Edit Song).

Store Performance
Whenever you edit a Performance, you will, at some point, decide that you either want to save your new sound combination, or simply forget it and return to using the instrument as before. A modified Performance that has not been stored to memory shows a small mark at the top left hand corner before the name in the Performance selection window. If you want to cancel all your modifications, either select the same Performance again, or select another one. If you decide you want to store your Performance into the instruments memory, the next step will be to press the STORE PERFORMANCE button. Any Performance that you create yourself can be stored in the Global Performances or the Style Performances banks. During the storing process, you will first be asked to select a destination for your new Performance and then given the opportunity to name it.

ERASE TRACK (F8)

This function, available only if you are working with a Song Performance in Song mode, allows you to cancel tracks of the current Performance. In Style/Performance mode, it is not possible to erase any tracks. Select the track you wish to cancel. A track engaged by the sequencer cannot be erased. Press the soft button F8. You are prompted to confirm with Are you sure?: Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
Hint: Cancel Song tracks that are not used. The resulting Song file will occupy less memory on disk.

SAVING TO THE CURRENT PERFORMANCE

1. Press STORE PERFORMANCE to open the Store Performance dialog window:

2. Press ENTER to save. To change the name of the Performance, press the soft button F7 or F8 and change the name using the keys of the keyboard. You can refer to the method described in the Alphanumeric Entry paragraph on page 1.4 of the Quick Guide. Press ENTER to confirm the name and return to the Store window.

Performances- Edit Performance 323

3. Press ENTER again to save the Performance with the new name.

Save operations

5. Move down to the Perf option with the cursor button [ ] and select the destination Performance or Style Performance with the DIAL.
Note : If you assign a new block the name AUTOLOAD.BLK, you can load the Block into RAM automatically on a future occasion by turning the instrument on with the floppy disk inserted in the drive. Naturally, only one Block with the name AUTOLOAD can exist in a disk.

TO SAVE TO AThe DIFFERENT PERFORMANCE Save procedures operate in the direction

RAM > Destination where the destination can 1. Press STORE PERFORMANCE. be Floppy disk, Hard disk or SCSI (optional). The WK6/8SE RAM is backed by a rechargeable battery to safeguard the data when the instrument is turned off. For security reasons, however, it is necessary to store your data to floppy SAVE SINGLE SETUP 6. The If you want to give the Performance a new disk or Hard disk with the Save command. Saves a function Setup file to a Block floppy disk or name, press the buttons F7/F8on and RAM should be considered as a work area which Hard Disk. The Setup corresponds insert a name using the text insertion meth- to the concan be continually updated, not as a data stor2. Select the Performance or Style-Performance figuration of the instruments global parameters od already described in the Quick Guide. age device. option with the / cursor arrows. (Edit General status) that determine how the Have a new or used disk ready to save data to. machine operates, regardless of the contents of These can be WK6/8SE format disks or standRAM. Saving a Setup file to a Block overwrites ard MS-DOS disks for the exclusive storage of the existing Setup file without affecting other data. 3. Select the Store To Group option with the MIDI files. You can also save MIDI Files to WK6/ Only one Setup file can be saved in each Block. cursor button [ ] and rotate the DIAL to se8SE format disks. lect the destination Performance or Style PerYou can create different Setup files for particular Check that the floppy disk is not write protected formance Group. occasions. For example, one for home sessions, if so, remove the protection beforehand. If you one for shows, one for piano-bar 7. Press ENTER tolive confirm or ESCAPE to can- work, etc. forget to do this, the instrument will prompt you cel. with an appropriate message when you attempt SINGLE SONG example of this You can SAVE also refer to another to save to the disk. Saves Songs to of disk at a time. If you have procedure on page 1.33 theone Quick Guide. Save operations are characterized by an addialready loaded some MIDI Files to RAM, use this tional option: the creation of a new Block if necprocedure to convert the files to WK6/8SE foressary. mat songs. 4. If you are saving a Style Performance, select WARNING - Do not save data to the original disks Hint: A Block can hold up to 16 Songs divided into supplied with the instrument. As the Style option with the cursor button [ a ] precautionary two virtual groups. If no empty locations are shown, measure against data loss, always check that your and rotate the DIAL to select the destination it means that the block is fully occupied. In this case, original disks are write protected. Style. either overwrite an existing Song that you dont mind

SAVE SINGLE
The Save Single command offers the following possibilities:

losing, or close the Block with ESCAPE, then select an empty location and press ENTER to create a new Block.

SAVE SINGLE PERFORMANCE

Saves a single user-programmed Performances (Real) to any of the 64 locations of the Performance Groups (1-8) on disk or Hard disk. The incoming Performances overwrite those present on the storage device.

SAVE SINGLE BLOCK

Saves the entire contents of RAM to disk or Hard disk in a single step. Block data contains: a Setup file, Sounds, Performances, ROM Style Performances, User Styles (and relative Performances) and Songs (and relative Performances), all housed in their respective Groups.

324 Reference Guide

Disk

411

Disk - Hard disk - SCSI

The DISK section of the WK6/8SE allows you to work with a number of different types of storage devices. Press the DISK button to enter the DISK mode. SCSI: This option will only be available if your instrument has been fitted with the optional SCSI interface. Both WK6/8SE models are predisposed for the installation of the optional SCSI kit. Any connected SCSI devices, (CD-ROM, Zip, Jaz, or other removable media), can be accessed with this button. After selecting the device that you want to work with, you next choose which type of operation you want to perform, LOAD, SAVE, ERASE, COPY, MOVE, UTILITY (Floppy, Hard Disk, SCSI).

SELECTING THE STORAGE DEVICE

The first step of any disk operation should be to select the type of device you want to access. There are three choices available:

CHOOSE THE DESIRED DISK COMMAND

Press the +/ PAGE/BANK buttons to select the type of operation you want to work with. For the LOAD, SAVE, ERASE and MOVE operations, the main display divides into two parts: on the left, three options which determine how many files will be handled, on the right, the type of file being handled. Specify your requirement by combining the File Quantity in the left column with the File Type in the other: For example: To load a single Song, specify SINGLE and SONG in the main LOAD page.

Floppy disk: The WK6/8SE can work with MSDOS formatted disks, either HD, (1.44 Mbytes) or DD, (720 Kbytes). Alternatively, the instrument can use its own special format, (1.62 Mbytes) which, while being less interchangeable than the MS-DOS format, allows you to use more space on a standard floppy disk. Hard disk: This option gains access to the Blocks of the internal Hard disk drive, (2.5 inch IDE type). The Hard Disk is standard for the WK8SE while for the WK6SE, an optional Hard Disk installation kit is available from Generalmusic.

Disk

41

LIMITATIONS 4. Select the User Group that you wish to load THE FILE SELECTOR LOAD ALL its corresponding destination (1, specified, Some file types and cannot be handled more than in RAM Once Use Load press ENTER All to load to confirm an entire your set of file types 2, 3Files, or 4).for example, can only one at a time. MIDI selection in in the a main singleDISK step. page and enter the
be handled using the SINGLE MIDI FILE operation. Other files can be handled as Single elements, Groups and All sets, while some are limited to Single and All operations only. The table below shows the valid commands for each file type:
File Type Block Setup Sound Command Single 5. Press ENTER twice to load the User Style Single Group file to memory.

file Selector. The File selector is where you can 1. Select ALL SONG from the main Load page. select the source files and respective destinations.

Single, Group, All Again, User Style Groups can be interchanged. For the display divides into two parts. On the left is the directory of the file origin (floppy, hard Group 3 All on floppy disk can Real Performanceexample, User Single, Group, disk, etc.) and on the right side is the main direcbe loaded to User Group, GroupAll 1 in RAM. Style Performance Single, tory of something called RAMFILE (Random AcUser Styles Single, Group, All cess Memory). This is the name given to the Song Single, Group, All WK6/8SEs internal memory. Everything currently stored in memory, Sounds, Performances, MIDIFile Single Styles, Songs, etc., are contained in the RAMFILE. Depending on the type of file selected in the main page, the RAM lists the files 3. Select the directory Block containing the Songs recurrently residing in thefrom instruments memory. quired the source directory then press ENTER twice to start the loading For example, if you selected Save Single Song procedure. in the main page, entering the File Selector will : Use Load ALL with care. If, for examshow the RAM Warning directory listing all the Songs ple, the disk-based All User Style data contains present in the WK6/8SE RAM memory. only one User Style, all your User Styles currently in RAM will be irremediably lost through Empty locations are represented by a broken line. cancellation by the incoming file. occupied Be absolutely sure, therefore, If you select a destination already by a that your Sounds, Songs, Styles and Performances file, the existing file is replaced by the incoming are safely stored to Disk or Hard Disk before using one. the Load ALL procedures.

2. Press ENTER to enter to the File Selector

Load All offers the following possibilities: Load All Song: loads up to 16 Songs; Load All Sound: an unspecified number of RamSounds and RAM -Sounds; Load All Real Perf: loads up to 8 Groups of Performances; Load All Style Perf: loads up to 12 Groups of Rom Style Performance banks, each containing up to 8 Style Performances;

42 Reference Guide

Disk

49

THE GENERAL DISK PROCEDURE

Use the following procedure as a reference for all the Disk operations. Some specific examples are also explained in this chapter.

1. If you are working with floppy disks, insert a disk into the drive and press DISK.
If you are working with the Hard Disk simply press DISK. The disk name is shown at the top of the left column. If the disk has no name, the name UNTITLED or other will be shown.

2. Use the +/ Page/Bank button to choose which type of operation you want to perform, LOAD, SAVE, ERASE, COPY, MOVE, UTILITY. 3. If necessary, select the storage device that you want to work with using the soft buttons F1, F2, F3.
Load and Save operations show the Floppy Disk, Hard Disk and SCSI options. If the SCSI port has not been enabled with an appropriate optional installation kit, this option will not be available. Erase, Copy and Move operations show the options Floppy Disk (F1), Hard Disk (F2), RAM (F3) and SCSI (F4).. Utility is an exception, discussed afterwards.

6. Select a Block and press ENTER to gain access.

The contents of the opened Block reveals the file type selected in step 4 (in this case, several Songs in numerical order).

4. Specify the desired command with the directional arrows (for example, Load Single Song). 5. Press ENTER to confirm the command and open the File Selector.
The Wait Please message appears for an instant before opening the File Selector. The File selector now shows the source directory which may consist of one or more BLOCKS to choose from in the left column. In the right column is the destination directory representing the sector of RAM corresponding to the file type being handled (in this case the empty Song memory).

At the bottom of both columns, information regarding the selected file will appear. In this case, the left column shows the date that the file was created and its dimensions expressed in Kb. The right column is blank and represents the empty destination.

7. If necessary, select the source file and its destination.

Empty locations are identified by a broken line. If you select an existing file, it will be erased by the incoming file.

Disk

43

display example of the previous page, 8. Press ENTERIn tothe confirm your choice. the disk directory shows the presence of one You will be prompted with Are you sure?. Percussive Sample (GRV.bpm 106) with Pr. Change and Bank Select number 114-6.

LOAD GROUP
The Load Group command offers a quick way of loading a Groups of 8 elements at a time.
Warning: The Group currently in memory is overwritten by the incoming Group. If, for example, the User Style Group you are loading contains only one User Style, all User Styles of the destination Group currently in RAM will be cancelled and replaced by the new Group. Be sure that your Group data are safely saved to Disk or Hard Disk before proceeding.

4. Select (if necessary) the Sample and its corresponding destination in RAM (114-6). 9. Press ENTER Sound again to execute command, Groups (1,the 2, 15, 16). In this case, or ESCAPE to cancel the operation. scroll to Group 15 (Percussive - example A).
With ENTER, the command is executed and a dialog window opens showing a message relating to the current operation. For example, if you are loading a single Song, the message will say: Loading Single Song.... When the dialog window closes, the operation has been executed. Use the +/ Page/Bank buttons to scroll the

Load Group offers the following possibilities:

LOAD GROUP REAL PERFORMANCE

Loads a Group of up to 8 user-programmed Performances to any Performance Group destination (1 - 8).

10. Repeat steps 6, 7, 8 and 9 until your destiUse the directional arrows to scroll to the nation is organized according your re- 6) and desdesired Bank (in thisto case, bank quirements. tination (Program Change 114 - example B).
To select another file from a different block, return to the source column, press Escape to escape the current Block, press Escape again to exit the File Selector, select another Block, press Enter to gain access and continue as already described.

LOAD GROUP USER STYLE

Loads a Group of up to 8 User Styles (and corresponding Performances) to any User Group destination.

LOAD GROUP SONG

Loads Songs as virtual Groups (Song Group 1 and Song Group 2 found in the Disk environment only). Each virtual group corresponds to the first 8 or second 8 locations of the Song memory. In fact, in normal conditions when you press the Song button to select a Song, the song selection display shows two columns, left and right. The left column corresponds to the virtual SongsGroup 1 and the right to Songs-Group 2. This feature is particularly useful for the WX Series Songs disks which contain Song Groups containing up to 8 Songs each.

11. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit Disk. 5. Press ENTER twice to load the Sample file to Pressing DISK escapes the Disk operations memory.
and remembers the last page selected. Note: Itallows is recommended load Sounds Pressing ESCAPE you to (1)to close the and Samples to their original locations to facilitate the on-board current Block, (2) close the file selector and file search facilities, but you are free to load them to (3) escape from Disk. any Group.

LOAD GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE

Loads a Group of 8 Style Performance banks, each bank containing up to 8 user-programmed Style Performances. Unlike other Groups, the Style Groups cannot be switched - they must be loaded to their original locations in memory.

44 Reference Guide

Disk

47

Load Operations
The load operations operate in the direction Source > RAM where the source can be Floppy disk or Hard disk.

LOAD SINGLE MIDI FILE

Loads disk-based MIDI files to RAM one at a time Loading MIDI Files into RAM automatically converts the files into WK6/8SE format Songs. The Load MIDI File procedure is almost identical to Load Single Song. In this case instead of Song names, youll see a list of files in the source directory with the .MID extension. In some cases, other names appear which represent subdirectories containing other MIDI Files. Important: When you load a MIDI File, track 17 is created automatically in order to be able to play along with the Song in playback.

LOAD SINGLE
The Load Single command offers the following possibilities:

LOAD SINGLE BLOCK

Rewrites the entire contents of RAM. Block data contains: Setup file, Sounds, Performances, Style Performances, User Styles (and relative Performances), Songs (and relative Performances).

LOAD SINGLE SOUND LOAD SINGLE SETUP

Loads a Setup file into RAM. Setup files contain information relating to the status of the instruments general functions (Tuning/Scale, Audio Mic/Line settings, MIDI Lock status, MIDI channel configurations, Pedals Lock status and the Pedals configuration). Load a disk-based Setup file when you want to change the general status of the instrument in a single step instead of programming the individual parameters that constitute a Setup file. Loading a Setup file into RAM does not affect other data. Only one Setup file resides in each Block. Loads single disk-based sounds to the Sound Bank destinations. Loads Ram-Sounds as well as RAM-Sounds. The Load Single Sound procedure is characterized by an increased number of steps, owing to the fact that there are 16 Sound Groups, each consisting of 8 Banks of 16 slots. You can choose to load your Ram-Sounds anywhere you want, but it is recommended that you load to the original Sound Group to facilitate future selection. Load Single Sound also features a Sound Search function. Owing to the large WK6/8SE Sound library, you might find it easier to pass directly to a Sound bank by specifying the name of a Sound that occupies a particular bank. From there, you can then easily select a destination for the Sound being loaded. The Sound Search procedure is explained in detail on pages 4.28.

LOAD SINGLE SONG

Loads Songs to RAM one at a time. This operation allows you to choose single Song files from various different blocks and load to RAM in a preferred order. WK6/8SE can load Songs from disk in its own format (Song), in previous compatible formats (WK, SK, PS, WX, SX), in standard MIDI file format 0 or 1 and in Tune1000 format.

Disk

45

LOAD SINGLE REAL PERFORMANCE

Loads a single Performance to any of the 64 loUse a disk known to contain a Sample to load to cations of the Performance Groups (1-8). The memory, or load from Hard Disk. For this proceThe load operations operate in the direction LOAD SINGLE MIDI FILEwith additional incoming Performances overwrite those in RAM. dure, your instrument is equipped Source > RAM where thecan source can be Floppy The original factory-set Performances be reSample RAM. Loads disk-based MIDI files to RAM one at a time disk or Hard disk. stored at any time with the Restore Performance Loading Files into RAM automatically con1. Insert the disk inMIDI the drive, press DISK and operation. verts the files into WK6/8SE format Songs. The select SINGLE SOUND from the main Load Load MIDI File procedure is almost identical page. to Load Single Song. In this case instead of LOAD SINGLE LOAD SINGLE USER STYLE The Load Single command offers Song names, youll see a list of files in the source Loads a single User Style and associated Userthe following possibilities: directory with the .MID extension. In some Style Performances to any location in the USER cases, other names appear which represent subStyle Groups (1-4). directories containing other MIDI Files. LOAD SINGLE BLOCK Important: When you load a MIDI File, track 17 the entire contents of RAM. Block data LOAD SINGLERewrites STYLE PERFORMANCE is created automatically in order to be able to play contains: Setup file, Sounds, Performances, Style Loads a single bank of up to 8 user-programmed along with the Song in playback. Performances, User Styles (and relative PerformStyle Performances to the original ROM Style ances), Songs (and relative Performances). Performance bank. These Performances can-

Load Operations

LOAD SINGLE SOUND (EXAMPLE)

2. Press ENTER to gain access to the File SelecLOAD SINGLE SOUND not be loaded to locations other than the original tor. SINGLE SETUP Loads single disk-based sounds to the Sound source StyleLOAD Performance bank. For example, Bank destinations. Loads Ram-Sounds as well the Style Performances of file Style cannot be files contain Loads a Setup into59 RAM. Setup as RAM-Sounds. loaded to any other location of the Styles. information relating toROM the status of the instruments general functionsother (Tuning/Scale, Audio The Load Single Sound procedure is characIf you attempt to load to a destination than Mic/Line settings, MIDI status, terized by an increased number of steps, owing the correct one, a user message willLock inform you MIDI chanconfigurations, Pedals Lock status and the to the fact that there are 16 Sound Groups, each of your errornel with the following message: Pedals configuration). Load a disk-based Setup consisting of 8 Banks of 16 slots. You can choose file when you want to change the general status to load your Ram-Sounds anywhere you want, of the instrument in a single step instead of probut it is recommended that you load to the origigramming the individual parameters that constinaldisk Sound Group to facilitate future The floppy directory may show the pres- selection. tute a Setup file. Loading a Setup file into RAM ence of Load several blocks, one containing the Single Sound also features a Sound Search Press ESCAPE close the message doesto not affect other data. and Onlytry one Setup file Sample,function. another User Styles, etc.. The inOwing to the large WK6/8SE Sound again, this time selecting theBlock. correct destination. resides in each struments RAM directory shows the ROM library, you might find it easier to pass directly to sounds of the first Group (Piano). the name of a Sound a Sound bank by specifying LOAD SINGLE SONG that occupies a particular bank. From there, you 3. Select (if necessary) the Sample Block and can then easily select a destination for the Sound Loads Songs to RAM one at a time. This operapress ENTER toloaded. gain access. being The Sound Search procedure is tion allows you to choose single Song files from explained in detail on pages 4.28. various different blocks and load to RAM in a preferred order. WK6/8SE can load Songs from disk in its own format (Song), in previous compatible formats (WK, SK, PS, WX, SX), in standard MIDI file format 0 or 1 and in Tune1000 format.

46 Reference Guide

Disk

45

In the display example of the previous page, the disk directory shows the presence of one Percussive Sample (GRV.bpm 106) with Pr. Change and Bank Select number 114-6.

LOAD GROUP
The Load Group command offers a quick way of loading a Groups of 8 elements at a time.
Warning: The Group currently in memory is overwritten by the incoming Group. If, for example, the User Style Group you are loading contains only one User Style, all User Styles of the destination Group currently in RAM will be cancelled and replaced by the new Group. Be sure that your Group data are safely saved to Disk or Hard Disk before proceeding.

4. Select (if necessary) the Sample and its corresponding destination in RAM (114-6).
Use the +/ Page/Bank buttons to scroll the Sound Groups (1, 2, 15, 16). In this case, scroll to Group 15 (Percussive - example A).

Load Group offers the following possibilities:

LOAD GROUP REAL PERFORMANCE

Loads a Group of up to 8 user-programmed Performances to any Performance Group destination (1 - 8).

Use the directional arrows to scroll to the desired Bank (in this case, bank 6) and destination (Program Change 114 - example B).

LOAD GROUP USER STYLE

Loads a Group of up to 8 User Styles (and corresponding Performances) to any User Group destination.

LOAD GROUP SONG

Loads Songs as virtual Groups (Song Group 1 and Song Group 2 found in the Disk environment only). Each virtual group corresponds to the first 8 or second 8 locations of the Song memory. In fact, in normal conditions when you press the Song button to select a Song, the song selection display shows two columns, left and right. The left column corresponds to the virtual SongsGroup 1 and the right to Songs-Group 2. This feature is particularly useful for the WX Series Songs disks which contain Song Groups containing up to 8 Songs each.

5. Press ENTER twice to load the Sample file to memory.

Note: It is recommended to load Sounds and Samples to their original locations to facilitate the on-board file search facilities, but you are free to load them to any Group.

LOAD GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE

Loads a Group of 8 Style Performance banks, each bank containing up to 8 user-programmed Style Performances. Unlike other Groups, the Style Groups cannot be switched - they must be loaded to their original locations in memory.

Disk

47

For example, Group 8 cannot be loaded to any THE GENERAL DISK PROCEDURE LOAD GROUP USER STYLE PROCEDURE (EXAMother location in RAM other than Group 8. PLE) Use the following procedure as a reference for If you attempt to load to a destination other than Use a disk known to contain User Style Groups all the Disk operations. Some specific examples the correct one, a user message will inform you to load to memory, or load from the Hard Disk. are also explained in this chapter. of your error with the following message:

Insert the disk in the drive, press DISK and 1. If you are working with floppy disks, 1. insert select GROUP USER STYLE from the main a disk into the drive and press DISK. Load page. The disk name is shown at the top of the left If you are working with the Hard Disk simply
press DISK. Press ESCAPE to close the user messagebutton and to choose 2. Use the +/ Page/Bank try again, this time selecting the correct destinawhich type of operation you want to pertion. form, LOAD, SAVE, ERASE, COPY, MOVE, column. If the disk has no name, the name UNTITLED or other will be shown.

6. Select a Block and press ENTER to gain access.

The contents of the opened Block reveals the file type selected in step 4 (in this case, several Songs in numerical order).

UTILITY.

3. If necessary, select the storage device that you want to work with using the soft but2. Press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SEtons F1, F2, F3. LECTOR.

Load and Save operations show the Floppy Disk, Hard Disk and SCSI options. If the SCSI port has not been enabled with an appropriate optional installation kit, this option will not be available. Erase, Copy and Move operations show the At the bottom of both columns, information options Floppy Disk (F1), Hard Disk (F2), regarding the selected file will appear. In this RAM (F3) and SCSI (F4).. case, the left column shows the date that the Utility is an exception, discussed afterwards. The floppy disk may show the pres- expressed file directory was created and its dimensions ence of several blocks, one containing the and repre4. Specify the desired command with the diin Kb. The right column is blank Sample, another User Styles, etc.. sents the empty destination. rectional arrows (for example, Load Sin-

3. Select the Block and press ENTER to file and its 7. Styles If necessary, select the source gain access. destination. 5. Press ENTER to confirm the command and open the File Selector. Empty locations are identified by a broken
line. If you select an existing file, it will be The Wait Please message appears for an erased by the incoming file. instant before opening the File Selector. The File selector now shows the source directory which may consist of one or more BLOCKS to choose from in the left column. In the right column is the destination directory representing the sector of RAM correIn this example, the disk directory shows the sponding to the file type being handled (in presence of two User Style Groups (User 3 this case the empty Song memory). and User 4).

gle Song).

48 Reference Guide

Disk

43

4. Select the User Group that you wish to load and its corresponding destination in RAM (1, 2, 3 or 4).

LOAD ALL
Use Load All to load an entire set of file types in a single step.

1. Select ALL SONG from the main Load page.

5. Press ENTER twice to load the User Style Group file to memory.
User Style Groups can be interchanged. For example, User Group 3 on floppy disk can be loaded to User Group 1 in RAM.

2. Press ENTER to enter to the File Selector

3. Select the Block containing the Songs required from the source directory then press ENTER twice to start the loading procedure.
Warning: Use Load ALL with care. If, for example, the disk-based All User Style data contains only one User Style, all your User Styles currently in RAM will be irremediably lost through cancellation by the incoming file. Be absolutely sure, therefore, that your Sounds, Songs, Styles and Performances are safely stored to Disk or Hard Disk before using the Load ALL procedures.

Load All offers the following possibilities: Load All Song: loads up to 16 Songs; Load All Sound: an unspecified number of RamSounds and RAM -Sounds; Load All Real Perf: loads up to 8 Groups of Performances; Load All Style Perf: loads up to 12 Groups of Rom Style Performance banks, each containing up to 8 Style Performances;

Disk

49

Load All User Style: loads up to 4 Groups of User Styles (including all associated User Style Performances).

Disk - Hard disk - SCSI

SCSI: This option will only be available if your instrument has been fitted with the optional SCSI interface. Both WK6/8SE models are predisposed for the installation of the optional SCSI kit. Any connected SCSI devices, (CD-ROM, Zip, Jaz, or other removable media), can be accessed with this button. After selecting the device that you want to work with, you next choose which type of operation you want to perform, LOAD, SAVE, ERASE, COPY, MOVE, UTILITY (Floppy, Hard Disk, SCSI).

The DISKAND section of the WK6/8SE allows you to LOAD WX/SX SONGS STYLES

work with a number of different types of storage WK6/8SE can load Songs and Styles from the devices. following previous format disks: Press the DISK button to enter the DISK mode. WX2, WX400, WX Expander, SX2, SX3 The loading procedures are identical to those used for WK6/8SE Songs and Styles. The Blocks however show the .WXS extension instead of .BLK. Furthermore, WX2/SX2 disks contain one Block only. WX Songs disks contain Song Groups consisting of up to 8 Songs each. For this purpose, the WK6/8SE Disk environment contains two virtual SELECTING THE STORAGE DEVICE Songs Groups (1 and 2) specific for the WX SeThe first step of any disk operation ries disks. Refer to the Load Group procedureshould be to select the type of device you want to access. explained on page 4.8. There are three choices available:

CHOOSE THE DESIRED DISK COMMAND

Press the +/ PAGE/BANK buttons to select the type of operation you want to work with. For the LOAD, SAVE, ERASE and MOVE operations, the main display divides into two parts: on the left, three options which determine how many files will be handled, on the right, the type of file being handled. Specify your requirement by combining the File Quantity in the left column with the File Type in the other: For example: To load a single Song, specify SINGLE and SONG in the main LOAD page.

Floppy disk: The WK6/8SE can work with MSDOS formatted disks, either HD, (1.44 Mbytes) or DD, (720 Kbytes). Alternatively, the instrument can use its own special format, (1.62 Mbytes) which, while being less interchangeable than the MS-DOS format, allows you to use more space on a standard floppy disk. Hard disk: This option gains access to the Blocks of the internal Hard disk drive, (2.5 inch IDE type). The Hard Disk is standard for the WK8SE while for the WK6SE, an optional Hard Disk installation kit is available from Generalmusic.

410 Reference Guide

Disk

41

Save operations
The Save procedures operate in the direction RAM > Destination where the destination can be Floppy disk, Hard disk or SCSI (optional). The WK6/8SE RAM is backed by a rechargeable battery to safeguard the data when the instrument is turned off. For security reasons, however, it is necessary to store your data to floppy disk or Hard disk with the Save command. The RAM should be considered as a work area which can be continually updated, not as a data storage device. Have a new or used disk ready to save data to. These can be WK6/8SE format disks or standard MS-DOS disks for the exclusive storage of MIDI files. You can also save MIDI Files to WK6/ 8SE format disks. Check that the floppy disk is not write protected if so, remove the protection beforehand. If you forget to do this, the instrument will prompt you with an appropriate message when you attempt to save to the disk. Save operations are characterized by an additional option: the creation of a new Block if necessary.
WARNING - Do not save data to the original disks supplied with the instrument. As a precautionary measure against data loss, always check that your original disks are write protected. Note : If you assign a new block the name AUTOLOAD.BLK, you can load the Block into RAM automatically on a future occasion by turning the instrument on with the floppy disk inserted in the drive. Naturally, only one Block with the name AUTOLOAD can exist in a disk.

SAVE SINGLE SETUP

Saves a Setup file to a Block on floppy disk or Hard Disk. The Setup corresponds to the configuration of the instruments global parameters (Edit General status) that determine how the machine operates, regardless of the contents of RAM. Saving a Setup file to a Block overwrites the existing Setup file without affecting other data. Only one Setup file can be saved in each Block. You can create different Setup files for particular occasions. For example, one for home sessions, one for live shows, one for piano-bar work, etc.

SAVE SINGLE SONG

Saves Songs to disk one at a time. If you have already loaded some MIDI Files to RAM, use this procedure to convert the files to WK6/8SE format songs.
Hint: A Block can hold up to 16 Songs divided into two virtual groups. If no empty locations are shown, it means that the block is fully occupied. In this case, either overwrite an existing Song that you dont mind losing, or close the Block with ESCAPE, then select an empty location and press ENTER to create a new Block.

SAVE SINGLE
The Save Single command offers the following possibilities:

SAVE SINGLE PERFORMANCE

Saves a single user-programmed Performances (Real) to any of the 64 locations of the Performance Groups (1-8) on disk or Hard disk. The incoming Performances overwrite those present on the storage device.

SAVE SINGLE BLOCK

Saves the entire contents of RAM to disk or Hard disk in a single step. Block data contains: a Setup file, Sounds, Performances, ROM Style Performances, User Styles (and relative Performances) and Songs (and relative Performances), all housed in their respective Groups.

Disk

411

ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel sion. In some cases, other names appear which SAVE SINGLE Press USER STYLE the User operation. represent sub-directories containing other MIDI Saves a single Style and associated User Files. Empty locations are shown as a broken Style Performances toThis anyoperation locationdoes in the USER Note: not copy the notes capyou editThe a Performance, linethe with theWhenever .MID extension. .MID exten- you will, at tured by the sequence. To copy the notes, use Style Groups (1-4) present on disk or Hard disk. some decide WK6/8SE that you either want to save sion is attached topoint, the original Song Copy events function (in Edit Style or Edit Song). your new sound combination, or simply forget it name automatically. SAVE SINGLE STYLE PERFORMANCE and return to using the instrument as before. A Have an MS-DOS or Atari ST/Falcon format disk Saves a single bank of up to 8 user-programmed modified Performance that has not ready. Use the Format MS-DOS disk (1.44 Mb) been stored Style Performances. These Performances canmemory shows a small mark at the top left hand ERASE TRACK (F8) and Formatto MS-DOS/Atari (720 KB) functions not be loaded to locations other than the original corner before the name in the Performance sein the Utility Disk page to format your new disks. function, available only if you are working source StyleThis Performance bank. For example, lection window. with a Song Performance in Song mode, allows the Style Performances of Style 59 cannot be you want to cancel all your modifications, eiyou to cancel tracks of the current Performance. SAVE SINGLE If SOUND saved to any other location of the ROM Styles. ther select the same Performance again, or seIn Style/Performance mode, it is not possible to single Ram-Sounds Saves as well as RAM If you attempt to save to a destination other than lect another one. erase any tracks. Sounds to disk or Hard disk to build a library of the correct one, a user message will inform you If youuse. decide you want to store your Performance the track you wish to cancel. A track en- for future Sounds The Save Single Sound of your errorSelect with the following message: into the instruments the next step will gaged by the sequencer cannot be erased. procedure is characterized by memory, an increased be to press the STORE PERFORMANCE butnumber Press the soft button F8. You are prompted to of steps, owing to the fact that there are ton. Any Performance that you create yourself 16 Sound Groups, each consisting of 8 Banks of confirm with Are you sure?: 16 slots. can be stored in the Global Performances or the Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel. Style Performances banks. During the storing You can choose to save your Ram-Sounds anyprocess, you will first be asked to select a destiHint: Cancel Song tracks that are not used. The where you want, but it is recommended that you Press ESCAPE resulting to closeSong the user message and file will occupy less memory on disk. nation for your new Performance and then given save to the same location as the original RAM try again, this time selecting the correct destinathe opportunity to name it. position to facilitate future selection. tion. Bear in mind that the RAM-Sound will take the SAVING TO THE CURRENT PERFORMANCE ProgramChange number of the chosen destinaSINGLE MIDI FILE 1. if Press STORE tion, therefore, you save 19-2 PERFORMANCE SwOrgan to, say, to open the Saves a WK6/8SE Song to disk (MS-Dos format) Store Performance dialog window: destination 25-16, the Sound will be shown with as a MIDI File in order to exchange the song with the new ProgramChange number on a future load other instruments or computers. WK6/8SE saves operation, not with the old. Songs as SMF1 or SMF0 format MIDI files. Set the SMF Save Format parameter in the GenNote: You can also use the Sound Search function to pass directly to a particular Sound and sound Bank. eral Set function of Edit MIDI. The Sound Search procedure is explained in detail If you want to save GM compatible MIDI files, set on pages 4.28. the General MIDI parameter to ON in the General set function of Edit MIDI. 2. Press ENTER to save. Performances are converted into track data (Bank To change the name of the Performance, Select MSB and LSB, Program Change, Volume, press the soft button F7 or F8 and change Pan, CC91 and CC93 for the depth of the effects). the name using the keys of the keyboard. You If a Score is present, the text is converted into can refer to the method described in the AlLyric events and the chord symbols into Text phanumeric Entry paragraph on page 1.4 of events. the Quick Guide. The save procedure is almost identical to Save Press ENTER to confirm the name and reSingle Song. In this case youll see a list of files turn to the Store window. in the destination directory with the .MID exten

Store Performance

412 Reference Guide

Performances- Edit Performance 323

SAVE MIDI FILE PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE)

1. Select SINGLE MIDI FILE from the main Save page.

SAVE GROUP
The Save Group command offers a quick way of saving a Group of 8 elements in a single step.
Warning: The Group currently on disk or hard disk is overwritten by the incoming Group. If, for example, the User Style Group you are saving contains only one User Style, all User Styles of the destination Group currently on disk will be cancelled and replaced by the new Group. Be sure of the contents of the Group data being overwritten before proceeding.

2. Press ENTER to enter the FILE SELECTOR and select the destination device (Floppy or Hard disk).

Save Group offers the following possibilities:

SAVE GROUP REAL PERFORMANCE

Saves a Group of user-programmed Performances to any Performance Group destination on disk or hard disk.

3. Select the Song to save as a MIDI file from the RAM directory and select a .MID destination in disk.

SAVE GROUP USER STYLE

Saves a Group of up to 8 User Styles (and corresponding Performances) to any User Group destination on disk or hard disk.

SAVE GROUP SONG

Saves Songs as virtual Groups (Song Group 1 and Song Group 2 found in the Disk environment only). Each virtual group corresponds to the first 8 or second 8 locations of the Song memory. The left column corresponds to the virtual SongsGroup 1 and the right to Songs-Group 2. If necessary, enter a Block (or sub-directory shown with the .<DIR> extension) to gain access to other MIDI File locations. If necessary, select an empty location to create a new Block using the method described in the Quick Guide, page 1.47.

SAVE GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE

Saves a Group of 8 Style Performance banks to disk or hard disk, each bank containing up to 8 user-programmed Style Performances. Unlike other Groups, the Style Groups cannot be switched - they must be saved to their original locations. For example, Group 8 cannot be saved to any other location on disk other than Group 8. If you attempt to save to a destination other than the correct one, a user message will inform you

4. Press ENTER twice to start the conversion process.

Disk

413

of your errorThen with the assign following the VELOCITY message: range as follows; Duet: similar to Smart, but limited to two SAVE GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE (EXAMPLE) notes. Track 1 : 0 to 40 1. Select GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE from the Block: based on the harmonizing tables. Track 2 : 40 - 80 main Save page. Octave 1: doubles the note of the right hand Track 3 : 80 - 127 by playing an octave higher. No left hand This will give you one sound across the whole chord required. keyboard . Depending on how hard you play, you Press ESCAPE to close the user message and Octave 2: doubles the note of the right will switch between different sounds. try again, this time selecting the three correct destinahand, one octave above as well as one oction. Assignable values: Low range 0127 - High tave below. No left hand chord required. range: 1270. Peterson: doubles the note of the right hand with a note two octaves below. No left hand Press the Page ( ) button to pass to Page 2. chord required. 2. Press ENTER to enter the FILE SELECTOR and Jazz: adds two notes above the note played HARMONY (F1) select the destination device (Floppy or Hard by the right hand, at intervals of a fourth and disk). a minor seventh. No left hand chord required. Rock: adds three notes of the perfect chord below the note played with the right hand. No left hand chord required.

TRACK 3. Select the destination Block then press ENSelects the track to which the harmony type is TER to gain access. Allows you to choose from a selection of harmony assigned.
types. The Harmony function is enabled and disabled by pressing the HARMONY button on the control panel. Harmony is a function that affects the instrument set to Styles/Performance mode when the keyboard is split (Upper/Lower and Multi modes). Songs are not affected.

Options: tracks 38

HARMONY TYPE STRUCTURES

HARMONY TYPE
If necessary, select an empty location to creProvides a selection of harmony types (defined ate a new Block using the method described by the structure chart shown below). in the Quick Guide, page 1.47. Close: the notes of a chord played below the Split Point harmonize the melody of the right hand. The harmonizing chord is a closed (or tight) position and the notes of the left hand are copied to the right hand (see table). Open 1: an open chord (see table). Open 2: similar to Open 1 (see table). Harmony example. The left hand plays a chord in C Major. The black notes represent the melody, the white note the Smart: similar to Close, but based on the harmony added by the Harmony option. harmonizing tables.

414 Reference Guide

Performances- Edit Performance 321

4. Select the Group file from the RAM directory and its destination.

SAVE ALL
Use Save All to save an entire set of file types contained in RAM in a single step.

SAVE ALL SONG PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE)

1. Select ALL SONG from the main Save page.

5. Press ENTER twice to execute the command.

2. Press ENTER to enter the FILE SELECTOR, then select the destination device (Floppy or Hard disk).

3. Select the destination Block in the disk directory, then press ENTER twice to start the saving procedure

If necessary, select an empty location to create a new Block using the method described in the Quick Guide, page 1.47.
Warning: Use Save ALL with care as this procedure overwrites all data at the destination. B e absolutely sure, therefore, of the file content in disk before using the Save ALL procedures.

Disk

415

The Save All procedure offers the following possibilities: Save All Song: saves up to 16 Songs; Here can program the parameters Save All Sound : you saves an unspecified number exclusive to the tracks, such as Section Transpose, Masof Ram-Sounds and RAM -Sounds (16 Groups); ter transpose enable/disable, Detune, Random Pitch, Touch Sensitivity, Save All Real Perf : saves up to 8 Polyphony Groups of priority, Velocity. These parameters would affect any sound Performances; you decide to assign to the tracks being proSave All Style Perf: saves up to 12 Groups of grammed. Rom Style Performance banks, each containing up to 8 Style Performances; TRANSPOSE (F1) Save All User Style: saves up to 4 Groups of User Styles (including all associated User Style Performances).

Tracks/Split

DETUNE (F3)

This allows you to adjust the fine pitch of the sound in steps of 1/64th of a semitone. Assignable values: - 630+63.

RANDOM PITCH (F4)

Here you can change the pitch of the sound in half tone steps, within a maximum range of 60 steps up or down. Assignable values: 600+60.

MASTER TRANSPOSE ENABLE/DISABLE (F2)

This function automatically applies a little detuning to the sound each time a new note is played. The amount by which it detunes the note is limited by the value you select. At maximum value, (7), this automatic detuning may be as much as a half step sharp or flat. Assignable values: 0 (no effect) ... 7 (maximum randomness).

TOUCH SENSITIVITY (F5)

Usually you will want to leave this set to ON. It confirms that this sound will be affected by the TRANSPOSE buttons on the front panel. In some situations, for example, when using drum kits, you may not want the track to be shifted. In this case, set this function to OFF (default setting).

This function enables or disables the tracks of

416 Reference Guide

Performances- Edit Performance 319

Erase operations
Use the Erase command to cancel files no longer needed from a data storing device; Disk, Hard Disk or SCSI (if installed), or from RAM, to make room for other files. The Erase File Selector does not operate between source and destination directories (as in the Load and Save File selector), but on a single directory contained in the device you are cancelling files from. Erase operations are executed using the same procedures are those described for the Load and Save commands. This section provides general information relating to the Erase operation. The user is encouraged to apply the same logic to Erase operations as those used for Load and Save operations. The following example shows how to Erase a single Song from RAM memory.

If you are erasing from a floppy disk, insert the disk into the drive and check that the Floppy Disk option is selected (soft button F1. If you are erasing from the Hard Disk, select the Hard Disk option with soft button F2. If you are erasing from a SCSI device (optional), select the SCSI option with soft button F4.

4. Press ENTER to enter the file selector.

ERASE SINGLE SONG

1. Press DISK to enter Disk Mode and use the +/ Page/Bank ( ) buttons to open the main ERASE page. 2. Select the desired ERASE command.

5. If necessary, select the Block containing the file to erase then press ENTER to access the Block. 6. Select the file to erase.

3. Select the source device to erase from.

In this case, select the RAM option with soft button F3.

7. Press ENTER twice to erase the file from the directory.

Disk

417

THE SWITCH PEDAL FUNCTIONS Copy operations

Off No effect

Fade In/Out Tempo >

Activates/deactivates the Fade In/ Out function. Increases the Tempo setting by one

unit at a time. Use the Copy command to copy a the filesustain from one Damper Applies effect to released In this case, pass to the source directory and, notes. device, or from Tempo < Floppy Decreases the Tempo setting by one location to another within the same if necessary, select Disk (F1). unit at a time. the Hard Disk to floppy (bypassing the RAM) and played at the Sostenuto Sustains only the notes time of the vice versa, or from a SCSI device to pressing Hard Disk or pedal; notes Punch Activates/deactivates the Punch reafter cording function during recording floppy and vice versa. The played source file pressing remainsthe pedal are not affected. operations. intact. Soft Attenuates the sound. Rotary s/f Changes the speed of the Rotary To copy a file from one floppy disk to another, effect from Slow to and Fast or vice versa. Then pass to the destination directory Start/Stop Simulates the Start/Stop button. first load the file to RAM, then save it to the other Minor Converts the currently held chord to select the Hard disk (F2) as the destination. floppy. Key Start Activates/deactivates the Key Start the minor Entering the Hard disk for the firstchord. time takes function. Copy operations are executed using the same some time, depending on the number of files held chord to Dim Converts the currently Intro Activates the Intro. procedures are those described for the Load and the diminished chord. already present. Save commands. provides general Fill < This section Activates the Fill< function. Min 7th message Converts the currently A Please Wait appears during the held chord to information relating to the Copy operation. The Fill = Activates the Fill function. the minor 7th chord. scanning period. user is encouraged to apply the same logic to Fill > Activates the Fill> function. Maj 7th diskConverts the currently held chord to Copy operations as those used for Load and Save Selecting Floppy or RAM automatthe Major 7th chord. Activates the Ending function. ically assigns the same device operations. Ending to source and Hardcopy Captures a Bitmap image of the curdestination. Variation 1 shows Switches Variation The following example how to to copy a sin-1. rent Display. gle Sound file from Floppy disk to Hard Disk. 2. Variation 2 Switches to Variation 4. Press ENTER to enter the file selector, select Variation 3 Switches to Variation 3. Switches to Variation 4. Switches to the next Variation. Vocal Mute

COPY SINGLE SOUND

Var >

Variation 4

essorthe for Vocal harmonies. the source Block containing desired file and press ENTER to gain access. Vocal Custom 1-16 Recalls custom Vocal Processor Voice settings. Mutes the Vocal Track when using the Vocal harmonies.

Vocal On/Off

Activates/deactivates the Vocal Proc-

1. Press DISK Mode and use the Variation. Var to < enter Disk Switches to the previous +/ Page/Bank ( ) buttons to open the Perf > Advances to the next Performance. main COPY page. N.B. To select Performances 2.
sequentially in increasing order, all Select the COPY command required from the should be those you want to recall programmed for the action of the main page. Perf> function. Perf <

Vocal Chord/Vocoder/Unison Switches from one Vocal Processor operating mode to the other. Freeze Chord Locks the current chord (pedal held), allowing you to play freely with both hands across the entire keyboard the without triggering from source di- changes in the Style auto-accompaniment. The function deactivates at pedal release.

Returns to the previous Perform5. Select the ance. N.B. To select Performances rectory. sequentially in decreasing order, all those you want to recall must be programmed for the action of the Perf< function. Activates/deactivates the Harmony On/Off button.

File to Copy

Harmony

3. Select the source and destination devices with the Bass to Bass to Low. Activates/deactivate Lowest function. soft buttons F1, F2, F3 or F4 and directional arrows. Arrange On/Off Activates/deactivates the Arrange
On/Off button.

418 Reference Guide

Performances - Edit Performance 317

6. Pass into the destination directory to select the destination.

If necessary, select a Block in the Hard disk and press ENTER to access then select a destination.

7. Press ENTER twice to copy the file to the destination.

Note: It is not possible to copy a file to itself. Attempting to do so prompts the following message:

Press ENTER or ESCAPE to close the window and repeat the operation by copying to a different destination.

Disk

419

Controllers/Pads Move operations

PEDALS PROGRAMMING (F2)

Here you can up Use the Move command toset shift a the file Trackball, from one the pedals 3. Select the source and destination devices with and the Pads, the on-board physical location to another within the same device, or from controllers soft buttons F1, F2, F3 or F4. for Performance inthe edit. the Hard Disk tothe floppy (bypassing RAM) and In this case, select RAM as the device to work vice versa, or from a SCSI device (optional) to in. Hard Disk orTRACKBALL floppy and(F1) vice versa. This option cancels the file at the source. Here you can assign a function to the pedals 1, 2 WARNING - Use the Move function only in cases and 3. All three Pedals can be set to operate as where the original file needs to be cancelled. either Switch or Continuous controls. Switch action pedals control on/off functions such To move a file from one floppy disk to another, Selecting disk or RAM automatasFloppy Soft, Sostenuto, Damper, Start/Stop, Fill, Rofirst load the file to RAM, then save it to the other ically assigns the same device to source and tary Slow/Fast, etc. floppy. destination. Continuous control pedals control functions such Move operations are executed using the same Press ENTER to enter the file selector, as Volume, Expression, Pitch select and Modulation. Activates the action of the Trackball for 4. single procedures are those described for the Load and a Block containing the desired file then press tracks. Each track can be independently proSave commands. This section provides general grammed for the action of the Trackball. SWITCH functions: ENTER to access the Block. Off, Damper, Sostenuto, Soft, information relating to the Move operation. The Start/Stop, Key Start, Intro, Fill <, Fill =, Fill >, This controlling device is spring loaded to return user is encouraged to apply the same logic to Ending, Var 1, Var 2, Var 3, Var 4, Var >, Var <, it to the Move operations ascentral those position. used for Load and Perf >, Perf <, Harmony, Bass to Low., Arrange Save operations. PITCHBEND On/Off, Fade In/Out, Tempo >, Tempo <, Punch, The example which follows shows by how to use (left/right) Rotary Slow/Fast, Minor, 7th, Dim, Min 7th, Maj Pitch Bend is applied horizontal the Move operation within RAM: Move Single 7th, Vocal On/Off, Vocal Custom 1-16, Vocal movements of the Trackball. The parameter ofSound. Mute, Vocal Chord, Vocal Vocoder, Vocal Unison, fers a maximum pitch excursion of 12 semitones Freeze Chord. and Off. The same control can be assigned to a continuMOVE SINGLE SOUND 5. Select the File to Move functions: from the source diCONTINUOUS Off, PitchBend, Pitch+, ous control pedal. See Pedals Programming rectory. Pitch, Filter Cutoff Frequency (CC74), Reso1. Press DISK (F2) to. enter Disk Mode and use the nance (CC71), Modulation (CC01), Breath con+/ Page/Bank ( ) buttons to open the troller (CC02), Volume (CC07), Pan (CC10), ExMODULATION main MOVE page. pression (CC11), Vocal Volume. Modulation is applied by vertical (up/down) move2. Select the MOVEof command required from the ments the Trackball. The parameter can be main MOVE page. Refer to the Pedal function tables on pages 3.16 set to either On of Off. and 3.17 for brief explanations of each function. The same control can be assigned to a switch action pedal. See Pedals Programming (F2). Options: Pitch Bend: Off, 1...12. Modulation: Off, On.

420 Reference Guide

Performances - Edit Performance 315

6. Pass into the destination directory and select the destination.

In this case, use the Page scroll buttons to scroll through the Sound Groups and the Up/ Down directional arrows to scroll through the individual Sound Group locations.

7. Press ENTER twice to Move the Sound file to the selected destination.
The file at the original location (in this case, 19-7) is cancelled and moved to the new location (in this case, 17-8).
Note: It is not possible to move a file to itself. Attempting to do so prompts the following message:

Press ENTER or ESCAPE to close the window and repeat the operation by moving to a different destination.

Disk

421

Utility EFF. 1: The Reverb selector of Group B.

GROUP B

GENERAL EFF1 BALANCE (F3)

Assignable reverb types: refer to the lists FORMAT in the MS-DOS DISK (1.44 MB) After pressing DISK, use the Page scroll button Appendix. to pass to the last two, or three, Disk pages which This operation formats a 3.5 HD floppy disk in VOL. General levelDisk of Group provide useful functions forReverb disk, Hard and B. MS-DOS format (capacity: 1.44 megabytes). SCSI formatting and servicing: Assignable values: 0 ... 127. This format permits file exchange with computFloppy Disk Utility; EFF. 2: The Modulation, (delay/chorus/flanger, ers running MS-DOS, Windows, OS/2, Macinetc) selector of Group B. Hard Disk Utility; tosh, Atari, Amiga, and all computers capable of reading Assignable delay/mod types: refer to the lists in MS-DOS format disks. SCSI Utility (only if the SCSI port is enabled Here you can adjust the overall Reverb level, rethe Appendix. - optional). The procedure is identical to that described for gardless of the current Performance. This paVOL. General Modulation level of Group B. the Format work disk (1.62 Mb) operation. rameter allows you to adapt the reverberation of Assignable values: 0 ... 127. the WK6/8SE to the natural reverb of the surFLOPPY DISK UTILITY EFFECT 2 TO EFFECT 1: Sets the quantity of MS-DOS/ATARI FORMAT roundings.DISK (720 KB) feedback of Eff2 into Eff1. This operation formats a 3.5 DD disk in (all wet). Assignable values: 0%floppy (all dry) ... 100% Assignable values: 0 (no feedback) ... 127 (maxiMS-DOS / Atari ST format (capacity: 720 to kiloThe value of 70% corresponds the factory set mum feedback of the signal). bytes), suitable for MIDI file exchanges. value. The procedure is identical to thatvaries described for to the diThe reverb duration according the Formatmensions work disk and (1.62 Mb) operation. absorption characteristics of the SEND LEVEL (F2) surroundings in procedures which youcancel play. the You can proWARNING : Disk initializing entire contents a used disk - be absolutely sureto obtain the gramof the WK6/8SE reverb in order that you are not results about to over cancel important data.or for home lisbest headphones, FORMAT WORK DISK (1.62 MB) tening, and then regulate this parameter to adapt reverb to the surroundings in which you play This operation force-formats a 3.5 HD floppy disk CHANGE DISKthe NAME in public. for WK6/8SE use. Use this operation to assign a name to a floppy setting not retained inallows memory at power This extended format procedure prepares the disk disk. GivingThe your disks is a specific name down. with a capacity of 1.62 megabytes (compared with quick recognition of the contents during a search
the standard 1.4 of MS-DOS disks). This format through disks without labels. If you write the disks EFFECTS cannot be read by computers. name on the index PROGRAMMING label, you can(F4) reduce the Here you can control the amount of effect (SEND) search times even further. 1. Insert a new floppy disk into the drive. assigned to each track. In Style/Performance WK6/8SE assigns a generic code name to disks you switch Groups for the keyboard You can mode, also use acannot formatted disk, provided formatted tracks and accompaniment tracks, therefore the with the Utility formatting procedures that you are not interested in conserving its the name depending on the size. Group A and B parameters cannot be selected. contents. For example, a 1.62 Mb work disk will be assigned The parameter is divided into three parts, the first, 2. Select Format work disk (1.62 Mb). a(E1), code name such as the one shown below: (Group A or B), remains fixed, the second, The following dialog window appears: and the third, (E2), relate to the Reverb and Modulation effect send levels for each track. In Song mode, the Group parameter can be Here you can program the effects currently asswitched from A to B and vice versa. signed to your Performance. Assignable values: 0 (dry) ... 127 (wet). A zero The top section ofprocedure the display lines) relate to Use the standard name entry to(6 give send level corresponds to no proceeffect for the track. Group A effects, bottom 3. Press ENTER to start the formatting your disks athe name. Confirm the while entry the with EN- half to the Group effects. dure. TER or cancel with B Escape.

422 Reference Guide

Performances - Edit Performance 313

HARD DISK UTILITY

HARD DISK CHECK/RECOVERY

This procedure can restore a damaged Hard Disk to its original status. Damage to the Hard Disk can be caused by: a power failure during a Save operation; physical defects of the disk. If the Hard disk is damaged, an access attempt prompts a message similar to the following:

FORMAT HARD DISK

This operation formats the Hard disk and is used a when rapid cancellation of the HD contents is required. USE THIS OPERATION WITH EXTREME CAUTION ! 1. Go to the Hard Disk Utility page and select (if necessary) the Format Hard Disk function. The following dialog window appears:

Use the following recovery procedure as soon as possible. 1. Go to the Hard Disk Utility page and select Hard disk check/recovery . The Are you sure? dialog window appears:

2. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel. As a security measure, a second confirmation request appears:

2. Press ENTER to start the recovery of the data. Shortly after, another dialog window appears similar to the one below:

3. Press the Soft button F1 (NOT ENTER) to start the Hard Disk format procedure, or ESCAPE to cancel.

Such a message shows no errors. In cases of errors, make a note of the numbers shown as they are useful to provide information for technical assistance. Check version - Version of the test program and data recovery. Error found - Code relating to the error found. None appears in cases where no errors are encountered.
WARNING - NEVER turn off the instrument while the Hard disk or disk drive are writing data (Save, Copy, Move, Erase operations).

Disk

423

HARD DISK SLEEP TIMEPAN (F3) RANDOM

To avoid hearing the noise caused by the rotation of the hard disk, you can set this parameter to turn the hard disk off after an operation. Options: Off (always on), 5 sec ... 60 sec.

HOW TO BACK 3D UP EFFECT YOUR(F5) HARD DISK DATA

1. Have some empty formatted data disks ready. As a general rule, 1000 Kb of Hard Disk data are compressed to approx. 50% of the original value in the case of Songs, and 30% in the case of Sounds. Use this conversion scale to calculate approximately how many HARD DISK PROTECTION disks you will require to backup your data. As a safety measure to prevent unwanted file loss, The size of each selected Block file is shown use the Hard Disk Protection to protect This function will function automatically shift the pan poThe 3D is a spatializer which adds dimenat the bottom of effect the directory. your hard disk. sition of the current track by a random amount sion to the WK6/8SE Sounds. 2. Select the Hard Disk Backup option and press a new note is played . The amount of Note: Allwhenever WK6/8SE instruments leave the factory ENTER to activate the function. with the Hard Disk Protection active. shift limited by the value you select. At maxiBASS: A Bass equalizer which adds or removes Selecting this function opens a second level mum level, (7), the pan position may shift comthe bass frequencies. In order to use the Save, Erase or Move operadisplay showing the Hard disk directory on pletely to the left or right channel Value range: 12dB +12dB tions on the Hard Disk, the protection must be the left and a column on the right where you removed. Value range: 0 (no effects) ... 7 (maximum rancan prepare a list of data to backup and comdomness). 3D: A spatializer which affects the stereo outSelect the Hard Disk Protection function and press. puts of the instrument. The effect is not heard if press ENTER to activate the protection function. the instrument is connected to a mono amplificaAUDIO OUT (F4) Use the right/left cursor arrows to toggle between tion system. the two options (Unprotect/Protect). Value range: 3dB ... 12dB.

Press ENTER to save the selected status to memory.

The backup list can consist of Block files only, not individual files normally found in a block. 3. The Prepare a list of the block(s) to backup. HARD DISK BACKUP Routing of the tracks to the audio outputs. parameter is important only when the tracks are Select a Block and press ENTER to insert it This option allows you to backup part or all the connected to the internal sound generation. into the list. The cursor moves down to the Hard disk data to floppy disk in compressed or next empty location automatically. Repeat Normally the WK6/8SE sends sounds to both decompressed form. By default, the Compress LEFT and RIGHT outputs, but it is possible the to operation for other blocks. option is selected. send some tracks to the auxiliary 1 and 2 outIf you attempt to insert a Block that has alAt the end of a work session, always remember puts, for an external mixing operation and a wider ready been inserted, an appropriate warning to copy all newly elaborated data present on Hard sound opening. is displayed. Press ESCAPE to cancel the disk to floppy disks. Should the Hard disk suffer warning and select a different Block. selection also damage andThe dataoutputs loss, you will always be affects able to the internal amplification. 4. Press EXECUTE (F1) to start the backup recuperate the data from disks. Options: Left+Right, Out1+Out2, Out1, Out2. process. After a short period, the unit is ready to backup the data and a dialog appears requesting you to insert Disk n. 1:

424 Reference Guide

Performances - Edit Performance 311

HARD DISK RESTORE

Use the HARD DISK RESTORE function to load backup data from floppy disk back into the Hard Disk. Insert a disk into the drive and press ENTER to start saving to the disk. When the Backup has finished, a message is displayed saying: Operation completed. If the Backup procedure requires more than one disk, a dialogue appears requesting the insertion of disk n. 2 and so on.

RESTORING BACKUP DATA TO THE HARD DISK

1. Insert the Floppy disk containing the backup file or files into the drive. 2. Select Hard Disk Restore and press ENTER to activate the function. The floppy disk may contain more than one backup file (shown with the .AR extension),

THE BACKUP OPTIONS

OVERWRITE (F1)

Select OVERWRITE (F1) if you want to overwrite data on disks previously used for other backups. This option is selected by default. Deselect this function if you want the backup floppies to retain any data currently stored in them.
COMPRESS (F2)

Select COMPRESS (F2) to compress the files of the backup list. This function is selected by default.
DELETE (F5)

3. Select the file to restore to the Hard disk and press ENTER to confirm. Confirming the backup file selection opens a second level display showing the Floppy disk directory on the left and a column on the right where you can prepare a list of backup data to decompress.

Select DELETE (F5) to cancel a block from the list. The Delete option does not cancel a Block from the Hard Disk directory.
RESET (F6)

Select RESET (F6) to cancel in a single step a list containing two or more Blocks.
SELECT ALL (F7)

Use Select All (F7) to select all the Blocks contained in the Hard disk.
EXECUTE (F8)

Use EXECUTE (F8) to start the backup process.

4. Prepare a list containing the block(s) to restore. Select a Block and press ENTER to insert it into the list. The cursor moves down to the next empty location automatically. Repeat the operation for other blocks. If you attempt to insert a Block that has already been inserted, an appropriate warning is displayed. Press ESCAPE to cancel the warning and select a different Block.

Disk

425

5. Press EXECUTE to start User Style : opens a selection window where MIDI DUMP... (F6) the hard disk reMULTICOPY H.DISK TO SCSI store process. you can select either All files or a single userThe DUMP menu allows you to transfer the conThis option allows you to copy more than one programmed file. When the Hard Restore has finished, a tents ofDisk the WK6/8SE s internal memory to ex- file at a time (a batch) from Hard Disk to a Block message is displayed saying: (such Operation : opens a selection window where you can ternal storage devices, as Home P.Cs ordeviceSong SCSI of your choice. completed. select either All files or a single Song (including MIDI Data Filers or another WK6/8SE), via1. MIDI. With the Multicopy H.Disk to SCSI option relative Song-Performance). If the Hard Disk Restore operation requires Selecting the MIDI DUMP option, (F6) opensselected, a press ENTER to open the SCSI more than disk, a dialogue appears fileone type selection window where reyou can select Drive selection window. Note: WK6/8SE receives and transmits the Dump questingthe thetype insertion of disk n. 2 to and soexternal on. of data to send the storage on the same MIDI ports (A or B) as the Common device or sequencer. Channel. HARD DISK RESTORE OPTIONS The System Exclusive parameter in the General DELETE (F5) Set option of Edit MIDI must be set to ON (ON by default). Select DELETE (F5) to cancel a block from the list. The MIDI DUMP operation must be carried out 2. Select the drive and press ENTER to enter while WK6/8SE is in Style/RealTime mode - Style The Delete option does not cancel a Block from the file selector. not playing. the Restore directory.
RESET (F6)

Select the desired file type then press ENTER to Select RESET (F6) to cancel a list containing two access the second level file selector. or more Blocks in a single step.

TRANSMISSION OF DATA TO A SEQUENCER

Check that the external sequencer is able to record System Exclusive data. SELECT ALL (F7) 1. Connect the MIDI OUT of the WK6/8SE to the MIDI IN of the sequencer. Use the MIDI Use Select All (F7) to select all the Blocks conport (A or B) assigned the WK6/8SE Comtained in the Restore directory. mon Channel. 3. Prepare a list of Block files to copy. EXECUTE (F8) Open MIDI DUMP selector and seSelect a 2. Block andthe press ENTER tofile insert it Press EXECUTE (F8) to start the restore procdatamoves that you want tothe transmit. into the list. lect Thethe cursor down to ess. next empty automatically. 3. location In the external sequencer, dedicate a track Use the direction arrows to select the desired file for the reception of Blocks. the system exclusive data and press ENTER again to send the Dump. Repeat the operation for other by assigning a generic MIDI channel (Any, 4. Press EXECUTE to start the copy process. The options are: All, or similar) and activate the recording in Setup: the current general settings of the instruthe sequencer. ment. 4. Press ENTER on the WK6/8SE to start transSound: opens a selection window where you can mitting. A bar graph shows the progression select either All files (including RAM-Waves, of the transmission. Wait until the data transRAM-Sounds and RAM -Sounds) or a single fer operation is complete. file from the WK6/8SE Sound Library. If the MIDI Dump aborted! - Check connecReal Performance: opens a selection window tions message appears, the transfer was where you can select either All files or a single unsuccessful. Check the cable connection Performance. and try again. Style Performance: opens a selection window where you can select either All files or a single user-programmed file.

426 Reference Guide

Performances - Edit Performance 39

MULTICOPY SCSI TO H.DISK

This option allows you to copy more than one Block file at a time (a batch) from a SCSI device of your choice to the Hard Disk. 1. With the Multicopy SCSI to Hard Disk option selected, press ENTER to open the SCSI Drive selection window.

EXECUTE (F5)

Press EXECUTE (F5) to start the multicopy process.

LIST SIZE (F7)

This option allows you to calculate the overall dimension of the current list and shows the free space available at the destination.
BLOCK SIZE (F8)

Use this option to calculate the dimension of the current Block.

2. Select the drive and press ENTER to enter the file selector.

3. Prepare a list of Block files to copy. Select a Block and press ENTER to insert it into the list. The cursor moves down to the next empty location automatically. Repeat the operation for other Blocks. 4. Press EXECUTE to start the copy process.

MULTICOPY OPTIONS
DELETE (F1)

Select DELETE (F1) to cancel a Block from the list.

RESET (F2)

Select RESET (F2) to cancel a list containing more than one Block in a single step.
SELECT ALL (F3)

Use Select All (F3) to select all the Blocks contained in the directory (SCSI or HD).

Disk

427

SCSI UTILITYwhich has been transposed, the computer can

return the notes to the same track which will trans(For model WK6SE, this option is available pose them further. This will not occur if MIDI IN only if the SCSI port has been enabled by inTranspose is deactivated. stalling the optional SCSI kit). Options: On, Off. This page offers a configuration of formatting options for periferal SCSI devices, depending on IN FIX VELOCITY: function will inthe current MIDI operating system running This on your crease the velocity of all notes received at MIDI WK6/8SE. The following example shows one of IN by the specified amount. the possible configurations. If this parameter is set to OFF, notes are received via MIDI IN with the correct velocity value. Options: Off, 1 ... 127. Hint: Some accordions transmit velocity at a fixed level, not able to be regulated. With this parameter, it is possible to modify the velocity value received by the accordion.

SMF SAVE FORMAT: Allows you to set the MIDI File conversion format to 0 or 1 when saving Songs as MIDI files. Options: 0, 1. SMF LOAD MODE: provides two loading options for Midi Files. Copy 1st bar optimizes the data, converting all Program Change data and storing to the Song Performance. Normal ignores the optimization process and loads the SMF File without Program Change conversion. Options: Normal, Copy 1st bar. GENERAL MIDI: The G.M function allows optimum compatibility with the General MIDI standard. Before loading a G.M file from disk, set this function to ON. The table shown below lists the drumkit Program Changes according to the status of the parameter. Options: On, Off. BANKSELECT: Enables, (On) or disables, (Off) the reception and transmission of the BankSelect MSB (CC00) and BankSelect LSB (CC32) message. Options: On, Off.

FAST ZIP 100/250 FORMAT ON allows the reception and transmission of

WK6/8SE exclusive data via MIDI. This operation formatssystem a 100 or 250 Megabyte Zip disk using a high Options: On,speed Off. method without checking the medium for possible bad blocks. SYSTEM EXC DEVICE ID: Sets the MIDI In and port and MIDI channel for system exclusive ZIP 100/250Out FORMAT transmissions. This operation formats a 100 or 250 Megabyte The a default settings are MIDI port A, channel 1. Zip disk using slower but optimised method, checking the medium for possible bad blocks. Any bad blocks found will be masked with the resulting reduction of the overall capacity of the disk.

SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE: Setting this function to

MIDI channel 10, General MIDI On - conversion table (automatic)

FAST JAZ 1G/2G FORMAT PC-GM

PC-BS WK6/8SE

Drumkit GM Standard Room Power Electronic TR-808 Jazz Brush Orchestra

Drumkit WK6/8SE DK-STAND1 DK-ROOM DK-POWER DK-ELECT DK-HOUSE DK-JAZZ1 DK-BRUSH DK-ORCH

This operation formats a 1 or 2 Gigabyte Jaz 1 8 113-2 disk using a9high speed method without check 16 114-2 ing the medium for possible bad blocks.
17 24 25 115-2 116-2

JAZ 1G/2G FORMAT

26 32 117-2 This operation formats a 1 or 2 Gigabyte Jaz 33 40 118-2 disk using a slower but optimised method, checking the medium for possible bad blocks. Any bad 41 48 119-2 blocks found will be masked with the resulting 49 128 120-2 reduction of the overall capacity of the disk.

428 Reference Guide

Performances - Edit Performance 37

Additional Disk functions

This section explains the various options found in the main Disk pages and in the File Selector, some of which are permanent, others specific to a particular command or disk page.

NEW FL. DISK (F5)

Updates the current directory after changing a disk inserted in the drive, allowing the instrument to recognize the disk change. Pressing the F5 Soft button opens the following dialog window:

You can also see the new directory by escaping Disk mode the re-entering.

Select the type of Sample-RAM with the cursor buttons and press ENTER to confirm. Once a RAM -Sound is loaded into memory, a flag is applied to it to indicate which SampleRAM contains the sounds associated sample. When you save the RAM -Sound, the flag is retained in the disk. When you load the Sounds again, the RAM Sounds are directed to the Sample-RAM indicated by the flag.
Note - If the Samples that you save with repeated Save Single operations become too large for the available backed Sample RAM, the instrument will attempt to save to the Volatile S-RAM (if present). If there is not enough space for the operation, or the Volatile S-RAM is not present, the save operation will be interrupted.

FREE MEMORY (F6)

This option displays the amount of memory remaining in the floppy disk, Hard disk, SystemRAM, Backed Sample-RAM, volatile SampleRAM and any connected SCSI device (optional).

BLOCK RENAME (F7)

This option, which appears in all File Selectors, allows you to modify the name of the selected Block. Use the standard method of name entry as described in the Alphanumeric Entry paragraph on page 1.10 of the Quick Guide.

SAMPLE-RAM... (F8)
This option allows you to select the Sample-RAM that is going to store your Samples. If your instrument has been upgraded with additional Sample-RAM (optional kit), you will be able to choose according to your needs. Selecting the option opens the window where you can choose between both types.

BLOCK SIZE (F8)

This option, which appears in all File selectors, determines the dimensions of the currently selected Block. The information appears under the directory of the active File Selector. The dimensions of the same Block residing in RAM and in disk can differ by a few kilobytes, due to the fact that some Setup data in RAM is not saved to disk.

Disk

429

SEARCH RESOURCE (F4) MIDI

CONFIGURATION (F2) SOUND SEARCH... (F7)

This option appears on all second level pages of The Sound Search function appears in the third all Single File operations. The second level pages level directory displays for the following operaUnder MIDI, youll find all the elements need are those that appear after confirming a File Se- youtions: to program your Performances for any kind of lector selection. Load Single Sound; MIDI setup. The Search Resource function is particularly use Save Single Sound; ful for search operations carried on the Hard Disk Erase Single Sound; containing aTHE large number of files. Copy Single Sound;: MIDI MENU Move Single Sound. For example, if you do not remember in which Use this option to set the track configuration of Block of the Hard disk you stored a user-proThe function recalls the nearest Sound having each of the 16 available tracks of your Performgrammed Sound, or you want to go directly to a the string of characters specified in the active ance. You can choose which tracks respond to Block name without scrolling through the entire zone. MIDI In messages, which ones react with the inHard Disk contents, press the Sound Search struments internal generator, which direct their 1. Press Soft button F7. option to open an insertion window where you messages to MIDI OUT and which ones do not can specify a name. The following dialog window appears: respond to any information. Just like the MIDI channel parameter, the Configuration parameter is divided into four parts and MIDI CHANNELS (F1) the selected one is shown highlighted. Rotate the dial to change the setting and move to the This option allows you to set the MIDI channel next part with the right cursor arrow and so on.. configuration for each of the 16 available tracks The name can be of the particular file you are and assigns the MIDI IN port, (A or B), and MIDI When an icon is shown, the parameter is on; looking for, or part of the entire name. For examOUT port, (Aincludes or B), for each track. track ple, if your Sound name the word or- Each2. Insert the string of characters relating to the can have separate assignments for MIDI IN and gan or a Block contains a particular sequence Sound you are looking for. MIDI OUT. Each can of letters, you can search forPerformance all files which in-have its own MIDI channel 2 or 3 letters are sufficient. clude the inserted name. configuration. MIDI keyboard/ internal sound MIDI The parameter is divided into four parts and the Press ENTER to start the search and the first 3. Press ENTER. IN Common Channel generator OUT selected one is shown highlighted. Rotate the Sound which includes the written name will apThe cursor goes directly to the first Sound dial change the setting and move to the next pear, showing itsto location: the specified part with the right cursor arrow and so on.. found containing when OFF appears in characters. place of the icon, the parameter is deactivated. The first part represents the MIDI IN port, the secSEARCH (F8) IN ICON: When on (icon showing), the track ond represents the MIDI IN channel, the third the NEXTMIDI MIDI OUT port and the fourth the MIDI OUTThis chanoption recalls the next Sound on the search responds to MIDI data received at the MIDI IN nel. list containing the When string OFF, of characters port. the trackspecified does not receive exin the Soundternal Search option. MIDI data. If the displayed file is not the one you are looking for, use the F7 to Previous and F8 to Next options are required. MIDI IN port MIDI OUT (A or B) channel When you find the file you are looking for, press (1...16) ENTER to pass directly to the file location or MIDI IN MIDI OUT ESCAPE to abort the search operation. channel port (A or B) Sound Search will also inform you of the absence (1...16) of a specified name by showing Not Found.

KEYBOARD/COMMON CHANNEL ICON: The track responds to the WK6/8SE keyboard, or to an external controlling device (master keyboard) transmitting to the WK6/8SE via the Common Channel. The common channel allows a remote controller keyboard to emulate the internal keyboard of the WK6/8SE.

430 Reference Guide

Performances - Edit Performance 35

Disk handling information

If youre new to working with floppy disks and are not sure as to how you should handle these delicate accessories, please read this section for some useful information.

Disk not protected

Disk protected

INSERTING A DISK INTO THE DISK DRIVE

Floppy disks must be inserted into the disk drive label side up and shutter first. Push the disk firmly into the drive until it clicks into place.

Use a pen or other pointed object to set the tab as shown.

HANDLING FLOPPY DISKS

When handling floppy disks, certain precautions should be taken to avoid damage or data loss. Do not open the metal protection shutter or touch the surface of a disk If your WK6/8SE has to be transported, make sure that a floppy disk is not inserted in the disk drive. Vibration may cause the disk drive head to scratch the disk, rendering it unusable. Do not store or place floppy disks in close proximity of television sets, computer monitors, loudspeakers, or other devices that are potential sources of magnetic fields. Doing so may render the disk unusable. Do not store or place floppy disks in locations subject to extremes of temperature and humidity, direct sunlight, or excessive dust and dirt. Do not place objects on top of a floppy disk. Return disks to their protective cases after use.

DRIVE OPERATING LED

Avoid forcing a disk into the drive and hold the disk straight while inserting it.

EJECTING A FLOPPY DISK

Before ejecting a disk, make sure that the disk drive operating led is off and that the WK6/8SE display is not currently showing a Loading or Saving message. To extract the disk, press the eject button and remove the disk.

EJECT BUTTON

THE WRITE PROTECT TAB

Floppy disks contain a write protect tab which allows you to protect valuable data from being accidentally overwritten. To prevent writing data to disk and so avoid accidental erasure, slide the tab fully down to open the window. To permit writing data to disk, slide the tab fully up to close the window.

Disk

431

BACKUP COPIES

Programming the Performances DISKS WITH A COMPUTER At the end of a work session, always remember

PRECAUTIONS TO OBSERVE WHEN USING WK6/8SE

to copy all elaborated data present on RAM or In name write situations, WK6/8SE allows file Hard disk to By Floppy Disks. aShould you accidennames of up todisplay, 10 characters, except Blocks of the Track the therefore, the activation selecting Performance, all the settings tally erase some files from RAM, or should are therecalled which 8,made in compatibility with MS-DOS and memorized to the Performance in a acceptis with the corresponding Soft button (Ahard disk suffer damage and data loss, you will changes, Windows Operating Systems. Block files also single step. In addition to the panel a 3.1H) and other tracks can be brought into view with always be able to recuperate data from your include the extension If your files to tracks are Performance canthe also memorize other paramthe Track.BLK. Scroll buttons. Theare active disks. It is advisable to keep backup copies of allstatus be used in shown MS-DOS devices (IBM PCs and eters, such as effect settings, the of the by the track status icon in the left display your disk data. Backup is technical jargon for compatibles), bear in If mind the tracks 8 character limit controllers, (pedals, Pitch/Mod Trackball, etc.), the column. all the are set to MUTE, you a second copy. stored in a safe of these systems when MIDI Backup channelcopies configuration and many others. will hear nonaming sound. your files. place are extremely important. can become parameters In the Macintosh, andsliders, Windows 95 systems, Lets examine all Disks the Performance The OS/2 8 panel (marked A-H underneath) damaged or that lost,can so please backup your work. file names can include more that 8 be modified and saved to the Performadjust the volumes of thecharacters. tracks shown in the disWhen a name is modified on a computer, the folances. play. lowing rules should be remembered: DISK DRIVE HEAD CLEANING To construct a Performance, you start by selectSound assignments are made using the SOUND do not change the buttons Block file extension. After a prolonged period of disk or save and A Performing a number of use, sounds, Tracks. GROUPS and +/ Page/Bank buttons to load errors may become frequent due mainly to Track or as avoid Block names longer that 8 characters. ance can contain as little as only one scroll the banks. Sound assignments are best dirty disk drive heads, that the disk drive . Regardmany as indicating 16 Tracks layered together madenumber with the HOLD function off, so the maximum ofDISPLAY files in a Block canhead may need ThisTracks can beyou done us- decide not lesscleaning. of how many actually to exceed that the the limit display returns tothe the WK6/ Performance you imposed by ing a good-quality fluid-type head cleaning kitview for 16 Tracks use, you will always be able to are programming every time you select a Sound. 8SE RAM. 3.5 inch (double-sided) disk drives. Do . notHow use a within your Performance many of the do not change the names of the permanent cleaning kit intended for single-sided diskto drives. sounds you actually decide activate and use files contained in the Blocks (e.g. the ROM entirely your choice . If youfluid. only decide, for EDIT MENU 1. Moisten is the cleaning disk with cleaning Style Group names). WK6/8SE requires example, that you want to layer three sounds totrack of the current Performance can be 2. Insert the cleaning disk into the disk drive. standardEvery names to recognize the structure gether, then you only need to be concerned with independently programmed in the Performance of the data. 3. Execute the a load An error first function. three Tracks in themessage Multi Track List Edit Menus which are accessed with the buttons will appear. This is normal. Furthermore, owing to some limitations of MSof the EDIT/NUMBER section. DOS, Windows 3.1 and Atari, it is essential to 4. After approx. 10 seconds, eject the disk. bear in mind the following advice: MULTI LIST Do not use the diskTRACK drive for about 5 minutes. do not insert spaces within a file name The Track List can be viewed by pressing the (e.g.: MY FILE.BLK). To separate a name MULTI button (F7/F8). If you are not currently in into two parts, you can either: one of the default displays, press the Group 1 separate two parts by the underscore symbutton of the Performances and select the Grand bol (e.g.: MY_FILE.BLK); Piano Performance. Use Uppercase (capital) letters for the first letters of both parts of the name, lowercase for the others (e.g.: MyFile.BLK). The buttons which gain access to the Performance Edit Menus do not assign two files the are same name using uppercase and lowercase letters (e.g. MY-, Tracks and Effects , Midi, Mixer , Control/Pads FILE and myfile). Sound . The aspect of the Blocks folders (MacinPress one of are the as Edit buttons to gain access to tosh, Atari) the or sub-directories (MS-DOS, parameters of the section.WinFor example, if You can move from one Track to another with OS/2).you dows, Other sub-directories or folders press the MIDI button, you can will gain access the Cursor up/down keys. The part shown be sefound in a . MIDI parameters: toBlock all the lected (negative highlight) is the active zone of

432 Reference Guide

Performances - Edit Performance 33

Styles
Styles are a collection of musical patterns representing many types of music, ranging from rock and pop to traditional, Latin and Oriental music The automatic accompaniments of the Styles are triggered by the chord information received from the WK6/8SE keyboard; the accompaniment patterns change to suit the current chord.

THE FUNCTIONS WHICH CONTROL THE STYLES

The Styles are controlled by a set of functions which determine how they play.

ABOUT THE WK6/8SE ROM STYLES

The WK6/8SE has 192 auto accompaniment ROM Styles arranged in 12 Style Groups, each containing 2 banks of 8 Styles each. To select a Style, press one of the STYLE GROUPS buttons, (8 Beat, 16 Beat, etc) and select a Style from the Bank 1 selection window with the corresponding soft buttons. To select Bank 2 Styles, press the Page/Bank button ). (

TEMPO LOCK

MIXER LOCK

BASS TO LOWEST

HARMONY ON / OFF

ARRANGE ON/OFF
When this button is on, all the accompaniment parts of a Style are enabled. If it is not on, you will only hear the Drum track when you press Start/Stop to start the Style.

FLASH STYLES
Your instrument may also contain a set of Flash User Styles.

ARRANGE MODE
Pressing this button gains access to the chord recognition modes for the accompaniments. Refer to the Arrange mode paragraph on page 5.3 for more information.

SELECTING AND PLAYING THE STYLES

Refer to pages 1.24-1.29 of the Quick Guide for illustrated examples of how to select the ROM Styles and Flash User Styles and how to use the automatic functions, (START/STOP, INTRO, ENDING, KEY START, TAP TEMPO, FILLS, FADE IN/OUT and VARIATIONS).

MEMORY
When this button is on, the accompaniment continues to play after releasing the left hand from the keyboard. When off, releasing your left hand causes the accompaniment to stop.

LOWER MEMORY
If this is on, the notes of the track assigned to the left hand (Upper&Lower and Multi modes) are held even if the left hand is taken away from the keys. The Lower Memory function is useful for holding on background sounds without having to use a Damper pedal (which may be of more use with the upper sounds).

Styles 51

In the Upper&Lower and Multi modes, the function is used to keep the Drum part playing even when you have taken your hand off the keys.

If STYLE LOCK is on, selecting PERFORMANCES recalls the sounds for the keyboard sections while the sounds of the accompaniment TEMPO LOCK sections of the current Style remain unchanged. If this button is off, you can recall memorized If TEMPO LOCK is off, when a Style or a PerStyles by selecting the Performances. This will formance is selected the tempo changes too. If allow you to change the entire sound configurathe function is on, the tempo will not change. tion of both keyboard sections as well as accomA PERFORMANCE is a combination of up to 16 Performances without losing them. At any time, paniment tracks. MIXER LOCK sounds either layered together or split across the you can restore the original Performances with keyboard in any configuration. Whatever playthe RESTORE function. A Performance also memorizes the track voling mode you are using, Real time, Style or Song, umes. If MIXER LOCK is off, when a Style or a SINGLE TOUCH PLAY it will always be governed by a Performance Performance is selected the track volumes REAL TIME PANEL OPERATIONS When which determines how you play in real time, how you activate the SINGLE TOUCH PLAY change too. If it is on, all the volumes of the tracks Several panel operations can ROM be carried out to button, all the sounds memorized in the play the Style or the Song. assigned to you the keyboard will change while the change the status of the Performances Style Performance are assigned to all the tracks. while you accompaniment track one volumes not. Pressing of thewill PERFORMANCE GROUPS play. Selecting buttons and selecting a PERFORMANCE will put a Style changes the sounds of the acFor example, if you recall single Performance, companiment tracks as well as the a keyboard the WK6/8SE in Performance play mode. You BASS TO LOWEST (one with only one sound active to play on the tracks. would use the Performances to play in real time If BASS TO LOWEST is on, the bass part of the keyboard), you PLAY can activate one or more tracks Pressing SINGLE TOUCH automatically with up to 8 sounds simultaneously. auto accompaniment of the current Style plays to play with a combination of sounds. activates the ARRANGE ON/OFF button, the The PerOther Performances which you can from around the lowest note of the current chord. If select formance will still be the same one MEMORY function and the KEY START button. recalled, but the panel are theof Style Performances, you play a different inversion the same chord, available modified so that more tracks are active to play. TOUCH PLAY is off, selecting in Style when the SINGLE TOUCH When PLAY SINGLE the lowest note alsomode changes resulting in a difSome examples are given in the Quick Guide on Styles recalls only the Style accompaniment secbutton is on. Also available are the Song Perferent bass note being played. pages 1.18-1.20. tions without changing the keyboard sounds. formances when you are in Song mode. If off, the bass will follow the original programmed You can also change other Performance paramLets take a closer look at the Performances and pattern of the Style. eters, such as the track Volumes using the 8 panel all the things you can do with them sliders, or the keyboard mode, from Full to UpBass To Lowest permits real time changes to the STYLE PERFORMANCE per/Lower, (split keyboard), to Multi using the otherwise fixed bass pattern of a Style, by playThe Styles are rendered more their THE PERFORMANCES corresponding Softversatile buttons.byYou can assign a ing different SELECTING chord inversions. Performances, 8 for split each Style. Once you sedifferent point to the keyboard in Upper/lower To select them, simply press one of the Performlect a Style, you can assign to 8 different Per- Sounds to mode, you can up even assign different ance Group buttons and select a Performance HARMONY ON/OFF formances to the Style while you play. Simply the tracks. with the corresponding soft button. In this way press the STYLE P button to open the Style PerThis button enables (LED on) or disables (LED If you dont want to save the changes you make you can select all Performances which already formance selection window related to the current off) the current Harmony Type selected in the to your Performance, simply select another one exist in memory. Style. HARMONY function of the Edit Tracks enviand all the changes to the previous Performance In the Quick Guide, on page 1.31, youll find ilronment. When Single Touch Play on, each WK6/8SE will be lost. If,is instead, you want to save the Perlustrated explanations relating to the selection of Style is associated to 8 Style Performances which Harmony can orchestrate your Style playing, formance, press the STORE PERFORMANCE the Performances. you can assign at any time before or during play. making simple one-note melodies sound as if they button followed by ENTER to save the changes. Eachby Performance Group button is recalls 8 PerThe Style Performances are permanent and are being played a full orchestra. Harmony The STORE PERFORMANCE canoperation is exformances to choose from. In this way you can not be destroyed. They are, however, rewritable associated to Styles only. Songs cannot exploit plained in greater detail on page. 3. 24. select all Performances which already exist in (keyboard and accompaniment sounds). Their this function. For more information on the Harmemory. see There areTracks/Split 64 Performances the settings can be restored with the Restore default mony types available, Edit in from factory and all are user-programmable. That is, command. the Performance chapter of the Reference Guide. you can save your modifications to any of the

Performances

STYLE LOCK (PERFORMANCE GROUPS SECTION)

52 Reference Guide

Performances - Edit Performance 31

A Style Performance be programmed to change the keyboard sounds as well as the accompaniment sounds, but the accompaniment patterns of the current Style remain unchanged.

CHORD RECOGNITION MODES

The Chord Recognition modes generate the automatic accompaniments of the Styles in various different ways according to how many notes are pressed and where on the keyboard (above or below the split point). The programmed accompaniment patterns are always fully generated with a fully recognised chord. Major, minor and seventh chords each can generate completely different accompaniment patterns. The chord recognition modes available are: ONE FINGER: A single note played below the Split Point is interpreted as the root of a major chord. A minor chord requires the root note and the minor third (e.g. C and Eb). A seventh chord requires the root and seventh (e.g. C with a Bb either above or below C). FINGERED 1: Needs at least three notes for full chord recognition. With less than three notes, the chord is not recognized - the notes played are considered stray. FINGERED 2: At least three notes must be played to obtain the fully programmed pattern. If less than three notes are played, the arranger recognizes the chord but triggers a partial accompaniment. FREE 1: A three note chord is recognized anywhere along the keyboard, overriding the Split Point. Less then three notes does not affect the chord recognition mechanism. Up to 4 chord notes are recognized by Free 1. FREE 2: As above, but up to 6 notes are recognized. The option selected can be stored to the Performances.

ARRANGE MODE
The ARRANGE MODE button gains access to several options associated to the Styles: the Auto and Fixed Chord modes, the Style Chord Recognition modes, Dynamic Arrange and Autobacking and the Mixer Lock and Bass Follow functions.

AUTO CHORD AND FIXED CHORD MODES

Chord recognition can be set to remain fixed regardless of the keyboard mode setting, or to change automatically according to the change in the keyboard mode. AUTO CHORD MODE: active by default, allows changes of the chord recognition mode according to the selected keyboard mode (Full Keyboard, Upper&Lower or Multi). Given that the keyboard mode is memorized in a Performance, the chord recognition can change along with the Performance. FIXED CHORD MODE: allows you to set a chord recognition mode which does change with changes in the keyboard mode (and consequently any Performance changes). The option selected remains memorized after power down.

Note: The symbols of the recognized chord appear on the main Style display screen. If the

Styles 53

chord is not recognized, the chord symbol is CHANGING THE SPLIT POINT Exit (F8) Storing Samples shown as the lowest note played followed by sevThe Split Point is: eral asterisks. For example: C***** . (a) the point that separates the Upper and LowUse the chord EXITto option to escape from Sample SAVE (F2) Note: In order for the be recognized (and er keyboard sections in the Upper&Lower and Translator without saving your samples. the relative symbol to be shown on the display) The SAVE operation Multi keyboard modes and, is used to save assigned Arrange On/Off must be on.activates a prompt to confirm the Pressing EXIT Samples to the WK6/8SE Library. A Wave(b) the point below which the keyboardWave recognizabort process with ENTER and cancel all samform can contain one or more assigned es chords which trigger the Style automatic samples, ples. DYNAMIC ARRANGE provided that each is assigned a specific keyaccompaniments (in Fingered and One to Finboard range. When DYNAMIC ARRANGE is active, the volger chord recognition modes). Once your samples havein been assigned, press ume of the Style Auto accompaniments can be The current Split Point setting appears the main the SAVE button, (F2), to Save the controlled according to the velocity applied to the page as an option that can be selected with theWaveform to the WK6/8SE chord notes. Increased chord note velocity inpaired soft buttons F7/F8. Wave Library. creases the volume of the accompaniments. The Save Sample window is shown: The setting can be modified asdialog required. When Off, the accompaniment volumes remain 1. With the main Style/RealTime display showunchanged with changes in chord note Pressing ENTER cancels allvelocity. samples and returns ing, press Soft buttons F7/F8 to open the to the Sound Edit environment. Split Point dialog window. AUTOBACKING Press ESCAPE to cancel the display and retain the samples. Save the samples with SAVE to When AUTOBACKING is on, a quick change of escape the Sample Translator. chord updates the Style auto accompaniment pattern instantly without breaks in the pattern. When off, a change of chord does not update 2. Rotate the DIAL, play a note on thefor keyHere youor can write a name the waveform instantly but waits for the next note of the acboard (corresponding to the highest note ofnew RAM (Wave name) and a name for the companiment before revising the pattern. the Lower split zone) to name) modify based the setting. Sound (Sound on the Waveform. If you entered the wrong note, play is automatiThe name given to the simply Waveform another. cally assigned to the sound once you select the Sound Name entry zone. You are free, however, to write a different name for the Sound. Also shown is the first available empty location in RAM for the new RAM -Sound, defined by the Bank and Program numbers. 3. Press ENTER to confirm the new Split Point, or ESCAPE to cancel the operation. Whatever Bank and Program number you select with the Dial, it will always With ENTER, the main page willcorrespond show the to an empty location in RAM. With WK6/8SE does not allow you new Split Point setting. ESCAPE the to overwrite Ram-Sounds or R AM original Split Point willexisting be restored. Sounds. Note: The Split Point is a general (not with a name If you attempt to saveparameter the Waveform linked to a particular Performance) is conthat already exists, an which message appears saying served in memory when the instrument is turned that the Wave Name already exists. off. The new setting is lost theto Reset All Press Enter or when Escape cancel the message operation is and carried out or if the backed-RAM return to the Save Sample window and write loses its data due to the total discharge of the a different name for the Wave. battery. Confirm with ENTER to save the Waveform to

54 Reference Guide

Sample Translator 255

User Styles
The four USER buttons (1, 2, 3 and 4) of the STYLE GROUPS section recall User-programmable Styles, in other words, free locations that allow you to record your own auto accompaniments. Up to 32 User Styles can reside in memory, 8 in each User Group. A new Style can be created by recording every part yourself. You can also modify an existing Style. This second option is explained in the Edit Style section on page 5.13. Disk based User Styles can be loaded into memory (to the User 1, 2, 3 and 4 locations) and user-programmed Styles can be saved to disk, using the methods described in the Disk chapter of the Reference Guide, page 4.6.

WHAT IS A RIFF?
A Riff is a musical motif capable of repetition (looping). It can also be expressed as a phrase or lick, but it is important to understand that the Riff must be capable of repetition. In fact, when you play with Styles, you will note that the patterns are short repeating sequences. The table shown on this page lists all the Riffs that make up a Style. The basic Riff is the principal pattern of the Style which repeats continually until stopped, or until it is broken by a Fill, Intro or Ending pattern. The Fills, Intros and Endings are triggered by pressing the relative FILL, INTRO, or ENDING buttons. A Riff can vary in length from one to sixteen measures long. Each Riff consists of up to 8 Style tracks: Drum, Bass, Acc1, Acc2, Acc3, Acc4, Acc5, Acc6.

THE BASIC STRUCTURE OF A STYLE

Styles provide automatic accompaniments based on the system of chords. In particular, the Major, Minor and Seventh chords trigger three completely different arrangement patterns. There are 4 Variations of the Major, minor and 7th chords and each Variation breaks down into several different sections: basic, Intro, Fill, Ending. These four sections form the basis of a structure consisting of 48 short sequences, or Riffs, for each Style.

Var1

Var2

Var3

Var4

Basic Major Basic Major Basic Major Basic Major Basic Minor Basic Minor Basic Minor Basic Minor Basic 7th Fill Major Fill Minor Fill 7th Basic 7th Fill Major Fill Minor Fill 7th Basic 7th Fill Major Fill Minor Fill 7th Intro Major Intro Minor Intro 7th End Major End Minor End 7th Basic 7th Fill Major Fill Minor Fill 7th Intro Major Intro Minor Intro 7th End Major End Minor End 7th

Intro Major Intro Major Intro Minor Intro Minor Intro 7th End Major End Minor End 7th Riffs of a Style

Intro 7th End Major End Minor End 7th

User Styles 55

RECORDING 1. Press F3 to select GAIN.

The display will show the current GAIN staRecording a User Style is easy. tus (in the example, we are working on the 1. Press on of the USER Style of buttons and seRIGHT section a stereo sample).

EXPORT (F7)
Use the Export option to save the Sample currently in edit to disk or SCSI device (if installed). 1. Premete EXPORT to open a selection window where you can select the periferal device to export toper aprire una finestra di dialogo dove potete segliere lunit esterna dove esportare il sample.

lect a free location (User) to create a new Style.

5. Select the track, usually the Drum track first, that you want to record.

2. Rotate the Dial to set the Gain to a suitable Press the corresponding Soft button to place level, playing the sample as you regulate the the track in Record mode (Record icon showsetting. ing). Only tracks showing the Record icon 2. events Press ENTER to recording. open a dialog where you will capture during the can specify a name for the sample and se2. You are prompted to create a new style. lect the format.

6. Press START/STOP to start the recording.

A one-measure countdown will start (shown 3. Press ENTER to confirm the setting. on the measure counter in the top right hand corner of the display) and a metronome tic After a short period, the sample Gain setting 3. Press OK, (F1). will help you with your timing. is memorized. The Style Record View page activates with You can to save in if two If you dont want the chose metronome, turn off of the most a superimposed Select Riff dialog window: commonly recognized formats: Sound Dewith the soft button F8. CUT (F5) signer 1 or Windows RIFF Wave. This option allows you to trim the Sample a playing after the lead-in. 7.atStart 3. Select the File Type parameter and rotate the specified Loop End in order to cut off the last The recording proceeds a cyclic manner: Dial to selectin the other format. portion of the Sample. once the end of the riff is reached, the reIf you vary the current setting of the Loop End cording starts again from the beginning. The and wish to eliminate the portion of the sample number of bars recorded will depend on the that follows, press F5 to trigger the CUT option. setting in the initial RecView display, in the After using CUT, youll find that the Loop End point Measures parameter (in this case 2). cannot be taken to a value. 4. Select the Variation, (VAR. 1,higher VAR. 2, VAR.

3, VAR. 4), section, (BASIC, FILL, INTRO, ENDING) and chord, (MAJOR, MINOR, 7TH) with the cursor buttons and press ENTER to confirm.
The LED on the RECORD button lights up and the Record View page is shown in negative highlight.

8. When you have finished recording the first 4. the Press ENTER to start the export procedure. track, stop recording with START/STOP.

If you export to disk, insert the disk into the The Track will still be in record mode, allowdrive before pressing Enter. ing you to add new events by starting again Shortly after, the Sample with Start/Stop. The default setting is of saved. the Record mode Press will be ESCAPE Overdubb. to exit Other the record Sample Edit dismode settings play. can be selected (explained afterwards). Stop the recording of additional note with Start/Stop.

56 Reference Guide

Sample Translator 253

9. Confirm the recorded track with the corresponding soft button.

The Record icon will change to the Seq-play icon.

RESTORING THE USER STYLES MEMORY

If you have loaded disk-based User Styles, or have recorded User Styles using up all the memory dedicated to the storage of Styles, a quick and easy way of clearing User Style memory and making room for other Styles is to use the Restore Styles operation. For details regarding the RESTORE functions available, refer to the GENERAL chapter, page 8.8, in the Reference Guide. Naturally, you must remember to save the User Styles that you dont want to lose to disk before proceeding with the restore procedure.

10. Select another track to record and repeat the procedure for other tracks until you have recorded all the riffs you want for your Style.
Remember to confirm each track you record before selecting another one, otherwise you will record your new track and add the same events to the track already recorded.

11. When you have finished, press the RECORD button to escape Record mode.
The LED on the RECORD button goes off and the display shows the new Style window.

User Styles 57

operation, use dialog the Tuning function, activated with Opens the SELECT RIFF window where the F1 soft button, which plays the original samyou can select a riff to record. ple pitch with a sinusoidal that is superimposed EDIT page (F6) shows several parameters The Record View on the sample. which you can setEdit for your User Style before startThe option opens a display showing nonYou can also use this parameter to make the saming your recording or playback. programmable information relating to the origiple play its normal pitch on a different key from nal sample, and gives access to some programthe one to which it was assign when it was remable parameters which allow you to change Select the Variation, section and chord with the corded. This, however, will pitch shift the samsome characteristics of each individual sample. cursor buttons and press ENTER to confirm. ple and change its playback rate, which can affect the timbre of the sample.

Sample Editing The Record View page

at which it was sampled). To help you with this REC RIFF... (F2)

SOUND VIEW (F5)

Recalls the Sound View page where you can see SAMPLE RATE: This parameter defines the freand change the sounds assigned to the Performquency with which the Sample is read. If the ance. Sampling Rate is modified, the sample pitch is also proportionally modified. For example, if the MODE... (F1) Sample Rate is raised in value, the sample pitch Opens the Record Mode dialog window where will also become higher. The first four items of the display correspond to you can select various recording options. Basically, this function provides a fine tuning for the sample information: the sample, avoiding dissonance between the SAMPLE NAME: Shows the original name of the samples that make up the Waveform. wave sample. LOOP START: This parameter causes samples to replay indefinitely until you release the note, or they decay to silence. Each sample, when REC VIEW (F6) PROPERTIES: Shows the technical triggered, begins at the LoopitStart point and plays REPLACE - The new notes substitute old notes characterRecalls the Record View page where is posistics the sample. through to the Loop End, then loops to the Loop already present inof the tracks being recorded. sible to control the record/play parameters. start point and plays again. This cycle will conOVERDUBB - New notes are merged with those SAMPLE SIZE: Shows the size of the sample tinue until the note is released. If the Loop Switch already present on the tracks being recorded. ERASE... (F7) is set to Off (see below), when the sample plays expressed as the total number of samples. PUNCH IN/OUT - A means of inserting a correcCancels a track, riff, variation or its the entire Style. to the Loop End on first cycle, it stops when it tion without repeating a recording. Punch recordThe remaining items of the display correspond reaches the Loop End. ing is activated by pressing an appropriately proto settings for the sample assigned to the curChanging the Loop Start (and Loop End) points grammed pedal (under EDIT CONTROLS). rently selected key range. All these parameters can have a small or great effect on the sample Activate the recording with PLAY. When the song are programmable. timbre, depending on the nature of the sound at reaches the point at which the correction must the Loop Start point. You may hear a click as the be inserted, SAMPLE press thePITCH: pedal. At this point, Indicates thethe pitch at which sample loops back from the Loop End to Sample recording proceeds in replace mode. recorded. When the This paramthe sample was originally Start. In such cases, vary the Loop Start value correction is eter complete, releasethe theRoot pedalKey to stop TRACK the selected track. also defines number, or the - Cancels until you reduce the click to an acceptable value. the recording. key where the sample root for the current key- Cancels the selected riff. RIFF range is assigned. END: parameter represents the end VARIATION LOOP - Cancels theThis selected variation. of the current sample and the point where the If the WK6/8SE does not recognize the Sample STYLE - Cancels the entire Style. sample, once played, loops back to the Loop Start Pitch of a sample youve loaded from disk, you point. If the Loop Switch is set to Off, the Loop can use this parameter to specify the key which End parameter changes to Sample End. will play the sample at its normal pitch (the pitch SAMPLE TYPE: Identifies the sample format.

58 Reference Guide

Sample Translator 251

METRONOME (F8)
Activates/deactivates the metronome.

TIME SIGNATURE
Valid for the entire Style. This parameter can be modified only before starting a recording. If the Style contains recorded events, this parameter cannot be modified.

MEASURES
Determines the length of a riff expressed in measures (max 16).

TEMPO
Sets the playing speed (metronomic Tempo). Valid for the entire Style.

the scale converter for the other two chords (minor and/or 7th). If, on a future occasion, you wish to program also the respective riffs, the relative Scale conversion will be ignored. The parameter consists of two variable parts, corresponding to the two complementary chords with respect to the one being recorded. If the Off setting is selected, the arranger carries out the simplified conversion referred to. The tables at the end of this chapter show how the Scale Converter operates, both in the off status, as well as for the Minor and 7th chords. Several different solutions for each chord are provided for. On pages 5.12 and 5.13 you find Scale Conversion tables for reference.

QUANTIZE
An auto-corrector of timing during the recording phase. The selection values are normal, triplets or swing.
Value 1/4 1/8 1/12 1/16 1/24 1/32 1/48 1/64 1/96 free 1/8 B...F* 1/16 B...F* free triplet (1/64) (1/64 triplet) no quantization (swing) (swing) no quantization triplet triplet Quantization

KEY NOTE
Sets the reference key for the recording. KEY NOTE indicates the key in which the original riff is recorded. When you play the indicated chord, the riff will play back in exactly the same manner as recorded. If other chords are played, the riff will be transposed accordingly.

SCALE CONVERSION
If you program a Style accompaniment based on the Major scale, the WK6/8SE arranger will automatically convert a minor or 7th chord accordingly. This allows you to limit your User Style recording times by, for example, recording only the Major riff of Variation 1, in order that when you play with the recorded style, a minor or 7th chord will be automatically adjusted for the change. However, in harmonic terms, this type of over-simplification creates errors when using the more complex chord structures. To overcome this problem, the WK6/8SE Scale Converter provides a selection of chord inversion systems, based on algorithms in order to render the conversion more musical. You can program the Major chord only and set

* B F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel.

User Styles 59

If (CANNOT the selected Sample is not shown with a black FREE MEMORY BE MODIFIED) simply strike the left Cursor the button ( ). The amount line, of memory remaining to record Rotate the Dial to assign the lowest riff. Each riff1. can occupy up to 30.000 bytes (30 key limit: kilobytes). If the RAM contains a large amount of data, a dialog window may appear showing the message Memory full! the recording can2. indicating Strike thethat right cursor button ( ) and assign not proceed further. The recording is instantly inthe upper key limit with the Dial. terrupted. You can increase the amount of space in RAM by deactivating the Undo function. 3. Press ENTER to confirm. 4. Select the next Sample to assign with the up/ down cursor buttons ( / ) then strike the left cursor button ( ) to activate the lowest key limit of the selected sample (A0).

OVERLAPPING SAMPLES

If you overlap the key range of two samples, pressing ENTER will prompt a message indicating the presence of an overlap.

Press Escape to cancel the message and assign the correct key range before confirming with ENTER. A typical assignment consisting of several samples that constitute a WK6/8SE Waveform may look like this:

Repeat the assignment procedure for all the samples that are to be part of the new Waveform, and avoid overlapping. Each sample covers a specified key range and the notch at the beginning of each range corresponds to the Root Key Number, also called the Sample Pitch. Once you have completed the sample key range assignments, press ESCAPE to close the ASSIGN display and return to the Sample Translator. At this point, unless you want to start editing your sample, you can press SAVE, (F2) to store your sample to the WK6/8SE wave library. Follow the section entitled, Storing the sample on page 2.55 at the end of this chapter.

510 Reference Guide

Sample Translator 249

SCALE CONVERSION TABLES

These Scale Conversion tables refer to chord and bass patterns played in the key of C and show which notes are converted. The changes are expressed in semitones, therefore, if the note C shows a conversion of 2, the note is converted 2 semitones down (Bb). Notes not converted are shown blank.
Scale Converter in OFF status: C Major riff > C 7th riff C# C accomp. bass 2 D D# E F F# G G# A +1 +1 A# B 1 1

Scale Converter in OFF status: C Major riff > C minor riff C# C accomp. bass D D# E 1 1 F F# G G# A +1 +1 A# B 1 1

Scale Converter active: C Major riff > C 7th riff C# C 7th 1 accomp. 7th 1 bass 7th 2 accomp. 7th 2 bass 7th 3 accomp. 7th 3 bass 7th 4 accomp. 7th 4 bass 2 2 +1 +1 2 1 1 2 D D# E F F# G G# A A# B

User Styles 511

device,C in thisriff example, a floppy Scale Converter active: Major > C minor riff disk, is
C min 1 accomp. min 1 bass min 2 accomp. min 2 bass min 3 accomp. min 3 bass min 4 accomp. D E 1 1 1 1 1 1 F G

LOADING OTHER SAMPLES

You A# can load other samples to the Sample Translator, provided that you select an empty location A B in the sample list.

shown the selection window, similar to the C# D# F# G# example below:

If you load another sample to an existing sample 1 location, a cancellation request will appear. +1
+1

The various sample formats are identified by 1 1 appropriate extensions. min 4 bass 5. Select the sample 1 you 1wish to load with the min 5 accomp. cursor buttons (1/ )1 1 and press ENTER to start loading the Sample. min 5 bass 1 1 1 allow you to load indimin 6 accomp. Some sample formats 1 1 +1 You can use the Sample Overwrite method to vidual samples or Programs. (See Sample cancel an unwanted Sample. Up to 16 Samples min 6 bass 1 1 +1 and Programs afterwards). can be loaded to the Samples List. min 7 accomp. 1 1 1 1 A dialog window showing an animated metmin 7 bass 1 informed 1 1 1 ronome keeps you of the samples LOADING SAMPLES AND PROGRAMS being loaded. A bar graph also appears at Some sample formats, such as Akai and the top of the display to monitor the loading Kurzweil, allow you to load individual Samples phase. (equivalent to the WK6/8SE Series samples) and When the sample has been loaded, the disCOMPLEX CHORDS Programs (similar to the WK6/8SE Series Waveplay will show something similar to the exforms). The logic applied to the conversion of the more complex chords follows similar lines to that used for the ample below. standard Major, minor and 7th chords indicated above. The user is In invited experiment with select the Scale suchto cases, when you a file type from Converter in order to discover the most suitable conversion for thethe Style being programmed. File Open window, a second selection window appears:

This example shows a single unassigned Flute Wave sample. Select an individual sample, or select All samples and press ENTER. A Program organizes the Samples by defining the keyboard ranges to which they are assigned. Unlike the Waveform of the WK6/8SE Series, a Program can distribute the Samples over sev

512 Reference Guide

Sample Translator 247

Edit Style
After recording a User Style, the Style riffs can be modified using the functions of the EDIT STYLE MENU. If you select a User Style to edit, all the Edit Style functions will be available. If you select a ROM Style, only the Copy function will be available.

To escape without closing the edit page, press the ST/SONG button. To pass to another edit environment, use the +/ PAGE buttons ( ).

THE EDIT STYLE OPTIONS

UNDO (F2)
When this parameter is selected (shown in negative highlight), the UNDO function is enabled. Undo cancels the last operation or series of operations carried out. This function consumes exactly the same amount of RAM memory as the Style. If there is a shortage of memory in RAM, it is a good idea to deactivate UNDO. Press the UNDO panel button to execute the desired Undo operation.

ENTERING EDIT STYLE

In Style/RealTime mode, select the User Style you wish to modify. Press the ST/SONG button (in the Edit Numbers section) to open the main EDIT STYLE menu.

You will be prompted with a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE. Entering this section the first time opens the main menu page (00). On all successive occasions, the last page selected is recalled.

THE EDIT STYLE MENU

The Edit Style menu contains 10 Style Editing functions (or Editors): Erase, Move, Copy, Quantize, Insert Measure, Delete Measure, Velocity, Transpose, Microscope, Mask. Two options are also available: Undo and Style name.

If UNDO is disabled, pressing the UNDO button and confirming with ENTER activates the following user message:

ESCAPE FROM EDIT STYLE

To escape from EDIT STYLE press ST/SONG or ESCAPE (once or twice, depending on the currently selected level).

Press ESCAPE to close the window and repeat the UNDO operation, this time with UNDO enabled.

Edit Style 513

STYLE NAME (F8) THE SAMPLE TRANSLATOR OPTIONS THE MAIN SAMPLE TRANSLATOR DISPLAY EDIT PROCEDURE
Changes theThe name of a Style. This function only consists main Sample Translator display 1. Press of ST./SONG to enter Edit Style. The Load : Loads a sample into the selected loapplies to USER Styles; the names of thea ROM 16 slots, each able to house sample that can main menu appears. cation, directly from the selected Styles are permanent and cannot be compose a Waveform. A modified. Waveform may consist 2. Select the editor that you wish -Sound, to edit using Ram from floppy disk or of one or more samples covering different keythe DIAL or the cursor buttons. It is also posvia MIDI from an external source board ranges. sible to enter an editor by specifying the rela(computer, sampler, etc.). The display example below shows the sample tive number on the numeric keypad. Save: Saves a sample to the instruments configuration of a Waveform originating from a 3. Press ENTER to enter the editor. Wave Library. Only samples which previous series instrument. have been a keyboard ex4. Select the desired option with theassigned soft buttension are saved. Saving also estons. capes the Sample Translator and The method used to insert characters is described 5. Select the parameters with the butreturns to cursor Edit Sound where you can in the paragraph entitled, Alphanumeric Entry, tons and modify their value with or with the new create a the newDIAL Sound on page 1.4 of the Quick Guide. You can move the numeric keypad. Waveform. the cursor with the soft buttons or the DIAL. In: Cancels the selected Sample from 6. Confirm Delete the operation with ENTER. sert the characters with the keys of the keyboard. the main Translator display. 7. Pass to another editor with theSample +/ Page ( ) Assign : Assigns the selected buttons . Otherwise, return to the main sample to a EMPTY TRACK INDICATION range. ediThis assigned menu with ESCAPE andkeyboard select another sample plays together with the other The presence of notes in a track is indicated by tor. Here, the original RAM -Sound contains a assigned samples that make up the the seq-play icon: Waveform consisting of 6 samples, each asWaveform. Sample keyboard range signed to a specific range of the keyboard: overlaps are not permitted. In play mode, this status icon indicates the presDeassign: Cancels the extension limits of the ence of notes in at least one riff. If the current riff selected sample. of the track does not contain notes, the empty Edit: Opens a page showing information Locations without samples are numbered and track message is displayed at the bottom of the regarding the Waveform (Sample shown with three dashes ( ). Edit Style page: name and type, properties, size,

SELECTING SAMPLES FROM directly THE WAVEFORM In record mode, tasks are performed on a riff, and theDISPLAY icon indicates the presence of notes Select the Samples with the Up/Down cursor in the track and in the riff being recorded. buttons. Next to each sample, three notes are usually shown, representing the lower limit of the keyboard range to which the sample has been assigned, the original sample pitch, and the upper keyboard limit:

pitch, Sample rate, Loop Start, Loop End points and the Loop status). Several parameters can be edited in this page and other options are activated (Tuning, Normalize, Gain, Cut, Export). Send Sample: Activates a sample Dump process to transfer (via MIDI) the sample to an external device (for example, another WK6/8SE keyboard). Exit: Escapes the Sample Translator, erasing all the samples present, and returns to Edit Sound.

514 Reference Guide

Sample Translator 245

Erase
This editor cancels events.

the end of the riff.

ERASE RIFF (F6)

Here you can erase all the tracks of a Riff.

ERASE TRACK (F5)

Allows you to work on a single Track of the Style.

PARAMETERS:

PARAMETERS: Variation: Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only Variations that contain at least one recorded riff can be selected.

Same as ERASE TRACK but without the Note Range From...To... parameter.

ERASE VARIATION (F7)

Here you can erase a Style Variation.

Riff: Selects one of the riffs of the selected Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is empty, the phrase No Riff appears. Event type: Determines the type of event to be erased. Duplicate note eliminates the note with the lowest velocity value when two notes of the same pitch start at the same position. Options: All, Duplicate note, Note, Pitch Bend, Mono touch, Poly touch, Velocity Off, ProgramChange, ControlChange 00...31, ControlChange 64...127. Note range from... to...: Sets the upper and lower limits of the notes to cancel. To cancel a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to cancel the snare (D2) set the parameter to Note range from D2 to D2. Assignable values: C-1 ... G9. From locator... To locator...: Determines the start and end point of the part to cancel. It is possible to specify the measure, beat and resolution. Assignable values: within the actual limits of the riff. It is not possible to specify a point beyond

ERASE STYLE (F8)

Here you can cancel the entire Style.

Edit Style 515

The action of the filters on the sound is repreResonance enhances the frequencies in close sented by curves: proximity of the Cutoff Frequency, rendering the Shifts events from one point to another within the Copies events from a track or from all the tracks. filter curves more complex: selected track. dB Low Pass (attenuates dB COPY TRACK (F5) the high end frequenResonance cies).
Hz

Move

FILTERS

Copy

RESONANCE

dB
Hz

Hz

High Pass (attenuates the low end frequencies).

Band Pass (attenuates the frequencies above PARAMETERS: and below the C.F.). Hz Variation: Selects one of the 4 Style Variations. PARAMETERS: Only Variations that contain at least one recorded Copy Parametric Boost (en- to Style...: Selects the destination Style dB riff can be selected. to copy the current Style (part or whole) to. hances the frequencies Assignable values: any USER Style. around the Cutoff FreRiff: Selects one of the riffs of the current Variaquency). tion. Only existing riffs can Hz be selected. If the From var... to var...: Selects the source and desStyle is empty the phrase No Riff appears. tination Variations for the part to be copied. Assignable values: 1 ... 4. Parametric dBTo locator...: Sets the From locator... start andCut (attenuates the frequencies From riff... to riff...: Selects the source and desend points of the part to be moved. The measaround the Cutoff Fre- riffs for the part to be copied. For examtination ure, beat and resolution can be specified. Hz quency). ple, it is possible to copy the patterns of a Basic Assignable values: within the actual limits of the Major riff to a minor Fill riff. riff. It is not possible to specify a point beyond Assignable values: any riff. The slope of these curves is determined by the the end of the riff. Track... to track...: Specifies the source and desattraction capacity of the poles. The WK6/8SE Start Locator : Sets the new position of the sectination Series can have two 2-pole filters connected in tracks for the copied elements. From tion being moved. track parallel (Dual 1, Dual 3 Algorithms), or one 4- shows the track selected using soft butAssignable values: any point within the riff. tons A...H. To track... can be modified using pole filter, corresponding to two 2-pole filters conthe nected in series (Dual 2, Dual 4 Algorithms). A DIAL. 4Assignable values: any accompaniment track pole filter creates a clearer slope and conse(9...16). quently a fuller and more aggressive sound. From locator... To locator...: Sets the start and end point of the part to be copied. Only the measTO OBTAIN A 4-POLE FILTER: urethe (bar) can be specified. Programme identical parameter values for Assignable values: within the actual limits of the Filter 1 and Filter 2 editors of the Dual 2 or riff.. Dual 4 Algorithms. Start locator: Sets the new position of the copied part. Assignable values: within the actual limits of the destination riff.

dB

Resonance was a very typical feature of classic analog synthesizers. As an example, listen to the Sound Resonance (102-2).

516 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 243

Copy times: Sets the number of consecutive copies. Each copy starts exactly where the previous one ends. Assignable values: depends of the length of the riff. The copy must not exceed the riff length. Copy mode: Determines the copy mode. Merge unites the copied events to those already present at the destination. Replace substitutes the events present at the destination with those copied. Options: Merge, Replace.

To Style...: The destination Style of the copy. Assignable values: any of the USER Styles.

COPY STYLE (F8)

COPY RIFF (F6)

Here you can copy all the tracks of a riff.

PARAMETER:

Copy current Style to Style: Selects the USER location where the entire current Style is to be copied to (Style [all Vars] option).

PARAMETERS: Same as COPY TRACK but without the Track to Track parameter.

COPY VAR (F7)

PARAMETERS:

Copy Variation... to Variation...: The source and destination of the copied Variation (Var (all riffs) option). Assignable values: 1 ... 4.

Edit Style 517

Note range from... to... : Sets the highest and IMPORTANT REMINDERS WHEN STORING NEW SOUNDS Quantize lowest note range to quantize. To quantize a sin1. You cannot overwrite a Rom-Sound. gle percussive instrument of the Drum track, asAn auto-corrector of timing errors. the same note to the highest and lowest limit. A modified ROM-Sound generates a sign RAMFor example, to quantize the snare (D2), set the Sound which can be stored to either an empNOTE ON QUANTIZE (F1) parameter to Note range from D2 to D2. ty location, or to an existing RAM-Sound. If Post-Quantization ofattempt the Note event. values: C-1 ... G9. you to On store a RAM-Sound to a Assignable ROMSound destination, the display will show the locator... To locator...: Determines the From following message: start and end point of the part that requires quantizing. Only measures can be selected.

Assignable values: within the actual limits of the Riff.

NOTE OFF QUANTIZE (F2)

PARAMETERS:

Post-Quantization of the Note Off event. After a Repeat the operation and select an empty Note On quantization, a Note Off quantization Variation: Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only location. affects the duration of the notes, adapting them existing Variations can be selected (those with at to a quantization grid. least one riff2. recorded). If you save the new RAM-Sound to an existing RAM-Sound, the existing file will be irreRiff: Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Varimediably lostbe without warning. ation. Only existing riffs can selected. If the Style is empty, the Nosure, Riff therefore, appears. that you have Bephrase absolutely stored the existing RAM-Sound Note On Quantize : Specifies the Note On to disk or quantize values.Hard disk before confirming the save procedure.
Value 1/4 1/8 1/12 1/16 1/24 1/32 1/48 1/64 1/96 free 1/8 B...F* 1/16 B...F* free triplet (1/64) (1/64 triplet) no quantization (swing) (swing) no quantization triplet triplet Quantization

PARAMETERS:

Note Off Quantize: Specifies the Note Off quantize values. All other parameters same as Note On Quantize.

* B F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel.

518 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 241

Insert Measures
Inserts a specified number of measures. The part of the Riff that follows the insertion point shifts forward the same number of measures as those inserted. The length of the Riff changes.

Delete measures
Cancels a specified number of measures. The measures directly after the point of cancellation shift towards the beginning of the Riff and join with the measures preceding the cancellation point.

PARAMETERS Variation: Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing Variations can be selected (those with at least one recorded Riff).

PARAMETERS:

Variation: Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing Variations can be selected (those with at least one recorded Riff). Riff: Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is empty, the phrase No Riff appears. Measures to delete: Specifies the number of measures to delete. Assignable values: a number that does not exceed the length of the Riff. For example, if the Riff is 4 measures long, the maximum assignable value if 4. Delete from locator: This parameter indicates the first measure of those to be deleted. Assignable values: within the actual limits of the riff. Dependent on the previous parameter.

Riff: Selects one of the riffs from the selected Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is empty, the phrase No Riff appears. Measures to insert: Specifies the number of measures to insert. Assignable values: depends on the length of the riff (max 16 measures). Insert from locator: Specifies the measure at which the new measures will be inserted. Assignable values: from the first measure (bar) of the Riff, to the first measure after the end measure of the Riff.
a b

(1)

(2)

(a)

(b)

(3)

(4)

(1)

(2)

(5)

(6)

Insert measures example. Two measures are inserted at measure 3. Measure 3 and all successive measure are moved forward.

Delete measures example. Measure 3 and 4 are cancelled. All the measures after the deletion point shift towards the beginning of the Riff.

Edit Style 519

From locator... To locator...: Determines the start and end point of the part to be affected. It is Press this soft button to escape permanently from possible to specify measure, beat and resolution. Sound environment without saving evenModifies thethe keyEdit Velocity value. This parameter Assignable values: within the actual limits of the tual modifications. represents the key-strike velocity, or its intensity. Riff. See Escape from Edit Sound Generally, the greater the velocity the higheron thepage 2.14 of this chapter. volume. Velocity also affects the filter of many sounds, making them brighter with increased velocity.

EXIT (F6) Velocity

SAVE (F8)

Press this soft button to save your programmed sound to the WK6/8SE Sound Library and escape from Edit Sound permanently. Refer to the section entitled Storing Sounds which follows on the next page (2.40). On page 2. 42, you will find some useful suggestions and tips to obtain the best results from PARAMETERS Sound Editing tasks. Variation: Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing Variations can be selected (those with at least one recorded Riff). Riff: Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is empty, the phrase No Riff appears. Velocity mode: Provides two velocity modes to choose from which affect the way the Change Velocity function operates. Normal - The value indicated in Velocity change is added to or subtracted from the Velocity values of the notes. Fixed - The note Velocities are all set to the value specified in Velocity change Change Velocity: Specifies the amount by which the velocity values can be changed. This depends on the option selected in Velocity Mode. Note range from... to...: Sets the upper and lower limits of the notes. To modify the velocity of a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to change the snare (D2) set Note range from D2 to D2. Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.

520 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 239

Transpose
Transposition in semitone steps.

Microscope
The Microscope allows you to modify every single event recorded in the tracks. The Event List shown at the center of the display shows all the events recorded.

ACCESS TO THE EVENT EDIT

1. With the track in edit selected, use the / cursor buttons to scroll through the events. The selected notes are played automatically. 2. Select the parameter to be changed using the / cursor buttons. 3. Use the DIAL to change the selected parameters.

PARAMETERS:

Variation: Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing Variations can be selected (those with at least one recorded Riff). Riff: Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is empty, the phrase No Riff appears. Transpose: Determines the value of the transposition (in semitone steps). Assignable values: -64 ... +64. Note range from... to...: Sets the upper and lower limits of the notes to be affected. To transpose a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to change the snare (D2) set the parameter to Note range from D2 to D2. Assignable values: C-1 ... G9 From locator... To locator...: Defines the start and end point of the part to be affected. It is possible to specify the measure, beat and resolution. Assignable values: within the actual limits of the Riff.

PROGRAMMABLE EVENTS AND PARAMETERS

The Status column shows the type of event. One or more parameters can be changed for each event. See the next page for a table of events and their parameters.

SELECT RIFF... (F1)

Selects the Riff and Variation to edit.

SHOW... (F2)
Here you can select the events that will be displayed in the Event List.

Set the parameters and press ENTER. To mask the events, select Off

Edit Style 521

INS: (X) (F3) PAN ENVELOPE KEY ON & KEY OFF

Inserts the event specified inand the Key INS. TYPE The Pan Key On Off Envelopes are 10 function at the current cursor position. segment maximum) curves.To position the inserted precisely, modify its locator Theevent Key On envelope regulates the Pan for the (the parameters to the left of the Status colentire duration that the notes are held pressed. umn). The events are inserted with the following default parameter values:
Status Note: P. Ch Contr. P.Bend M.Tch P.Tch 1V C4 1 2V 64 1 3V 64 1 Gate 128

PAN ENVELOPE Event List TRACKING track in edit

The Pan Envelope Tracking curve, valid both for the Key On and Key Off envelopes, modifies the relative position of the sound across the keyboard extension with respect to the central point. For example, the sound in the bass section may be further to the left while in the treble section, it may be further to the right.

measure Value 1 1 0 Off envelope ---The Key controls Pan variations beat Value 2 after releasing the 0 64 ---- notes. resolution Value 3 0 ---type and parameters Gate The event options used to shape the C4 0 ---(Status) Pitch Envelope Tracking curve, (Segment, Point,

After inserting the desired event, modify its parameters accordingly.

Key and Level), are identical to those used for the Volume Tracking curve explained on page 2. CATCH LOCATOR 20.(F7)

Selects the event currently playing, or the event immediately An after the current riff position. illustrated example of how to program a TrackOpens a dialog window where you can select the ing curve is on page 2. 22. The options and parameters used to shape the type of event to insert manually with the Ins: GO TO LOC... (F8) Pan Key On/Key Off Envelopes, (Zoom, Seg(x) function. ment, Time and Level), are identical to those used the cursor directly to the first event in the Takes for the Amplitude Key On/Key Off Envelope ex- measure. The number can be entered specified plained on page 2..24. using the DIAL.

INS TYPE... (F4)

An illustrated example of how to program Key On & Key Off Envelope is on page 2. 25.
Specify the locator and press ENTER to confirm. Select the type of event and press ENTER.

DELETE (F6)
Deletes the selected event.

522 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 237

EVENTS TABLE AND RELATVE PARAMETERS

STATUS Note VALUE 1 Note name VALUE 2 Key On Velocity VALUE 3 Key Off Velocity GATE Note Length expressed as the Sequencer resolution (q=192) [0 63323]

Program Change

Program change Bank Select MSB message. The PC message. To select contained in the tracks the WK6/8SE banks, and shown in the use numbers 1 16 Microscope has [1 128] priority over the PC recorded in the Performance. [1 128] Type of Control Change (or MIDI controller). Example: CC00 = BankSelect MSB, CC32 = BankSelect LSB, CC01 = Modulation, CC07 = Volume [1 128] Value of LSB (Least Significant Byte). [0= Off, 1127 = On] Control Change Value

Bank Select MSB message. Not necessary to select the WK6/8SE sounds [1 128]

Control Change

Pitch Bend

Value of MSB (Most Significant Byte). Effectifve value of bending. [063 = down 64 = neutral 65127 = up]

Mono Touch Poly Touch

Channel Aftertouch intensity [0 127] Note to which Aftertouch is applied. [C1 G9] Note Aftertouch intensity. [0 127]

Edit Style 523

AMPLITUDE S.O.1 & S.O.2: Applies Lfo A1...A6 to the of Variation and S.O.1 you want to mask A4, the depth of TOUCH2FILT & S.O.2: Links Amplitude to produce Tremolo effects. This A5paand A6 for Variation 1, A2 and A3 for Variation the Filter modulation to Aftertouch pressure. By rameter determines the modulation depth 2, of program the the first two lines aspressure follows: to the keys, the Deapplying aftertouch LFO on the Amplitude (the output level). lay parameter is ignored and the oscillation starts The Mask function allows you to program the Baimmediately (toggles between open and closed V1 = Off/Off/Off/A4/A5/A6 sic elementsThe of two Variations (Var 2 values and 4) indicate in positive and negative an opfilter). order to automatically obtain the Basic elements posed sense of increase/decrease of the Tremolo V2 = Off/A2/A3/Off/Off/Off of the remaining two Variations (Var 1 and 3). output level (the choice between positive or negaThe positive and negative values indicate an optive values give perfectly The Basic Variation 2 generates the equivalent Basics of results). DRUM MASK posed (F7/F8)sense of opening and closing, otherwise, choice between a positive or negative Variations 1 Higher and 2. The Basic Variation 4 generpositive or negative values increase the the Drum the Opens dialog window. value mask give perfectly equivalent results. Higher ates the Basics of Variations 3 and 4. To obtain modulation depth. As in the Mask function for the values Arrangement positive or negative increase the Filter the best results, program your Variations with all Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect. tracks, the Drum Mask excludes individual permodulation depth. 6 accompaniment tracks (Acc.1,2,3,4,5,6) as well cussive sounds from the Drum tracks of the Varias Drums and Bass. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect. TOUCH AMPL. S.O.1 & S.O.2: Links the ations. depth The idea is to reduce your Style recording times of the Amplitude modulation to Aftertouch presFour keyboards (or drumkits) appear in the diaby recordingsure, 2 Variations and exploit the autopermitting you to control of the amount of log window, each representing the Drum track matic features to create Style with Variations. Tremolo bya varying the4aftertouch pressure ap(DR) of the four different variations. Then, using plied the Arranger Tracks function, mask to the keys. Select the variation with the cursor buttons / . one or two accompaniment sections in one or The Delay parameter is ignored when pressure Play the notes corresponding to the percussion two Variation to reduce the instrumental content is applied to the keys and the oscillation starts instruments to exclude them from the selected of the respective accompaniments. immediately. variation. The Bass tracks rest unchanged and cannot be The positive and negative values indicate an opThe excluded notes are denoted by a small black altered. posed sense of increase/decrease of the Tremolo line on white notes and a white line on the black Program theoutput Intro, Ending and Fill of the 4 Varialevel (the choice between positive or neganotes. tions to create a values complete Style. tive give perfectly equivalent results). Play the same note to cancel the line and to play Higher positive or negative values increase the the sound in the selected variation. modulation depth. Press ENTER to confirm the programming, or Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect. ESCAPE to cancel.

Mask

FILTER S.O.1 & S.O.2: Applies Lfo to the Cutoff Frequency of the Filter (1 or 2) to produce a WhaWha effect, caused by the opening and closing of the Filter. This parameter determines the PARAMETERS modulation depth of the Lfo on the Cutoff Frequency. Mask: Activates the Mask function. When the Mask parameter is enabled (ON), the Basic VariThe positive and negative values indicate an opation 2 automatically generates Basic Variation posed sense of opening and closing, other1, while Basic Variation 4 generates Basic or negative wise, the choice between the a positive Variation 3. value give perfectly equivalent results. Higher Options: On,positive Off. or negative values increase the Filter modulation depth. Arranger tracks: Deactivates the individual ArAssignable values: 7 Variation. ... +7. 0 = no effect. rangement parts (A1...A6) of each For example, if you have programmed tracks
Drum track of Variation 1 showing masked Percussive instruments

524 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 235

Song
The SONG button allows you to select any SONGS that you may already have loaded to memory from Disk or Hard Disk. From the same button, you can also enter Song Record mode by selecting an empty User Song. SONG-PERFORMANCES Each Song contains up to 8 Performances, which are loaded and memorized with the corresponding Song. Using the Song-Performance is an alternative and rapid method of changing Sounds and Effects. Song-Performances instantly reset the instrument, therefore, they are very useful during a real time Song recording. PROGRAMMING SONG PERFORMANCES Program your Song Performance using the methods described for the Global Performances and Style Performances. Store the Song Performance to the Song Performance bank with the STORE PERF procedure (refer to the Performance chapter for instructions). A Song Performance can have a maximum of 32 tracks. Lets first examine how to select a Song and play it back. In this section you will also find explanations regarding the various options offered in song playback mode. LOAD SONGS TO MEMORY If you havent already loaded any Songs to RAM memory, refer to the DISK chapter for illustrated instructions of the Load file operation from Disk, Hard disk or SCSI device (optional). Return to the Time/Tempo window with button F6.

SONG PLAYBACK
1. Once youve loaded your Song(s), press the SONG button to open the SONG BANKS selection window.

2. Select the Song with the corresponding Soft button to enter Song Playback mode. The display shows the Time/Tempo window, where you can modify some playback parameters.

If you want to see the sounds assigned to the tracks of the Song Performance, press the SoundView button, (F5), and use the Track scroll buttons to bring other tracks into view.

Song 61

3. Start thePITCH playback with the PLAY button in JUKEBOX... (F1) ENVELOPE KEY ON & KEY OFF PITCH ENVELOPE TRACKING the SEQUENCER. Recalls Jukebox (explained after- valid both The Pitch Key On and Key Off Envelopes are 10 the The Pitch function Envelope Tracking curve, During the playback, the LED on the PLAY wards). segment maximum) curves. for the Key On and Key Off envelopes, increases button will be on and the song location pointor reduces the speed of action of the Pitch enveThe Key On envelope regulates the Pitch for the er (LOC) in the top right hand corner of the OPTION... (F2) lope across the keyboard. entire duration that the notes are held pressed. display monitors the position of the Song. You This parameter allows you to set the Metronome can also start the SONG with the START/ options. STOP button. Countdown - activates a one measure lead into Using the PLAY, STOP, >> (FORWARD) and the recording of a sequence during which events << (REWIND) buttons in conjunction with the cannot be captured. Options: On, Off. song position locator, you should be able to Metr. volume - Sets the metronome volume. easily move around from the beginning of Options: Off, 10...127. your song to the end and all points in between. At any time while a song is playing, The Key Off envelope controls Pitch variations SONG P (F4) you can jump forwards or backwards by after releasing the notes. The options and parameters used to shape the Press this button to select a Song Performance. pressing the >> FORWARD or << (REWIND) Pitch Envelope Tracking curve, (Segment, Point, buttons. For a longer song, holding down Key and Level), are identical to those used for these buttons will move rapidly in either dithe Volume Tracking curve explained on page 2. rection. 20. 4. If you press STOP once, it will pause your song at the current position. An illustrated example of how to program a TrackThe LED on the STOP button will flash to ining curve is on page 2. 22. dicate that the Song is paused. While the song is paused, you can cue it to any measUse the soft buttons to select the required Song ure using theoptions forward (>>) and rewind (<<)to shape The and parameters used the If you select it during the recordbuttons. Pitch Key On/Key Off Envelopes, (Zoom,Performance. Seging, the event is stored in the Master Track as a ment, Time and the Level), are identical to those used When you press PLAY, song will resume ProgramChange. See Song Performance on for the Key On/Key Off Envelope exfrom where youAmplitude are currently paused. page 6.4. plained on the page 2..24. If you want to take song back to the beginning, press the START/STOP button, or SOUND VIEW (F5) press STOP again while the STOP LED is An illustrated example of how to program Pitch Recalls still flashing. Key On & Key Off Envelopes appears on the page the Sound View page, where you can see and change the sounds of the current Perform2.25. When the Song is not playing and at its initial ance. starting position, the LED on the STOP button remains on. 5. To change the Tempo, rotate the DIAL. This control is active in Song playback mode for changes in the playing speed (tempo). Lets now examine the options available in the main Song playback display.

62 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 233

TIME/TEMPO (F6) Recalls the Time/Tempo page, where you can control the record/playback parameters.

LOCATOR (SONG POSITION POINTER) This section, (LOC 1 1) shows the current Song position expressed in measures and beats. When the Song is not playing, the Locator can be modified in the Time/Tempo page to select a starting point for the playback. It can be also modified with the << (Rewind) and >> (Forward) buttons regardless of the status of the sequencer (playing or off). LOCATOR (PROGRAMMABLE) This parameter (1 1 1) shows the same information as the locator in the status bar, but at a higher resolution, 1 (beat), 1 (measure), 1 (tick). When the sequencer is not playing, you can select this parameter and modify each part of the locator by rotating the DIAL. PLAY/REC MODE This parameter offers three Playback or Record options to choose from: Linear: the Song starts at the point indicated by the locator and stops at the natural Song end. Forced stop: the Song starts at the point indicated by the locator and stops at the specified End. Loop: the Song starts at the point indicated by the locator, stops at the End, then repeats from the Starting point. The loop repeats continuously until stopped with the Stop button.

ERASE... (F7) Here you can cancel a Track or a Song. Track- Cancels the selected track. Song - Cancels all tracks (all Song) leaving an empty Song, ready to start another recording.. The Song-Performances are not cancelled. METRONOME (F8) Activates/deactivates the metronome.

THE TIME/TEMPO PARAMETERS

The Time/Tempo display shows several information boxes and offers a number of different playback options. TEMPO ( ) Shown in the status bar at the top of the display, this represents the current Metronome speed (Tempo) expressed in beats per second. During the playback, the Tempo can be modified with the DIAL. The [i] or [e] symbols, shown after the tempo value indicate the current status of the synchronizing MIDI clock: [i] = internal (WK6/8SE or [e] = external (external sequencer controlling the sequencer). The MIDI Clock can be programmed under EDIT MIDI/GENERAL SETTINGS.

Song mode - the Time/Tempo parameters

Song 63

START FILTER ENVELOPE KEY ON & KEY OFF JUKEBOX FILTER ENVELOPE TRACKING This parameter sets start measure and can Valid for the all Algorithms. The Jukebox Valid function for all chains Algorithms. the songs of your only be modified when the Play mode is set to choice and plays them back as a medley a valid both The Filter Envelope Trackingwith curve, The Key On and Key Off Filter Envelopes are 10 LOOP. With LOOP selected, the START paramsingle command. for the Key On and Key Off Filter Envelopes, insegment curves (maximum). eter shows the starting point of the Loop. Procreases or reduces the speed of action of the Select The Keyplayback On envelope represents the variation of the JUKEBOX button (F1) in the Time/ grammable in Song mode and Record Filter envelope acrosstwo the columns: keyboard. Tempo page. The display shows the Filter cutoff frequency for the entire duration mode. on the left appears a list of Songs in memory while that the notes are held pressed. on the right is the Jukebox list. END This parameter sets the end measure and can only be modified when the Play mode is set to FORCED STOP or LOOP. With LOOP selected, START shows the point at which the sequence ends before looping back to the Start locator. With FORCED STOP selected, START indicates the The options and parameters used to shape the automatic Stop point. Programmable in Song The Key Off envelope controls Filter variations Balance Envelope Tracking curve, (Segment, playback mode and Record mode. The negative highlight cursor shows which song after releasing the notes. Point, Key and Level), are identical to those used is selected in the Song list. The frame on the for the Volume Tracking curve explained on page TIME SIGNATURE (PROGRAMMABLE WITH AN EMPTY right shows the destination in the Jukebox list. 2. 20. SONG) Select a Song from the left part to include in the This parameter can only be modified before reJukebox list and press the INSERT button, (F5) An illustrated example oflist. how to program a Trackcording the Song. or ENTER, to insert the Song in the ing curve is on page 2. 22. START TEMPO (PROGRAMMABLE WHEN THE SONG IS OFF) This sets the starting tempo of a Song and can only be modified when the Song is off. The value The options and parameters used of the setting is recorded in the Master Track, asto shape the Filter Key On/Key Off Envelopes, (Zoom, Segthe Start Parameter. ment, Time and Level), are identical to those used for thePROGRAMMABLE) Amplitude Key On/Key Off Envelope exSONG MEMORY (NOT plained on page 2..24. Repeat the selection procedure for other Songs Shows the Song dimensions expressed in Kiloand press INSERT (or ENTER) each time to combytes. Each Song is limited to 400 kb of memory, pile the list. illustrated ofinhow to program Key independentAn of the memoryexample remaining the System RAM. On & Key Off Envelope is on page 2. 25. If you want to substitute one of the names in the Jukebox list, move to the right part of the display, select the name to change, move back to the left, select another Song and press INSERT (or ENTER). Now return to the right and select a new location for the next Song. When you have compiled the list, press EX-

64 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 231

ECUTE, (F8) to start the playback of the Jukebox list.

PRELOAD
The Preload function is a background loading facility which allows you to playback, by means of a single command, a list of Songs (or MIDI Files) contained in a disk or Hard disk, without having to load all the data to memory beforehand. PLAYBACK ALL THE SONGS OR MIDI FILES ON A DISK 1. Insert the disk containing Songs and/or Midi files into the disk drive and press PRELOAD (in the Edit Numbers section). If a disk is not inserted in the drive, the Hard Disk will be engaged automatically.

You can interrupt the Jukebox at any time with STOP. DELETE (F4) Removes a selected Song from the Jukebox list. INSERT (F5) Inserts the selected Song into the Jukebox list. RESET LIST (F6) Removes all the names from the Jukebox list. ALL SONG (F7) Includes all the Songs contained in memory to the Jukebox list in a single step. An existing list will be cancelled and substituted with the new. EXECUTE (F8) Starts the playback of the Jukebox.

2. Select the type of file to include in the list using the soft button F6 (SONG/smf). 3. Use the cursor buttons to select the Song or MIDI file to include in the list and press ENTER. The selected file is added to the first available space in the list and the destination frame moves one step forward.

4. Select other files and press ENTER each time to include them in the list. IMPORTANT: If you are working from Floppy disk, do not extract the disk during the file insertion procedure; doing so will provoke the cancellation of the list.

Song 65

5. You can fill the list in a single step using the THE PRELOAD FUNCTIONS Select All function (F7). Starting with the Time/Tempo display, press To replace a file inserted into the list by misPRELOAD to gain access to all the options avail- High Pass, Assignable values: Off, Low Pass, Valid for all Algorithms. take, select the name to replace, then select able which you can select with the soft buttons Band Pass, Parametric boost, Parametric cut. The Dual 1 and Dual and 3 algorithms have two Filthe file that you want to insert press ENF1F8. TER. ters connected in parallel [Filter os. 1, Filter os. CUTOFF FREQUENCY: Sets a value for the 2]. The Dual 2 and Dual 4 algorithms have two 6. Press F8 (Play) to start the playback of the FLOPPY DISK (F1) Cutoff Frequency, or the frequency at which the Filters connected in series [Filter 1, Filter 2]. Songs in the list. filter intervenes. The Cutoff Frequency is the Selects the floppy disk. Filters enhance or attenuate certain frequencies After short disk scanning period, the first Song same for all the notes of a Sound, unless you of the Waveforms. The sound changes accord(or Midi file) on the disk starts to play. If programme Filter Tracking. HARD DISK (F2) ing to the type of filter selected. The WK6/8SE Preload engages the Hard Disk, the first song Assignable 0 ... 191. filters are 2 pole filters with roll off curvesSelects at 12 the Hard disk (ifvalues: installed). of the first Block found containing Songs will dB per octave. start to play. During playback, the backRESONANCE: Applies resonance to the Cutoff AUTO PRELOAD (F3) If both filters are programmed with identical paground loading procedure for the second frequency, creating a peak of emphasis at the rameter values, they become Song a single 4 pole fil- this option is selected (negative highlight), When song begins (the message Preloading Cutoff frequency. A high value of resonance can a roll off curve of 24 dB per octave, per- are loaded into memory together with all Songs appears ter for with an instant). place the filter on auto-oscillation, producing a fect for those classic analog synth sounds. associated RAM-Sounds andrich RAM Sounds. If whistling sound in harmonics. there is not sufficient memory in RAM to accept Some additional information regarding Filters Assignable Values: 0 ... 127. the associated Sounds, ROM Sounds will be used is on page 2.43 of this chapter. instead and the Song may playback incorrectly. CUTOFF DYNAMIC SENSITIVITY: Links the If the Auto Preload option is not selected, the During playback, press PRELOAD to open Cutoff Frequency to Key On Velocity. Songs associated RAM-Sounds and RAM the TIME/TEMPO display where you can sePositive increase the Cutoff Frequency by Sounds will not bevalues loaded. lect a track and set it to key-play in order to playing harder (the filter opens resulting in a play along with the Song. Use the << and >> brighter sound), negative values produce the inbuttons to advance or rewind the Song at will. RESET LIST (F4) verse effect (the filter closes and the sound beCancels the comes currentdull). list and stops the playback instantly. Assignable values: 7 ... 0 +7. 0 = no effect.

Filter

PLAY ALL SONGS (F5) RESONANCE DYNAMIC SENS.: Links ResoTYPE: Selects the Filter type. Off deactivates Select this option to automatically play all the nance to Key On Velocity. the filter. Songs or Midi files contained in a disk Positive values enhance the without Resonance with infirst loading creased the datakey intovelocity RAM memory. After values give while negative pressing Preload with a disk inserted in the drive, the inverse effect. Playback continues non-stop until all the select PLAY ALL SONGS (F5) and press Songs or MIDI Files on disk, or in the enAssignable values: 7 ... 0 +7. 0 = no effect. PRELOAD twice. After a short scanning period, gaged Hard disk Block, have been played. the first available Song (or MidiFile) will start to CUTOFF TOUCH SENSITIVITY: Links the CutPress STOP only if you want to stop playplay. Playback will continue non-stop until all the off Frequency to Aftertouch. back, otherwise you will cancel the Preload Songs (or Midi files) on disk have been played. operation. Positive values increasingly open the filters with increased Aftertouch pressure, negative values SONG/SMF (F6) have the inverse effect. Use this option to select the type of file to insert Assignable 7 ... handled 0 +7. is 0 = no effect. in the list. The currentvalues: type being shown in capital letters. If, for example, the type Edit Sound - Filter

FILTER CONTROL PARAMETERS

66 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 229

of file being loaded is a Song, the caption SONG will appear in capital letters while the second caption smf will appear in small letters. SELECT ALL (F7) Selects all the files shown in the left part of the display and inserts them directly into the list. The list can contain a maximum of 16 files. If the SMF option is selected, Select All inserts all MIDI files present in the current directory. The list will show the Song names without the .MID extension. PLAY (F8) Starts the playback of the Songs contained in the list.
Note: if the Disk or Hard Disk contains more than one Block, Preload will recognise only the first block while others will be ignored. Warning:: song playback using Preload will cancel all songs contained in memory, except the one currently playing.

Midi File Player

WK6/8SE features a MIDI File player which allows you to play MIDI Files directly from a source (Floppy disk or Hard disk) without loading the files to memory. Press the SONG button to access the SONG BANKS page.

Press one of the +/ Page/Bank buttons (S.M.F. PLAYER) to open the MIDI FILE PLAYER.

If a Floppy disk containing MIDI Files is inserted in the drive, the machine starts to scan the disk and the display shows the root directory, where MIDI files are saved. If selected, press ENTER to gain access to the MIDI files.

Select a MIDI File to listen to and press PLAY. While the Midi file is playing, you can play along with the playback.

Song 67

The MIDI fileBalance starts to play envelope directly response from the to source key velocity SEARCH vari- S.M.F. BALANCE (F7) ENVELOPE KEY ON & KEY OFF disk. Press STOP ations.to stop the MIDI File playback This button The open a Search window you Balance Key On andwhere Key Off Envelopes are at any point.Positive values increase the response of the Balcan specify the name or the first(maximum), few letters of a 10 segment curves allowing you to The MIDI FILE ance PLAYER envelope display with increased offers several key velocityspecific while MIDI File, useful for searching the enhance the presence of oneon Waveform with reoptions. negative values have the inverse effect. AssignHard Disk. spect to the other in the key on and key release able values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect. situations. FLOPPY DISK (F1) - HARD DISK (F2) The Key On Envelope represents the variation These two buttons select the source storage deof the Balance for the entire duration that the KEY OFF BALANCE ENV. RATE DYN. SENS.: vice where MIDI Files are located. notes are held pressed. Links the response of the key off Balance envelope completion velocity to key velocity variations. MELODY ON/OFF (F3) Positive increase the completion velocity Select this option to values deactivate the melody line of the Key Off Balance envelope with increased of the Song currently in playback. When the Insert the characters using the keyboard and key velocity the while negative values in- ENTER to confirm. press melody is deactivated, option changes tohave the verse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no MELODY OFF (in negative highlight) and you can effect. play the melody yourself on the keyboard. EXIT (F8) To activate the melody line, press the MELODY Press EXIT to escape from the MIDI FILE The Key Off Envelope represents the variation OFF option (F3). PLAYER. of the Balance after the notes have been released. BALANCE (F4) This option opens a KEYBOARD BALANCE window where you can adjust the BALANCE between the keyboard sounds and the sequencer.

Rotate the DIAL to adjust the Balance. SOUND VIEW (F5) - PLAY VIEW (F6) These two buttons toggle between the Sound View and Play View displays. The PlayView display offers the same playback parameters shown in the Song PlayView display.

The options and parameters used to shape the Balance Envelope (Zoom, Segment, Time and Level), are identical to those used for the Amplitude Key On/Key Off Envelope explained on page 2..24. An illustrated example of how to program a Key On & Key Off Envelopes appears on the page 2.25.

68 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 227

Recording Songs
WK6/8SE offers two principal Song recording methods: Quick Rec and Record. QUICK REC RECORDING The Quick Rec method exploits existing Styles in order to record your keyboard tracks with automatic accompaniments. This method is a quick and easy way of recording which does not involve the more advanced options common to the more traditional Song Record method explained afterwards. The Quick Rec method is an excellent way of recording backing tracks for vocalists. RECORD METHOD The more traditional Record method allows you to record one track at a time and does not exploit existing structures. For example, to record a Drum track, you must build the drum accompaniment note for note using the individual percussive instruments of a Drumkit assigned to one of the tracks. 3. Select a Style and set the accompaniment controls (MIXER LOCK, TEMPO LOCK, ARRANGE ON/OFF, MEMORY, LOWER MEMORY, ARRANGE MODE options). 4. Program the Performance as required and save the changes with STORE PERFORMANCE. 5. If necessary, activate KEY START, INTRO, FILL or ENDING. 6. Press START/STOP to start the recording. The PLAY button activates automatically. 7. Play the keyboard sounds with the automatic accompaniment, using the Fills and Intro at will. 8. Conclude your song (use the Ending). 9. Press STOP. The LED on the RECORD button goes off. At this point it is possible to modify the song recording in Edit Song, or to record other tracks using the normal Record method described on the next page.

THE QUICK REC METHOD

(N.B. See also page 1.42 of the Quick Guide). 1. Press SONG to open the Songs dialog window and select a free location (User). 2. Select the QuickRec option from the New Song dialog window by pressing the soft button F2. The RECORD LED lights up and the Quick Record page activates showing a negative highlight page. A new Song and Song Performance is created based on the starting Performance (if modifications were previously applied, entering record mode saves the modifications to the new Song-Performance).

tracks QuickRecord page

menu

Recording a Song 69

The maximum segment time is approximately 21 The Record seconds. method Assignable values: 0 ... 127. Sets the Sound of the segment at 1. Press theLevel SONG: button to open the level Song Banks window. its terminal point. The maximum level corresponds to the volume programmed in the Volume editor. Assignable values: 0 ... 127.

IMPORTANT The initial level of the first Key On segment at the starting point is always zero (it cannot be modified). The level at the terminal point of the Key Off Envelope is always zero (it cannot be modified).

An illustrated example of how to program Key On & Key Off Envelopes is shown below. Here you can program a number of recording parameters before starting. Refer to the section entitled Time/Tempo on page 6.12. KEY ON AND KEY OFF ENVELOPES 2. Select anPROGRAMMING empty location (User). 5. A track will already be selected for the recordYou are prompted to select a recording mode 3.bySelect the TIME 1. To insert a segment, press F6 to open the ing shown the record icon:parameter with the down ( ) to create a New song. cursor arrow and rotate the DIAL to set the SEGMENT selection window and press ENTER

required value. to confirm the Add Segm option (shown selected). If you want to record a different track, simply
3. Press Record, (F1) to enter Song Record mode. The LED of the RECORD panel button lights up and the display shows the Sound View page in negative highlight with the first track active for recording.
Edit Sound - Key On Envelope: add 1 segment

select it. To place all the tracks in record, press SELECT ALL TRACKS (F4). All the tracks will be activated for recording and the parameter changes to DESELECT ALL TRACKS. 6. To change sounds, select the Sound View option by pressing F5.
- Key Onto Envelope: modify the Time parameter It will notEdit beSound necessary store the changes in the Song They will be auto4. Performance. Select the LEVEL parameter with the down matically stored. ( ) cursor arrow and rotate the DIAL to set

2. Rotate the DIAL to select the envelope seg7. To record with or required without the Metronome press the value. ment that you wish to modify. If necessary, the relative soft button (F8) and set it accorduse the ZOOM option to zoom in on the seingly. lected segment.
Entering Song Record activates a default Song Performance. You can program your Song Performances just like the other Performances (Global and Style). Refer to the Performance chapter, page 3.1 for specific information regarding Performance programming tasks. 4. If you want to program the recording options, Sound - Key On Envelope: select a segment press theEdit Time/Tempo button (F6).

8. Press PLAY to start the recording. If Countdown is ON, wait for the countdown to finish before playing (events are not recorded during this phase). 9. Start to play after the countdown. Events will recorded the track or the tracks Editbe Sound - Key On in Envelope: modify Level parameter active for recording.

610 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 225

10. When you have finished, stop the recording with STOP.
Note: Pressing STOP twice rewinds the Song back to the beginning.

TIME/TEMPO PAGE
MODE... (F1) Opens the Record Mode dialog window where you can select various recording options. Replace - The new notes substitute old notes already present in the tracks being recorded. Overdubb - New notes are merged with those already present in the tracks being recorded. Punch In/Out - A means of inserting a correction without repeating a recording. Punch recording is activated by pressing an appropriately programmed pedal (in Edit Controll./Pads). Activate the recording with PLAY. When the song reaches a position just before the point at which the correction must be inserted, press the pedal. At this point, the recording proceeds in replace mode. When the correction is complete, release the pedal to stop the replace recording. OPTION... (F2) Metronome options. Countdown - A lead into the recording during which time no events can be captured Settings: On, Off. Metronome vol. - Volume setting of the metronome tick. Settings Off, 10...127. CONTROLS REC... (F3) Recording options for Tempo, Master Volume, effects changes. These events are captured in the Master Track. Tempo - To record the Tempo variations. Settings: On, Off. P.Volume. - To record the general Volume of the instrument using the Damper pedal programmed to operate as a continuous control (Volume). These events are recorded as CC07 (see Appendix). Settings: On, Off.

11. To add additional events to the same track(s), press STOP again to take the song pointer to the starting point and repeat points 8 - 10.
Note: To add notes to existing ones in a track, select the Overdubb option. To substitute existing notes in a recorded track with new ones, select the Replace option.

12. If you are satisfied with the recording, confirm the track or tracks by pressing the corresponding Soft buttons. The recording will be confirmed and the tracks set to seq-play. 13. Repeat the recording procedures for other tracks. 14. Press RECORD to escape Record mode. The LED of the RECORD button will turn off and the display returns to normal. 15. Press PLAY to listen to the playback. Lets examine the Time/Tempo parameters.

Recording a Song 611

Effect - To record the changes of the effects asPLAY/REC MODE signed to the Performance and respective effect Recording and playback options for the Song. volume levels. These events are captured as Linear causes the Song to play or be recorded CC16, CC17, CC48, CC49 (see Appendix). once only, from the beginning to theis point which Valid for all Algorithms. Dual 1 and Dual 2 actiWhen this parameter not at set to Off, the last Settings: On,vate Off. the Amp. Envel. 1 and Amp. Envel. you press STOP. 2 edisegment of the Key On Envelope sets to 0 auto-

Amplitude Envelope & Balance Envelope

tors; Dual 3 and Dual 4 share an Amp. Envelope matically cannot modified; this is to preForced Stop causes and the song to be play or be reSELECT ALL TRACKS with (F4) a Balance control. the sound from playing continually after recorded from vent the specified start locator to the end Amplitude Envelopeand represents lease due to the deactivated Key Off Envelope. Activates all The the tracks for recording the pa- the volume locator. displacement Sound over time. Assignable values: Off, A0 C8. rameter changes name of tothe DESELECT ALL Loop allows you to play or record in a cyclic This editor youinto program the Key On TRACKS. This resets allallows the tracks key-play manner from the Start point to the End point. Envelope, SEGMENT 1 RATE DYNAMIC SENS.: Segment or seq-play status. the Key Off Envelope and the EnveNote: requires an additional memory lope Tracking. In practice, the Key On and Key The loop 1 corresponds to the Attack phase. This parambuffer. When this mode is selected, the memory Off Envelopes correspond to the traditional ADSR eter ties the Attack rate of the Sound to key veSOUND VIEW (F5) progress bar shows an increased amount of used parameters (Attack, Decay, Sustain, Release). locity. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. Recalls the SOUND VIEW page where you can memory. Positive values increase the Attack rate with insee the changes that you may want to make to creased key velocity while negative values prothe Performance tracks. START duce the inverse effect with increased key velocStarting indicator. is active (Play/Rec ity. 0 = If noLoop response. TIME/TEMPO (F6) Mode= Loop) this parameter indicates the point at Recalls the TIME/TEMPO page where you can which the Song starts repeat. The parameter KEY OFFto RATE DYNAMIC SENS.: Links the program the record/play parameters. can be modified with the DIAL. response of the Key Off Envelope rate to the release velocity. The Key Off Envelope correERASE... (F7) END sponds to the Release phase. Assignable valAMPLITUDE ENVELOPE PARAMETERS End point marker. CancellationTHE of the track or Song. ues: 7 ... +7. is active (Play/Rec If Loop Mode= this parameter indicatesthe thecompletion point ENVELOPE FINISH: Determines the note from Loop) Track - Cancels the selected track. Positive values increase speed at which the repeating song ends before looping which the Key Off envelope cannot interrupt the of the Key Off Envelope with increased key reSong - Cancels all the tracks (entire Song) and back to the Start marker. If the Play/Rec Amp. envelope on its natural course to complelease velocity, while negative values slow down leaves an empty Song, ready to capture reMode=Forced Stop, this parameter indicates the key release tion, indispensable to simulate, for example, the the completion speed with increased corded events. The Song Performance remains automatic Stop point. acoustic piano where no dampers are applied velocity. 0 = no response. intact. from the note A6 onwards; the sound continues The parameter can be modified with the DIAL. indefinitely after release. SUSTAIN (F5) METRONOME (F8) TIME SIGNATURE This parameter fixes a sustain level independent Activates/deactivates the metronome. Metro. This parameter of the release can be envelope. modifiedActivation only be- of this pafore startingrameter a recording. depends If the onSong the status contains of the Sustain LOC recorded events, function. the parameter cannot be modiThe Song Locator. Indicates the current position fied. Press soft button F5 to activate Sustain (shown of the Song, expressed in measures, beats and in negative highlight). Press again to deactivate resolution (tick). TEMPO Sustain. The measure can be modified with the DIAL. It Initial playing/recording speed. 0 The parameter Assignable values: 127. is not possible to select the next measure after can be modified with the DIAL in the Sound the Song end point. For example, if the recorded View or Time/Tempo page, or in the Master Song terminates at measure 10, the Locator canTrack. not be given a value greater than 10 -1 -1. Tempo changes can be carried out during the Edit Sound - Amplitude Envelope (single)

612 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 223

recording by using the DIAL. The events are captured in the Master Track, provided that the appropriate option is active (Controls rec, dialog window F3). The Master Track always contains the initial Tempo of the Song. The value can be modified but not cancelled. QUANTIZE An auto-corrector of timing errors during the recording phase. The selection values are normal, triplets or swing.
Value 1/4 1/8 1/12 1/16 1/24 1/32 1/48 1/64 1/96 free 1/8 B...F* 1/16 B...F* free triplet (1/64) (1/64 triplet) no quantization . . (swing) (swing) triplet triplet Quantization

If the RAM already contains a large amount of data, a dialog window may appear showing the message Memory full!, which indicates that the recording cannot proceed further. The recording is instantly interrupted. You can increase the amount of space in RAM by deactivating the Undo function. RESTORING THE SONGS MEMORY If you have loaded disk-based Songs or recorded Songs and used up all the memory dedicated to the storage of Songs, a quick and easy way of clearing Song memory and making room for other Songs is to use the Restore Songs operation. Naturally, you must remember to save the Songs that you dont want to lose to disk before proceeding with the restore procedure. 1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain access EDIT GENERAL. 2. Press RESTORE SONGS, (F6) to cancel all the Songs (and relative Song-Performances) in RAM. You are prompted with a request to reconfirm your choice. 3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel. With ENTER, the Songs are cancelled from memory. With ESCAPE, the song data are retained. EDITING YOUR SONGS The Edit Song functions allow you to modify the recorded song, by copying or moving entire parts of a song, by correcting timing errors, by inserting events in event edit environments (Microscope and Master Track).

no quantization

* B F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel. MEMORY PROGRESS BAR A bar graph which monitors the amount of memory being used up by the song as it is being recorded. In Play mode, the parameter changes to SONG MEMORY, expressed as a numerical value and is independent of the total amount of memory remaining in RAM. Each Song is limited to 400 kb.

Recording a Song 613

Balance Tracking allows you to program a BalValid for Dual 3 and Dual 4 Algorithms onlY. UNDO (F2) ance offset, or the variation of the Balance (programmed the Balance page) across the keyWhen this parameter is in selected (shown in negaAfter recording a Song using either the RECORD board. tive highlight), the UNDO function is enabled. method or the QUICK REC method, it can be Undo cancels the last operation or series of opmodified using the functions of the EDIT SONG erations carried out. This function consumes MENU. exactly the same amount of RAM memory as the Song. If there is a shortage of memory in ENTERING EDIT SONG RAM, it is a good idea to deactivate UNDO. Select the Song you wish to modify. Press the UNDO panel button to execute the Press the ST/SONG button (in the Edit/Numbers THE BALANCE PARAMETERS desired Undo operation. section) to gain access to the EDIT SONG paBALANCE: Balances the Volume of the two osrameters. cillators of the current layer. Assignable values: The option and parameters used to shape the 127 ... +127. Balance tracking curve, (Segment, Point, Key and Level), are identical to those explained for the Positive values render the first Waveform louder, You will be prompted with a request to2.20. confirm Volume Tracking on page negative values enhance the second Waveform. the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE. BALANCE DYN. SENSITIVITY: Links the BalAn illustrated example of how to program a Trackance response to key velocity variations. Value ing curve is on page 2. 22. range: 7 ... +7. values the presence Entering thisPositive section the first enhance time opens the main of the first Waveform with increased key velocity menu (page 00/10). On all successive occasions, while negative valuesis enhance the presence of the second the last page selected recalled. UNDO Waveform with increased key velocity. 0If= no is disabled, pressing the UNDO button and confirming with ENTER activates the folresponse. THE EDIT SONG MENU lowing user message: The Edit Song menu contains 10 Song Editing Links the BALANCE TOUCH SENSITIVITY: functions: Balance response to aftertouch variations. Value Erase, Move, Copy, Quantize, range: 7 ... +7. Insert Measure, Delete Measure, Velocity, Transpose, Micro- of the first Positive values enhance the presence scope, Master Track. Waveform with increased Aftertouch pressure Three options are also available: Undo, Edit while negative values enhance the presence of Press ESCAPE to close the window and repeat Score and Song name. Waveform with increased Aftertouch the second the UNDO operation, this time with UNDO enapressure. 0 = no response. bled. ESCAPE FROM EDIT SONG To escape from EDIT SONG press ESCAPE EDIT SCORE (F6) (once or twice, depending on the currently seOpens the Score Edit function. Turn to page lected level). 6.33 Score and Edit Score for explanations reTo escape without closing the edit page, press garding this function. the EDIT button. To pass to another edit environment, use the +/ PAGE buttons ( ).

BALANCE Edit Song

THE EDIT SONG BALANCE OPTIONS TRACKING (F2)

614 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 221

SONG NAME (F8) Modifies the name of the Song.

EDIT PROCEDURE
1. Press ST./SONG to enter Edit Song. The main menu appears. 2. Select the editor that you wish to edit using the DIAL or the cursor buttons. It is also possible to enter an editor by specifying the relative number on the numeric keypad. 3. Press ENTER to enter the editor. 4. Select the desired option with the soft buttons. 5. Select the parameters with the cursor buttons and modify their value with the DIAL or the numeric keypad (with the KEYPAD LED on). 6. Confirm the operation with ENTER. 7. Pass to another editor with the +/ Page ). buttons ( Otherwise, return to the main menu with ESCAPE and select another editor.

The characters are inserted using the method described in the paragraph entitled, Alphanumeric Entry on page 1.4 of the Quick Guide. You can move the cursor with the Soft buttons or the DIAL and insert the characters with the keys of the keyboard. Name - Name of the Song which appears in the WK6/8SE file selector. This name does not appear when the disk is read by a computer. Maximum character length: 10. Title - Full name of the Song. Author - Name of the composer. Pub - Song Publisher.

Edit Song 615

Erase Volume e Balance

Cancels the events from a single track or from all VOLUME tracks. Valid for all Algorithms. Dual 1 and Dual 2 activate Volume 1 and Volume 2, Dual 3 and Dual 4 SOFT BUTTONS F3 a ... F8 Volume editor with a Balance conshare single Use the Softtrol. buttons F1...F8 to select the track from which events will beeditor cancelled. Depending The Volume controls the volume of a sinon the type gle of track selected, thevolume following waveform, or the of patwo waveforms rameters may or a may not appear. with Balance control (Dual 3 & 4). This function corresponds to the maximum volume level Track (F3) - Single track. Select thesituation. track available of the Sound in any with the Soft buttons A...H. Master track (F4) - The Master Track records events pertaining to the general controls of the Song (Tempo, Time Signature, selected Performance, selected effects). Chords track (F5) - Track for the chord symbols inserted in the score. Music track (F6) - Track for the notes of the score (standard notation). THE VOLUME PARAMETERS Lyrics track (F7) - Track for the lyrics of the score. VOLUME: Sets the Volume of waveform 1 or 2. If the Algorithm comprises the Balance editor, this All tracks (F8) . controls the general volume of the layer. Assignable values: 0 127. DYNAMIC SENSITIVITY: Links the Volume response to velocity variations. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. Positive values increase the Volume with increased key velocity, while negative values create the inverse effect. 0 = no response. VOLUME TOUCH SENSITIVITY: Links Volume response to Aftertouch. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. Positive values increase the Volume with increased aftertouch pressure, while negative values create the inverse effect with increased aftertouch. 0 = no response.

ERASE PARAMETERS
EVENT TYPE Selects the type of event to cancel (only for the tracks containing recorded events). DUPLICATE NOTE Eliminates the note with the lowest velocity value when two notes of the same pitch start at the same position. Options: All, Duplicate note, Note, Pitch Bend, Mono touch, Poly touch, Velocity Off, ProgramChange, ControlChange 00...31, ControlChange 64...127.
Edit Sound - Volume

Edit Sound - Balance

616 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 219

NOTE RANGE FROM... TO... The highest and lowest limits of the note range to cancel. To cancel a single percussive instrument from the Drum track, assign the same value to the from and to parameters. For example, to cancel the snare (D2), set the parameter as Note range from D2 to D2. Assignable values: C-1 ... G9. FROM LOCATOR... TO LOCATOR... Determines the start and end point of the part to cancel. In some cases it is possible to specify the measure, beat and resolution (tick), in others, only the measure. Assignable values: within the limits of the Song. It is not possible to specify a point before the start or after the end of the Song.

Edit Song 617

Move Waveform
Shifts eventsValid fromfor one point of the selected track all Algorithms. Single activates a single to another. Waveform editor while all Dual Algorithms activate Waveform 1 and Waveform 2. The Waveform editor gains access to the fundaPARAMETERS mental control parameters of the Waveform which is the basic waveform of the sound. FROM LOCATOR... TO LOCATOR... Determines the start and end point of the part to move. It is possible to specify the measure, beat and resolution (tick). Assignable values: within the limits of the Song. It is not possible to specify a point before the start or after the end of the Song. START LOCATOR Determines the position of the part that is to THEnew WAVEFORM PARAMETERS be moved. WAVEFORM: Here you can select the basic Assignable values: anyof point of the song. waveform the Sound, choosing from the Rom Waveform library, from the Waveforms loaded to memory with a disk-based Ram -Sounds, or one created with the Sample Translator (see page 2.44). Select the waveforms sequentially with the DIAL, referring to the ROM Wave table in the Appendix at first if necessary. You can also use the Search facilities to look for a specific waveform. WAVE VECTOR: Allows you to choose a wave vector: Forward: reads the wave from the start point to the end; Reverse: reads the wave from end to start point; Alternate 1: reads the wave from start point to the end, loops back to the beginning and repeats continually; Alternate 2: a variation of Alternate 1. TUNING MODE: Assigns the Waveform to a specific note of the keyboard. Assignable values: Normal, A0C8. Normal transposes the wave according to the note played. Assigning a note (A0C8) fixes the Wave to the same note across the entire keyboard. TRANSPOSE: Transposes the Waveform in semitones. Assignable values: 64 ... +64. 0 corresponds to standard pitch. FINE PITCH: Fine tunes the Waves pitch in steps of 1/64th of a semitone. Assignable values: 64 ... +64. 0 corresponds to standard pitch. PITCH TOUCH SENSITIVITY: Links Pitch to Aftertouch variations. The Pitch of the Sound can be varied by applying pressure on the notes of the keyboard after key on. Assignable values: 7 (lowest sensitivity = 2 semitones) ... +7 (highest sensitivity = +2 semitones). Positive values increase the Pitch while negative ones have the inverse effect. WAVESTART: Represents the actual (default) starting point of the wave sample in the instruments memory. Use this parameter to determine the point at which the sample will start its playback.

Edit Sound - Waveform

618 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 217

Copy
Copies events from a single track or from all tracks.

SOFT BUTTONS F3 ... F8

Use the Soft buttons F1...F8 to select the track from which events will be copied. Depending on the type of track selected, the following parameters may or may not appear. Track (F3) - Single track. Select the track with the Soft buttons A...H. Master track (F4) - The Master Track records events pertaining to the general controls of the Song (Tempo, Time Signature, selected Performance, selected effects). Chords track (F5) - Track for the chord symbols inserted in the score. Music track (F6) - Track for the notes of the score (standard notation). Lyrics track (F7) - Track for the lyrics of the score. All tracks (F8) .

Edit Song 619

COPY PARAMETERS THE MAIN MENU OPTIONS

FROM LOCATOR... TO LOCATOR... LAYERS The main Menu offers several options which can Determines the end measure Thestart first measure thing you and need to know, when you enter of the part tothe copy. Bars and Resolution cannot COPY MODE be selected with the corresponding Soft buttons EDIT SOUND menu to edit a sound, is that (F1F8). See also page unites 2.38 for further explabe specified.all WK6/8SE sounds are created using either 1, Determines the copy mode. Merge the nations. 2 or 3 LAYERS. After of entering EDIT SOUND, Assignable values: within the limits the Song. copied events to those already present at the deslook at extreme left column ofthe the Edit Sound It is not possible to the specify a measure after tination. Replace substitutes the events Sample Activates program which end is able menu showing three Soft options. of the Song. present at the destination with those the copied.

Options: Merge, Replace. Generalmusic Series instruments (S, START LOCATOR WX, SX) and disk-based samples of the new position of the copied part. various formats. Also permits Determines the reFROM TRACK... TO TRACK... ception and transmission of samples Assignable values: any point, even after the end Specifies the source and destination track of the via Midi and the creation of new point of the Song. copy. The From track... part is selected with Waveforms. Sample Translator is the Soft buttons A ... H. Thediscussed To track... part ison page 2.44. separately modified with the DIAL. COPY TIMES These are the layer select options (L1, L2, L3) Algorithm Allows you to choose one of the 5 which can be in any Edit Sound situaAssignable values: any track (1...32). available. Specifies the number of selected consecutive copies. Algorithms tion. Either 1, 2 or all 3 of these options will be exactly where the previous one Layer Utility Allows you to Create, Import Each or De-copy starts selected. This tells you how many layers the ends. TO SONG... lete layers as required. current sound is made from. Assignable values: 1...998. Determines the destination Song forvelocity the copy. Layer Range Sets the andIf key ranges for Layer can be activated (L) and muted (M) by the selected Song is non existent, it will be cre-you to create each layer allowing toggling between the L and M status with the corand velocity switching between ated by the act of confirming splits the copy command. responding Soft button (A1, B2, C3). Muting a layers. Assignable values: any Song (1...16). layer can be useful when you want to hear only Exit Escapes definitely from the Edit of the layer which youre currently editing without the Sound. NOTE RANGE FROM... TO... listening to the others. Save Allows you to save your modified Determines the highest and lowest limits of the If an option shows the letters XX, this simply Sound to the WK6/8SE Sound Linote range to copy. To copybrary a single percussive means that the Sound in edit does not comprise (RAM) and escapes from Edit instrument from the Drum track, assign the same that particular layer. Sound definitely. value to the from and to parameters. So what actually is a layer ? In simple terms, a Compare Available in all Edit pages, Compare For example, to copy the snare (D2), set the palayer is a sound. In fact, many of the WK6/8SE temporarily assigns the original parameter as Note range from D2 to D2. rameter status of the current edit sounds are created using only one layer. When page to the Sound in edit to compare more complex sounds are needed, up to three Assignable values: C-1 ... G9. the Sound before and after the modilayers can be combined together to form a single fications. Pressing Compare actisound. Since the process required to edit one vates two new commands: layer is exactly the same as for another, the exCopy (F7) Copies the recalled paplanations in this section concentrate only on rameter status to the Sound in edit, editing a single layer. Creating multi-layer sounds cancelling all the modifications made is a relatively simple process once you know how in the current edit page and escapes to edit a single layer. from Compare mode.
Compare exit (F8) Escapes from Compare and retains the modifications made to the sound in the current edit page.

Translator

to read samples from previous

620 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 215

Quantize
An auto-corrector of timing errors. Includes triplet and swing quantize values.

SOFT BUTTONS F1 AND F2

These select the Note On Quantize and Note Off Quantize parameters. Note On Quantize - Quantization of the Note On event. Note Off Quantize - Quantization of the Note Off event. After a Note On quantization, a Note Off quantization affects the duration of the notes, adapting them to the quantization grid.

Edit Song 621

QUANTIZE PARAMETERS

NOTE OFF QUANTIZATION Determines the Note Off quantize value. Same as Note On. NOTE ON QUANTIZATION If youre serious about creating and editing PROCEDURE Determines the Note On quantize values. sounds then it wont be too long before you NOTE yearn 1. From RANGE FROM... TO...the main Style/Performance display, for a little more flexibility than is offered by the select the containing the Determines the highest andtrack lowest note range to Sound you Performance Edit Sound/Sound Patch paramValue Quantization wish to edit. percussive instruquantize. To quantize a single eters. 1/4 If track, necessary, press the SOLO button to isoment of the Drum assign the same note to In the advanced editing controls you will find 1/8 the Sound fromexample, the rest. to thethe highest andlate lowest limit. For real key to the sound synthesizing power quantize of the the snare (D2), set the parameter to 1/12 triplet 2. Press the SYNTH button in the EDIT WK6/8SE. The results of your Sound editing Note range from D2 to D2. NUMBER section 1/16 tasks is a RAM-Sound that you can store to the Assignable values: C-1 ... G9. You are prompted to confirm the request to WK6/8SE 1/24 triplet sound library, assign to any track of enter EDIT SOUND. any Performance and save to Disk. 1/32 FROM LOCATOR... TO LOCATOR... 1/48 triplet Determines the start and end point of the part ENTERING EDIT SOUND 1/64 (1/64) that requires quantizing. Only measures can be When you enter EDIT SOUND, it is best to preselected. 1/96 (1/64 triplet) pare yourself by checking that the current sound, Assignable values: within the limits of the Song. free no quantization that is, the one shown selected in the PerformIt is not possible to specify a point after the end ance display, For 1/8 B...F* (swing) is the one you want to edit. 3. Press ENTER to enter EDIT SOUND. of the if you want to tweak some of the pa- Song. 1/16 B...F* example, (swing) Press ESCAPE to cancel the request. rameters of a Piano sound to create a variation, free no quantization its best to start with a sound similar the one you With ENTER, you gain access to the Edit want to modify. If, instead, you want to create a Sound menu consisting of several Editors. * B F indicate an adjustment of the swing feel.you can start completely new and original Sound, The configuration of the Editors depends on with practically any one you wish, because in the the starting Sound. editing menus, youll find all the tools you need. You can choose to enter EDIT SOUND either with a solod Sound (SOLO button LED on), or with two or more tracks of the current Performance active. This second option allows you to listen to the Sound currently in edit together with other active tracks of the Performance to give you an idea of what your edited Sound is like when combined with other Sounds. Once you enter EDIT SOUND, you cannot activate or deactivate the SOLO button; you must set the SOLO button according to your requirements before entering Edit Sound.

Advanced Edit Sound

Edit Sound - main menu

622 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 213

Insert measures
Inserts a specified number of measures. The part of the Song after the insertion point shifts forward the same number of bars as those inserted. Given that the Time Signature of the inserted measures can differ to the Time Signature of the Song, the Insert Measures parameter permits the creation of a Song with multiple Time Signatures.

PARAMETERS
MEASURES TO INSERT Specifies the number of measures to insert. Assignable values: 1...999. TIME SIGNATURE Determines the Time Signature of the measures to insert. INSERT FROM LOCATOR Specifies the measure at which the new measures will be inserted. Assignable values: from the first measure of the Song, to the first measure after the end measure of the Song (coda insertion).

(1)

(2)

(a)

(b)

(3)

(4)

Insert measures example. Two measures are inserted at measure 3. Measure 3 and all successive measures are moved forward.

Edit Song 623

ON/OFF switch. When active, the original parameter values of the Drumkit/Sound Patch in edit Cancels a specified number of measures. The are temporarily recalled in order to compare them measures directly after the point of cancellation with the current edited ones. shift towards the beginning of the Song and join with the measures preceding the cancellation RESTORE (F6) point. This option restores the original Sound Patch or cancels the last modifications applied after savHint: To cancel measures without shifting those afing to the Performance. ter the deletion point, use the Erase events function.

(F4) Delete COMPARE... measures

SAVE THE MODIFICATIONS AS A NEW DRUMKIT/ SOUND PATCH FILE 1. Press F8 (Store...).
The Store dialog window opens:

PARAMETERS

1. Press F6 to open the following dialog window:

2. The File option is shown selected. Press ENTER to confirm.

An insertion zone appears:

MEASURES TO DELETE Specifies the number of measures to delete. Assignable values: any number that does not exceed the total number of measures in the Song. 1 2.if Select the is function required with the direcFor example, the Song 50 measures long, tional arrows and press ENTER the maximum value that can be assigned is 50.to confirm or

ESCAPE to cancel to abort.

The insertion zone shows the ProgramChange and BankSelect 3 4 5 6MSB (CC00) to which the new Drumkit/SoundPatch will be saved.

3. Press ENTER to confirm the current location, DELETE FROM LOCATOR S.P. Performance - Restores the Drumkit/ 1 2 3use the 4DIAL if you wish to select a differor This parameter Sound indicates the measure of status (canPatch in first edit to its original (1) (2) (5) (6) ent location. those to be deleted. cels all editing operations applied to all notes). Assignable values: withinedit the -actual limits the modificaCurrent Cancels theof current 4. If you want to change the name of the file, Song. The parameter is linked tothe thelast previous Example of Delete measures. Measures 3 and 4 are cancelled. tions and recalls saved parameter press the soft button F7 or F8. All the one, which can be modified if the measures besettings of the Drumkit memorized in themeasures after the delete point shift towards the beginning of the song. tween the deletion start point and the end of the Performance. Song are less than those shown in Measures. STORE... (F8)
This option allows you to save the modifications to a Performance or creates a new Drumkit/ Sound Patch file that can be used by any Performance. To conserve the modifications, save them before selecting a Performance. Selecting a Performance before saving cancels all modifications applied.

5. Insert a name using the method described in the Alphanumeric Entry paragraph on page 1.4 of the Quick Guide. Press ENTER to confirm the name and return to the Store window.

624 Reference Guide

Edit Perf Sound /Sound Sounds Patch 211

Velocity
Modifies the key Velocity. This parameter represents the speed with which a note is played, or its intensity. Generally, the greater the velocity the higher the volume. Velocity also affects the filter of many sounds, rendering them brighter with increased velocity.

PARAMETERS
VELOCITY MODE Provides two velocity modes to choose from which affect the way the Change Velocity function operates. Normal - The value indicated in Velocity change is added to or subtracted from the key Velocity values. Fixed - The key Velocities are all set to the value specified in the Change Velocity parameter. CHANGE VELOCITY Specifies the amount by which the velocity values can be changed. This depends on the option selected in Velocity Mode. NOTE RANGE FROM... TO... Assigns the upper and lower limits of the notes to be affected. To modify the velocity of a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to change the snare (D2) set the parameter to Note range from D2 to D2. Assignable values: C-1 ... G9. FROM LOCATOR... TO LOCATOR... Determines the start and end point of the part to be affected. It is possible to specify Measure, Beat and tick. Assignable values: within the actual limits of the Song. It is not possible to specify a point beyond the end of the Song.

Edit Song 625

THE EDIT SOUND PATCH PARAMETERS Transpose

EDIT NOTE: Determines the note to edit. Transposition of a recorded track by semitones. Assignable values: A0 ... C8 (respectively the lowAlso available are options to transpose the est and highest note in an 88 note master keyChords and Music tracks of the Score of a song. board). This allows you to see the score in the correctly transposed status after a transpose operation. SOUND: Determines the Sound assigned to the note. It is possible to select any sound from the TRACK (F6) ROM-Sounds, RAM-Sounds or RAM -Sounds. Transposition of a Song track by semitones. EFF. 1 (REVERB): Effects send for the reverbs. VOLUME: Determines the volume of the note in The maximum value corresponds to a perfect edit. This parameter can be useful to balance CHORDS TRK (F7) balance between the original sound and the procSounds which differ greatly in volume. Transposition of the Chords track of the Score TRANSPOSE VALUE essed one. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. by semitones. Determines the value of the transposition (in semiAssignable values: 0 ... 127. tones). PAN: Determines the position of the note in the MUSIC TRK (F8) stereo is important to EFF 2 (DELAY/CHORUS/FLANGER/MODULATransposition of thepanorama. Music trackIn ofDrumkits, the Scoreitby NOTE RANGE FROM... TO... pan single percussive instrument correctly. For TION): Effect sends for the modulation effects. semitones. upper and lower limitscorresponds of the notes to a perfect example, the toms are normally positionedAssigns in or- the The maximum value to be To transpose a single percussive der that a snare drifts from one stereo channel toaffected. balance between the original sound and the procinstrument of the Drum track, assign the same the other. essed one. note to the highest and lowest limit. For examAssignable values: -32 (all left) ... 0 (balanced) Assignable values: 0 ... 127. ple, to change the snare (D2) set the parameter ... +32 (all right). to Note range from D2 to D2. AUDIO OUT: Allows you to direct the sound asAssignable values: ... note G9. in edit to a preferred output. signed C-1 to the TRANSPOSE: Transposes the Sound assigned to the note. At the zero value, a percussive inAssignable values: Main, Left+Right, Out1+Out2, TO LOCATOR... strument can be distant from the sampledFROM note,LOCATOR... Out1, Out2. Determines the start and end point of the part to which is normally around note C4. If the note in affected. DYNAMIC It is possible to specify Measure, edit is below C4, the Sound will require be transSWITCH: Threshold level that divides Beat and tick. posing upwards (positive), while if above will reLayer 1 from Layer 2. When you play with a low quire transposing down (negative). Assignable values: within the actual limits of velocity, the Sound assigned to the Layer 1 is trigSong. It is not possible to specify a point beyond gered. By playing harder, the Sound assigned to Assignable values -64 ... +63. the end of the Song. Layer 2 is triggered. The value 0 causes the Sound assigned to Layer 2 while the value 127 TUNING: Fine tune control, in steps of 1/64 of a causes the Sound assigned to Layer 1. semitone. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. Assignable values: -64 ... +63. FILTER: Regulates the cutoff frequency of the filter. Assignable values: -64 (maximum decrease) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 (maximum increase).

EXCLUDE: A linking number between two notes that exclude each other. Playing a note will interrupt another note with the same exclude number. For example, if a Closed Hi-Hat and an Open Hi-Hat have the same exclude number, they interrupt each other, exactly as occurs in reality. You can create as many linked percussive instrument groups as there are Exclude numbers assignable. Assignable values: Off, 1, 2, 3.

626 Reference Guide

Edit Perf Sound /Sound Sounds Patch 29

Microscope
The Microscope allows you to modify every single event recorded in the tracks. The Event List at the centre of the display shows all the events recorded.

Event List

track in edit

ACCESSING THE EVENT EDIT MODE

1. Select the track whose events you wish to see in the Event List. 2. Use the / buttons to scroll through the events. The selected notes are played automatically. 3. Select the parameter to modify using the cursor buttons / . 4. Use the DIAL to modify the selected parameter.

measure beat resolution

Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 event type (Status) Gate

EVENTS AND PARAMETERS WHICH CAN BE CHANGED

The Status column shows the type of event. One or more parameters can be modified for each event. Refer to the events table on the following page for an explanation of each event.

SHOW... (F2)
Recalls a dialog window where it is possible to select the events that will be displayed in the Event List. Set the events that you want to mask to OFF.

Set the parameters and press ENTER.

Edit Song 627

eter to either increase, decrease or completely EVENTS TABLE AND RELATED PARAMETERS
STATUS Note

THE PERFORMANCE SOUND OPTIONS

Program Change

remove the effect. Assignable VALUE 1values: -63 (minimum VALUE 2 rate) ... 0 (unVALUECOPY 3 TO... (F6)GATE changed) ... +63 (maximum rate). Note name Key On Velocity Key OffCopies Velocity the modifications Note Length applied to the current [C1 G9] [1 127] [1 127] expressed as the Performance track to a different track of the same Sequencer resolution LFO DELAY: This parameter determines the dePerformance. The parameter values are cop(q=192) [0 63323] lay of the entry of the LFO. In acoustic instruied, NOT the Sound, therefore, if a Piano sound Program change Bank Select LSB ments, vibrato generally enters afterMSB the attackBank Select is at the source and a Bass is at the destination, message. The PC message. To select message. Not phase, and mainly forms part of the sustain phase theto Bass sound will inherit the parameter modificontained select of the sound.in the tracks the WK6/8SE banks, necessary cations and and shown in the use numbers 1 16 the WK6/8SE soundsplay with the same characteristics Assignable values: as those applied to the Piano sound. Microscope has -63 (minimum [1 128]rate) ... 0 (un[1 128] changed) ... +63 rate).. priority over the(maximum PC
recorded in the Performance [1-128]

Control Change

Type of Control Change (or MIDI controller). Example: CC00 = BankSelect MSB, CC32 = BankSelect LSB, CC01 = Modulation, CC07 = Volume [1 128] Value of LSB (Least Significant Byte). [0= Off, 1127 = On]

Control Change Value

Track - Select the track with the DIAL. In Style/RealTime mode, the maximum number of tracks is 16, in Song mode, 32.

RESTORE TRACK (F7)

Cancels the modifications of the selected track. 1. Press F7 to cancel. You are prompted to reconfirm the operation.

Pitch Bend

Value of MSB (Most Significant Byte). Effective value of bending. [063 = down 64 = neutral 65127 = up]

Mono Touch Poly Touch

Channel Aftertouch intensity [0 127] Note to which Aftertouch is applied. [C1 G9] Note Aftertouch intensity. [0 127]

2. Press ENTER again to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.

RESTORE ALL TRACKS (F8)

Cancels the modifications applied to all the tracks of the Performance. 1. Press F8 to cancel. You are prompted to reconfirm the operation.

2. Press ENTER again to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.

628 Reference Guide

Edit Perf Sound /Sound Sounds Patch 27

INS: (X) (F3)

Inserts the event specified in the INS. TYPE function at the current cursor position. To position the inserted event precisely, modify its locator accordingly (the parameters to the left of the Status). The events are inserted with the following default parameter values:
Status Note: P. Ch Contr. P.Bend M.Tch P.Tch 1V C4 1 1 0 0 C4 2V 64 1 0 64 ---0 ---3V 64 1 ------Gate 128

DELETE (F6)
Cancels the selected event.

CATCH LOCATOR (F7)

Selects the event currently playing (when the Song is in playback mode), or the event immediately after the current Song position.

GO TO LOC... (F8)
Takes the cursor directly to the first event of the specified locator (measure). The number can be specified with the DIAL.

Specify the locator and press ENTER to confirm.

After inserting the desired event, modify its parameters accordingly.

INS TYPE... (F4)

Recalls a dialog window where you can select the type of event to insert manually with the Ins(x) function.

Select the event type to insert and press ENTER.

Edit Song 629

ATTACK: event This type parameter adjusts the time taken for a sound (Status) to reach its maximum volume level after a key has been pressed. Setting a very fast attack time will make a sound more percussive. 3. Use the DIAL. Setting a slower attack time will cause the sound to fade in slowly when a key is pressed. Note: When loading a MIDI file, normally the PerThe modifications are expressed as relative valINITIAL PARAMETERS OF THE SONG formance settings are ignored, due to the fact that ues, subtracting them from initializing or adding them to the commercially available MIDI files contain The events that define the Song at the start point normal attack the Sound. events at the start of each of track can be modified but not deleted. To access and Assignable values: -63 (maximum rate) ... 0 (unmodify the events press F1 (Start param). changed) ... +63 (minimum rate). VOLUME - Overall volume, controlled by the Damper pedal set for continuous control and asDECAY: This parameter will only affect those signed the Volume function. sounds which feature decay. Decay is the efKEY - Key for correct visualization of the fectthe of something fading away as you hold a key score. Alters the score according to the speciPERF - Initial Performance. Sets the initial valon the keyboard. A piano sound is a good examSOUND fied key (inserts correct render- As you hold ues of some of the track parameters (Program ple the of a soundaccidentals), which has decay. ing the score easier tokey, read. example, the or decays. Layer 3 If the same paChange, Volume, Pan, Effects). down the theFor sounds fades if away Layer score was captured in the key ofhear C, you dis-at all. An orrameters are also found at the2 beginning of each Eventually you will no can sound Layer 1 play the score in sound, the keyon of F# all the correct track, the sound, volume and pan settings are gan thewith other hand, has no decay. The accidentals shown in the initial key signature by as long as selected and controlled by the events2contained level of the sound remains the same Oscillator setting the Key parameter to F#. 1 in the tracks and not by theOscillator initial Performance. you hold down a key. The decay parameter is used to adjust the amount takes a sound TEMPO - Metronome pulse. Can also of betime set it on Assignable values: one of the 8 (max) Song Perto decay, (in the case of our piano sound that Sound View or Time/Tempo pages. formances. Filter Wave Envelope would be the amount of time it took between when the sound is at maximum level and the point at which we no longer hear anything). Sound structure. The number of layers and oscillators can change from a Sound to another. The modifications are expressed as relative val

It is useful to know something about the structure of the WK6/8SE Rom Sounds and how they The Master Track editor allows you to modify the are affected by the modifications you make unevents recorded in the Master track which conder the Edit Sound/S. Patch editor. tains events pertaining to the general controls of The WK6/8SE comprise 1, 2 or 3 the Song. This Track records Sounds changescan in Performlayers. The layers are sound generating units ance, general Volume (Pedal Volume), Effect consisting of 1 or 2 oscillators. Each oscillator Changes, Effect Volume, Scale, Tempo changes, elaborates a Wave sample, or waveform. Coninitial Time Signature and the Score Key. sequently, each polyphonic voice can be generThe structure of the page is analogous to the Miated by 6 simultaneous oscillators. croscope. The events are shown in the Event List structure of the Sounds is represented in the at the centerThe of the display. diagram below. The Edit Performance Sound tasks modify all layers and all oscillators simultaACCESSING THE EVENT EDIT MODE neously. This allows all the parameters of a Per1. Use the cursor buttons to scroll through formance Sound/to be edited by means of a few, the events. simple operations. 2. Select the parameter to modify using the cursor buttons / .

OSCILLATORS AND LAYERS Master Track

Initial parameters Event List EDIT PERFORMANCE SOUND

In Edit Performance Sound, you can program a set of principal Performance parameters that will affect any sound you decide to assign to a track of the current Performance.

bar beat value

THE PERFORMANCE SOUND PARAMETERS resolution

630 Reference Guide

Edit Perf Sound /Sound Sounds Patch 25

PROGRAMMABLE EVENTS AND PARAMETERS

The Status column shows the type of event. One or more parameters can be modified for each event. The table shown opposite lists the events and parameters which can be modified.

STATUS TEMPO

VALUE Metronomic Tempo. If the Tempo Rec option is enabled during the recording, all tempo variations are recorded. [20 250]

START PARAMETERS (F1)

Enters the edit of the Songs start parameters. Press F1 again to return to the edit of the successive parameters.

PERFORMANCE Change of Performance [1 8] VOLUME Volume variation via MIDI (through the Common channel) or by means of the Volume Pedal. Does not record Volume changes made with the M.VOL slider. [0 127] Selection of a DSP device. Corresponds to CC18. Type of effect assigned to the selected DSP. Corresponds to CC48. The tables of the assignable effects are in the Appendix. General Effect Volume of the effect type assigned to the DSP. The Effect Sends (amount of effect applied) for each track is regulated in the Microscope by means of the Control Change messages CC91 & CC93.

SHOW... (F2)
Recalls a dialog window where it is possible to select the events that will be displayed by the Event List. Set the events that you want to mask to OFF.

EFF. DEVICE SEL. EFF. TYPE

EFF. DEVICE VOLUME

INS: (X) (F3)

Inserts the specified event type at the cursor position. To position the inserted event precisely, modify its locator (the parameters to the left of the Status).

Edit Song 631

The events The are inserted current family with the is shown following at the detop of the INStop TYPE... (F4) EDITING AND CHANGING SOUNDS fault parameter of the values: display and you can select any other famRecalls a dialog Any window sound on from the WK6/8SE which youcan canbe seedited to your ily by pressing the SOUND GROUP buttons aclect the typetaste. of event This to insert editing manually can consist withof the anything from cordingly. Ins(x) function. the simplest adjustment of the sounds tone or Status Value volume level, to a complete reconstruction of the Tempo 120 sound, resulting in a totally original and personal Performance 1 sound. Volume 64 Editing always begins by selecting one of the Eff. Dv. Sel 0 sounds currently in the instruments memory as a starting point for the sound youre going to creEff. Type 0 ate. When you edit a sound, you can decide, at Eff. Vol 0 any point, to either save the new sound youve RotaryA Slw/Fst Press the cursor arrow to bring other events made or to just quit editing and go back to using into view. RotaryB Slw/Fst the instrument as before. This procedure is explained in detail under STORING SOUNDS. Scale 1 There are two different ways to edit a sound. Key Sign C The first method is EDIT PERFORMANCE SOUND which lets you modify the sound indiAfter inserting the desired event, modify its parectly by programming the parameters that are rameters accordingly. exclusive to the tracks of the current Performance. Any sound that you assign to the edited THE SOUND GROUP FAMILIES Select the type of event and press ENTER. track, therefore, will inherit the modifications applied. This is a quick and easy method, using a Sound Group ProgramChange DELETE (F6)set of Performance parameters under EDIT SOUND/SOUND PATCH of the Edit Performance Piano 1 ... 8 Cancels the section. selected event. Chromatic 9 ... 16 The second method is ADVANCED EDIT SOUND Organ 17 ... 24 which allows you to intervene on the Sounds paCATCH LOCATOR (F7) Guitar 25 ... 32 rameters, going deep into the sounds structure Selects the event currently playing (when the Bass 33 ... 40 and changing its characteristics. The result is a Song is in playback mode), or the event immedinew RAM-Sound that you can store to any empty Strings 41 ... 48 ately after the current Song position. slot of the Banks within the SOUND GROUP famiEnsemble 49 ... 56 lies. You will then be able to assign your new Brass 57 ... 64 RAM-Sound to any track of any Performance. GO TO LOC... (F8)
Reed Pipe Synth Lead Synth Pad Synth SFX Ethnic Percussive SFX 65 ... 72 73 ... 80 81 ... 88 89 ... 96 97 ... 104 105 ... 112 113 ... 120 121 ... 128 Specify the required number and confirm with ENTER.

Takes the cursor directly to the first event of the selected measure. The number can be specified with the DIAL.

632 Reference Guide

Sounds 23

Score & Edit Score

THE SCORE TRACK
The Score track is a ghost track that is added to the tracks of a Song. This track allows the insertion and viewing of notes (Music), words (Lyrics) and chord symbols (Chords). The Score displays a melody line and not chords. A track of chords is analyzed, the highest notes are extracted and a melody line is generated. THE SCORE BUTTON Press SCORE to view the notes, lyrics and chord symbols on the display and/or on an external monitor.

Score Controls
In the Score page, press F8 to open the Score Control dialog window.

Press F8 (Score controls...) to select the viewing options and the video standard. When a Song containing a Score is in playback, an indicator ( ) monitors the current position of the score.

When finished, press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.

PARTS OF THE DISPLAYED SCORE

Select the parts of the Score to display with the Soft buttons F3 F8. All - Notes, lyrics, chord symbols. Lyric 1...Lyric4 - Lyrics only across the display, with characters of various dimensions. Chords - Traditional chord symbols without notes. This option refreshes the display very quickly which can be useful for guitarists and bassists.

To view on an external monitor, the WK6/8SE Video RGB output must be connected to the external monitor or domestic TV by means of the special cable supplied with the instrument. The Score is created in Edit Song.

Score/Edit Score 6 33

VIDEO CONTROLS

Viewing options for an external monitor.

At times, the music score will show special symbols. The octave lower symbol. ECHO LCD The displayed note or notes ON: the external monitor displays exactly what is are in reality one octave shown on the WK6/8SE display. lower. OFF: the monitor displays only the Score parts The note too high symbol. (music, lyrics, chords). The note at the position Options: On, Off. corresponding to the displayed symbol is too high to BANKS 4 - 16 in the staff. VIEW MODE Because the WK6/8SE has well over 1000 facappear tory sounds as standard, these sounds have been These are the core sounds of the WK6/8SE, Selects a color for the lyrics and for the backThe note too low symbol. divided into 16 families, making it easier to find where you will find a wide selection of typical synground. This option is valid for the external moniThe note at the position the right type of sounds quickly and easily. thesizer sounds, authentic reproductions of trator only. corresponding to the disThe families are organized into 16 Instrument ditional orchestral instruments and more. Many played symbol is too low to Options: 116. Groups of the SOUND GROUPS section (Piano, of these sounds are further enhanced by approappear in the staff. This Chrom, Organ, etc.) and each Group is further priatesymbol effects,rarely typical of the instruments playing appears with a VIDEO MODE subdivided into 16 Banks, each capable of constyle,standard being assigned either velocity or music staffto (Score RGB: the RGB port transmits RGB and Compostaining up to 8 sounds (128 Sounds per family). aftertouch. split option in the Score ite Video signals. controls to ON). All the Soundswindow can be set freely edited and stored CV: the RGBGMX port BANKS transmits Composite 1, 2 AND 3 Video sigas new sounds. The 16 Banks of each family nals. For a correct Composite Video image, this provides ample room for all your programmed GMX is a standard set of sounds which are inoption is recommended. work. cluded in every Generalmusic product. The first Options: RGB, CV. GMX bank, (Bank 1) of the Sound Groups section contains the industry standard General MIDI DRUM KITS AND DRUM SOUNDS sound library. This family is designed to be used Y SHIFT The Drum Kits family, called PERCUSSIVE, inthe WK6/8SE is required to play General Controls thewhen vertical alignment. cludes just about every type of drum kit you could MIDI song disks or when the instrument is being imagine - from jazz to rock, orchestra to techno controlled by a computer program or some other and beyond. SCORE SPLIT device which requires a General MIDI sound liJust like the sounds, the individual drum sounds ON: the notes are displayed on a staff. brary. can be freely edited and stored to the empty loOFF: the notes displayed on the treble clef(Bank 2 & 3) Theare second and third GMX banks, cations of the 16 Banks of the Percussive family. only. Notes contain that normally occupy the bass 256 sounds taken from clef Generalmusics They can then be stored as new sounds, either are shown with the symbol sound library. (bass 8ve). own extensive These sounds, for individual use or for incorporating into the drum along with the 128 sounds in Bank 1, ensure comkits. CHORDS ON LYRICS patibility with Generalmusics own song library, and also with song disks 4created If ON, the viewing options Lyric 1 ...Lyric show on other Generalmusic instruments. chord symbols together with lyrics on the external monitor.

Sounds

SPECIAL SYMBOLS

634 Reference Guide

Sounds 21

Edit Score
HOW TO ENTER EDIT SCORE 1. Press SONG and select a Song. 2. Press the ST.SONG button to open the main Edit Song menu. 3. Press EDIT SCORE (F6) to enter the Score page.

INSERTING CHORD SYMBOLS

Chord symbols correspond to the MIDI Text event. These are loaded and saved with MIDI files. Chord symbols can be inserted into a new Song using the procedure explained on the next page. 1. Press F5 (Chords) to take the cursor to the chord line (above the staff).

If the Song does not contain a score, press GET SCORE (F4) to create one (this procedure is explained afterwards). HOW TO EXIT EDIT SCORE Press ESCAPE once to return to the main Edit Song menu, twice to return to main Edit menu and a third time to return to the Sound View page.

2. Press the soft button G (Go to loc...) to go to a specific measure:

INSERTING NOTES
To create a Score, notes are withdrawn from a Song track. 1. Press F4 (Get Score):

Specify the measure with the DIAL then press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel. 3. Move the insertion point to the previous or next note using the soft buttons D (Next event) and E (Previous event). 4. Each note is ideally subdivided into 1/16ths. In addition to a symbol at the beginning of a note (first 1/16th), you can insert symbols in one of the 1/16ths which follow. Press F8 to open the symbol insertion zone:
Insertion of the symbol at the second 1/16th

2. Use the DIAL to select the track to transcribe. 3. Press ENTER to confirm. Wait a few seconds for the score to be generated.

Insertion of the symbol at the third 1/16th Insertion of the symbol at the fourth 1/16th

The number shown on the left of the insertion zone indicates the current 1/16th. To move the insertion point to one of the other 1/16ths, use the soft buttons H (<<1/16)

Score/Edit Score 6 35

5.

6.

7. 8.

and F8 (>>1/16). To escape and return to the note, press the soft button E (Previous event). To escape and pass to the next note press the soft button D (Next event). Play the chord below the Split Point. The chord symbol appears, in the following form: CMaj, Dmin, E7th... If you want to indicate a bass extension, or a pedal note, press the function button F (Extension) and play the alternative chord. The bass extension will appear in the following form: CMaj/D, Dmin/G... Press the soft buttons D (Next event or E (Previous event) to pass to another event. You can modify the selected symbol by playing a different chord. You can modify a chord by transforming it, for example, from a major to minor chord to seventh. Press F7 (Root) repeatedly to alternate between the bass of the chord (the root: A, B, C, etc.) and the abbreviation of the chord (min, 7th, dim, aug...).
The entire symbol is selected. Press F7 (Root).

INSERTING LYRICS

Lyrics corresponds to the MIDI Lyrics event. This type of event is loaded and saved with MIDI files. Lyrics can be inserted into a new Song in the Sounds, Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch following manner: Edit Sound 1. Press the Lyrics button (F6) to take the cursor to the lyrics line (below the staff). SampleTranslator

Reference Guide
Performances, Edit Performance Edit Midi, Edit Mixer, Edit Effects, Edit Controllers/Pads, Edit Tracks/Split, Disk-Hard Disk-SCSI Styles, User Styles (programmable),

Styleto loc...) to go to a 2. Press soft button Edit G (Go specific measure (bar): Preload, Midi File Player, Songs, Song Recording Edit Song
Specify the measure with the DIAL then press or Vocal Processor ENTER confirm ESCAPE to cancel. Edit General 3. Move the insertion point to the previous note or the next note with the soft buttons D (Next Utility functions (Help, Display Hold) event) and E (Previous event). 4. Each note is ideally subdivided into 1/16ths. In addition to syllables at the beginning of the note (first 1/16th), you can insert syllables in one of the 1/16ths which follow. Press F8 to open the syllable insertion zone.
Insertion of the syllable at the second 1/16th

Score, Edit Score

The root note is selected. Press F7 (Root).

The chord abbreviation is selected. Press F7 (Root).

The entire symbol is selected again. Insertion of the syllable at the third 1/16th

Rotate the DIAL or play another chord to modify the selected element (the root or abbreviation).

Insertion of the syllable at the fourth 1/16th

The number shown on the left of the insertion zone indicates the current 1/16th. To move the insertion point to one of the other 1/16ths, use the soft buttons H (<<1/16) and F8 (>>1/16).

636 Reference Guide

To escape and return to the note, press the soft button E (Previous event). To escape and pass to the next note press the soft button D (Next event). At this point, Next event and previous event pass from 16th to 16th instead of from note to note. 5. In this operating mode, the keyboard transforms into a source of alphanumeric data (see the paragraph entitled Alphanumeric Entry on page 1.10 of the Quick Guide). Write the required syllable using the keys of the keyboard. 6. Press soft button F (End phrase) to terminate the verse. The end of the verse is indicated by the end phrase symbol I. Do not write lines consisting of more than 20 characters. This is to avoid the incorrect syllabisation of words when you are viewing lyrics in large type. For example, the word Ballgame may syllabize to Bal-lgame, or Ballg-ame or other, instead of Ball-game. 7. You can modify a selected syllable by rewriting it entirely or partially. To replace one character with another, remain in Overwrite mode (rectangular cursor). If you are in Insert mode (cursor in the form of a vertical line), press note D#2 (INS/OVER) to pass to Overwrite mode. Move the cursor with the DIAL, then insert the new character. To insert a character without cancelling another, pass to Insert mode. Press note D#2 (INS/OVER); the cursor will take the form of a vertical line. Move the cursor with the DIAL, then insert the new character. Press D#2 to return to Overwrite mode.

THE EDIT SCORE PAGE

CHORDS (F5) Takes the cursor to the Chords line (above the staff). LYRICS (F6) Takes the cursor to the Lyrics line (below the staff). NEXT EVENT (D) Takes the cursor to the next event (note or pause). PREV. EVENT (E) Previous event. Takes the cursor to the previous event (note or pause). GO TO LOC... (G) Takes the cursor to the beginning of the specified measure. Press soft button G to open the dialog window:

Specify the measure with the DIAL. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.

>> 1/16 (F8) Each note greater than a sixteenth (demisemiquaver) is ideally subdivided into sixteenths; this button takes the cursor to the next sixteenth. For example, a quaver (8th) is divided into two 1/ 16ths, a crotchet (quarter) into four 1/16ths, etc.. The edit takes place in an active zone:

To escape and return to the normal edit of the note, press soft button E (Previous event). To escape and pass to the next note, press soft button D (Next event).

Score/Edit Score 6 37

<< 1/16 (H) 7. If necessary, select a destination andor by playing a different chord. press ENTER twice to the Save Song See above. Takes the cursor toexecute the previous six- SinglePlay the chords below the Split Point. teenth command.

Pressing ENTER the first time prompts a reEND PHRASE (F) GET SCORE... (F4) quest to confirm the command. Press ENThis command inserts an End phrase symbol Creates a score from selected track from the proceTER a the second time to complete (I) at the end of a verse. In the viewing modes which the melodydure. is transcribed. Press F4 to open Lyrics 1 Lyrics 4, when the verses that end the dialog window: After a short period, the Song will be saved with the End phrase symbol are reached, the to disk or Hard Disk. next verse starts on a new line. Remember that if you save to an existing file, We recommend that you write lines using not it will be overwritten by the incoming one. more than 20 characters, to avoid displaying inSpecify the track with the DIAL. correctly syllabized words when the Lyrics 1 optry to save to an empty Press ENTERWhenever to confirm or possible, ESCAPE to cancel. tion (large types) is used. location (shown as a broken line) to safeguard existing data on the storage device. This symbol can be cancelled as any other charIf the track contains chords, the analyser withacter by selecting the syllable with D (Next draws the highest notes, attempting to eliminate 8. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit or E (Previous event). Select the symevent) notes not related to the melody. A score is obbol with the DIAL and cancel the symbol with note DISK mode. tained with excellent results from a track containOr F2 (DELETE). ing a melody line only.

EXTENSION (F) This command allows you to add an alternative bass extension to the chord. Select a chord and press soft button F, then play a complete chord which contains the alternative bass root required to insert.

IMPORTANT - Do not save to the original disk(s) supplied with the instrument. Make sure that original disks are always protected.

You can modify the extension with the DIAL, or play a different chord. Play the chords below the Split Point. ROOT (F7) This command allows you to modify the root note of a chord and its related abbreviation separately. Select a chord and press F7 repeatedly to place the chord parts in edit, first the root, then the abbreviation, then to return to the edit of the entire chord symbol.

You can modify the selected part with the DIAL,

638 Reference Guide

Quick Guide 147

Vocal Processor
The Vocal Processor function allows solo vocalists to add vocal harmonies to their Performance. Up to 4 extra melody lines can be added to any kind of sound source (voice, guitar, synth, etc.). Your WK6/8SE is fitted with the Audio Vocal Processor card which provides effect processing and vocal harmonizing features. THE VOCAL PROCESSOR FEATURES 1. Add vocal harmonies to your voice according to various Performance configurations which enrich the vocal backings automatically. 2. Implements controlling functions assignable to the Pedals and specific MIDI Controllers to control the Vocal Processor via MIDI. 3. Under Edit General, the Vocal Processor implements an Equalizer (the Mic/Line editor) which affects the Microphone signal only. 4. The rear-panel MIC/LINE INPUT 1 is predisposed to accept a Microphone signal in order to be processed by the Vocal Processor function. The Vocal Processor function is found under EDIT EFFECTS, editor N.2, VOCAL PROC. Press ENTER to gain access to the Vocal Processor menu.

CONNECTIONS
To work with the Vocal Processor, the minimum amount of equipment you will need is: A low impedance microphone with a standard jack connector on the output end of the cable. Other equipment youll be using which WK6/ 8SE already has is one of the switch pedals. Switch Pedal: Assign an optional pedal one of the Pedal functions to control the Vocal Processor (Vocal On/Off, Vocal Mute, Mode recall, etc.). Microphone: connect the Microphone to the MIC/ LINE 1 jack. You can regulate the microphones sensitivity (Gain) with the small knob 1. In Edit General, Mic/Line editor, you will find the Mic/Line On/Off and Vocal On/Off options and an Equalizer which affects the microphone input signal only.

Vocal Processor 71

ACTIVATE THE VOCAL PROCESSOR

The Vocal Processor operates only if both the Select the Vocal Processor editor from the main Mic/Line On/Off and Vocal Processor On/Off opEdit Effects menu and press ENTER to gain acThe WK6/8SE RAM is backed by a rechargeable battery to safeguard your programmed data when the tions in Edit General are enabled. These are cess to the relative functions. instrument is turned off. For security reasons, it is best to store your data to floppy disk or Hard Disk for enabled by default, but should they have been It is also possible to enter the editor us- updated, future use. The RAM memory should be considered as a work area which can directly be continually disabled, heres how to activate the functions. ing the Page scroll buttons ( ). not as a data storage device. Press the GENERAL under the Edit/Numbers seThe configuration displayed depends Have a new or used disk ready to save data to.parameter These can be WK6/8SE format disks (or standard MSlection, select the Mic/Line function and, if necon the mode selected. DOS disks for the storage of MIDI files). You can also save MIDI Files to WK6/8SE format disks. How essary, enable the Mic/Line On/Off and Vocal On/ operating modes are available: Chord / to save MIDI files is discussed in the Disk Three chapter of the Reference Guide. Off options with the corresponding Soft buttons. Vocoder / Unison. The following example shows how to save the Song that you recorded with the Quick Rec method to Disk or Hard Disk.

WORKING WITH THE VOCAL PROCESSOR Save your programmed data to disk or Hard Disk

CHORD mode recognizes the chords you play If the main Save page is not selected, use and determines the most appropriate harmony the +/ Page/Bank ( ) buttons to pass to for your singing. This mode produces intervals the page required. up to four voices according to the recognized chord If you want to save to Hard Disk, select the and chord type (Close or Smart - see Vocalsoft Processor Edit). The harmonic voices are Hard Disk option with the corresponding generated within the octaves above and below button F2. Press ESCAPE or EDIT to exit Edit General and the input note with two different intervals: one return to the Edit Effects section. interval near the input note (Close) and another The instrument will memorize the status of the further away (Extreme). The interval extensions selected parameters even after power down. vary according to the chord played .

1. If you are saving to floppy, insert the disk 1 N.B. into the drive and press DISK to open the THIS MODE IS OPERATIVE IN STYLE MODE ONLY first Disk mode page.

CHORD (F5)

2. Specify the Save operation required (example, Save Single Song).

Use the navigational arrows ( / and / ) to navigate within the two columns of the display area and select the required command by combining one element from each column. For example, combine Single from the left column with Song from the right to specify Save Single Song. If you are using a MIDI file disk, specify Single MIDI File.
Edit Effect- Main Menu

Vocal Processor - Chord mode, Volume option

72 Vocal Processor

Quick Guide 145

The four voices can be selected from the six available: Voice 1 : Extreme Lower octave Voice 2 : Close Lower octave Voice 3 : Extreme Upper octave Voice 4 : Close Upper octave Main : doubles the input voice Bass : doubles the input voice one octave down. You can regulate the Volume and Pan parameters of each single voice (F1/F2). You can mute or activate the various voices with the function buttons A-F. Ex: an active voice shows the icon a muted voice shows the icon The Harmony parameter controls the general volume of the Vocal Processor: The Volume page operates in the same manner as the same page in Edit Mixer; in other words, you can regulate the levels with the Dial or Sliders. The Volume and Pan controls are common to all three operating modes. NB. The number of voices produced by the Vocal Processor is always a maximum of 4. Example: if voices 1, 2, 3 and 4 are active in order to activate the Main or Bass voice, you must mute one of the active voices.

VOCODER (F6)
VOCODER mode operates both in Style mode as well as Song mode. The VOCODER mode operates by referring to the notes played in real time on the keyboard, or reproduced by the sequencer, and the Vocal Processor responds by shifting the pitch of your voice exactly to the notes played. The Vocoder is always tied to one of the tracks (see Vocal Processor - Edit). You can regulate the Volume and Pan parameters of each single voice (F1/F2). You can mute or activate the various voices with the function buttons A-F. In VOCODER mode, the Main and Bass voices are not present. The assigned Vocoder track is able to receive Pitch and Modulation messages.

Vocal Processor - Vocoder mode, Volume option

Vocal Processor 73

5. Press either PLAY or START/STOP to start the UNISON (F7)

recordingboth and in start to play. UNISON mode operates Style mode as well as Song mode. In this mode, the Vocal PLAY starts the recordingProcfor the real time essor automatically produces the same note as the recordOr tracks only. START/STOP starts the input note, doubling up to 4 Voices. ing and also engages the Style accompaniEach voice is doubled ments with tracks. a slight detune effect above and below the input note according to the If you selected a Style in step 4 with SINGLE following scale. TOUCH PLAY active and you also activate Voice 1 = +12 cents KEY START, you will be able to start the reVoice 2 = + cording 7 cents(Style and real time tracks) by playVocal Processor - Unison mode, Volume option ing on the keyboard. You can also start with Voice 3 = 7 cents an Intro by preselecting the INTRO, FILL or Voice 4 = 12 cents ENDING button before record start. You can regulate the Volume and Pan paramAs the recording eters of each single voice (F1/F2).proceeds, you can select other Styles, introduce the Fills, change PerYou can mute or activate the various voices with formances, activate or deactivate other real the function buttons A-F. time tracks, etc.. In UNISON mode, the Main and Bass voices are not present. 6. When you have finished, stop the recording

either with STOP or START/STOP.

STOP stops the sequencer and the recording of both the accompaniment and keyboard The Edit page allows to apply a Low Fre- (locator) to tracks,you taking the Song pointer quency Oscillator (LFO) to the voices produced the starting position [1 1 1]. by the Vocal Processor. The modifications affect START/STOP stops the accompaniment the voices globally, not individually. tracks but not the sequencer, allowing you to The parameters of the Edit page are common to continue recording the real time tracks withall three operating modes. out accompaniment. The Song Pointer conABOUT THE LFO tinues to monitor the recording. To stop the press STOP. The LFO is a periodicrecording (repeating)completely, control source which RECORD ST/SONG button LED produces a low speed (low frequency) waveform will turn off. which is applied to the voice Pitch to obtain a 7. Press PLAY or START/STOP to listen Vocal to the Processor - Edit cyclic modulation. song playback. Because of its periodic nature, the LFO applied In playback, you can stop the song with STOP to the pitch creates the Vibrato effect to simulate or START/STOP and start the song again the natural vibrations of the human voice. from the stop point with PLAY. If you press STOP or START/STOP twice Sine Triangle Saw-tooth during playback, the song returns to the starting point (locator 1 1 1).

EDIT (F3)

Or

Or

In EDIT SONG, you can enter a name for the

Square

Song. Random Sample&Hold

74 Vocal Processor

Quick Guide 143

THE EDIT PAGE PARAMETERS

LFO WAVE

VOICE SET (F4)

In this page, it is possible to recall up to 16 Custom configurations. Each Custom recalls a different setting of all the Vocoder parameters (Volume, Pan, Mute, Mode, lfo,...). The Custom settings are not programmable. You can use the Custom Voice Sets as a starting point for your configurations and, any subsequent changes to the settings can be memorized to the Performances.

Selects the waveform of the low frequency oscillation. Assignable values: Off, Sinus, Triangle, Saw, Square, Random, Sample/Hold.
LFO RATE Determines the velocity of the LFO. Assignable values: 1 200. LFO DEPTH

Determines the depth of action of the LFO. Assignable values: 0 7.

LFO DELAY

Determines the delay before the entry of the LFO. Entry of the LFO is gradual. Assignable values: 0 64.
PITCH FILTER
Vocal Processor - Voice Set

Checks the pitch of the voices. In Free mode, all pitch imperfections detected due to minor changes in the pitch of the voice rest unchanged. In Auto Correction mode, the imperfections are automatically corrected. Assignable values: Free, Auto Correction.
CHORD TYPE

LOCK (F8)
The LOCK function locks the current Vocal settings to protect them from subsequent Performance changes. To lock the current setting, press the function button F8 to activate the Lock. The icon is shown in negative highlight and the small lock closes.

Selects from two different modes of harmonization according to the chord played. Assignable values: Close and Smart.. [See also Harmony Type in Edit Tracks/Splits].
VOCODER TRACK Selects the track exploited by the Vocoder. Assignable values: 1 32. TRANSPOSE

Transposes the Vocoder track one octave above standard pitch. Assignable values: Off, Octave+.
Vocal Processor - Chord mode, Volume option, Lock on

Vocal Processor 75

In Edit General, the Mic/Line editor includes an Equalizer which prompts the following window In addition to the above, the following additional the display shows a Proclist of files when of theactivated: modifications areNow implemented by the Vocal same type selected in step 2 (in this case essor: High gain Songs). Middle Freq 5. Select the Song that you want to loadusing Middle gain PEDALS the Up/Down directional arrows. Low gain In Edit Controllers/Pads. A destination in RAM will already be selected The following additional assignable functions are (shown enclosed by a rectangular frame). The Equalizer parameters exclusively affect the implemented for the pedals and Pads: Microphone signals at input 1 of the Mic/Line inMove over to the right of the display (RAM) if Vocal On/Off (Pedals) terface. you want to select a different destination. Vocal Volume (Pedals Assign.) The Vocal On/Off option enables/disables the Vocal Custom 1-16 (Pedals) Vocal Processor. Vocal Mute (Pedals) The Mic/Line On/Off option enables/disables the MIC/LINE interface. Vocal Chord/Vocoder/Unison (Pedals)

4. If necessary, select a Block file and VOCAL press ON/OFF 4 AND EQUALIZER Additional changes ENTER to gain access to the files contained in the Block.

6. With a RAM destination selected, press EN6 TER twice to execute the Load Song comNB. These parameters are memorized in Edit NB. All the parameters mand. described above can be
General. memorized to the Performances. Pressing ENTER the first time prompts a request to confirm the command. Press ENTER a second time to complete the procedure. After a short period, the Demo Song will be in memory.

7. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit DISK mode.

DISK leaves Disk mode directly. When you return to Disk the last page selected will be shown. ESCAPE allows you to exit from the various levels of the Disk operations: (1) exit the Block, (2) exit the file selector, (3) exit Disk mode.

7
Or

Edit Controller - Vocal Volume and Vocal On/Off assigned to the pedals

Edit General - Equalizer

76 Vocal Processor

Quick Guide 141

SPECIAL MIDI CONTROLLERS ASSOCIATED TO THE VOCAL PROCESSOR

To control the Vocal Processor via MIDI, the following special MIDI controllers (Common Channel) are available:
Cntrl No. Description 12 13 14 Vocal volume Vocal On/Off Mode recall Value 0 127 0 Off/On (toggle) 64-127 On 0 = Chord mode 1 - Vocoder mode 2 = Unison 15 Voice Set recall 1=1 2=2 3=3 15 = 15 16 = 16 85 Voice Mute mode 0 = Voice 1 1 = Voice 2 2 = Voice 3 3 = Voice 4 4 = Main 5 = Bass

LOADING MIDI FILES CONTAINING A VOCODER TRACK

When a MIDI File containing a Vocoder track is loaded from disk, the Vocoder track sets to track 5 by default.

Vocal Processor 77

3. Press ENTER to access the SMF folder.

A list of MIDI Files is shown.

3/4

4. Use the directional arrows to select a MIDI File that you want to listen to.

5. Press PLAY to start the MIDI File playback.

During the playback, you can deactivate the melody by pressing the MELODY ON soft button (F3) i order to play the melody yourself. The option changes to MELODY OFF. Press the same soft button (F3) to restore the melody (MELODY ON). When the end of the MIDI File is reached, playback stops. Repeat the selection procedure and press PLAY to listen to other MIDI Files.

6. Press EXIT (F8) to escape from the Midi File Player.

You can refer to the SONG chapter in the Reference Guide for information regarding all the MIDI FILE PLAYER options.

78 Vocal Processor

Quick Guide 139

Edit General
This is where you can modify global parameters that affect the instrument as a whole and which are not memorized to a Performance. A part of the general parameter settings are conserved in RAM and saved to disk as a Setup. Press the GENERAL button in the Edit/Numbers section to gain access to the EDIT GENERAL section. When you press GENERAL for the first time, the display shows the main menu. The GENERAL functions can be selected using one of the following methods. 1) Rotate the DIAL to select the editor and press ENTER; 2) Use the directional arrows to select the editor and press ENTER; 3) Use the page scroll buttons to pass directly from one editor to another; 4) Specify the editor number on the keypad (with the KEYPAD LED on) and press ENTER.

DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN MENU PAGE

The menu page shows 6 editors at the centre: General Controls, Tuning/Scale, Pedalboard/ Computer, Date & Time, Display Controls and Mic/Line In. On the right hand side are 8 options which can be selected with the corresponding Soft buttons F1F8: Battery & Release, Auto Help, System Info, Restore All, Restore Styles, Restore Performances, Restore Songs, Restore Style Performances, Restore Sounds. After entering the editors, the options shown in the options column change according to the editor. The description of the main menu options is at the end of this chapter.

Edit General - Main menu

Edit General 81

with Effects or bypass them Tuning/Scale General Play Controls

MASTER You can temporarily modify the way in which a PITCH KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY
Performance is processed by the on-board efFine tunes the instrument as a whole in fractions Determines the response of the keyboard to vefect processor by changing the On/Off setting of of a semitone. of 1/64 locity changes. the Effects Off button. Assignable values: -63...+63. Assignable values: Soft, Medium soft, Medium, Medium hard, Hard. BYPASS THE EFFECTS

1. To bypass the effects, press the EFFECTS OFF 1 of Temperaments (Scales). FOOTSWITCH POLARITY Provides a selection button.
FOOTSWITCH 1, 2, 3The LED of the button turns on, indicating III, Arabian 1, Arabian 2, User1 ... User8.

KEYBOARD SCALE

Options: Equal, Inverse, Meantone, Werkmeister

the current Performance Sets the polaritythat of the programmable pedals 1,is no longer processed the Effects. 2, 3. Generalmusic pedals by are of the NC type. Options: NC (Normally Closed), NO (Normally USER PROGRAMMABLE SCALES TO ACTIVATE THE EFFECTS Open). You can program your own scale using the key2. Press the active EFFECTS OFF button. board map shown at the bottom of the display. This graphical representation shows the current The LED of the button goes off to indicate pitch of the notes of an octave. The octave curthat the current Performance is processed byin edit is shown in the title bar directly above rently the Effects. the keyboard (e.g. Octave C-1/B-1). Each note shows the coarse tune and fine tune status. The programming tasks allow you to alter the pitch of You can find out more about the Effects and how one or more notes by modifying the coarse and to assign them to the Performances, Style and fine tuning parameters of the current scale. Song Performances in the Edit Effects section of the Performance Chapter in the Reference Guide.

Actual note Coarse tuning

Octave (select F5 for Octave Up or F6 for Octave Down).

Fine tuning in 64ths of a semitone Edit General: General controls

Edit General: Master pitch & Keyboard Scale

82 Reference Guide

Quick Guide 137

The final configuration can then be copied to selected octaves of the keyboard, or to all octaves.
EXAMPLE - TO PROGRAM A SCALE BY FINE TUNING ONE OR MORE NOTES:

OCTAVE UP (F5) Selects the next highest octave to edit. OCTAVE DOWN (F6) Sets the next lowest octave to edit. CATCH NOTE... (F7) Selects the note to edit. Press F7. The following message appears:

1. With the Octave Up function (F5), select the octave to program. 2. Use the directional arrows to select the fine tune parameter (in this case 0) and rotate the Dial to fine tune the note according to your requirements. While tuning, play the note repeatedly. 3. Repeat the microtuning operation for other notes. 4. Select the Copy to oct. function (F3), select Fine Tune in the Copy parameter and ALL in the to octave parameter, then press ENTER to confirm. 5. When the scale has been programmed, save it to the Setup by pressing F7 (Save). You will be prompted to select a User location.

Play the note to edit. SAVE... (F8) Saves the User programmed scale to the Setup. The Save dialog window is opened where you can choose from 8 User scale destinations.

THE TUNING/SCALE OPTIONS

COPY TO OCTAVE... (F3) Copies the current setting to another octave. The Copy to octave dialog window is opened where you can specify the elements to copy and the octave to copy the user programmed data to.

Select the User scale with the DIAL. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.

Coarse&Fine - Copies both the coarse tuned notes as well as the fine.. Coarse - Copies only the coarse tuned notes. Finetune - Copies only the fine tuning. To octave - Selects the octave to copy to. Select the ALL option to copy a programmed octave to the entire keyboard.

Edit General 83

Pedalboard/Computer Transposition

Note C2 D2

Function Start/Stop Intro Ending Fill < Fill = Fill > Key Start

Note C#2 D#2 F2 G2 A2 B2

Function Tempo Tempo + Var 1 Var 2 Var 3 Var 4

The PEDALBOARD and COMPUTER connecTRANSPOSE THE INSTRUMENT UP OR DOWN E2 tors cannot operate at the same time. Selecting you would like to play a song in a different key, one renders If the other inoperative. F#2 or a is too high or too lowthe for a singer or To activate one ofsong the two connectors, select G#2 another instrument, you can corresponding option (Pedalboard ortranspose Com- the instruto play the song in an easier key. A#2 puter) with ment the cursor buttons.
C3

The TRANSPOSE b/# buttons allow real time semitone adjustments (transpositions) of the PEDALBOARD overall pitch (range 24 semitones = 2 octaves). BASS SUSTAIN (F1) If you have purchased Generalmusics optional 1. Press TRANSPOSE # Pedalboard to raise the pitch.Sustain for the notes of the pedalboard. 13-note pedalboard, connect it to the connector and program the unit for how it will An insertion screen shows thebe current Transused by pressing F8 (Mode). pose value (0 = standard pitch).

Press the Transpose # button as many times MODE (F8) FOR PEDALBOARD OPTIONS Instead of using the MIDI interface, you can conas necessary until you reach the desired nect via a single serial cable to a computer. ProOptions for the pedalboard. pitch. gram the connector for the type of computer used by pressing F8 (Mode). 2. Press TRANSPOSE b to lower the pitch.

COMPUTER

An insertion screen shows the current Transpose value. Continue pressing the TRANSPOSE b button until the dialog window shows a negative Off - Pedalboard deactivated. reading. Pedalbass - The automatic bass of the auto-accompaniments isThe deactivated BASS track will be on to LED on and one the of the buttons is assigned to the Pedalboard, allowing you indicate that the instrument isto currently in a play the bass with the pedalboard. Transposed status (sharp or flat ). Pedalchord - Chord recognition on the keyboard is disabled and passed to the pedalboard. TO CLEAR THE over KEYBOARD TRANSPOSE SETTING To play minor and sevenths, play two bass notes 3. Press both TRANSPOSE buttons simultaneat the same time. Alternatively, you can program the Pedals 1, 2,ously. or 3 to select minor and sevenths. The LED on the active button goes off and Multifunction - Each note of thenormal pedalboard rethe instruments pitch is restored. The calls a function associated to the Styles: display shows the 0 setting for a few seconds then returns to normal.

Edit General: PedalBoard/Computer

84 Reference Guide

Quick Guide 135

COMPUTER MODE (F8) OPTIONS Options to communicate with a computer

Date & Time

Sets the internal calendar and clock.

SET DATE (F1)

Off - Connection deactivated. Macintosh - To connect to an Apple Macintosh computer. A standard Mac serial cable is required to connect to the Modem port. In the computer software, set a communication velocity of 1 MHz. PC1 - Allows serial connection with an IBM computer or compatible, with a communication velocity of 31250 baud. A standard PC serial cable must be connected to the RS-232 port of the computer. PC2 - As above, but with a communication velocity of 38400 baud. Sets the date in edit. Take the cursor to the day, month and year and specify the value of each parameter with the DIAL. Confirm with ENTER or F1.

SET TIME (F2)

Sets the time in edit. Take the cursor to the hour, minute and seconds with the cursor buttons and specify the value of each parameter with the DIAL. Confirm with ENTER or F2.

Edit General; Date & Time

Edit General 85

Display Store controls Performance

Mic/Line Input

Viewing controls display. The settings are Use for thethe STORE PERFORMANCE command This tois save where any you changes can regulate you make your toinput a Performance, signal a Style conserved to memory after They Performance or power a Songdown. Performance. when using the Audio Vocal Processor. This page cannot be saved to disk. contains bar graphs to monitor the level of sigThe changes made to the Performances and Style Performances are interchangeable, that is, you can nals fed into the Mic/Line inputs 1 and 2. save a modified Performance to a Style Performance and vice versa. A modified Song Performance The input isyou directed to the a internal sound CHORD LANGUAGE can be saved only to the Song Performances. In allsignal cases, can create completely new Performgenerator and effects processor before being diance and change its name. Determines the viewing language (English/Italrected to the LEFT and RIGHT outputs and the ian/French/German) of the chord notation in the speaker system. Score. 1. Press STORE PERFORMANCE to open the You can regulate the signal gain with the GAIN Store Performance dialog window. knobs located next to the Mic/Line jacks. An opHELP LANGUAGE timum signal level can be obtained when the inIf SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is off, the destinaput signal, at maximum volume, almost touches Selects the language for the Help file. tion suggested will be a Performancethe locaextreme right of the VU bar graph (the clipYour model maytion not(Performance). contain a file in a different ping zone). language. If SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is on, the destinaRegulate the maximum volume with the MIC/LINE tion suggested will be a Style-Performance panel slider. The M. VOL slider regulates the sum DISPLAY MODE location (Style). of the internal sound generator output level (WK6/ Offers the choice of viewing black text on a white 8SE sounds and signal of the MIC/LINE IN inbackground (Positive) or white texts on a black puts). background (Negative).

LAST SELECTIONOR MEMORY

2. Press ENTER to save to the current PerformINPUT VU ance,

If enabled (ON),Select the last selected carried out in a different Performance either Style, Performance or Sound mode is save to before pressing ENTER. memorised. If disabled (off), the selection window of these modes not show the last selecSAVING TOto THE SAME PERFORMANCE tion made. With ENTER, the changes are memorized to the current Performance and the display returns to the modified Performance display. Each time this Performance is recalled, it will configure the WK6/8SE with precisely the same settings are those memorized. If you press ESCAPE, you will to cancel Store operation, but the temporary status of the new Performance will be retained, until you select another Performance.

Monitors the level of the input signal. Controls the signal gain of the two signals fed into the Mic/ location Lineto IN1 and IN2 jacks with the knobs 1 and 2 located next to the inputs.

Edit General - Display controls

Edit General - Mic/Line In

86 Reference Guide

Quick Guide 133

Maximum volume levels can produce clipping, a distortion which can be eliminated by controlling the gain.
clipping

RESONANCE Sets the filter resonance. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. AUDIO OUT Directs the signal to the audio output outputs. Assignable values: L+R, 1+2, 1, 2.

The VU-meter indicates the level of the input signal. The dark zone to the extreme right represents clipping (distortion).

VOLUME Separate volume control for each input. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. PAN Determines the position of the input signal within the stereo panorama. Assignable values: -32 (all to the left) ... 0 (centre) ... +31 (all to the right). EFF GROUP Selects the Group of effects A or B. E1 SEND Determines the amount of Reverb effect to apply to the signal. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. E2 SEND Determines the amount of modulation effect to apply to the signal. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. FILTER Selects a filter type. Assignable values: Off, LP (Low Pass), HP (High Pass), BP (Band Pass), PB (Parametric Boost), PC (Parametric Cut). CUTOFF Sets the cutoff frequency. Assignable values: 0 ... 191.

MIC/LINE ON/OFF (F1)

Switch to activate/deactivate the Mic/Line IN1 and IN2 jacks. When the inputs are active, the overall polyphony is reduced by two voices; if you do not intend using the Mic/Line inputs, deactivate them in order to direct the two voices to the internal WK6/8SE sounds.

VOCAL ON/OFF (F3/F4)

Switch for the activation/deactivation of the Vocal Processor. See also the Vocal Processor chapter.

EQUALIZER (F5/F6)
The Equalizer parameters affect the Mic/Line input signals only.

Edit General 87

The Edit Select General Main Menu Options the Performances

WK6/8SE in eight different banks in the PERBATTERY & RE.... (F1) has 64 user programmable Performances, SYSTEM INFOorganized (F2) FORMANCE GROUPS section. These Performances feature single and layered sounds, custom effect This option shows the date and time of the latest option displays informationbank. regarding the create your settings, split keyboard combinations and This a special Drawbar Performance You can release of the operating system and the charge presence or absence of the various accessories own Performances or load new ones from disk. A Performance can also memorize a Style, Variation level of the rechargeable backing battery. can be installed in the instrument.. and Style Tempo, giving you the possibilitythat of saving your user-programmed Style Performances to the Press F1 once to show the release date and batPerformance Group locations. When you select the Performances, you can then choose to recall the tery charge memorized level: Style or not by means of the Style Lock button.

Press F1 once again to show the date and time of the release: The display will show 8 Performances to choose from, each with a different name.

1. Press the Bank 1 button in the PERFORMANCE GROUPS section.

RESTORE

If the STYLE LOCK button is off, (default The Edit General main menu offers several dediPERFORMANCES RECALL STYLES setting) selecting Performances will recall live cated Restore functions, useful to reset part of keyboard and also accompaniment Sounds all the instruments RAM. (Style Perfs). The relative Style, Variation and All user-programmed data (Performances, User Tempo are selected. If the battery charge level is low, leave the instruStyles, Songs, Performance-Sounds, Sounds) PERFORMANCES RECALL If the STYLE button is on (LED on) , cancelled, either as an individual ment turned on for at least 15 LOCK hours to recharge can be block KEYBOARD SOUNDS ONLY selecting Performances recalls live keyboard the battery completely. (Performances, Style-Performances, User Styles, sounds only. Songs, Sounds) or entirely (All) by means of a single command. Cancelling user programmed 2. Select a Performance use the Soft buttons data from memory restores the instruments originearest to the name (Church in the examnal default parameter status. ple). For example, if you use the Restore Performance command, you will cancel all user-programmed If Display Hold (D. HOLD) is off, the disand restore the original factory play will return to the previous situation Performances showsettings. ing the newly selected sound combination.

If D. HOLD is on (LED on), the Performance WARNING: use the RESTORE commands with cauGroup selection display will remain active, tion because user-programmed data is irremediably allowing you to select another Performance lost. Make sure that you have saved any data you from the same Group. Press ENTER if you so not wish to cancel to disk or Hard disk before prowant to see the recalled sound combination. ceeding with a restore operation.

Options column of the main Edit General page

88 Reference Guide

Quick Guide 131

RESTORE ALL (F3)

This operation cancels all user programmed data currently in RAM (Performances, User Styles, Style-Performances, Songs) and restores the instrument to its factory-set status (RAM empty). Pressing F3 prompts a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.

RESTORE STYLE-PERFORMANCE (F7)

This operation cancels all user-programmed Style-Performances associated to the ROM STYLES. The status of the Style-Performance parameters are restored to the factory-set values. ROM Styles associated to modified StylePerformances are identified by an asterisk (*) after the Style name. Pressing F7 prompts a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.

RESTORE STYLES (F4)

This operation cancels all User Styles in RAM (including User Style-Performances) residing in the User 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons of the STYLE GROUPS. The User slots are restored to the factory-set conditions (empty: User). Pressing F4 prompts a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.

RESTORE SOUNDS (F8)

This operation restores the Sound configuration to the original factory-set situation, cancelling all User edited Sounds previously stored to user locations. This operation is particularly useful to restore the original WK6/8SE sound set (over 1,000 sounds) after loading a sound configuration from a previous series WK6/8SE disk (about 600 sounds) using the Load All Sounds or Load Block procedures. Pressing F8 prompts a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.

RESTORE PERFORMANCE (F5)

This operation cancels all user-programmed Performances in RAM residing in the 8 buttons of the PERFORMANCE GROUPS. The status of the Performance parameters are restored to the factory-set values. Pressing F5 prompts a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.

RESTORE SONGS (F6)

This operation cancels all Song in RAM. The Songs memory is restored to the factory-set status (empty: User). Pressing F6 prompts a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.

Edit General 89

SELECT AND PLAY THE FLASH MEMORY USER STYLES

WK6/8SE leaves the factory with a selection of User Styles stored in the User Style flash memory banks, reserved for factory use where the contents may vary from market to market. From time to time, Generalmusic may offer operating systems which contain upgrades of the User flash banks. The selection procedure is identical to the one used to select a ROM Style, with the difference that you select the flash User Style from bank 2 of the User 1 and User 2 locations

1. Press the USER 1 button in the STYLE GROUPS section 2. Select Bank 2 with the +/ Page/Bank ( ) buttons.
The display will show the names of 8 flash Styles to choose from..

1 2

IMPORTANT: the Flash Styles vary depending on the model. The WK6SE Flash Styles utilize ROM Sounds, while those of the WK8SE require sounds that reside in the instruments RAM memory. For this purpose, WK8SE leaves the factory with the sounds of Block A_1RSND (in the Hard Disk) already loaded into the RAM memory. Bear in mind, therefore, that if you modify the contents of the WK8SE RAM memory, the Flash Styles might not play correctly due to the absence of the correct sounds. In such a case, you will have to reload the Sound Block A_1RSND from the Hard Disk. Refer to the Disk and Hard Disk chapter for information regarding how to load Hard Disk data.

WK6SE

WK8SE

3. Select a Flash User Style with the corresponding soft buttons.

To play with the flash Style, proceed as already described on page 1.24.

Note. The recalled Flash User Style Performance can be modified and memorized to the same Flash User Bank, or to any other User location. Refer to the Store Performance procedure on the pages which follow for details regarding how to store Performances. The Flash User Styles cannot be erased.

810 Reference Guide

Quick Guide 129

Help
WK6/8SE incorporates an on-line-help system which provides brief information on the basic functions of the instrument. This feature is particularly helpful if you get stuck and do not have access to the owners manual at the time. Generally, pressing HELP opens a page showing information regarding the currently set mode. HOW TO USE HELP 1. Press the HELP button when you want general information regarding the current mode. A GENERAL page will open showing information regarding the current operating mode. 2. If available, press DETAILS (F7/F8) to open a sub-page with specific details concerning the current help topic. Depending on the current mode, a NEXT page (F3/F4) may or not be available. Once you have entered a NEXT page, the PREVIOUS option (F1/F2) will be available. Options not available will be shown with broken lines. 3. To return to a GENERAL page, press F5/F6. 4. To pass to another HELP topic, regardless of the current operating mode, press NEXT (F3/ F4) or PREVIOUS (F1/F2). 5. Press ESCAPE to close the current HELP page.

Therefore, if you are in Style/Performance mode, press HELP to get information concerning the default situation (main page). Similarly, if you are currently working in one of the Edit sections, (Edit Effects, for example), press HELP to get information on the Effects section. Some Help pages consist of a General information page and one or more Detail pages which provide detailed information regarding the current topic.

Utility functions 91

PANIC

START A STYLE WITH KEY START

MIDI communications can sometimes lock the the start of The Key Start function synchronizes instrument due the transmission of an exces-with a note theto automatic accompaniment This function is active (LED on) by default. When sive quantitypressed of data, on or an MIDI mestheincorrect keyboard below the split point on, you can select items from the current selecsage. without having to use START/STOP. KEY START tion display without closing it. If off, every time can be used in the various situations. The most comThe PANIC function sends All notes off and you select an item from a selection window, the mon use ismessages as follows:to all external Reset all Controllers display will return to the main display relating to MIDI devices connected to the WK6/8SE MIDI the current mode. 12. When the Style is not playing, press KEY OUT port. If D. Hold is off, press the button to activate the START. function. HOW TO ACTIVATE PANIC The KEY START LED turns on. If your machine locks up while working with MIDI, press both Page buttons ( ) at the same time. 13. Play a chord (at least 3 notes) with your left

Display Hold

12

13

D. HOLD remains active (LED on) until the butThe accompaniment starts immediately ton is pressed again. (eventually preceded by the introductory patUse ESCAPE to close the current selection wintern if selected). If you release the keys, the dow without deactivating D. HOLD. accompaniment continues to play. Use Display Hold when selecting Sounds, Styles, Note: If ARRANGE MEMORY or LOWER MEMORY Performances and Songs are off, the accompaniment plays while your notes WK6/8SE sends the all notes off and reset are pressed on the keyboard and stops instantly all controllers messages toreleased. all connected when the notes are If, instead, one of these two functions are active, the accompaniment MIDI devices.

hand below the split point (B3).

or the drum track only will continue playing after releasing the keys.

14. Press START/STOP or ENDING to stop the ac-

companiment.
With Start/Stop, KEY START remains active. With Ending, KEY START turns off. If you use Start/Stop to stop the accompaniment, press KEY START to turn it off.

14

92 Reference Guide

Quick Guide 127

Appendix
Sound tables Drumkit tables Style tables Performance tables Effect tables Wave tables MIDI Controllers MIDI Implementation Implementation System Exclusive Index (alphabetical)

ROM-Sounds 4. Press the right Track Scroll button to check

Bank PIANO group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Piano12 Piano22 Piano32 E.Piano11 E.Piano22 Harpsichor1 Clavinet
1

the sounds recalled for the accompaniment 2 3 4 5 tracks.

PianoMk1 PianoStage InharPiano Note that in thisPickPiano example, the tracks Acc 4/5/ PianoW22 Pianoctave3 PianoTine3 TonePiano2 6 are all muted. 2 2 2 3 E.G.Piano1 E.G.Piano2 AtkPiano1 RhodxFilt2 E.PianoSft2 LogPiano2 PercPiano
2 2 2 2 2

4
6 Grand Piano E. Grand 1 E.PianoX2 DynE.P.1 FM Pro MezzoPiano FM E. Piano Rhodex 1 7 8

ArcoPiano

2 2 HonkyTonk2 Press DetPiano Western AtkPiano2 the2left Track Scroll button to 2 E.Piano42 the ThinRhodx keyboard sounds.

return to
E.PianoMk2 DetuneE.P.2 ElPianoSeq1

E.Piano32 Harpsich22 SynClav

1

E.Piano52 Harpsich31 WowClav

2

MALLET. group Celesta2 Glockenspl MusicBox2 Vibraphone1 Marimba1 Xylophone1 Santur5.

2 2

CelestaPlk2 GlockVibes WineGls12 Vibes21 Marimba22 Xylophone21 SoftBell2

1 2

ToyPiano2 GlockChoir MusicBell2 SynVibes2 Mallet2 XyloTribal2 Oohlalaa2

2 2

Balarimba1 ToyOrgan2 GlockSeq1 Vibes Marimba31 SynthMarim1 VibeSeq1 Quasimodo

TubularBel2

ORGAN group Organ1

2 1

Press the INTRO button if you want to BarChimes Climbing preselect the Style introduction.
16'1'Draw
1 1

5/6
2

Organ1WX
2

2 2

OrgTheatre
1 2

16'1'Vib3
1 1

8'1 4'
1

2'1 OctaDrawbr FiltDrawbr3 SixtDrawbr3 Bandoneon31 Trekzak DirtyOrgan3 OctAccordn2

3

RockOrgSeq1 TheatreSus RotaryPress

Organ2 6. Organ32

16'8'5'Drw JazzOrgan3 Press the START/STOP buttonOrgan3W to start the16' auto SwOrgan SynOrg1 OrganC3 5'1/3 accompaniments.
2

2'2/31 Hamclick2 EvocativOr2 Accord51 PercOrgan2 AccordEnv1

1

ChurchOrg12 Musette1

Church21

Organ3WX2

Organ1W2

PipeOrg32

2 will hear ReedOrgan1You PipeOrgan

2 the Drum track start2 to play. If 1 Organ4 PipeChiff HamDrw 1 youAccord1 pressed INTRO 5 1above, the 2 Accord22 in point Accord3 Accord4 1 Harmonica1 Style Blusette WestHarmon Farfis1 Hamperc1 will1 start with an introduction.

Fuzztain The Strat

Bandoneon1 NylonGtr 7.1 SteelGtr

1

Cassotto1
1

OrganLfo2
2

Bandoneon22
2

Diatonic2

GUITAR group) SoloGtr VocalGtr PedalSteel CrunchGt Play a chord of at least three notes below 12StrGtr SteelGtr1 SteelGtr2 the split point (B3) to start Style play. Mandolin
2 1 1 1

NylonGtr2 7 Mandolin2 ElGuitar32

3 1

SteelGtr31 ElGuitar42
1

JazzGtr11 CleanGtr1 MutedGtr DistGtr1

1

OctJzGtr1

Hawaiian2

JazzGtr21

MutedClean1

JazzStrato2 MandolinSeq LeadDist33

1 2 2 ElGuitar1 ChorusGtrauto ElGuitar2 Dyn.Clean2 A fully orchestrated accompaniment 2 1 1 Muted2 Dyn.Muted MutedFunk1 pattern will start to play. MutedWha

The suffix = 3 oscillators per voice. The suffix = 2 oscillators per voice. The suffix = 1 oscillator per voice. The prefix DK = DrumKit

In default chord FuzzGtr2 conditions, HeavyGt2 the keyboards LeadDist3 LeadDist23 2mode is set 2 to Fingered 1 recognition 1 which HarmonxGtr SlowHarmx HarmGtr3 StratoGt JazzPick2 allows you to play Styles using fingered chords anywhere along the keyboard, regardless of the split point. You can change the chord recognition mode from Free to Fingered 2, One Finger or Free, by entering the ARRANGE MODE options. See the ARRANGE MODE function in the Styles chapter of the Reference Guide.
1

Overdrive1

WhaGtr12

5thOverdr2

CrunchStb2

5thDistort3

A2 Appendix

Quick Guide 125

ROM-Sounds
Bank PIANO group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MALLET. group 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ORGAN group 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 GUITAR group) 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 ST_Mandolin1 ST_Steel11 ST_Steel21 ST_Nylon1 ST_Steel31 ST_12Strng1 ST_Steel41 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Tables A3

ROM-Sounds TO DISPLAY LYRICS ON AN EXTERNAL MONITOR

Bank 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 BASS group

You can project the lyrics any Song onto your TV screen, or computer monitor, (or any other video 1 AcoustcBs11 AcoustcBs21 AcousticBs32 Dyn.AcoBs1 HarmAcBs device). Your the factory set 1 2WK6/8SE leaves 1 1 FingeredBs Dyn.Fingrd Dyn.Bass1 Dyn.Baxx HarmAcBs21 by project song lyrics onto an 1 1 default to instantly 2 1 PickBass Dyn.Bass21 PckBass2 PkBsMute HarmElBs external video 2device. 2 Fretless AcidBass1 Flanged1 Fretless21 RezoBass1
SlapBass11
1

6 FingerdBs21 Fretless31 WedgeBass1 SynBass51

7 DanceBass2 FingerdBs32 SubBass2 WowBass1 FingAndSlp2 DubbedRezo2 Popcorn2 NylonBass

2 2

8 TheChopper2 LowPassed2 SerialBass2 ContraSynB2 DigiBass2 PriorBass2 SynBass62 RazorBass2

1. Connect one ofStopBass the video outputs (RGB, SWXBass ThumBass BleapBass to a domestic TV or AcoustcBs4 to a monitor by SynBass1 VHS) SynBass3 TecknoBass SynSlapBs SynBass2 means SynBass4 RaveBass video SynthBass of the supplied cable. HitBass
SlapBass22
2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2

Dyn.Bass31

SlapSynBs2

PckBass31

ClickBass1

1 1

1/2 BassMik
1

ToneBass1 SpaceBass12 SpaceBass2

STRINGS group) Violin1 Viola

1

Cello1 Contrabass1
1 1

TheSlowViolin supplied RGB/Scart video cable is suit1 ViolinOrch2 able to connect your WK6/8SE to a domes2 2 BowedViola ViolaPad 1 2 tic TV or computer monitor. SlowCello CelloEns Quartet1
BowedBass2
2 2

2. If you are connecting TremoloStr OctTremolo Plectra to the TV, tune it to the Pizzicato AV channel. OctPizz EchoPizz
1 1

Staccato1

Harp1 Timpani1 Strings1

ENSEMBLE group)
1

To select the AV channel, consult the ownTimpaniEFX2 Dyn.Orch I'I'I2 ers manual of the television set.
StereoStrg2
2

HarpDelay2

Spacehar2

3. Select a Song with Lyrics. SlwStrings StrgOrch St.SlwStrg

2

StrgGlock2

DualStrgs2 Strings2
1

StereoOctv3 SlwString21 SawStrings the Lyr- 2 NoiseUuh2

1

SynStrg12 SynStrg22 Choir

1

2 TheSynStrg3 external

2 1 SynStrg5 OrchHits2 video device will show

SynStrg4 ics of the 2Song.Strings32 VoiceUuh

2

StrEthnic2
2

SlowUuh

BackVocals

PannedVox4

VoiceOohs2 If SynVox2 OrchHits2 Trumpet1 Trombone Tuba2 4.

1

2 2 also be you press SCORE will VoiceAah SlowAah2 the lyrics SimStrings WideEnsemb2 1 shown on the instruments display. 2 StereoSlow2 SkatVoices Vocoder2 SympMemory

Rave2 FlugelAttk1 Trombone3

1 1

Dyn.St.Hit3 FlugelHorn1 WowTromb2

1 2 1

HitsRev2 DynSection2 TrombSwell

1 1 1

OctSlowStr2 NoiseTrp3 TrombSlop2

3 3 3

BRASS group TrombSwel2

If the Lyrics doWowTuba not appearClassicBrs on the external ShortTuba OctBrass1 press F8Dyn.MtTrp to open theModernBrs Score controls MutedTrp1 device, MutedTrp2 OctBrass2 FrenchHorn window Dyn.FrHorn TotoHorns FrHrnSwell FrenchFlut and adjust the parameters of the Brass Brass2 BrassRips BrassFall BrassTrp video controls accordingly.
1 1 2 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2

ColorBrass2 StereoBrs2

SynBrass12

SynBras22

SyntHorn2

SynBrass32

PercSynBrs3

2 2 the directional arrow buttons SynBrass22 Use SlowHorn AttkHorn SynBrass42 to select SynBrass52

the parameters. Refer to the section entitled SCORE & EDIT SCORE in the Edit Song chapter of the Reference Guide for instructions regarding how to set the parameters.

A4 Appendix

Quick Guide 123

ROM-Sounds
Bank BASS group 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 STRINGS group) 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 ENSEMBLE group 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 BRASS group 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 ST_PickBs11 ST_SynBas4
2

10

11

12

13

14

15

16 ST_AcousBs1

Vang.Bass DanceFing SoftBass2

2

Vang.Bass2

ST_FngrdBs1 ST_PickBs21 ST_Fretls11 ST_Fretls21 ST_FngrBs21 ST_Fretls31 ST_Fretls41

Tables A5

ROM-Sounds
Bank REED group 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 95 1

Multimedia
2 3 4 5 6 7 8

WK6/8SE can 1 2 Soprano Soprano2

1 disks TenorSax

display Lyrics when playing WK 1 SoprFilter AltoSax1 Safe Sax

1 1 1 variety of (or PS) SaxNoise Series2 Disks. There areLiscioSax a wide SoftSax SoftFilt 2 1 that display lyrics when played. OctaveSax TenFilter TouchSax2 No other

1 2 1 1 the Gem keyboard brings vision to your music like BaritonSax BaritDet BariFilter BaritnSax2

Oboe1 WK EnglisHorn2

2 OboeChiff Series does!

OboeFilter1 HornFilter2 ClarFilter1

1

SaxQuartet1 TenSaxSolo1 BreathSopr2 LiscioClar1

1. Bassoon
1

Press the SONGBassoonFlt button. Bassoon2

1

EngHorn22 ClarSolo2

Clarinet1 Piccolo1 Flute1 Recorder2

1

FLUTE group

You will see up to sixteen Song choices in the HardFlute1 display 2(autoload the four song demo disk HardFlute22 PanFilter1 provided with the instrument if necessary). 2 2 2 Dyn.Flute1 DynHiFlute ColorWind
Recorder22
2 2

2. Select the desired SONG with the correspondPanFlute PanFlute2 Dyn.Pan Panfluit Soft button. BottleBlow ing BottleNois Tube
1 2 1

Bubbler1

Shakuhachi2 Whistle
1

Shakupad2 Whistle1WX
1

ShakuVoice2 Whistle3WX2 OcarinaSyn2 Pulse22 Lyle2 SynLead12 Digital

2

Ocarina2 SquareWave2 SawWave2 SynCalliop2 ChiffLead Charang2 SoloVox2 5thSawWave BassLead3 Fantasia3 WarmPad2 Polysynth2 SpaceVoice MetalPad2 HaloPad3 SweepPad2
2 4 3

OcarinaPan2 Pulse12 ObxFilter2 Azimut2 Jump2 FiltRes12 Decay1

2 2

SYNTH LEAD group ProphSaw1 TrianWave1 ClavWave1 MiniSaw1 MiniPulse1 DigiWave1

1 1

SnapSynth1 SeqTone1 SeqWoody1 SeqStick

1

BirAttak1

RdPhas1 StrnNoise1 SevenSynth1 SynthLead MKSynth1 StlSynth1 FmIsh

1 1

Boss1 PannedSeq2 Joe4lead2 OlFaithful3 Saw-Me3 Saw-You3 PowerPop2 TooAnalog3 RichForm2 BellPad012 BellPad022
2

3. Press PLAY to start the SONG playback.

Chopper
2

PulseWave

Boink1 Gring1 Thin

1

SoundTrk2 FiltRes22 Decay2

2 2

Inharm11 Inharm21 Inharm3

1 1

Buzz1 LfxSynth1

4. Press the SCORE button and the score will Obx2 Obx3 DigiWave2 Inharm4 appear in the display. SYNTH PAD group
NewAge2 Obx12 Fantasy22 VocBells Bright22 Slave2 Machiner2
2

4 Shape

Sharp

1 1

BtSynth1 PrettyPad12 PrettyPad23 Fantasy43 StereoFrm1 FizzyPad2 BandSweep2 EpicPan2 StereoFrm22

PPG2 AnlgPad2 Fantasy32 Angels

2

Fantasy13 Waveaura2 Awala1 OcBreath Panch1 Bright33 Ppg1 Waiting2

2

Form11 Form21 Form31 Form4

1

LogStr1 MarimVox2 Pad4U1 MyVox

1

StereoFrm32 BellPad032 BellPad042 BellPad052 StereoFrm42

BowedGlass2

Prophet12

Prophet22 Analogic2 Atmosphere2 Decay32

Form51 Form61 Form71 Budweis2

PadZone11 PadZone21 PluckPad1 Tibet2

5. Press the F8 button to activate the SCORE CONTROLS.

A6 Appendix

Quick Guide 121

ROM-Sounds
Bank REED group 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 FLUTE group 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 SYNTH LEAD group 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 FatSynth2 WhaSynth2 Outburst2 Its19852 FMbefore2 CrossShape2 CrossSharp2 CrossWires2 IcePad12 IcePad22 BassPad2 Alf's Pad Alf's Pad2 MinBitSyn12 MinBitSyn22 DigGrunge12 DigGrunge22 ToneZone12 ToneZone22 ToneZone32 ToneZone42 FxShape2 SharpBuzz2 MinStack4 MajStack4 DimStack4 Maj5Stack4 Min7Stack4 Maj7Stack4 Eerie12 Eerie22 Eerie32 Eerie42 VocoWah2 ThinWha2 FatAttak12 FatAttak22 Vangelis1 Vangelis2 An A.Logic Spiral Phat Pulse Soft Seq. Soft Lead Alf's Lead 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SYNTH PAD group

Tables A7

ROM-Sounds
Bank SYN SFX group 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 1

Listen to the Demo Songs

2 3 4 5 6 Mech-Lp1 Mech-Wv1 SeqCook1 7 Yowww3 Stars2 Babbling1 Synkro2 JimisDream2 TunedNoise1 BlasteRel2 StarTheme4
3

8 HitThePipe2 StabSynth2 MetalWork2 DigiDrops2 WoodCutter2 SnapOff2 SilicaPick2 Yourimba2

You 3 IceRain

can listen playback ofImpact your 2 to the automatic 2 1 Noiseres BigRoom2 Submarin 2 2 2 2 WK6/8SE to get an idea of what the instrument Soundtrack MoonWind Slope Ekoendls SynRain2 2 capable 2 Crystalis Wind of doing. SynLead22 Jets2 SeqSnap1

1. 3 Brightness
Goblin2 StarTheme Sitar1

Atmosphere2

Press DEMO (inPopUp the Edit/Number to WithGas OnOff section) Spect1 open the DemoNoGravity window. Synthex3 Resonance Spect2
2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1

Arp260002

GlockAthm2

Smak2

ColorBlast2

1 Atomic
HiJoe
2

BounSync2
2

SawModula2 Synthex62

EchoDrops1
2

TheStarTheme2 Select 2Demo dialog window appears. PowerBad2 StarTheme32 Spect31

2 2 1

Synthex12

Synthex22

Synthex42

Synthex52

ETHNIC group

2. Select one of theSynSitar elements in Kalimba2 the list (All, Demo SitarDet Song, Demo Style) with the cursor buttons / . Banjo BanjoOct EthnicGtr KalimShot
2 2 2 1

Shamisen1 Koto1 Kalimba Fiddle1 Shanai

1 1

ShamSitar2 Kanoun2 ShrtKalimb Hukin2 BacktoWS

2 2

SynSham2 TrpClarin1 SaxTrumpt1 BrassEns2 FiddleBell2 VoiceSpect2 Kalimba31

Bagpipe1

BagpipeEns2

PERCUSSIVE group 3.
1

Press ENTER to gain access to the selection DK_STAND.1 DK_STAND.2 DK_STAND.3 DK_STD.2WX window of the element selected in step 2 Agogo DK_ROOM DK_WS DK_ROOM1WX DK_ROOM2WX (Demo Song or Demo Style). SteelDrums DK_POWER DK_STD.1WX DK_POWER1WX DKPOWER2WX
TinkleBell2
2

3 DK_STAND.5
DK_STD'70 DK_HYBRID1 DK_STAND.6 DK_STAND.7 DK_STAND.8 DK_JAZZ3

DK_HOUSE2 DK_HIPHOP DK_DANCE2 DK_TEK'90A DK_ELECT.2 DK_DNC1999 DK_POLY

Vang. Kit DK_ROCK DK_STAND.9 DK_STAND10 DK_TUNED DK_HYBRID2 BD_ONLY_KT

Woodblock1 The DK_ELECT DK_DANCE DK_ELECT1WX DK_FUSION corresponding selection window DKELECT2WX actiTaiko2 Melo.Tom11 DK_HOUSE DK_TECHNO DK_HOUSE1WX DKHOUSE2WX vates showing 8 Song or Style names. DK_JAZZ1 DK_JAZZ2 DK_JAZZ_WX DK_STAND.4

DK_TEKBRSH DK_TEK'90B

of text starts to scroll DK_BRUSHWX DK_BRUSH2 1 the top of the display under theSD_ONLY_KT title, 120 ReverseCymacross DK_ORCH DK_SY77 DK_ORCH_WX SFX group showing basic technical specifications of the 121 GtFretNois1 instrument. Gtr.WhaWha|'|'|1 GtrNoise1 Rideit
122 123 124 125 126 127 128

animated string SynthDrum1 An DK_BRUSH DK_M1

If you select ALL, 1 TickTack Drop1all the Demo Songs and 2 1 1 Demo Styles are chained into a single medBird Scratch1 Water 1 ley. The sequencer 1 1 starts to play the first song Telephone1 Telephone2 Door 2 and stops when it reaches the Helicopter2 automatically SynPerc32 Clackson 1 Applause2 endHeartBeat PickScrape of the 2last Demo Style in memory.
Seashore2 GunShot1

BreathNois1

Zapp1

KeyClick1

If you want to cancel the Select Demo display without playing the Demo Songs or Styles, press ESCAPE.

Explosion2

Bomb2

4. Select one of the Demos (Song or Style) with the corresponding soft button.
The selected single demo playback starts and shows up in negative highlight. When the end is reached, the demo stops.

A8 Appendix

Quick Guide 119

ROM-Sounds
Bank SYN SFX group 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 SFX group 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 WhaWha11 Glasses1 TekBrush2 Highhh1 PhoneWave1 RndEnArm2 OddSpace2 GlassalG2 WhaWha21 ReverseBd11 ReverseBd21 ReverseBd31 SCRATCH31 SCRATCH41 SCRATCH51 SCRATCH61 WhaWha31 ReverSnar11 ReverSnar21 ReverSnar31 DYNA_PERC2 SD_ROCK2 BD_ROCK2 WEEP1 WhaWha41 ReverShrt11 ReverShrt21 ReverShrt31 Noisnare12 Noisnare22 Noisnare32 Noisnare42 SD_HEAVY12 SD_HEAVY22 SD_HEAVY32 SD_HEAVY42 BD_DN1_ZP2 BD_DN2_ZP2 BD_DN3_ZP2 BN_DN3_SD2 SD12 SD22 SD32 BD_Z1_HHC2 BD_DN3_HI2 BD_DN2_HI2 BD_DEEP_DN2 TOMLOW22 TOMHIGH22 BORDER_12 BORDER_22 Sinus1 BDHOUSE11 BDTEKNO
1

10 BDHOUSE21 BDORCH
1

11 BDELECT11 BDPOWER SDJAZZ21 SDSTD4

1 1

12 BDJAZZ1 ACOUST_KIK STICK1 SDJAZZ31 HOUSSD1

1 1

13 BDROOM11 BD_KIK
1

14 BDSTD11 BD_70_P RIM_11 SDROOM11

1 1

15 BDSTD21 BD_70_F RIM_21 SDROOM21 ROLL_F_LN BD_AC_2A1 TIMPANI1 HOUSEHH1

1 2 1 1

16 BDSTD31 CLAP_MIX1 EFF_RIM1 SDSTD11 ROLL_F1 BD_AC_2B1 OPSURDO21 HHCLO21

1

RIMSHOT11 SDELECT1 SDSTD2

1

RIMSHOT21 DYNSDJAZZ1 SDSTD3 CLAP1 BRUSREV1 TOMHIGH

1 1

HOUSERIM1

RIM_701 SDORCH1 HOUSESD2

ROLL_70 TOM_141

HOUSECLAP1 ROLLSNARE1 TOMELEC

1

BD_AC_1DYN1 BD_AC_2DYN1 BD_AC_1A1 BRUSRIG1 TOMJAZZ

1

BD_AC_1B1 TOMLOW
1

BRUSHSLP1 TOMROOM HHPEDAL1 HHOP_70

1 1

BRUSHTAP1 TIMP_JM
1

TOM_13_DYN2 TOM_10_DYN2

ETHNIC group HHCLO1L1 HHOPEN2

1

HHCLO1S1 HHCL_70
1

HHOPEN11 HHFT_70
1

HHTGHT11 HH_CL1_DR RIDECYM1

1 1 1

HHTGHT21 HH_CL2_DR SPLASH1 CONGAHIGH MARACAS1 QUICALOW1 OPSURDO1 KITCHEN1

1 1 1

HH_PED_DR CHINA1 RIDE1 CONGALOW WHISTLE1 TRIANLONG1 DARBKHIGH LOGDRUM1 DOLLYVOX SQCLICK1 BEAT_SD1 SD_BR1 808_OC_HH1 DNC_BD11
1

HH_OP_DR1 SMASH1 RIDECUP1

CRASHORCH1 CRASH1 TAMBOURINE1 TAMBSLP1 BONGOHISL

1 1

HOUSERIDE1 COWBELL1
1

RIDECUP1 VIBRASLAP1 CABASA1

1 1

HOUSECOWB1 COWBL21 CABASAL1 MTSURDO DOOR1

CONGALSLAP BONGOLOW TIMBLOW1 JINGLEBELL

1

CONGAHSLAP CONGALSLAP WOODBLOCK1 QUICAHIGH1

HOUSETCON1 MUTBELL2 TRIANSHORT1 DARBKLOW1 CLAKSON1 BABYVOX1 DYTEK_TIMB2 SD_9091 SD_BR_DYN2 808_OPHHLP1 BD_Z21

TIMBALES1 GUIROLONG1 SHAKER

1

AGOGO1

GUIROSHORT1 CLAVES1

WINDCHIMES CASTANETS NOISE21 WATER1

1

PERCUSSIVE group FINGERSNAP1 DROP1 VOICES1

1

VOICES2 ZAPP1

VOICES3

VOXHHCL

VOXTAP SD_BB1

VOXTIP D_SD1

FINGBELL1 NOISEPERC1 SD_STD11 SD_SH11 REZO_IT3

SCRATCH11 CRASH_181 SD_STD31 SD_SH31

SCRATCH21 HARD_CLAP1 SD_STD41 SD_FSN1 9091_OCHH1

TOMBRUSH2 SD_P701 EFF_SD21 BD_DNC31 9092_CHH1

HOU_TOM1 SD_F701 808_CL_HH1 BD_Z1_LAYL2 9092_OPHH1

RASPYRIDE1 SD_STD21 SD_SH21 LNG_BD11

BD_DMGD_LN1 BD_DNC2_LN1

LONG_REVRS1 BD_Z1_LAYH2 9091_CHH1

HH_LOOP_CL1 HH_LOOP_OP1

909_SD_LNG2 BD11

NOISE_C1HH1 BrokeNoise2 NOISE_C2HH1 HatOrSnare2 NOISE_OPHH1 FallingBD2 NOISE_OPRV1 WayaW2

BD_DMG_SD2 Empty1

Tables A9

Drumkits

ADJUST THE SOUND VOLUMES SEPARATELY (BALANCING)

The volume of each sound (in Full, Upp/Low or Multi setups) can be independently regulated with the corresponding sliders of the group to the left of the display.
WHISTLE 110-15 GUIROSHORT 111-10 GUIROLONG 111-9 CLAVES 111-11 WOODBLOCK 111-12 WOODBLOCK 111-12 QUICAHIGH 111-13 QUICALOW 111-14 TRIANSHORT 111-16 TRIANLONG 111-15 SHAKER 112-9 JINGLEBELL 112-10 WINDCHIMES 112-11 CASTANETS 112-12 MTSURDO 112-13 OPSURDO 112-14

The Performances memorize the track volumes. After mixing, you can save the changes to the current Performance using the STORE PERF button. The correspondence between the sliders and the tracks is indicated by the two LEDs shown on the right of the group of sliders. The sliders can affect:

Full keyboard mode Upper/Lower mode

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

A) the tracks identified by the silkscreened markings above the sliders, or B) the tracks identified by the silkscreened markings AH below the sliders.
In Full Keyboard or Upper&Lower keyboard modes (situation A), refer to the markings above the sliders. The sliders (Upper 1 & 2, Lower 1 & 2) control the corresponding tracks. In Multi mode (situation B), or when Style accompaniment tracks are shown (see page 22), refer to the markings AH. Each slider corresponds to one of the displayed tracks: slider A to track 1, slider B to track 2, . slider H to track 8.
< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

Multi mode

< = same as DK_STAND1 113-2-1

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

A10 Appendix

Quick Guide 117

Drumkits

DK_STAND1 113-2-.1 ROLLSNARE 103-9 FINGERSNAP 113-9 ZAPP 115-10 GunShot 128-1 SCRATCH2 115-12 SCRATCH1 115-11 STICK 99-12 SQCLICK 115-15 HOUSERIM 99-11 MUTBELL 110-16 BDSTD2 97-15 BDSTD1 97-14 RIMSHOT1 99-9 SDSTD1 100-16 HOUSECLAP 102-9 SDSTD4 101-11 TOMLOW 104-14 HHCLO1S 105-10 TOMLOW 104-14 HHPEDAL 105-12 TOMLOW 104-14 HHOPEN2 106-9 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMHIGH 104-10 CRASH 107-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 RIDECYM 107-13 CHINA 107-15 RIDECUP 107-12 TAMBSLP 108-10 SPLASH 107-14 COWBELL 108-11 CRASH 107-10 VIBRASLAP 108-12 RIDECYM 107-13 CONGASLAP 109-10 BONGOLOW 109-11 CONGAHSLAP 109-12 CONGAHIGH 109-14 CONGALOW 109-15 TIMBALES 110-9 TIMBLOW 110-10 AGOGO 110-11 AGOGO 110-11 CABASA 110-12 MARACAS 110-14 WHISTLE 110-15

DK_ROOM 114-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDROOM1 97-13 BDROOM1 97-13 < SDROOM1 100-14 < SDROOM2 100-15 TOMROOM 104-12 HHTGHT1 105-13 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_POWER 115-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDELECT1 97-11 BDROOM1 97-13 < SDROOM2 100-15 < SDSTD3 101-10 < HHTGHT1 105-13 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_ELECT. 116-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDELECT1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 < SDELECT 100-9 < SDROOM1 100-14 TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 HHOPEN1 105-11 TOMELEC 104-9 TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 < ReverseCym 120-1 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_HOUSE 117-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDHOUSE2 97-10 BDHOUSE HOUSERIM 99-11 < < HOUSESD2 101-13 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSEHH 105-15 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSEHH 105-15 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HOUSETCON 109-16 < < < < < HOUSECOWB 108-13 < < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 < < < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_JAZZ 118-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < < BDJAZZ 97-12 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 < SDSTD3 101-10 TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHTGHT1 105-13 TOMJAZZ 104-11 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHOPEN1 105-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

Tables A11

Drumkits

PLAY UP TO 8 SOUNDS AT THE SAME TIME (MULTI)

9. Press the soft buttons F5/F6 on the right of the display to select the MULTI keyboard mode.
All references to the Upper and Lower keyboard sections will no longer be displayed. The Multi situation will show 8 of the 16 Tracks of the current Performance. In Multi keyboard mode, you can play up to 8 Sounds in real time. The remaining 8 tracks are associated to the Style auto accompaniment tracks (explained later).

9
< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < Applause 127-1

10. Configure the active/mute status of the displayed tracks using the relative soft buttons A F on the left of the display.
In Multi mode, the soft buttons on the left are not paired; each button relates to the corresponding track shown in the display.

10

11. Play on the keyboard with both hands.

11

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

You will hear a single sound, or a combination of sounds on both the left hand and right hand, depending on the active/mute status of each track. At this point, you can practice changing the overall sound combination by activating and/ or muting the sounds at will using the methods already described.
< = same as DK_STAND1 113-2-1

BONGOLOW 109-11 BONGOLOW 109-11 CONGASLAP 109-12 CONGAHIGH 109-14 CONGALOW 109-15 GUIROLONG 111-9 QUICALOW 111-14 TIMBALES 110-9 TIMBALES 110-9 AGOGO 110-11 TRIANLONG 111-15 WHISTLE 110-15 BDHOUSE1 97-9 NOISEPERC 116-9 HOUSSD1 101-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES 3 114-11 VOICES2 114-10 VOXHHCL 114-12 VOICES2 114-10 VOXHHCL 114-12 VOXTIP 114-14 VOXTAP 114-13 CLAKSON 113-16 DOLLYVOX 114-15 TAMBSLP 108-10 ROLLSNARE 103-9 SDORCH 100-13 HHCLO1S 105-10 CLAVES 111-11 CONGALOW 109-15 QUICAHIGH 111-13 AGOGO 110-11 STICK 99-12 STICK 99-12 STICK 99-12 STICK 99-12

Multi (split) Keyboard < --- Sound(s) ----- > < ----------- Sound(s) ------------- >
< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

A12 Appendix

Quick Guide 115

Drumkits

DK_BRUSH 119-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < < BDJAZZ 97-12 < BRUSHTAP 103-13 BRUSHSLP 103-12 BRUSREV 103-10 TOMBRUSH 115-13 HHTGHT1 105-13 TOMBRUSH 115-13 < TOMBRUSH 115-13 < TOMBRUSH 115-13 TOMBRUSH 115-13 < TOMBRUSH 115-13 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < BDPOWER 98-11 SDELECT 100-9 SDROOM2 100-15 SDSTD3 101-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 CABASA 110-12 < TAMBSLP 108-10 < COWBELL 108-11 RIMSHOT2 99-10 BDJAZZ 97-12 BRUSRIG 103-11 DYNSDJAZZ 100-10 BRUSHTAP 103-13 TOMJAZZ 104-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHCLO1S 105-10 TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHPEDAL 105-12 WOODBLOCK 111-12 HHOPEN2 106-9 HOUSCLAP 102-9 BDSTD1 97-14 RIDECYM 107-13 SDSTD1 100-16 RIDECUP 107-12 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 SPLASH 107-14 TOMROOM 104-12 CRASH 107-10 VIBRASLAP 108-12 CHINA 107-15 FINGERSNAP 113-9

DK_ORCH. 120-2-1 < < HHTGHT1 105-13 HHPEDAL 105-12 HHOPEN2 106-9 RIDECYM 107-13 < < < < BDSTD3 97-16 BDORCH 98-10 < SDORCH 100-13 CASTANETS 112-12 SDORCH 100-13 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 < < < < < CRASHORCH 107-9 < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_STAND.2 113-3-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDSTD3 97-16 < < SDSTD4 101-11 < SDSTD3 101-10 < HHCLO2 105-16 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_WS 114-3-1

DK_STD.1WX 115-3-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDELECT1 97-11 BDROOM1 97-13 < SDROOM2 100-15 < SDSTD3 101-10 < HHTGHT1 105-13 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_DANCE 116-3-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDELECT1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 < SDELECT 100-9 < SDROOM1 100-14 TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 HHOPEN1 105-11 TOMELEC 104-9 TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 < ReverseCym 120-1 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

Tables A13

Drumkits

CHANGE SOUND BANK

4. Repeat step 2 to make additional selections.

This time, after pressing a SOUND GROUPS button, select the Bank containing the desired sound using the +/ (Page/Bank) buttons in the top right hand corner of the display area. Each Sound Group button consists of up to 16 Sound Banks, each containing up to 8 Sounds. The Bank 1 Sounds are all GeneralMidi compatible, while those that occupy the positions of the remaining 15 banks are variations the Bank 1 sounds.

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

Note: Not all sound Banks are fully occupied the empty slots are ready to accept user-edited sounds or disk based RAM-sounds.

CONGAHIGH 109-14 TIMBALES 110-9 TRIANSHORT 111-16 TIMBALES 110-9 TRIANLONG 111-15 NOISEPERC 116-9 NOISEPERC 116-9 DOOR 113-13 NOISEPERC 116-9 SDSTD2 101-9 ROLLSNARE 103-9 SDSTD3 101-10

If you want the Sound Group selection display to close after making your selection, turn the D. HOLD button off (LED off).

BreathNois 122-1 VIBRASLAP 108-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9

PLAY ON A SPLIT KEYBOARD

5. Press the F3/F4 paired Soft buttons to select the UPP/LOW keyboard mode and press a key below note F#3.

Pressing Upp/Low will activate the Lower 1 section for Play. You will hear a different Sound with respect to that assigned to Upper 1. The keyboard will be divided at note B3. The Lower 1 section will play across the extension C2-B3 and the Upper 1 section will play across the extension C4 - C7).

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

< = same as DK_STAND1 113-2-1

SPLIT Keyboard <--------Lower 1 -------- > < ------------ Upper 1 ------------- >

An active section shows a keyboard icon while a mute section shows the mute icon.

< GUIRLONG 111-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1-9 BARCHIMES 16-2-1 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-13 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLACKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPY RIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY

ACTIVE

MUTE

A14 Appendix

Quick Guide 113

DK_TECHNO 117-3-1 < < < < < < < < < BDTEKNO 98-9 BDJAZZ 97-12 HOUSERIM 99-11 HOUSSD1 101-12 < HOUSESD2 101-13 HOUSETCON 109-16 HHCLO2 105-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HHTGHT1 105-13 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HHOPEN2 106-9 HOUSETCON 109-16 ReverseCym 120-1 < < < < HOUSECOWB 108-13 < < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 DYNSDJAZZ 100-10 SDJAZZ2 100-11 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 < < BDROOM1 97-13 BDELECT1 97-11 BDHOUSE1 97-9 BDPOWER 98-11 SDSTD1 100-16 SDORCH 100-13 SDSTD3 101-10 HOUSSD1 101-12 SDROOM2 100-15 RIMSHOT1 99-9 SDROOM2 100-15 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMHIGH 104-10 HHCLO1S 105-10 HOUSEHH 105-15 HHPEDAL 105-12 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HHOPEN2 106-9 TAMBOURINE 108-9 HOUSEHH 105-15 CRASH 107-10 CHINA 107-15 RIDECYM 107-13 RIDECUP 107-12 CABASA 110-12 VOXHHCL 114-12 HOUSCLAP 102-9 BONGOLOW 109-11 BONGOLOW 109-11 DARBKLOW 112-16 DARBKHIGH 112-15 CONGALOW 109-15 BDSTD2 97-15 BDROOM1 97-13 BDELECT1 97-11 BDPOWER 98-11 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMHIGH 104-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 BDHOUSE1 97-9 BDSTD2 97-15 SDSTD1 100-16 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 SDSTD3 101-10 TOMROOM 104-12 RIMSHOT1 99-9 SDELECT 100-9 TOMROOM 104-12 HOUSECLAP 102-9 COWBELL 108-11 CABASA 110-12 HHCLO1S 105-10 TAMBOURINE 108-9 HHOPEN2 106-9 CRASH 107-10 ROLLSNARE 103-9 RIDECYM 107-13 RIDECUP 107-12 TubularBel 15-1 TubularBel 15-1 TubularBel 15-1 KITCHEN 113-14 KITCHEN 113-14 DARBKLOW 112-16 DARBKHIGH 112-15 BreathNois 122-1

Drumkits

DK_JAZZ2 118-3-1 < < < < < < < < < < < BDJAZZ 97-12 RIMSHOT2 99-10 SDJAZZ3 100-12 < DYNSDJAZZ 100-10 TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHTGHT1 105-13 TOMJAZZ 104-11 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHOPEN1 105-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_M1 119-3-1

DK_SY77. 120-3-1

DK_STAND.3 113-4-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDSTD1 97-14 BDSTD2 97-15 RIMSHOT1 99-9 SDORCH 100-13 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 < HHTGHT1 105-13 < < < HHOPEN1 105-11 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_ROOM1WX 114-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < < < SDSTD2 101-9 < SCSTS3 101-10 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

Tables A15

The four programmable Pads buttons (Pad 1, Pad 2, Pad 3, Pad 4) provide quick and easy ways of adding extra sounds to your playing. You can program each pad to produce an instrumental sound, a percussive sound or sample. The programmable Pads can also be assigned to the rotary slow/fast switching function.

The Trackball can be enabled or disabled to react with the keyboard tracks of a Performance.

The Trackball is spring loaded to return to the central position.

The default configuration of the Trackball is as follows:

The on-board controlling devices include a Trackball on the left key block, preset for Performance functions.

Left/Right movement = Pitch Bend

Up/Down movement = Modulation

The configuration of the Programmable Pads can be stored in the Programmable Performances.

While you play, add additional sounds from the pads in real time.

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < CABASAL 110-13 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

Pitch Bend

Modulation

PLAY THE PROGRAMMABLE PADS

PLAY WITH THE TRACKBALL

Strike the Pads freely.

< = same as DK_STAND1 113-2-1

A16 Appendix
Drumkits

Quick Guide 111

Drumkits

DK_POWER1WX 115-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 BDSTD1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 < SDROOM2 110-15 < SDSTD3 101-10 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_ELECT1WX 116-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 BDSTD1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 < SDROOM2 110-15 < SDROOM2 110-15 < < < < TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_HOUSE1WX 117-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDHOUSE 97-9 HOUSERIM 99-11 HOUSSD1 101-12 < SDSTD2 101-9 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSEHH 105-15 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSEHH 105-15 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 < HOUSETCON 109-16 < < < < < < < < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 < TIMBALES 110-9 COWBELL 108-11 < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_JAZZWX 118-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDJAZZ 97-12 < SDJAZZ2 100-11 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_BRUSHWX 119-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDSTD2 97-15 < BRUSHTAP 103-13 BRUSHSLAP BRUSHREV 103-10 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_ORCHWX 120-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 HHCLO1S 105-10 HHCLO1L 105-9 HHOPEN2 106-9 RIDECYMB 107-13 < BDELECT1 97-11 RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < TIMPANI 48-1 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 FINGERSNAP 113-8 SDJAZZ3 100-12 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

Tables A17

<---------------------------- FULL keyboard ------------------------->

Getting to know your instrument

A comfortable level is around two thirds of the sliders travel distance.

Different viewing angles may require an adjustment of the display contrast.

1. Insert the instruments power cord into a suitable grounded wall outlet and press the power switch to turn on WK6/8SE.

4. Adjust the general volume with the MASTER VOLUME slider.

3. Play on the keyboard and you will hear a piano sound (GrandPiano 1) play across the full keyboard.

2. If necessary, regulate the display contrast with the DISPLAY CONTRAST panel knob on the left of the display.

If you are using external amplification, better results are obtained by adjusting the volume with mixer or amplifier controls rather than lowering the volume of the instrument.

After a few seconds the instrument will set to the default situation.

The initial (default) main display screen will show a single sound (GrandPiano1) active.

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < CABASAL 110-13 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< < < <

ADJUST THE GENERAL VOLUME

POWER UP

< = same as DK_STAND1 113-2-1

A18 Appendix
Drumkits

Quick Guide 19

Drumkits

DK_STAND2WX 113-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < < < SDSTD2 101-9 < SDSTD3 101-10 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_ROOM2WX 114-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDROOM1 97-13 < SDSTD3 101-10 < SDROOM2 110-15 < < < < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_POWER2WX 115-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDROOM1 97-13 < SDROOM1 100-14 < SDELECT 100-9 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_ELECT2WX 116-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDELECT1 97-11 < < < SDSTD3 101-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 HOUSEHH 105-15 TOMHIGH 104-10 HOUSEHH 105-15 TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_HOUSE2WX 117-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDHOUSE2 97-10 < SDSTD2 101-9 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < < < < < < < < < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_RIDE IT 118-5-1

Tables A19

ROM-Styles Most of the operating modes display the tracks and their status icons are shown on the left part of the display. CC00 PC Style CC00 PC Style CC00 PC Style CC00 PC Style The status of a track can be shown in four different ways: 8 BEAT Bank 1 ROCK Bank 2 POP Bank 1 COUNTRY Bank 2 if it can be played on the keyboard; 32 00 8Beat 1 in key-play32 40 Rock 3 32 80 70' Disco 32 120 TheatreOrg 01 8Beat 2 41 Rock 4 81 Disco 01 121 Org.March in mute if the track is temporarily deactivated; 02 8Beat 3 42 Shuffle 82 Disco 02 122 Welkish is in a3record pending83 status; 03 8Beat 4 in record if the track 43 SlowRock Disco 03 123 Organsel 04 8Beat 5 in seq-play if the 44 track SlowRock 4 84 Disco 04 124 Hawaiian contains recorded notes.
05 06 07 8Beat 6

status is identified by an icon which appears the You can change the track 8BeatEach 7 46 Blues 86 in Latin D.2track status column. 126 Mod.Evngls by repeatedly 8Beatstatus 8 47pressing SlowBluesthe corresponding 87 soft Rap button.
Banktoggle 2
8Beat 9 8Beat 10 8Beat 11 8Beat 12 8Beat 13 32 48 49 50 51 52 53 Funk 1 Funk 2 Funk 3 Funk 4 Funk 5 Funk 6 32 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 BakerPop Harpy PartyPop EuroPop SynthDance SoulB.B. Open Disco by a

45

Rock 5

85

Latin D.1

125 KidsMarch

8 BEAT
32 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

For example, RealTime mode, you can 127inPraise between the mute play status pressing the corresponding repeatedly. FUNK Bank and 1 POP by Bank 2 WORLD soft Bankbutton 1
33 00 01 02 03 04 05 Slow Waltz Waltz 1 Waltz 2 Romagna Mazurka RealVienna ItalyMarch

THE TRACK ICONS

SlowBeat

SlowBallad 6_8Ballad

KEY-PLAY ICON (KEYBOARD PLAY) 54 Funk 7

The MIDI status of 06 the Orch.Waltz tracks is also be identified 80' Disco status icon.
07

16 BEAT
32 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Bank 1
16Beat 1 16Beat 3 16Beat 4 16Beat 5 16Beat 6 16Beat 7 16Beat 8

55 be Funk 8 95 The track can played on the keyboard SWING in RealFUNK Time. Bank 2 32 56 Funk 9 32 96 57 58 Funk 10 Funk 11 97 98

Bank 1
Swing

MIDI-RECEIVE/TRANSMIT ICON 33 08 Cnt.Gospel

09 G.de.Oory The track can receive (IN) and transmit 10 CountryBop (OUT). 11 Cajun Cnt.Rock SteamTrain 13

WORLD

Bank 2

16Beat 2 MUTE ICON

Mid Swing Slow Swing Big Band 1 Dixieland

The track is 59 temporarily Funk 12 deactivated, even 99 if it is connected to 60 Funk 13the keyboard. The 100 track does not 61 receive Funk 14 or transmit MIDI. 101
62 NewAge Fusion1 63

Big Band 2 MIDI-RECEIVE ICON 12

SEQ-PLAY ICON (SEQUENCER-PLAY)

DANCE1 Bank 1

102 Broadway 103 Foxtrot

14 Cowboy The track receives MIDI messages (IN), 15 transmit Cnt.Waltz them (OUT). but does not

16 BEAT
32 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Bank 2
16Beat 9 16Beat 10 16Beat 11 16Beat 12 16Beat 13 16Beat 14 16Beat 15

The track contains notes i.e. it is engaged 32 64 TMerengue 32 104 by a Song or Style accompaniment track. 65 PianoDance 105 In either case, type of track cannot play 66 this FunkDance 106 in real time 67 on the keyboard, unless it 107 is DiscoHit 68 FastDance 108 set to key-play. This track cannot receive 69IN.Pulsing 109 data at MIDI
70 SambaDance

SWING

Bank 2
BourBonStr EasySwing LatinBand QuickStep

ETHNIC
17

Bank 1
Twist 1 HullyGully

MIDI-TRANSMIT SwingBand 33ICON 16

The track 18 does not 1receive MIDI mesReggae sages (IN), butReggae transmits them (OUT). 19 2
20 PasoDoble

The Track and MIDI status BBandXmas 21 PolkaIcons are usually com22 Tarantella together to allow you to control the overall 23 playing, Pop '60 muting, recording status, both for Bank 1 ETHNIC Bank 2 in real time and in MIDI setups. 33 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Bajon Mex. 3_4 Charleston Germ.Polka Boehmisch Twist 2 Folk 2_4 Polka 6_8

MUTE ICON (TRACK WITH 16BtBallad 71 NOTE) House

Bank 1
Rock 1 32 72 73 74 76 77 78 79

110 Foxtrotbined 2 111 Shuffletrack 32 112 Gospel 1 113 Sacred 114 Gospel 2 115 Western 116 Bluegrass1 117 Bluegrass2 118 Country 119 March USA

ROCK
32 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

DANCE1 Bank 2 COUNTRY The track is temporarily deactivated.

DigitHall Rap'nShift DownBeat HeavyDance Techno DancePop DiscoPop

ICON Rock RECORD 2

R. and B. SlowRock 1 SlowRock 2 Rock'nRoll Boogie LovelyRock

The track is75 in a recording status. DiscoFun

A20 Appendix

The Display 17

Styles/Style Performances
CC00 PC Style CC00 PC Style-Perf. 36 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

User Styles/Songs
CC00 PC User Style CC00 PC Song 55 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 CC00 PC Song-Perf. 64 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

LATIN 1
33 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

Bank 1
Bossa Nova SoftBossa ChaCha 1 ChaCha 2 Rhumba 1 Rhumba 2 Rhumba 3 Rhumba 4

USER 1
44 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

LATIN 1
33 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47

Bank 2
Tango Stand.Tango Samba Beguine Salsa 1 Salsa 2 Cumbia 1 Cumbia 2

USER 2
44 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

LATIN 2
33 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55

Bank 1
Merengue 1 Merengue 2 Mambo 1 Mambo 2 DiscoSamba Disco Cha Meneito 1 Meneito 2

USER 3
44 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

LATIN 2
33 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63

Bank 2
El Tic Tac Makarena Caliente 1 Caliente 2 Limbo Gipsy Guaracha Calypso

USER 4
44 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 CC00 PC User Style-Perf. 40 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

On MIDI Common channel only

Tables A21

Performances (Real) Effects THE DEFAULT DISPLAY: SOUND VIEW PAGE This type of page shows the Sounds assigned to the CC00 PC Performances CC00 PC Performances CC16 DSP A/Btracks. select Sound View is the default viewing mode.
Group 1
48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

variations GrandPiano
E.Grand1 Rhodx1 FM Piano Vibes EP PadX OrcheXtra Church E.X.Tines PianoWarm SplitAhead RagIntime Synth2X TwiceSaw CPandPad StartTrack StayWithMe Ensemble TrumpetEns

A typical Sound View Sound pages showing slight Group 5 page appears in Style/RealTime 0 Eff1 (Reverbs mode GrpA) (other CC16 DSPView A/B select 1 and Eff1 (Reverbs GrpB) appear mode and Style Song recording modes). 48 in 33Song Mantovani 64 Eff2 (Mod. GrpA)
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Clarinet Ahnsemble Blatter LeroyBrown MezzoPiano MezzoForte SambaParis NotInLove 2010 CC Marsians Ole Devil BigBrass Runaway Mozart 40 Saxy Samba Strings1 Strings2 CC48 Rev Eff type select 48 0 1 2 8 9 10 16 32 40 41 48 56 57 64 65 72 73 80 88 Hall 1 Hall 2 65 48 Eff2 (Mod. GrpB) 0 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 33 40 41 48 49 56 57 36 37 Mono Delay 1 Mono Delay 2 Stereo Delay 1 Stereo Delay 2 Multitap Delay 1 Multitap Delay 2 Ping Pong Pan Mix Chorus 1 Chorus 2 Ensemble 1 Ensemble 2 Phaser 1 Phaser 2 Flanger 1 Flanger 2 Chorus Delay 1 Chorus Delay 2 CC48 Mod. Eff type select

Hall 3 Warm Hall Long Hall Chamber Studio Room 1 Studio Room 2 Studio Room 3 Club Room 1 Club Room2 Club Room3 Vocal Metal Vocal Plate 1 Plate 2 Church Mountains

g h c

St. Concert

Group 2
48 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Group 6
48 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

Last James

Group 3
48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Group 7
48 49 50 51

a. Track status icons . Select the tracks with89 the Falling Soft buttons A...H or with cursor / . 60 the Flanger Delay buttons 1 Titanic 52 Strings3 104 Early 1 61 Flanger Delay 2 b. Sound names.53The name of the Group to which the Sound belongs appears close to the Sound Iceberg Choir 105 Early 2 MSB, BankSelect 28LSB Dubbing ProgramChange, BankSelect numbers. Tracks which Hurts 2 be name, or (in order) 54 the Vocal Early 3 64 Distortion WK Time are not assigned 55 toSynthPad1 internal sounds show 106 a string of dashes (------) instead of the Sound name.
Dolce Vita

Group 4
48 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

If the track Group has been modified with Edit Perf Sound, appears the Sound name. P.Model the symbol 80 Pitch after Shifter 1 8 81 the Pitch Shifter 2 c. Menu or Function listn'Bass . Contains options which can be selected with Soft buttons F1...F8. In Buonasera1 48 57 Ham Shift Delay Style/RealTime58 mode the soft buttons are coupled (F1/F2, F3/F4, 82 F5/F6, F7/F8) and the menu Buonasera2 Swingin' 96 Rotary 1 FallinLove shows the options 59 to Soft Organ select: 97 Rotary 2 NoM'orGuns 60 (Full, PercusOrgan the track status Upp/Low, Multi). 104 EQ Jazz Europa 61 PrettySplt the Split Point. The keyboard area below the split point corresponds105 to the chord recognition zone EQ Pops San Tana 62 BluesSplit for the automatic accompaniment. 106 EQ Rock Don't Shoot 63 Jazz Split 107 EQ Classic d. Status bar showing general information. Ghostrider 64 HrmoncSplt e. Style and Performance name (Performance or Style-Performance, depending on whether SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is on or off). Song mode: Song and Song-Performance name. A Performance that has been modified but not saved with STORE PERFORMANCE is identified by the symbol []. A ROM Style with a modified Style-Performance is identified by the symbol [*]. f. Tempo (varied with the DIAL). g. Locator (measure and beat counter). In Style mode this parameter monitors the Style pattern (riff). h. Chord - the current recognized Chord symbol.

56

SynthPad2

112 Stereo

65

Distortion Delay

On MIDI Common channel only

A22 Appendix

The Display 15

Wavetables
PIANO MARTELLO AGOGO BABYVOX BD_ELECT1 BD_HOUS1 BD_HOUS2 BD_JAZZ BD_ROOM1 BD_STD_1 BD_STD_2 BD_STD_3 BD_TECNO BONG_SLH BONGO_HI BONGO_LO BRUS_REV BRUS_RIG BRUSHSLP BRUSHTAP CABASA CABASA_L CASTAGNT CHINA CLAKSON CLAVES CON_H_SL CON_L_SL CONGA_HI CONGA_LO COWBELL CRASH DARBK_HI DARBK_LO DOLLYVOX DROP FINGERSP GUIRO_LG GUIRO_SH HH_CLO1L HH_CLO1S HH_OPEN1 HH_PEDAL HH_TGHT1 HH_TGHT2 HOU_COWB HOU_TCON HOUS_RIM HOUS_SD1 HOUS_SD2 HOUSCLAP HOUSEHH HOUSRIDE JNG_BELL MARACAS MT_SURDO OP_SURDO QUICA_HI QUICA_LO RIDE_CUP RIDE_CYM RIMSHOT1 RIMSHOT2 ROLL_SN SD_ELECT SD_JAZZ1 SD_JAZZ2 SD_JAZZ3 SD_ORCH SD_ROOM1 SD_ROOM2 SD_STD1 SD_STD2 SD_STD3 SD_STD4 SMASH SPLASH STICK TAMB_SLP TAMBOURI TIMB_LOW TIMBALES TIMPANI TOM_ELEC TOM_HIGH TOM_JAZZ TOM_LOW TOM_ROOM TRIAN_LO TRIAN_SH VIBRASLP VOICES_1 VOICES_2 VOICES_3 VOX_HHCL VOX_TAP VOX_TIP WATER WHISTLE WIND_CHI WOODBLCK DIGIT1WV DIGIT2WV 1685DRAW EL_PIAN7 ORGAN_2W ORGAN_3W ORGAN_4W FROG_WV ORGAN_5W ORGAN_6W VIBES_2W E_PIANO4 E_PIANO5 FORMANT ORGAN_1W PIP_ORG3 SQUARE PULSE_O5 PULSE_10 PULSE_15 PULSE_20 PULSE_25 PULSE_30 PULSE_35 PULSE_40 PULSE_45 SAW SINUS SUPERSAW TRIANGLE TUB_WAVE ACCORDIO ACO_STR ARMONICA BARCHIME BOTTLE BRS_RIP CASSOTTO CHOIR CLARINET STEL_GTR CLAVINET BIRDS GUN_SHOT ELICOPT PHONE_1 PHONE_2 SCRATCH1 SCRATCH2 SEA TICKTACK ZAPP ELGTR_S2 FAGOTTO FLHARD_H FLHARD_L FLUGE_S2 FNKGSTOP SCRAP_GT HARP JAZZ_GT1 MUTE_TR1 SPECTR_1 NOISE OBOE OCT_JGT PANFLUTE PICKBASS SOFT_SAX SOPRANO TENORSAX PIZZICATO TROMBONE VOCALBOY STRINGS ACBASS_L ACBASS_H HARMACBS BAGPIPE ELBASS_H EL_BASS_L THUMBASS HARMELBS BASSLAP_H BASSLAP_L FRETLES FLUTE HARMGT_H HARMGT_L DIST_GTR JAZZ_GT2 GTR_KURZ ICE_RAIN KOTO OR_THEAT ORROCK_F SAX_BARI VOC-DUKN FLANGED BANJO KALIUMBA SHAMISEN SITAR GLOCKEN LPN_KNH ELPN_KNL FLICORNO GTR_MUTE ELPN_MKS RHODES_H RHODES_L TRUMPET VIBES XILOPHNO ACCORD2 BRASS VOCAL_DU VOCAL_BA FRHORN_H FRHORN_L ELPNKURZ A_MUSETT PLECTRA MANDOL PKBSMUTE 16_1DRAW ORJAZZ_S BD_ORCH FINGBELL CELLO HH_CLO2 HH_OPEN2 DOOR KITCHEN LOGDRUM CRAS_ORC KNELGT_L APPLAUSE HARPSI_S VIOLA VIOLIN FKG_G_WS GT_HARMO PIK_GRT1 PIK_GRT2 WHAWHA1 WHAWHA2 WHAWHA3 WHAWHA4 ORCH_HIT PIK_GTWS PIPE_S2 TROMBO_K ORG_PIP1 MARIMBA ORROCK_S MANDOL2 BD_POWER ACO_GTR2 STELGTR2 PIANO_H PIANOL2 BRASS_2 PIANO_D GRNDPLUS CP80_2 RHODX ELPNKURZ WUROLD FMPIANO1 CLAVINET VIBES RP_PIPE THEATORG ORGAN316 VOICESA ACOUSGTR ELECTBAS JAZZ_GT1 RP_2_STR CEMBALO CELESTA NEWPAD ACU_RIDE SWITCH FRETLES HARP STRATO STEL_GTR ORJAZZ_S OR_THEAT BARCHIME ICE_RAIN KPICK MARIMBA METRO MARTEL2 RHODX_L RHODX_H THEATR_L THEATR_H WUROLD_L WUROLD_H BASSFRET BASSPICK BASSCONT ARMONICI CLICK_BS REZOBASS BLEEP_BS DBASS HIT_BASS FINGBMS FRETW WEDGBASS SYNBASS TONE BOSMIC BRASS_T ABRASS BRASS_T ; ABRASS MARI_GM MARIM STRINGK ORCHIT CHOIRA KALI_GM

Tables A23

Wavetables THE DISPLAY

KALI GM_DIST ; CRUNCH STRATO CRUNCH MUTEDCGT GOFUNK FARFIS HAMDRAW HAMPERC HAMCLICK FISA GLASSES TELEPH PRPSAWJM TRIAN_JM CLVWAVJM PULSE_JM MINSAWJM MINPULJM DIGI1 DIGI2 SNAPSYN SEQ_TONE SQ_WOODY SQ_STICK INHARM1 INHARM2 INHARM5 INHARM9 MBIRA BOINK GRING THIN BUZ1 LFX_SYN SHARP SHAPE RDPHAS STRNNOIS SYNTH_7 12STRWAV MKS_80 BT_SYN FMISH SQ_STLDR BOSS

The display is theDIGI2 principal user interface communicates the status of the instrument at all times. FORM1 PRPSAWJM whichBD_KIK(1) SD_HEAVY4(2) PHONEWAVE(1)
FORM3 FARFIS PULSE_JM BD_ROCK(2) SD_P70(1) REVERSEBD1(1) FORM4 FINGBMS RDPHAS BD_Z1_HHC(2) SD_ROCK(2) REVERSEBD2(1) FORM5 FISA REZOBASS BD_Z1_LAYH(2) SD_SH1(1) REVERSEBD3(1) TRACK SCROLL BUTTONS PAGE (MENU) SCROLL BUTTONS FORM7 FMISH SEQ_TONE BD_Z1_LAYL(2) SD_SH2(1) REVERSHRT1(1) FV FORM1 SEQSNP BD_Z2(1) SD_SH3(1) REVERSHRT2(1) GLASVOX FORM3 SHAPE BD1(1) SD_STD1(1) REVERSHRT3(1) WAVE44 FORM4 SHARP BROKENOISE(2) SD_STD2(1) REVERSNAR1(1) AWALA FORM5 SNAPSYN DNC_BD1(1) SD_STD3(1) REVERSNAR2(1) PANCH FORM7 SPECT1 FALLING_BD(2) SD_STD4(1) REVERSNAR3(1) PPG2 FRETW SPECT3 LNG_BD1(1) SD1(2) REZO_IT(3) LOGSTRT FV SQ_COOK2 HOU_TOM(1) SD2(2) SCRATCH3(1) MARIMVOX GLASSES SQ_STICK HOUSETCON(1) SD3(2) SCRATCH4(1) MY_VOX GLASVOX SQ_STLDR TIMP_JM(1) TEKBRUSH(2) SCRATCH5(1) PAD_01 GM_DIST SQ_WOODY TIMPANI(1) 808_CL_HH(1) SCRATCH6(1) PAD_02 GOFUNK STRATO TOM_10_DYN(2) 808_OC_HH(1) WEEP(1) PLUCK_PD GRING STRINGK TOM_13_DYN(2) 808_OPHHLP(1) IMPACT HAMCLICK STRNNOIS TOM_14(1) 9091_CHH(1) SEQSNP HAMDRAW SYNBASS TOMHIGH2(2) 9091_OCHH(1) NEGATIVE HIGHLIGHT SOFT BUTTONS A SYNTH_7 H SPECT1 HAMPERC WAYAW(2) 9092_CHH(1) SOFT BUTTONS F1 F8 CURSOR SPECT3 HIT_BASS TELEPH 909_SD_LNG(2) 9092_OPHH(1) VOXNOIZ IMPACT THIN BEAT_SD(1) HH_CL1_DR(1) MECH_LP INHARM1 TONE BORDER_1(2) HH_CL2_DR(1) MECH_WAV INHARM2 TRIAN_JM BORDER_2(2) HH_LOOP_CL(1) SQ_COOK2 INHARM5 VOXNOIZ D_SD(1) HH_LOOP_OP(1) CURSOR ENTER/ESCAPE 12STRWAV INHARM9 WAVE44 EFF_RIM(1) HH_OP_DR(1) ARROWS AND DIAL ABRASS KALI WEDGBASS EFF_SD2(1) HH_PED_DR(1) The principal navigating controls are the CURABRASS1 KALI_GM ACOUST_KIK(1) HATORSNARE(2) HHCL_70(1) SOR ARROWS (directional arrows) and the prinARMONICI LFX_SYN BD_70_F(1) NOISNARE1(2) HHFT_70(1) cipal Data entry device is the DIAL. Secondary AWALA LOGSTRT BD_70_P(1) NOISNARE2(2) HHOP_70(1) navigating devices are the SOFT BUTTONS on BASSCONT MARI_GM BD_AC_1A(1) NOISNARE3(2) NOISE_C1HH(1) the left and right of the display, and the TRACK BASSFRET MARIM BD_AC_1B(1) NOISNARE4(2) NOISE_C2HH(1) SCROLL and PAGE (MENU) SCROLL ( ) BASSPICK MARIMVOX BD_AC_1DYN(1) RIM_1(1) NOISE_OPHH(1) buttons above theMBIRA Soft buttons. ABD_AC_2A(1) secondary data BLEEP_BS RIM_2(1) NOISE_OPRV(1) entry device is the numeric keypad (the EDIT/ BOINK MECH_LP BD_AC_2B(1) RIM_70(1) CRASH_18(1) NUMBER which enters absolute numBOSMIC section), MECH_WAV BD_AC_2DYN(1) ROLL_70(1) RIDE(1) bers when the KEYPAD LED is on. BOSS MINPULJM BD_DEEP_DN(2) ROLL_F(1) RIDECUP2(1) BRASS_T MINSAWJM BD_DMG_SD(2) ROLL_F_LN(2) CLAP(1) EDIT/NUMBER The displays cursor is a negative highlight zone BT_SYN MKS_80 BD_DMGD_LN(1) SD_909(1) CLAP_MIX(1) SECTION which can be moved by means of the cursor butBUZ1 MUTEDCGT BD_DN1_ZP(2) SD_BB(1) COWBL2(1) ENABLED FOR tons. The selected parameter can be modified CHOIRA MY_VOX BD_DN2_HI(2) SD_BR(1) DYNA_PERC(2) NUMERIC ENTRY with the DIAL or NUMERIC KEYPAD. ConfirmaWHEN THE CLICK_BS ORCHIT BD_DN2_ZP(2) SD_BR_DYN(2) DYTEK_TIMB(2) tion or cancellation of an operation within the disKEYPAD LED CLVWAVJM PAD_01 BD_DN3_HI(2) SD_F70(1) HARD_CLAP(1) play is with the ENTER or ESCAPE buttons.. SD_FSN(1) IS ON CRUNCH PAD_02 BD_DN3_SD(2) TOMLOW2(2) CRUNCH PANCH BD_DN3_ZP(2) SD_HEAVY1(2) Glasses(1) DBASS PLUCK_PD BD_DNC2_LN(1) SD_HEAVY2(2) GLASSALG(2) DIGI1 PPG2 BD_DNC3(1) SD_HEAVY3(2) LONG_REVRS(1)

NAVIGATION, DATA ENTRY, CONFIRMATION/CANCELLATION

A24 Appendix

The Display 13

MESSAGGI DI CONTROL CHANGE RICONOSCIUTI (MIDI CONTROLLER)

Il messaggio di ControlChange attiva un MIDI Controller, determinato del primo valore del ControlChange. Il ControlChange composta da tre parti:

CONTROL CHANGE SULLA TRACCIA

CC00,32 CC01 CC06,38 CC07 CC10 CC11 CC12 CC13 CC14 CC15 CC16,48 CC17,49 CC18,50 CC32 CC64 CC66 CC67 CC71 CC72 CC73 CC74 CC80 CC81 CC85 CC91 CC93 CC98,99 Bank change. Modulation. Data Entry. Main Volume. Pan (panorama). Expression. Vocal Volume (Vocal Processor) Vocal On/Off (Vocal Processor) Mode Recal (Vocal Processor) Voice Set recall (Vocal Processor) Effects selection Effects volume General Purpose (Tuning control) BankSelect LSB. Damper pedal. Sostenuto (sustain) pedal. Soft pedal. Resonance. Release Time. Attack Time. Filter Cutoff Frequency. One Shot control On/Off control Voice Mute mode (Vocal Processor) Effect 1 send (E1, reverb depth). Effect 2 send (E2, modulation depth). NRPN

status byte - (status) determina lo stato di messaggio di ControlChange. data byte 1 - (value 1) MIDI Controller attivato dal messaggio di ControlChange. il numero con cui sono identificati i ControlChange nelle tabelle seguenti. data byte 2 - (value 2) valore del MIDI Controller attivato.

CC100-101 RPN

= travels on MiIDI Common channel only

Tables A25

Chapter 1 Layout & Display

FRONT LAYOUT
1. Power On/Off Switch. 2. Speakers. 3. Sliders (M.Vol, Mic/Line, Drum, Bass, Acc1/ 3, Acc 4/6, Lower 2, Lower 1, Upper 2, Upper 1, [A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H]. 4. Arrange On/Off, Arrange Memory, Lower Memory, Arrange Mode, Tempo Lock, Mixer Lock, Bass to Lowest, Harmony On/Off 5. Effects Bypass, Solo, Single Touch Play, Store Perf. 6. 1/4 VGA Display (backlit), Track Scroll buttons, Page Select buttons, Soft buttons AH, F1F8. 7. Style Lock, Performance Groups, Style P. 8. Contrast, Undo, Help, D. Hold, Key Pad. 9. Sequencer: Record St./Song, <<, >>, Score, Song, Stop, Play, Style/Real Time. 10. Sound Groups. 11. Edit/Number: Effects, Midi, Mixer, Cnt/Pads, Tracks, Sound, St./Song, Synth, General,
Active sensing All Sound Off Reset All Contr. Local ON OFF All Note Off Clock Commands Song Position Song Select Tune True number 0-127 ***** o o o o o o o o o o o 0-127 Cntrl 81 OFF [0,63] ON[64,127] 0,1,2 Fill><-Fill<-Fill> 61 Rotary 1 (Off=slow) [GrpA] 62 Rotary 2 (Off=slow) [GrpB] o o o o o o o o o o o Start, Stop Continue 0-127 Aux Messages System Real Time Common System System Exclusive Program Change

Notes These messages are available on the Common channel only (1) Vocal Processor Controllers o: YES x: NO Mode 1 OMNI ON - POLY Mode 3 OMNI OFF - POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON - MONO Mode 4 OMNI OFF - MONO

Demo, Preload, Disk, Hard Disk LED. 12. Trackball (Pitch Bend, Modulation). 13. Headphones jacks (2). 14. Keyboard (C2-C7) - responds to note messages transmitted to MIDI IN for all notes from C1 - G9 (notes numbers 0 - 127). Using the Transpose function, the entire range C1 G9 can be covered on the keyboard. 15. Alphanumeric configuration - each note corresponds to a letter or number for use in name writing situations. 16. Style Groups. 17. Fade In/Out, Var 1, Var 2, Var 3, Var 4, Fill <, Fill ><, Fill >. 18. Start/Stop, Intro, Key Start, Ending. 19. Enter, Escape, Tempo/Data Dial. 20. Directional buttons (cursor arrows). 21. Pad 1, Pad 2, Pad 3, Pad 4. 22. Octave /+, Transpose b/#. 23. Disk Drive location.
93 98,99 100,101 Chorus depth NRPN RPN 93 Chorus depth (send) 98,99 NRPN 100,101 RPN

Cntrl 80 (ONE SHOT): 0 Fill>< 1 Fill< 2 Fill> 8 Intro 16 End 24-27 Variations 0-1-2-3 40 Key start 61 Rotary 1 slow/fast [GrpA] 62 Rotary 2 slow/fast [GrpB] 64 Start/Stop 66,67 Tempo inc. dec. 68,69 Perf inc. dec. 0 = Fill>< Off, 64 = Fill>< On 1 = Fill< Off, 65 = Fill< On 2 = Fill> Off, 66 = Fill> On 61 = Rotary 1 Slow, 125 = Rotary Fast 62 = Rotary 2 Slow, 126 = Rotary 2 Fast

8 9 10 11

12 13

14 15

16

17

18

19 20

21

22

23

A26 Appendix

Front and Rear panel 11

MIDI Implementation Chart

Manufacturer: Generalmusic S.p.A. FUNCTION Basic Channel Mode Default Messages Altered True voice Note ON Note OFF Keys Chs o 0,32 1 6,38 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 Bank change Modulation Data Entry Volume Pan Expression Contr. Vocal Volume (1) Vocal On/Off (1) Mode Recall (1) Voice Set Recall (1) x o o o o 0,32 1 6,38 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16,48 17,49 18,50 64 66 67 71 72 73 74 85 91 18,50 64 66 67 Tuning control Damper Pedal Sustain (Sostenuto) Soft pedal 85 91 Voice Mute Mode (1) Reverb depth Bank change Modulation Data Entry Volume Pan Expression Controller Vocal Volume (1) Vocal On/Off (1) Mode Recall (1) Voice Set Recall (1) Effects selection Effects volume Tuning control Damper Pedal Sustain (Sostenuto) Soft pedal Resonance Release time Attack time Filter 1 cut-off freq. Voice Mute Mode (1) Reverb depth (send) o o o o 0-127 ***** 0-127 Multimode X X Multimode X X Default Changed 1-16 1-16 1-16 1-16 Transmitted Recognized Model: WK6/WK8 Special Edition Remarks

2 MIDI IN; 2 THRU; 2 MIDI OUT EXTRA COMMON/CHORD CH.

Note Number Velocity After Touch Pitch Bender Control Change

true voice depends on selected sound

Bank change recognized on common channel, only in reception: Bank-Change P.change C#0 C#32 PC 32 0 0-95 Internal Styles 36 0 0-7 Int. Style Perfs 40 0 0-7 User Style Perfs 44 0 0-31 User Styles 48 0 0-63 Global Presets 55 0 0-15 Songs 64 0 0-7 Song-Presets C#16 DSP select 0 Eff1 Reverb GroupA 1 Eff1 Reverb Group B 64 Eff2 Mod. Group A 65 Eff2 Mod. Group B C#48 Eff Type select (See Effects charts for selection values of individual Eff types)

Version: 1.00

Tables A27

WK6/WK8 Special Edition System Exclusive Implementation

UNIVERSAL NON-REAL TIME SYSTEM MESSAGES
SAMPLE DUMP STANDARD

The transfer of data relating to the samples contained in the sounds of the instrument ias based on the standard protocol, called SDS (Sample Dump Standard). The formats of the various commands available are as follows:

Quick Guide
1 Panel and Display 2 Getting to know your instrument

ACK (handshake message):

F0 H 7E H cc 7F H pp F7 H = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status Non-Real Time extension device ID ACK ID packet number EOX

NACK (handshake message):

F0 H 7E H cc 7E H pp F7 H = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status Non-Real Time extension device ID NACK ID packet number EOX

CANCEL (handshake message):

F0 H 7E H cc 7D H pp F7 H = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status Non-Real Time extension device ID CANCEL ID packet number EOX

WAIT (handshake message):

F0 H 7E H cc 7C H pp F7 H = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status Non-Real Time extension device ID WAIT ID packet number EOX

DUMP HEADER:
F0 7E cc 01 ss ss ee ff ff ff gg gg gg hh hh hh ii ii ii jj F7 cc ss ss ee ff ff ff gg gg gg hh hh hh ii ii ii jj = device ID = Sample number (LSB first) = Sample format(# of significant bits from 8-28) = Sample period in nanoseconds (LSB first) Sample length in words (LSB first) Sustain loop start point word number (LSB first) = Sustain loop end point word number (LSB first) = Loop type (00=forward,01=backward/forward,7F=loop off)

= =

DUMP REQUEST:
F0 H 7E H cc 03 H ss ss F7 H = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status Non-Real Time extension device ID DUMP REQUEST ID Request sample (LSB first) EOX

DATA PACKET:
F0 H 7E H cc 02 H kk <120 bytes> ll F7 H = = = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status Non-Real Time extension device ID DATA PACKET ID running packet count (0-127) data (7 bit data format) checksum (XOR of 7E cc kk <120 bytes>) EOX

A28 Appendix

DEVICE INQUIRY
To be able to identify a MIDI device, the following two messages are utilized; the first used for the inquiry:

INQUIRY MESSAGE:
F0H 7EH cc 06H 01H F7H = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status Non-Real Time extension device ID INQUIRY ID Identity Request EOX

and the second for the device response:

RESPONSE MESSAGE:
F0 7E cc 06 02 mm ff ff dd dd ss ss ss ss F7 cc mm ff ff dd dd ss ss ss ss = = device ID = Manufactures Sistem Exclusive id code = Device family code (14 bits, LSB first) = Device family member code (14 bits, LSB first) Software revision (format device specific)

UNIVERSAL REAL TIME SYSTEM MESSAGES

DEVICE CONTROL
These messages are used to control the general functions of the system, without refering to a specific MIDI channel and, therefore, inserted in the context of the Universal messages.

Master Volume:
F0H 7FH cc 04H 01H vv vv F7H = = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status Real Time extension device ID Device Control ID Master Volume ID Volume (LSB first) EOX

SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES ADDRESS DATA INTERFACE

The MIDI System Exclusive capabilities of the WK Series instruments allow you to manipulate all parts of the instruments memory from a computer system. The following is a reference to the SysEx protocol used by the WK Series instruments. This Data Address Interface is based on two principal functions: SET and GET. SET is used to set the contents of some of the instruments resources while GET is used to withdraw them. At the reception of a GET message, the instrument replies with an appropriate SET message containing the values of the requested data and relative checksums.

GET SET
F0H 2FH 3cH 00H/ 01H id cf aa1:3 ss1:3 dd1 ddn cc F7H

status F0 F0

data 2F 3c 00 id aa1 aa2 aa3 ss1 ss2 ss3 cc 2F 3c 01 id cf aa1 aa2 aa3 dd1 ... ddn cc
= = = = = = = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC Command ID: 3 RealTime, c = Device ID (0-F) Get subfunction / Set subfunction Model ID, 00 = WK4 c = checksum (0:1), f = Data Format (0:4) 1 c=1 checksum present, c=0 absent; starting address code (MSB first) amount of required data bytes (MSB first) Data byte : first data byte to be sent Data byte : last data byte to be sent checksum ( optional ) EOX ( End Of Exclusive )

EOX F7 F7

EXTREMELY IMPORTANT: when parameters have positive values that exceed 127 (=7FH), always enter f=2 in the cf field of the SET stream and transform the data into nibble format as in the example: 134 = 0x86 becomes 0x08 0x06. N.B.: in the following address map, the undefined value xx that parameterizes some of the addresses is the number relating to the structure (typically track or note).

System Exclusive A29

EXAMPLES OF EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES AND CHECKSUM CALCULATIONS (relating to the structure of the Address Data Interface)

SOME USEFUL INFORMATION BEFORE STARTING

The battery is recharged while the instrument is turned on (not just plugged in!). F0 2F 36 01 00 00 00 13 00 02 F7 (1) (2) (3) When (4) (5) (6) address data off, (7) if the battery is at maximum charge level, the data in RAM is conthe instrument is turned (1)Exclusive Status served for about two weeks. The charge of the battery increases by one day for every hour the instru(2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC ment is + left on, the maximum level is reached. If the battery discharges, leave the instrument on for (3)Command ID(3=RealTime) device IDuntil (6=7 device ID) (4)Set Subfunction at least 15 hours to recharge it completely. (5)Model ID (0=WK4) To increase the efficiency of the rechargeable battery, repeat the complete recharging operation at least (6)c=0(No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) (7)EOX once a month. In most cases, normal use of the WK6/8SE will keep the battery charged.

<Example 1> : The setting for the 1st Effect Type of Group A on Hall 3 using the common channel 7, the format 0 (7 bit data value) and without checksum. THE RECHARGEABLE BATTERY According to the address map relating to the Performance Parameters -EFFECTS A the address is 00 13 00H (effctnr1) and the value relating to The WK6/8SE conserves is as follows: the data in RAM after turning off, thanks to a rechargeable battery. HALL3 is 02H; therefore the set streams

<Example 2> : The setting for the Attack of trackbased 11 to +13 common channel 2 (N.B. the 1st channel is 0 ), format 0 (7 bitpower data value) and with WARNINGSounds onusing sample RAM (RAM -Sounds) are conserved after down in the Backed checksum. Sample-RAM . According to the address map relating to Performance Parameters - T_SLIDER the address relating to track 11 (the first track is 0) is 0A 1C 00H (Attack) and the value to set is 4DH; therefore the set stream is as follows:

F0 2F 31 (1) (2) (3)

01 REMAINS 00 10 IN 0A 1C 00 AND 4D cc=?? F7 WHAT MEMORY WHAT IS CANCELLED (4) (5) (6) address data checksum (7)

(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC Stored after turning off (3)Command ID(3=RealTime) + device ID (1=2 device ID) (4)Set Subfunction Programmable (Real) Performances (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6)c=1(Yes checksum),f=0(7 bitStyle-Performances data value) Modified (7)EOX

Not stored after turning off

The checksum value is obtained with an XOR of all the bytes starting from the GeneralMusic ID (2FH) included; using ^ as the operator XOR ( OR Exclusive ), then: Songs cc=checksum = 2F ^ 31 ^ 01 ^ 00 ^ 10 ^ 0A ^ 1C ^ 00 ^ 4D = 54 Setup (general settings) the message to send is: RAM-Sounds (based on samples in ROM)
F0 2F 31 01 00 10 0A 1C 00 4D 54 F7 .

User Styles (User buttons)

RAM

-Sounds (based on samples in Backed S-RAM)

RAM

-Sounds (based on samples in Volatile S-RAM)

<Example 3> : Setting the M.Transpose to -6 using common channel 2, format 0 (7 bit data value) with and without checksum. Samples in Backed S-RAM Samples in Volatile S-RAM According to the address map relating to the Global Parameters - GLOBSET the address is 00 09 02H (transpose) and the value to set is 246=18=12H; therefore the set stream without checksum is as follows:

F0 (1)

01 status 00 of 00the 00 09 02 buttons 12 F7 The following also remain memorized: ARRANGE ON/OFF, ARRANGE MEMORY, (4) (5) (6) address data (7) LOWER MEMORY, TEMPO LOCK, MIXER LOCK, BASS TO LOWEST and the ARRANGE MODE (1)Exclusive Status settings.MUSIC (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL
(3)Command ID(3=RealTime) + device ID (1=2 device ID) (4)Set Subfunction (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6)c=0( No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) (7)EOX

2F 31 (2) (3)

with the checksum, the stream will be:

F0 2F 31 01 00 10 00 09 02 12 16 F7 .

<Example 4> : setting the parameter FltCutoff of the group AUDIOIN1 to 147 ( >127 ) on command channel 2 and format 2 ( data in nibble ) with and without checksum. According to the address map relating to Global Parameters - AUDIOIN1 the address is 00 0B 05H (FltCutoff) and the value to set in nibble format is, 09 03H; infact 147=93H, therefore the value is sliced in two nibbles 9 and 3 obtaining 09 03H; therefore the set stream without checksum is as follows:

F0 (1)

2F 31 (2) (3)

01 (4)

00 (5)

02 (6)

00 0B 05 address

09 03 F7 data (7)

(1)Exclusive Status

A30 Appendix

Introduction 5

(2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(3=RealTime) + device ID (1=2 device ID) (4)Set Subfunction (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6)c=0 ( No checksum), f=2 (nibble) (7)EOX

with the checksum, the stream will be: F0 2F 31 01 00 12 00 0B 05 09 03 09 F7 . <Example 5> : To know the value of the parameter HighGain of the Equalizer using common channel 9 and format 0 (7 bit data value). According to the address map relating to the Global Parameters - EQUALIZER the addrress is 00 00 01H (HighGain) and the size is 00 00 01H; therefore, the get stream is as follows:

F0 (1)

2F 38 (2) (3)

00 (4)

00 (5)

00 00 01 address

00 00 01 size

F7 (6)

(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(3=RealTime) + device ID (8=9 device ID) (4)Get Subfunction (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6) EOX

If, for example, the value of the parameter equals 1 dB, the instrument will respond with the appropriate Set stream containing the value requested and with the checksum; therefore, the stream returned will be: F0 2F 38 01 00 10 00 00 01 0D 0A F7.

REFERENCE TABLE
GLOBAL PARAMETERS MIXER EQUALIZER

Address(H)
00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 02 00 00 03

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 00 00 18 18 0C 0C

Parameter
LowGain HighGain LowFrequency HighFrequency

Description
-12 -> +12 [dB] -12 -> +12 [dB] 100 -> 400 [Hz] 3.0 -> 15.0 [KHz]

Default
0EH= 2dB 0DH= 1dB 2=150KHz 0 = 3KHz

SCORE CONTROL

Address(H)
00 01 00 00 01 01 00 01 02

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 00 04 03 15

Parameter
video_display lyrics_fonts view_mode

Description
2

Default

01 char size 00 (if video_display=3) monitor bkgrnd col 00

GENERAL CONTROLS

Address(H)
00 02 00 00 02 01

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
01 01 05 05

Parameter
dynamic a.touch

Description

Default
3=Medium 3=Medium

ARRANGE MODE

Address(H)
00 03 00 00 03 01 00 03 02 00 03 03 00 03 05 00 03 09 00 03 0B

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 03 00 00 00 15 01 02 04 04 01 01 6C

Parameter
FixCh_Mode ChordMode1 ChordMode2 ChordMode3 DynamArrg Autobacking Chord_split

Description
on/off Up/low-multi (Auto chord mode) Full keyboard (Auto chord mode) Fix chord mode on/off on/off

Default
01 01 03 01 00 01 3BH = 59

(GENERAL CONTROLS) FOOTSWITCH POLARITY

Address(H)
00 04 00

Size (H)
00 00 01

Range(H)
00 01

Parameter
Footswitch[1]

Description
0=Normally closed, 1=open

Default
0=NormClosd

System Exclusive A31

00 04 01 00 04 02

00 00 01 00 01 Footswitch[2] 0=Normally closed, 1=open TV, 0=NormClosd Automatic accompaniments (Styles) (monitor, domestic closed circuit video), it is 00 00 01 00 01 Footswitch[3] 0=Normally closed, 1=open 0=NormClosd also possible to display score and lyrics on a telThe internal ROM Styles provide automatic mu(GENERAL) DISPLAY CONTROLS evision (or other external video device). Lyrics sical accompaniments, consisting of 8 tracks. Address(H) Size (H) Range(H) Parameter Description Default can be projected onto 0=English a monitor during a perEvery Style has 4 Variations. Up to 32 disk based 00 05 00 00 00 01 00 01ChordLanguage 0 = English, 1 = Italiano formance to allow others to sing with the player. Styles programmable) can be loaded and0 = English, 00 05 01 00 00 (User 01 00 01Help_Language 1 = Italiano 0=English 00 05 02 00 00 01 00 01Display_Mode 1 = Negative 0=Positive automatically stored in the battery backed sys-0 = Positive Audio/Video card with Vocal Processor memory. Each Style can also be (GENERAL) tem NOTE TUNING/SCALE ( xx = NOTE = automati0 - 7F ) The Audio/Video card offers the possibility of Address(H) cally Size (H) Range(H) Parameter Default reconfigured by means of up to 8 associat-Description Mic/Line xx 06 00 00 00 01 00 7F coarse processing 0 -> 127 signals with the instruments ed Style Performances. xx 06 01 00 00 01 01 7F finetune -63 ->Processor +63; internal Effects and includes the Vo-

Flash Styles (GENERAL) TUNING/SCALE

00 07 00 00 07 01

cal Processor function to add vocal harmonies to

your performance. Address(H) WK6/8SE Size (H) contain Range(H) Parameter Default an additional set of StylesDescription
00 00 in 01 the User 01 Style 7FFlash memory Master_pitch 0 stored banks,-63 -> +63; Advanced MIDI operation & System Ex00 00 01 00 0D kbd_scale 0 -> +13 0=Equal reserved for factory use where the contents may clusive MIDI CLOCK vary from market to market. From time to time, WK6/8SE has two independent MIDI circuits (A Address(H) Size (H) Range(H) Parameter Description Default Generalmusic may operatingMidiClock systems whichInt/Ext and B), offering 00 08 00 00 00 01 00 offer 01 0=Internal up to 32 MIDI channels, with contain upgrades of the User Flash banks. MIDI-merge and MIDI-thru functions and System GLOBAL SET

Address(H) Disk Sizedrive (H)

00 09 02

Range(H) Parameter Description Exclusive communication. Default 00 00 01 be stored 00 on 30 transpose [semitones] 18H = 0 Data can 3.5" HD floppy disks, in-24 +24Direct connection with a computer MIDI GENERAL SET WK6/8SE expanded format (1.6 megabyte), The Computer jack permits Address(H) standard Size (H)MS-DOS Range(H) Parameter Defaultthe connection of (1.44 megabyte) or Atari ST/Description computers fitted with 00 0A 00 00 00 01 00 10 Common_ch 0=Off; 1->10 = channot 1->16 0a = MIDI Off interface to WK6/ Falcon format (720 WK6/8SE is able to in-1 = MidiIn 00 0A 01 00 00 01 01 Kb).02 Common_In A, via 2= MidiIn B serial cable. 1 = In A 8SE a single itialize for01 every format. ItCommon_Out is possible to1 = MidiOut A, 2= MidiOut B 00 0A 02 00 00 disks 01 02 1 = Out A SCSI port 00 0A 03 00 00 01 00 Styles 01 and Songs Midi_lock 1 = On load RAM-Sounds, from WK, 00 0A 04 00 00 01 00 01 Clock_Send 1 = Onis fitted with a SCSI For off-line storage, WK8SE WX2, Thanks Midi_Merge to the Sample00 0A 05 00 00SX2 01 floppy 00disks.01 0 = Off port, so you can store files on an external storRAM, it01 is also possible to load new samples from 00 0A 06 00 00 00 01 MidiInTran 0 = Off 00 0A 07 00 00 01 00 7F MidiFixedDyn 0 -> 127 0 = Off age device connected via the SCSI port (ZIP, disk (as RAM -Sounds). MS-DOS compatibil00 0A 08 00 00 01 00 01 Midi_sysex 0=Excl JAZ, System OFF, 1=ON 1 =This On also makes it posHard Disks, etc.). ity00 permits file exchange with other instru-0 = GMidi, 1 = smfformat 00 0A 09 00 01 MIDI00 01 SMF saveFrm 0=GMidi sible to load files from1 a CD-ROM drive. The ments 00 0A 0A 00 00 and 01 computers. 00 01 Bank_select WK6SE is predisposed for the installation of a (GENERAL) MIC/LINE INPUT 1 Hard disk SCSI interface by means of Generalmusics opAddress(H) WK8SE Size (H) Range(H) Parameter Description Default is fitted 00 with a 2.5 IDE orVolume E-IDE internal0 -> 127 tional SCSI kit, available from all authorised Gen00 0B 00 00 00 01 7F 7FH =127 Hard disk, WK6SE upgraded with 00 0B 01 00 00 01 while00 01can be EffGroup 0 eralmusic outlets. 00 0B 02 00optional 00 01 Generalmusic 00 7F Hard Disk Eff1Send 40H = 64 the installation0 -> 127 00 0B 03 00 00 01 00 7F Eff2Send 0 -> 127 40H system = 64 Up-dateable operating (OS) kit, available from authorized Generalmusic 00 0B 04 00 00 01 00 05 FltType 0 Since the operating system resides in a flashstores. 00 0B 05 00 00 01 00 BF FltCutoff 0 191, Use nibblized if > 127 0 ROM, it is possible to load updates from floppy 00 0B 06 00 00 01 00 7f FltResonance 0 -> 127 0 Hard Disk installed in the factory contain a vast 00 0B 07 00 00 01 00 3E Pan -31 -> +31 3EH = 31 disk. Operating system updates can add new assortment Sounds, 00 0B 08 00 00 01 of data 00 (Songs, 03 User Styles, AnalogOut 0 functions to the instrument. etc.). Disk contents, a bookletOn/Off 00 0B 09 00 00Refer 01 to the 00 Hard 01 Mic/Line 0 The Multitasking operating system allows you to suppliedINPUT with models of the instrument fitted with (GENERAL) MIC/LINE 2 execute several operations simultaneously, such Hard Address(H) the Size (H)Disk. Range(H) Parameter Description Default as modifying sounds while a song is playing, load00 0C 00 00 00 01 00 7F Volume 0 -> 127 7FH=127 Score view 00 00 0C 01 00 00 01 01 EffGroup 0 play, formatting a disk ing a song during song 00 0C 02 00 00 01 can00 7F score, Eff1Send 40H= 64 The display show the the lyrics and0 -> 127 while playing. 00 0C 03 00 00 01 00 7FBy connecting Eff2Send 40H= 64 chord symbols of a song. the Vid-0 -> 127 00 0C 04 00 00 01 00 05 FltType 0 eo video system0->191, Use nibblized if >127 0 00 0C 05 00(RGB-S/VHS) 00 01 00 interface BF to aFltCutoff
00 0C 06

00 00 01

00

7f

FltResonance

0 -> 127

A32 Appendix

Introduction 3

00 0C 07 00 0C 08 00 0C 09

00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

00 00 00

3E 03 01

Pan AnalogOut Mic/Line

-31 -> +31 On/Off

3EH= 31 0 0

MIDI_CHANNELS ( xx = CHANNEL3 = 0 - 1F )

Address(H)
xx 0D 00 xx 0D 01 xx 0D 02 xx 0D 03

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
01 01 01 01 02 10 02 10

Parameter
Midi_IN_Port Midi_IN_Ch Midi_OUT_Port Midi_OUT_Ch

Description
1 = MidiIn A, 2= MidiIn B 1->10 = channels 1->16 1 = MidiOut A, 2= MidiOut B 1->10 = channels 1->16

Default
1=In A 1=Out A

(GENERAL) PEDALBOARD/COMPUTER MODE

Address(H)
00 0E 00 00 0E 01 00 0E 02

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 00 03 03 01

Parameter

Description

Default

Computer Mode 0=Off, 1=Mac, 2=PC1, 3=PC3 0 = Off Pedalb. Mode 0=Off,1=Pdbass, 2=Pdchord, 3=MFun 0 = Off PcIfcPedB Mode switch 0

MIDI FILTERS IN ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F , Midi Lock ON )

Address(H)
xx 0F 00 xx 0F 01 xx 0F 02 xx 0F 03 xx 0F 04 xx 0F 05 xx 0F 06

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 64 64 64 64 64 64 64

Parameter
filter_1 filter_2 filter_3 filter_4 filter_5 filter_6 filter_7

Description
0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C)

Default
00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H

MIDI FILTERS OUT ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F , Midi Lock ON )

Address(H)
xx 10 00 xx 10 01 xx 10 02 xx 10 03 xx 10 04 xx 10 05 xx 10 06

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 64 64 64 64 64 64 64

Parameter
filter_1 filter_2 filter_3 filter_4 filter_5 filter_6 filter_7

Description
0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C)

Default
00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H

MIDI COMMON/ARRG NoteToArrang

Address(H)
00 11 00 00 11 01 00 11 02 00 11 03

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 00 00 10 01 10 01

Parameter
Chord Ch.1 IN_1 Chord Ch.2 IN_2

Description
0=Off, 1->10 = chans 1->16 0=Off, 1->10 = chans 1->16

Default
0 = Off 0 0 = Off 0

MIDI CTRL PADS ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )

Address(H)
xx 12 00 xx 12 01 xx 12 02 EFFECTS A

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 00 01 01 01

Parameter
ped_ftsw[1] ped_ftsw[2] ped_ftsw[3]

Description

Default
1 1 1

PRESET PARAMETERS

Address(H)
00 13 00 00 13 01 00 13 02 00 13 03 00 13 04 00 13 05 00 13 06 00 13 07 00 13 08

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 17 7F

Parameter
Eff_Type1 eff_vol1 par#1_1 par#2_1 par#3_1 Eff_Type2 eff_vol2 par#1_2 par#2_2

Description
0 -> 23 0 -> 127

Default
5=St.Concert 5AH = 90

00 00

1F 7F

0 -> 31 0 -> 127

9 = Chorus2 79H = 121

System Exclusive A33

00 13 09 00 13 0A EFFECTS B

00 00 01 Introduction 00 00 01 00

7F

par#3_2 Eff2ToEff1

0 -> 127

Thank you for purchasing the new GEM WK6 Special Edition and WK8 Special Edition World KeyAddress(H) board Size by (H)Generalmusic. Range(H) Parameter Description Default 00 14 00 00 00 01 00 17 Eff_Type1 0 -> 23 2= Hall3 These instruments provide high quality sounds and accompaniments, and a simple user interface with 00 14 01 00 00 01 00 7F eff_vol1 0 -> 127 37H = 55 a 00 graphic allows total control of all the performance and programming activi00 14 02 00 01 instrument display which par#1_1 00 14 03 00 00 01 par#2_1 ties.
00 14 04 00 14 05 00 14 06 00 14 07 00 14 08 00 14 09 00 14 0A 00 00 01 par#3_1 00 00 01 00 1F Eff_Type2 0 -> 31 0=MonoDelay1 00 00 01 00 7F eff_vol2 0 -> 127 79H = 121 00 00 01 par#1_2 POWER AND MULTIMEDIA FACILITIES 00 00 01 par#2_2 The instruments, WK6 SE and WK8 SE, incorporate a Flash-ROM memo00 new 00 01Special Edition Series par#3_2 00 01allows 00 7F Eff2ToEff1 0 -> 127with the latest 0 operational advantages and new ry00 which the instruments to be updated by disk

functions. The basic System, which features 24 Mbytes of ROM sounds, an advanced Edit TRACK SOUND ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - Operating 1F )
Address(H) Sound Size (H) function and Range(H) the Sample Translator Parameteris common Description to both versions, not toDefault mention the Audio Vocal
xx 15 00 xx 15 01 00 00 02 for vocal 0: 7F+0:F Soundnr Prog.Change(MSB) Bank(LSB) of incoming line/mic sigProcessor harmonizer possibilities as well as multi-effect+ processing 00 00 01 0 Ctrl32 no sound if no zero 0 nals. Both models incorporate Sample RAM (D-RAM) memory to increase the number of on-board MIDI CONFIGURATION ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F ) waveforms with samples from a wide range of choices (8 Megabyte for the WK8SE and 2 Megabyte for Address(H) Size (H) Range(H) Parameter Description Default the WK6SE). 00 xx 16 00 00 00 01 03 source Track source 4 5 Both models incorporate Floppy disk drive, while the WK8SE includes an on-board 2.5 xx 16 01 00 00 01 00 03an on-board destination Track destination xx 16 04 00 00 01 Disk and 01 SCSI 02 interface. Midi_In_Port 1 = MidiIn A, 2= MidiIn B with a Hard Disk and is also IDE Hard WK6SE can be easily upgraded xx 16 05 00 00 01 01 10 Midi_In-Ch 1->10 = channels 1->16 predisposed for 01 the installation of Midi_Our_Port a SCSI interface. the disk and xx 16 06 00 00 01 02 1 = Both MidiOut A,Hard 2= MidiOut B SCSI optionals are available as kits by Generalmusic xx 16 07 00 00 supplied 01 01 10 Midi_out-Ch 1->10 = channels 1->16 A=guitar player can to the audio inputs of the WK6/8SE Series instruments and play the chords COMMON ( xx CHANNEL =0 - 1Fconnect ) Address(H) which Size appear (H) Range(H) Parameter Description Default on a monitor connected to the instruments video outputs, and mix his sounds with those xx 17 00 00workstation 01 00 (complete 7F of00 the withvolume effects processing!). At the same time a group of singers can follow xx 17 01 00 00 01 00 78 transp -60 -> +60 3CH = 0 the a television (or other video projection device)ifby the WK6/8SE video interface. xx 17 02 00lyrics 00 02 projected 00 on 0300 delay 0 -> 768 Use nibblized > 127 0 xx 17 03 xx 17 04 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 07 01 dyn_resp m_transp 0 1

INTERNAL ( xx = CHANNEL 0 - 1F ) THE OWNERS=MANUAL xx 18 00 xx 18 01 xx 18 02 xx 18 03 xx 18 04 xx 18 05 xx 18 06 xx 18 07 xx 18 08 xx 18 09 xx 18 0A xx 18 0B

Address(H) The Size (H) Range(H) Description Default Owners Manual is supplied Parameter as a 3-ring binder with instructions inserted inside.

00 00 01 00 02 mode 0 00 00 01 00 01 m_priority Poly.Mono 0 00 00 00 7F -64 -> +63 40H = 0 HOW TO 01 USE THE OWNERS MANUAL detune 00 00 01 00 03 analog_out 0 To ensure trouble-free please read this manual carefully. 00 00 01 long, 00 01 operation, effect_group Selection effects group A or B The Owners Manual is sup00 00 01 vol_group_A Volume sent of eff. group A plied as a 3-ring00 binder 7F with instructions inserted inside. 00 00 01 00 7F vol_group_B Volume sent of eff. group B First, read the WK6/8SE which explains the functions of each 00 00 01 the Quick 00 Guide 3E chapter pan while operating -31 -> +31 3EH =31 button This will help you understand the basic operation of the instrument. Graphical 00 00 and 01 the display. 00 07 rand_pitch 0 00 00 01 are included 00 07 rand_pan 0 illustrations for a better understanding of the instrument. 00 00 01 01 0B Harmony 1 -> 11 1 Once you instruments basic functions, use the Reference Guide to discover all 00 00 01 are acquainted 00 0Cwith thePitchRange 0 -> 12 0

the potentials of your World Keyboard. MIDI IN FILTER ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - WK6/WK8SE 1F ) the end manual is the Appendix containing various tables, MIDI information and an index. Address(H) AtSize (H) of the Range(H) Parameter Description Default
xx 19 00 xx 19 01 xx 19 02 xx 19 03 xx 19 04 xx 19 05

00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

00 00 00 00 00 00

64 64 64 64 64 64

filter_in1 filter_in2 filter_in3 filter_in4 filter_in5 filter_in6

0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100

00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H

A34 Appendix

Introduction 1

xx 19 06

00 00 01

00

64

filter_in7

0 -> 100

00H

MIDI OUT FILTER ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )

Address(H)
xx 1A 00 xx 1A 01 xx 1A 02 xx 1A 03 xx 1A 04 xx 1A 05 xx 1A 06

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 64 64 64 64 64 64 64

Parameter
filter_out1 filter_out2 filter_out3 filter_out4 filter_out5 filter_out6 filter_out7

Description
0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100

Default
00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H

LOCAL ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )

Address(H)
xx 1B 00 xx 1B 01 xx 1B 02

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 00 01 01 01

Parameter
ped_ftsw[1] ped_ftsw[2] ped_ftsw[3]

Description

Default

SLIDER ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )

Address(H)
xx 1C 00 xx 1C 01 xx 1C 02 xx 1C 03 xx 1C 04 xx 1C 05 xx 1C 06 xx 1C 07 xx 1C 08

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 02

Range(H)
00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 0: 7F+0:F

Parameter
Attack Release Flt Cutoff Flt Resonance Decay LFO Depth LFO Rate LFO Delay Soundnr

Description
-64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 Prog.Change(MSB) + Bank(LSB)

Default
40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 40H = 0 0

DRUM KIT EDITING

LAYER1 SOUND PATCH ( xx = NOTE = 0 - 7F )

Address(H)
xx 1D 00 xx 1D 01 xx 1D 02 xx 1D 03 xx 1D 04 xx 1D 05 xx 1D 06 xx 1D 07 xx 1D 08 xx 1D 09

Size (H)
00 00 02 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
0: 7F+0:F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 03 00 7F 00 7F 00 04

Parameter
Soundnr Level Panorama Transpose Tune FltCutOff Exclude Effect 1 Effect 2 Analog Out

Description
Prog.Change(MSB) + Bank(LSB) 00 127 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 00 03 00 127 00 127 00 04

Default

DYNAMIC SWITCH

Address(H)
00 1E 00

Size (H)
00 00 01

Range(H)
00 7F

Parameter
DynSwitch

Description
00 127

Default

LAYER2 SOUND PATCH ( xx = NOTE = 0 - 7F )

Address(H)
xx 1F 00 xx 1F 01 xx 1F 02 xx 1F 03 xx 1F 04 xx 1F 05 xx 1F 06 xx 1F 07 xx 1F 08 xx 1F 09

Size (H)
00 00 02 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
0: 7F+0:F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 03 00 7F 00 7F 00 04

Parameter
Soundnr Level Panorama Transpose Tune FltCutOff Exclude Effect 1 Effect 2 Analog Out

Description
Prog.Change + Bank 00 127 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 -64 +63 00 03 00 127 00 127 00=track,1=L+R,2=O1+O2,3=O1,4=O2

Default

System Exclusive A35

TRACK SELECT

Address(H)
00 20 00

from Edit Style 5. 1F Escape Selected 00 13 31 The Edit Style options 5. 13 5. 13 SYSTEM OBJECT ACCESS Undo MESSAGES Style Name 5. 14 SYSTEM RESOURCE ACCESS Edit procedure 5. 14 Erase Messages relating to the RESOURCE ACCESS allow the transfer5. via15 MIDI of the same basic resources of the instrument that can be exported to Move 5. 16 disk, and which are: Copy 5. 16 System SETUP Quantize 5. 18 SOUNDS Insert Measures 5. 19 GLOBAL PRESETS Delete measures 5. 19 STYLE PRESETS USER STYLES Velocity 5. 20 SONGS Transpose 5. 21 Microscope 21 Each type of resource can constitute several files, in which case, before 5. transmitting, are compacted into a single data block.. Access to the Event Edit 5. 21 The transmission can take place in handshake mode for higher speeds and better control of the data transmitted (the system automatically recogMask 5. transmission 24 nizes the mode utilized according to the reply given or not after the of the File Header Message). Drum mask (F7/F8) 5. 24 The MIDI message transmitted consists of the following structure: 00 00 01 00
F0H 2FH 5cH ss id cf pp <data > cc F7H = = = = System Exclusive Message status LoadMUSIC songs to memory ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) 6 Song-Performances 6. = Subfunction ID Song playback 6. 1 = Model ID, 00 = WK4 Jukebox 6. 4 = c = checksum (0-1), f = Data Format (0-3) = (optional) = EOX packet number (optional)Midi

Size (H)

Edit Style 5. 13 Style menu 5. Description 13 Range(H) The Edit Parameter

Default

Song 6. 1

6. 1 1

Preload 6. 5 File Player 6. 7

Recording Songs 6. 9
checksum (optional) Subfunction ID:

The Quick Rec method 6. 9 The Record method 6. 10 Time/Tempo page 6. 11 Start 6. File 12Header 01H Time Signature File Data 6. 12 Tempo 6. 12 Resource Request 03H QuantizeParametr 6. 13Request Parameter Data Restoring the Songs memory 6. 13
ACK

02H 40H 41H 7 7FH 7EH 7DH 7CH

Edit Song 6.NACK 14

CANCEL The Edit Song Menu 6. 14 WAITEdit Song 6. 14 Escape from Edit Song options 6. 14 message) to indentify the successve blocks of data The transmission of one of the available resources startsThe by sending a message (File Header Undo 6. 14 desired (File Data message). Edit Score 6. 14 Typically the files concerned can be relatively long, therefore it is better to subdevide the information into several brief packets which can be Song Name 6. 15 individually tested and eventually retransmitted (in the case of using the handshake mode and the reception of an ACK reply confirms the correctEdit procedure 6. 15 of the error packet). ness of the packet received, while a reply of the type NACK forces the retransmission Erase possible 6. 16 to send the CANCEL command at any moment during the course of the Should it be necessar to interrupt the transmissoin, it is always Move 6. 18 communication. Copy mode 6. 19 A WAIT command has also beed included for future implementations. Quantize 6. 21 Insert measures 6. 23 File Header message: Delete measures 6. 24 F0H = System Exclusive Message status Velocity 6. 25 2FH = ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC Transpose 5cH = Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F)6. 26 01 H = Subfunction ID = FILE HEADER Microscope 6. 00 = Model ID, 00 = WK4 Accessing the Event Edit Mode 6. 30 03 H = not checksum, format 3 (octect) Master Track 6. 30 8 <data > F7H = = 3 octects EOX

Score & Edit Score 6. 33

File Data message:

F0H 2FH 5cH = = =

The Score track 6. 33 The SCORE button 6. 33 System Exclusive Message status Score Controls 6. 33 ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC Video controls 6. 34 Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F)6. 35 Edit Score

A36 Appendix

Contents v

02H 00 13H pp <data > cc F7H

= = = = = = =

Subfunction ID = FILE DATA Model ID, 00 = WK4 checksum, format 3 (octect) packet number (00:7fH) 15 octects checksum EOX

Resource Request message:

F0H 2FH 5cH 03H 00 00 tt ss F7H = = = = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status Manufacturer ID = GENERAL MUSIC Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) Subfunction ID = RESOURCE REQUEST Model ID, 00 = WK4 not checksum, format 0 Resourse ID all files(0), selected(>0) 9 EOX System SETUP SOUNDS GLOBAL PRESETS STYLE PRESETS USER STYLES SONGS 0 1 2 3 4 5

Resource ID:

ACK message:
F0H 2FH 5cH 7FH 00 00 pp F7H = = = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) Subfunction ID = ACK Model ID, 00 = WK4 not checksum, format 0 packet number (00:7fH) EOX

NACK message:
F0H 2FH 5cH 7EH 00 00 pp F7H = = = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) Subfunction ID = NACK Model ID, 00 = WK4 not checksum, format 0 packet number (00:7fH) EOX

CANCEL message:
F0H 2FH 5cH 7DH 00 00 pp F7H = = = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) Subfunction ID = CANCEL Model ID, 00 = WK4 not checksum, format 0 packet number (00:7fH) EOX

WAIT message:
F0H 2FH 5cH 7CH 00 00 pp F7H = = = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) Subfunction ID = WAIT Model ID, 00 = WK4 not checksum, format 0 packet number (00:7fH) EOX

System Exclusive A37

EXAMPLES of Resource Request message compositions Performances <Example 1> : System Setup request:

3. 1

F0 (1)

2F 50 (2) (3)

03 (4)

00 (5)

00 (6)

00 (7)

(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(5=RESOURCE ACCESS) + device ID (0=1 device ID) MIDI 3. 5 (4)Subfunction ID (3=RESOURCE REQUEST) (5)Model ID (0=WK4) MIDI Channels 3. 5 (6)c=0(No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) Configuration 3. 5 (7)Resource ID (0=Setup ) MIDI Filters 3. 6 (8)not used for Setup Req General settings 3. 6 (7)EOX

Selecting the Performances 3. 1 Real Time panel operations 3. 1 00 F7 Arrange On/Off 3. 2 (8) (9) 3. 2 Style Lock Multi Track List 3. 3 Programming the Performances 3. 3

<Example 2> : System Sound request:

F0 (1)

2F 50 (2) (3)

03 (4)

00 (5)

00 (6)

01 (7)

Common Channel/Arrangement 3. 8 MIDI Dump... 3. 9 Local On, 00 F7 Local Off 3. 10 MIDI Lock (8) (9) 3. 10

(1)Exclusive Status Volume 3. 10 (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(5=RESOURCE ACCESS) + device ID (0=1 Pan device 3. ID) 10 (4)Subfunction ID (3=RESOURCE REQUEST) Random pan 3. 11 (5)Model ID (0=WK4) Audio Out 3. 11 (6)c=0(No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) 3D Effect (F5) 3. 11 (7)Resource ID (1=Sound ) (8)Selected ( 00 = All files) Effects 3. 12 (7)EOX

Mixer 3. 10

Effects type 3. 12

<Example 3> : Request for the 3rd Song in the System: Group A 3. 12

F0 (1)

2F 50 (2) (3)

03 (4)

00 (5)

00 (6)

05 (7)

(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC 3. 15 (3)Command ID(5=RESOURCE ACCESS) + device ID Controllers/Pads (0=1 device ID) (4)Subfunction ID (3=RESOURCE REQUEST) Trackball 3. 15 (5)Model ID (0=WK4) Pedals programming 3. 15 (6)c=0(No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) Pedals assignment 3. 16 (7)Resource ID (5=Song ) The continuous pedal Functions 3. (8)Selected ( 3 = 3^ file selezionato ) The switch pedal Functions 3. 17 (7)EOX

Group B 3. 13 03 F7 3. 13 Send Level (8) (9) General Eff1 Balance 3. 13 Effects Programming 3. 13

16

Pads 3. 18

Ped./Pad Lock 3. 18 DEVICE PARAMETER ACCESS

Messages relating to the DEVICE PARAMETERS ACCESS allows access specific information relating to the instrument; the protocol invludes the Transpose 3. to 19 transmission of a request message which will be followed by the eventual reply.

Tracks/Split 3. 19

Master transpose enable/disable 3. 19 Detune 3. 19 Parameter Request message: Random pitch 3. 19 F0H = System Exclusive Message status Touch Sensitivity 3. 19 2FH = Manufacturer ID = GENERAL MUSICMode/Priority 3. 20 5cH = Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) Velocity curve 3. 20 40 H = Subfunction ID = PARAMETER REQUEST Velocity range 3. 20 00 = Model ID, 00 = WK4 Harmony 3. 21 00 = not checksum, format 0 Harmony type 3. 21 tt = Parameter ID Harmony Type structures 3. 21 bs = Bank Select ps = PrChange Select (only for SOUND) Delay 3. 22 F7H = EOX Key range 3. 22 Create track 3. 22 Parameter ID : STATUS of the system Copy track 3. 22 SOUND Name Erase track 3. 23GLOB PRST. Name

Store Performance 3.STYLE 23 PRST. Name USER STYLE Name

Saving to the current Performance 3. 23 SONG Name To save to a different Performance 3. 24

0 1 2 3 4 5

A38 Appendix

Contents iii

Parameter Data message:

F0H 2FH 5cH 41H 00 cf pp <data > cc F7H = = = = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERALMUSIC Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) Subfunction ID = PARAMETER DATA Model ID, 00 = WK4 checksum=1, format (5 per Status, 0 altrimenti) packet number (00:7fH) checksum EOX

The data sent refer to the structure as described below.

bytes 1 1 1 1 4 4 4 4 4 4

Status Data. The data relates to the parameters contained in the following fields (the quantities of memory are expressed in Kbyte):
rel.addr. 0 1 2 3 4 8 12 16 20 24 name iClass iSubClass iRelease instrument peripherals totalSysRam freeSysRam totalBackedRam freeBackedRam totalVolRam freeVolRam 1 S2 MK88 WS400 2 S3 WS2 description see classification in Tab.1 see classification in Tab.1 release HD=b1, AV=b0 Total System Memory Freee System memory Backed Sample Ram Memory Free Backed Sample Ram Memory Total Volatile Sample Ram Memory Free Volatile Sample Ram Memory 3 S2 Box WS1 RPro1 4 SK76 WX2 RPro2 5 SK88 6 7 8

iClass / iSubClass 1 - Synth Expander 2 - Masterkeyboards 3 - Keyboards 4 - Pianos 5 - Home Organs 6 - Classic Organs 7 - Accessories

WX2Box CD RPprox Ps2500

WX400 PS1500

WK4

SX2

SX3

WK3

AS-1

(TAB.1)
Parameter Data. In this case the streams relating to the parameter names requested are returned and all the data is identifed by the following 16 bytes:
0 Parameter ID 1 2 3-15 Bank SelectPerf Select Parameter Name (13 char Max)

The parameters bs (bank select) and ps (prChange select) contained in the request vary according to the parameter as in Tab.2, taking into accound that the request will have effectively followed only in the case in which what has been requested is actually present in the system; to be able to request all the values available for a given parameter, it is sufficient to send the values bs=00 e ps=00.
Bank Select Range PrCh Select Range 00 00 STATUS 1 - 16 1 - 128 SOUND REAL PERF. 1-8 1 - 96 not used (nu) nu STYLE 1 - 16 nu SONG

(Tab.2)

APPENDIX A
DATA FORMAT
The messages used to control the system exclusives accept data in the following formats: format =0 (7 bit data value): the natural data format with values from 0 to 127. Does not require any form of treatment. format =1 (7 bit wide word LSB_J): the value of the data present in the stream has a range defined by the number of bytes transmitted. For example, to transmit the hexadecimal value F123 (61731 decimal) three bytes configured as follows are required: 03 62 23. This format is useful to transmit single data (byte, short, int, long, float, double) which do not fall within the range 0-127. format =2 (nibble): single byyes contain only 4 significant bits but which can represent much greater values. for example, to transmit the hexadecimal value F123 (61731 decimal) would require four bytes configured as: 0F 01 02 03; i practice, each single byte is sliced in two and transmitted on two bytes with the four most significant bits at 0. format =3 (octect): the bytes are groups in sets of 8 Bytes with 7 significant bits to represent 7 real bytes in 8 MIDI bytes (56 bit). This format allows, therefore, to achieve maximum compactness of the data to transmit in cases of data consisting of a large number of bytes whose priory value is not known.

System Exclusive A39

The procedure is as follows: from each bytes of the 7 in sequence, the least significan bit is extracted and saved in an eighth byte, therefore the same byte is shifted to the right; finally all is transmitted in the order. For example:

Contents
QUICK GUIDE
0x11 = 0x09 + 1 (b0) 0x22 = 0x11 + 0 (b1) 0x33 = 0x1A + 1 (b2) 0x44 = 0x22 + 0 (b3) 0x55 = 0x2B + 1 (b4) 0x66 = 0x33 + 0 (b5) 0x77 = 0x3C + 1 (b6)

7 real bytes = 0x11 0x22 0x33 0x44 0x55 0x66 0x77 Introduction Intro. 1 then shifting to the right and memorizing in a byte the extracted bits:
8 byte:

Layout 0x01& Display 1. 1

0x05 Front panel 1. 1 0x05 Back panel (connections) 1. 2 0x15 The display 1. 3 0x15 Navigation, Data Entry, Confirmation/cancellation 0x55

0x01

1. 3

8 byte Midi = 0x09 0x11 0x1A 0x22 0x2B 0x33 0x3C 0x55.

Alphanumeric entry 1. 4

Getting to know your instrument 1. 9

format =4 (nibble data dump): the single bytes containing only 4the significant bits to be able represent any data stream. For example, the stream Adjust general volume 1.to9 ciao corresponds to the ASCII data 0x63 0x69 0x61 0x6fPower and will,up therefore, 1. 9 be represented by the following bytes: 0x06 0x03 0x06 0x09 0x06 0x01 0x06 0x0f. Play with headphones 1. 10

Playin with pedals 1. 10 format =5 (BCD data dump): the single bytes are subdivided two the nibbles and subsequently converted in BCD; this is a format particularly useful Play with Trackball 1. 110x12345678 corresponds to the ASCII data 0x12 0x34 with numerical data which does not permit direct visualization. For the example, the number Play the Programmable Pads 1. 11 0x56 0x78 which subdevided in nibbles give: Select sounds 1. 12 Change Sound Bank 1. 13 Play on a split keyboard 1. 13 which when conve rted in BCD give: Return to full keyboard playing 1. 14 0x31 0x32 0x33 0x34 0x35 0x36 0x37 0x38 Play up to 8 sounds at the same time (Multi) 1. 15 Using the Keypad to Select 1. 16 which when shown on the terminal gives the stream 12345678 , representing the initial Sounds data. Adjust the sound volumes separately (balancing) 1. 17 Observations: The SOLO button - Isolate a single sound from the rest 1. format 18 with which the The Set function of the System Exclusive is able to automatically identify the amount of the field to update, regardless of the Listen to the Demo Songs 1. 19 data is sent with the following exceptions: Multimedia 1. 21 the format 0 always modifies a bytes relating to the addres of theloading variable of to update, for example, Automatic Songs therefore, at power if up 1. 22 we want to modify with format 0 a variable of 32 bits of the current value equalling 0x12345678 (hexadecimal value), after sending the data 7F we will obtain the variable updated To display lyrics on an external monitor 1.0x 23 to the value 0x7F345678. The correct method to update Play a variable a Accompaniment value greate than 7Styles bit (correspnding with with Auto 1. 24 to the decimal value 127) is to use the format 1 or 2; in the way, to update a 16 bit variable to the hexadecimal value 0x1234 you can send: Start a Style with Key Start 1. 27 Start Style with Tap Tempo 1. 28 format 1: 0x24 0x34 (2 data a bytes) format 2: 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 (4 data and bytes). Start stop a Style with Fade In/Out 1. 28 Select a Style without changing the keyboard sounds 1. 28 the formats 4 and 5 do not consider the limits accepted by the filed in memory for which case should be taken not to send a numder of data Select and play the Flash memory User Styles 1. 29 higher than the accepted limit. Select a Style Performance 1. 30 Select the Performances 1. 31 APPENDIX B Saving to the same Performance 1. 33 Store Performance 1. 33 Creation of RESOURCE ACCESS files. Saving to a different Performance 1. 34 To control the resources via system exclusive (RESOURCE ACCESS)the makes use of the solution of packaging Transpose instrument up or down 1. 35 the various files which constitute the same resource into a single buffer. To clear the keyboard transpose setting 1. 35 Generally, therefre, we would have the following situation: Transposition 1. 35 Transposing tracks by octaves 1. 36 Resource File = FILE.000 To clear the Track Octave setting 1. 36 FILE.001 FILE.002 Bypass the effects 1. 37 ... the effects 1. 37 To activate Play with FILE.00n Effects or bypass them 1. 37 Using the Midi File Player 1. 38 for a total of (n+2) files (with n which can also be 0). Loading data into RAM memory 1. 40 Each file can be identified by a set of three numbers which represente their own description: Quick Rec Recording 1. 42 File ID = (Resource Record atype Song (Quick ID) rec.) 1. 42 bank (0xFF if not exist) Song 1. 44 Play along with your recorded perf (0xFF if not exist) Save your programmed data to disk or Hard Disk 1. 45
0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08

This document wants to indicate how to identify the files concerned for each resource to be accessed, how to operate to manipulate these files and, finally, the effective transmission mode.

A40 Appendix

Contents i

Types of Resources
The resources can be classified as follows:
Resource ID: system SETUP SOUNDS GLOBAL PRESETS STYLE PRESETS USER STYLES SONGS 0 1 2 3 4 5

for each of which concern various files For each of the resourcces available, it is possible to send a command requesting all the resources which make up the part of that groups (all the SOUNDS, all the SONGS, ...), or, it is possible to refer to a single resource of the currently selected group (send the selected SONG, the selected STYLE, ...). Referring to the Resource Request Message command detailed above, setting the value of 0 in the field ss we will obtain all the resources, while specifying a number greater than 0 we will obtain the transmission of the single resource required. for each group of rerouces the possible selection values are the following:
Resourse ID SOUNDS GLOBAL PRESETS STYLE PRESETS USER STYLES SONGS Max Select Number 16 8 96 32 16

Creation of the Resource File

To create the Resource File it is necessary to write for each single file of a chunk consisting of a desription of the file and of the data that consistutes the file; the format of each chunk is the following:
bytes 4 4 1 1 1 1 20 len-28 rel.addr. 0 4 8 9 10 11 12 32 name chunck id chunck len file type file bank file perf not used F_HEAD < data > description data es.: 3010

see under byte data

therefore the Resource File can be represented as: data len0 ... < data > for FILE.000 data len1 = len0+4 ... < data > for FILE.001 data len2= len0+len1+8 ... < data > for FILE.002 data len3= len0+len1+len2+12 ... < data > for FILE.003 data len_n = S[len(i)] + 4*n ... < data > for FILE.00n To calculate the totale length of the Resource File it is sufficient sum of the lengths of each file (Li) with the length of each single header chunk (32 bytes):
Resource File Length = S[Li] + n*32;

The variable F_HEADER present refers to the internal structure of how the file is effectively memorized within the system; to identify it we refer directly to the stuctures C used internally:
union TIME_INF { struct part { unsigned short hour : 5; unsigned short min : 6; unsigned short sec : 5; }; ushort time; }; // total 2 bytes

union DATE_INF { struct part { unsigned short year : 7; unsigned short month : 4; unsigned short day : 5;

System Exclusive A41

}; total 2 bytes FEDERAL //COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION struct F_HEAD { unsigned char name[8],ext[3],flags; // 12 TIME_INF time; // and 2 Note : This equipment has been tested found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant DATE_INF date; // 2 to Part 15 of FCC Rules. long length; These limits are designed // 4 to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference }; a residential installation. This equipment generates, // total 20 bytes in uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not ushort date; };

installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. For completion, the description of the file inside the HEADER.hdr refers instead to a more complex stucture:
struct F_HEADER { cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the instrument F_HEAD f; charand on, name[16]; off the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: long offset; };

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this instrument does

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. - Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Before sending the Resource File, a Resource Header is sent which describes the entire Data File which is then sent. The Format of the file is the - Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. following: - Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Creation of the Resource Header
bytes 1 1 4 15 rel.addr. 0 1 2 6 name resource type nfile CAUTION : len name

description Resource ID number of file Changes or modifications to resource this product not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void total length of the effective binary file of the complete structure associated to the file the name users authority to operate this product.

for a total length of files equal to 21 bytes.

A42 Appendix

APPENDIX C
MIDI FILTERS conversion table
N. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Description Filter off Prg. change Pitch Mono touch Poly touch 0 Bank sel 1 Modulation 2 Breath cnt. 3 Undef. cnt. 4 Foot cnt. 5 Portamento time 6 Data en. MSB 7 Main vol. 8 Balance 9 Undef. cnt. 10 Panorama 11 Expression 12 Control 1 13 Control 2 14 Undef. cnt. 15 Undef. cnt. 16 Gen. purp. c.1 17 Gen. purp. c.2 18 Gen. purp. c.3 19 Gen. purp. c.4 20 Undef. cnt. 21 Undef. cnt. 22 Undef. cnt. 23 Undef. cnt. 24 Undef. cnt. 25 Undef. cnt. 26 Undef. cnt. 27 Undef. cnt. 28 Undef. cnt. 29 Undef. cnt. 30 Undef. cnt. 31 Undef. cnt. 64 Damper ped. 65 Portamento 66 Sostenuto 67 Soft pedal 68 Legato foot 69 Hold 2 70 S.C. (Sn.v.) 71 S.C. (Res.) 72 S.C. (Rel.) 73 S.C. (Att.) 74 S.C. (Cut.) 75 S.C. (Undef.) 76 S.C. (Undef.) N. 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 Description 77 S.C. (Undef.) 78 S.C. (Undef.) 79 S.C. (Undef.) 80 Gen. purp. c.5 81 Gen. purp. c.6 82 Gen. purp. c.7 83 Gen. purp. c.8 84 Portam. cnt. 85 Undef. cnt. 86 Undef. cnt. 87 Undef. cnt. 88 Undef. cnt. 89 Undef. cnt. 90 Undef. cnt. 91 Eff. 1 (Rev.) 92 Eff. 2 93 Eff. 3 (Chor.) 94 Eff. 4 95 Eff. 5 96 Data incr. 97 Data decr. 98 NRPN LSB 99 NRPN MSB 100 RPN LSB 101 RPN MSB 103 Undef. cnt. 104 Undef. cnt. 105 Undef. cnt. 106 Undef. cnt. 107 Undef. cnt. 108 Undef. cnt. 109 Undef. cnt. 110 Undef. cnt. 111 Undef. cnt. 112 Undef. cnt. 113 Undef. cnt. 114 Undef. cnt. 115 Undef. cnt. 116 Undef. cnt. 117 Undef. cnt. 118 Undef. cnt. 119 Undef. cnt. 119 Undef. cnt. 120 All snd. off 121 Reset all c. 122 Local cnt. 123 All note off 124 Omni m. off 125 Omni m. on 126 Mono m. on 127 Poly m. on

see Appendix A on Data Format 0=Echo LCD, 1=All, 2=All on 2 lines, 3=Lyric only, 4=Chord only 3 The values 00H-0FH relatve to the Midi Port-A and 10H-1FH to Port-B 4 00=No Midi, No Keyboard, 1=only Keyboard, 2=only Midi, 3=Midi & Keyboard 5 00=N0 Midi, No Generation, 1=only Generation, 2=only Midi, 3=Midi & Generation 6 see Appendix A on Data Format 7 see paragraph Device Parameter Access 8 Infact the Resource File Header is composed of 21 byte (see Appendix B) 9 See Appendix B regarding the composition of the various resources available 10 28 + byte data number
2

System Exclusive A43

Owners manual
271316

A44 Appendix

English

Index
A
Adjust the sound volumes separately 1. 17 Advanced Edit Sound 2. 13 Algorithms, Edit Sound 2. 16 Amplitude Envelope 2. 23 Amplitude Envelope Tracking 2. 26 Arrange On/Off 1. 24 Arrange On/Off, Performances 3. 2 Assigning samples, Sample Translator 2. 48 Attack, Edit Performance sound 2. 5 Autoload 1. 22

Erase track, Edit Performance 3. 23 Escape Edit Sound, temoprary 2. 14 Exclude, Edit Sound Patch 2. 9 Exit Edit Sound 2. 14 Expand, Edit Sound Patch 2. 10 Export sample, Sample Translator 2. 53

F
Fade In/Out 1. 28 Features Intro. 2 Fill In 1. 26 Filter Control, Edit Sound 2. 29 Filter Cutoff, Edit Performance sound 2. 6 Filter Cutoff Tracking 2. 30 Filter, Edit Sound 2. 29 Filter Envelope Tracking 2. 31 Filters connected in parallel 2. 29 Filters connected in series 2. 29 Flash Styles 1. 29 Front Panel 1. 1 Full keyboard playing 1. 14

B
Balance (Edit Sound) 2. 21 Balance Envelope 2. 23 Balance Envelope, Edit Sound 2. 26 Balance Envelope Tracking 2. 28 Balance Tracking 2. 21 balancing 1. 17

H
Hardcopy (Pads) 3. 18 Harmony 3. 21 Harmony type 3. 21 Headphones 1. 10

C
Cancelling assignments, Sample Translator 2. 50 Cancelling samples, Sample Translator 2. 50 Catch note, Edit Sound Patch 2. 10 CC#0 (ControlChange) 3. 18 CC#32 (ControlChange) 3. 18 Channel A effects 3. 12 Channel B effects 3. 12 Common Channel, Edit Performance 3. 5 Common channel, Edit Performance 3. 8 Compare, Edit Sound Patch 2. 11 Continuous Control Pedals 3. 15 Controllers, Edit Performance 3. 15 Copy track, Edit Performance 3. 22 Create track, Edit Performance 3. 22 Cutoff Frequency, Edit Sound 2. 29

I
Important Preliminary Notes Intro. 4 Isolate a single sound 1. 18

K
Key Assign 3. 18 Key On/Key Off Amp. Envelopes 2. 24 Key On/Key Off Balance envelope 2. 27 Key On/Key Off Envelope programming example 2. 25 Key On/Key Off Filter Envelope 2. 31 Key On/Key Off Pan Envelope 2. 37 Key On/Key Off Pitch Envelope 2. 33 Key range, Edit Performance 3. 22 Key Start 1. 27 Key-play 1. 7

D
Decay, Edit Performance sound 2. 5 Delay, Edit Performance 3. 22 Delay/Modulation 3. 12 Detune, Edit Performance 3. 19 Dialog windows 1. 8 Display Hold 1. 12, 1. 31, 2. 2 Drum Kit editing 2. 8 Drum Kits 2. 1 Dynamic layer, Edit Sound Patch 2. 8 Dynamic switch 2. 9

L
Layer dynamic range, Edit Sound 2. 38 Layer key range, Edit Sound 2. 38 Layers, Edit Sound 2. 15 LFO, Edit Performance sound 2. 6 LFO, Edit Sound 2. 34 Loading data into RAM 1. 40 Loading samples, Sample Translator 2. 46 Local ON, Local Off, Edit Performance 3. 10 Low Frequency Oscillator 2. 34 Lyrics on an external monitor 1. 23 Lyrics on display 1. 21

E
Edit Menu, Performances programming 3. 3 Edit Performance Sound 2. 5 Edit Sound 2. 13 Edit Sound menu 2. 14 Edit Sound Patch 2. 8 Edit Sound/Sound Patch 2. 4 Effect Send 3. 13 Effects, Edit Performance 3. 12 Effects, enable/disable 1. 37 Effects Programming 3. 13

M
MIDI channel configuration, Edit Performance 3. 5 MIDI Channels 3. 5 Midi Clock, Edit Performance 3. 6 MIDI Dump, Edit Performance 3. 9 MIDI, Edit Performance 3. 5 Midi File Player 1. 38 MIDI filters, Edit Performance 3. 6

Index A45

MIDI Lock, Edit Performance 3. 10 Slope, Edit Sound 2. 43 MIDI Merge, Edit Performance 3. 6 SMF Save format, Edit Performance 3. 7 MIDI Sample Dump Standard 2. 54 SOLO button 1. 18 Mixer, Edit Performance 3. 10 Sound Banks 1. 13, 2. 1 Models with Optional Hard Disk Installed Intro. 4 Sound editing hints 2. 42 Modulation 3. 15 Sound families 2. 1 Monophonic mode, Edit Performance 3. 20 Sound Groups 2. 1 Multi Track ListCongratulations 3. 3 Sound View pages 1. 5 Special Edition World Keyboard by on your purchase of the new GEM WK6 / WK8 Multicopy HardGeneralmusic. Disk to SCSI 4. 26 Sound/S.Patch procedure 2. 4 memory, so that your new This instrument is equipped with cutting edit edge Flash ROM Multicopy SCSI to Hard Disk 4. 27 Sounds 2. 1 keyboard can be permanently updated by disk with the latest operational Sounds, editing and changing 2. 3 advantages and new features. Multimedia 1. 21 It is important that you follow the procedure below before using your instrument for the first time Sounds, selection 2. 2 Mute 1. 7 Split keyboard 1. 13with your authorised Generalmusic dealer to ensure that the instrument functions properly . Check O Status of a track 1. 7 for exciting new features ROM in the future. Overlapping samples, Sample Translator 2. to 49load in your Flash Stereo panorama 2. 36 Store (salvataggio sound) 2. 11 P With the instrument turned OFF, insert Store Performance 1. 33the WK Operating System Disk Pads 1. 11, 3. 18 Store Performance 3. 23 included in your materials packet into the disk drive. After you have inserted Pan, Edit Sound 2. 36 Storing Samples, Sample Translator 2. 55 the disk, turn the instrument ON . Pan Envelope Control 2. 36 Storing Sounds to the Sound Library 2. 40 Pan Envelope Tracking 2. 37 Style Lock 31 You will see a message in 1. the instrument display screen that says: Ped./Pad 3. 18 Style Lock, Global Performances 3. 2 Pedals programming 3. 15 Loading OS-DISK clears ALL MEMORY!! <Enter to Load/Escape to Style Performance 1. 30 Pitch Envelope 2. 32 Styles, selection and play 1. 24 abort> Pitch Envelope Control 2. 32 Switch action pedals 3. 15 Press ENTER and wait about 2. 3 minutes for the new Operating System to Pitch Envelope Tracking 2. 33 Switch sounds 8 PitchBend 3. 15 load. When the new system hasEdit finished loading, System Exclusive, Performance 3. you 7 will see the following Play along with a Song 1. 44 message in the instrument display screen: T Play with the Trackball 1. 11 Loading Successful!! <Enter Performances 3. 1 Tap Tempo 1. 28to continue> Performances, selection & play 1. 31 At this time, Press ENTER again and the instrument Touch Sensitivity, Edit Performance 3. 19 will proceed through Priority, Edit Performance 3. 20 Trackdisplay configuration, Edit Performance 3. 5Turn OFF the instruthe normal operating screens. You can now Programmable Pads 1. 11 Track Icons 1. 7 ment in preparation for the final step listed below. Programming Performances 3. 3 Tracking envelope, programming example 2. 22 IMPORTANT: REMOVE THE OPERATING SYSTEM DISK Tracks, Performances and the track status icons 1. BEFORE 6 R Tracks/Splits, Edit STEP! Performance 3. 19 PROCEEDING TO THE FINAL RAM reset Intro. 6 Transpose, Edit Performance 3. 19 RAM Waveforms, Sample Translator 2. 44 As you turn the instrument Transposing ON, tracks by octaves 1. 36 THE DIAL until the KEEP ROTATING Random pitch, Edit Performance 3. 19 following message U appears in your display screen: Rear Panel 1. 2 Rechargeable battery Intro. 5 Up-dateable operating system Intro. 4 !!WARNING!! Dial on Power-Up Requests Memory Clear!! Record 1. 7 Using the to Keypad to Select a Sound 1. 16 <Enter to clear/Escape abort> Record a Song, (Quick Rec method) 1. 42 V have now completed the update process, and your Release, Edit Performance sound 2. 6 Press ENTER. You Resetting at Power Up Intro. 4 Variation stylehas 1. 26 WK6/WK8 Special Edition been permanently upgraded. Resonance, Edit Performance sound 2. 6 Velocity range, Edit Performance 3. 20 Resonance, Edit Sound 2. 29 Volume (Edit Sound) 2. 19 Restore all tracks, Edit Performance sound 2. 7 Volume e Balance (Edit Sound) 2. 19 Restore track, Edit Performance Tracking 2. controls. 20 Dial sound 2. 7 Location of Dial, Volume Enter & Escape Reverbs 3. 12 W Rom Waveform library There 2. 17 may be a Battery Warning message when you initially turn on the instrument. This Note: Warnings 1. been 8 message will not appear after the instrument has plugged in and turned ON for a few S Wave Library, Sample Translator 2. 44 hours. During this time, the internal battery that holds new information in memory will Sample Editing, Sample Translator 2. 51 Sample loading methods 2. For 44 now, just press ENTER or ESCAPE to continue on if the message appears when recharge. Sample MIDI Dump 2. 54 you power-up the instrument. Sample Translator 2. 44 Sample Translator, entering 2. 44 Sample trimming 2. 53 Save data to disk or Hard Disk 1. 45 Save modifications to a Performance 2. 12 Save new Edit Sound 2. 39 Select sounds 1. 12 Seq-play 1. 7 Single Touch Play 1. 24

IMPORTANT Read Before Using Keyboard!

STEP 1

STEP 2

FINAL STEP

A46 Index

271316